132kV GIS Substations Contract

ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS
132 kV Outdoor Gas Insulated Substations & Ancillary Equipment
SECTION 5
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc
Page 1 of 11
Table of Contents
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT.....................................................................................................................3 EXTENT OF CONTRACT ....................................................................................................................................3 CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS........................................................................................................................7 PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.....................................................................................9 BUILDINGS..........................................................................................................................................................9 TOOLS AND APPLIANCES ..............................................................................................................................10 SPARES.............................................................................................................................................................11
Page 2 of 11
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
The Project works are to be carried out at the International Airport and Pyla substations. Both substations are situated in the southeast coast of Cyprus near the town of Larnaka. The Project includes the refurbishment of both substations with the installation of new outdoor 132kV GIS switchgear, 40MVA 132/22-11kV power transformers, earthing transformers, power cable termination work and refurbishment of the protection and control system. It also includes the supply of one 22kV Medium Voltage switchboard for Protaras substation, one 22kV Medium Voltage switchboard for Limassol Marina Primary Substation and one 40MVA 132/22-11kV power transformer for Larnaka Commercial Substation. Finally it includes the installation of protection panels at Dhekelia, Larnaka Commercial Centre, Free Industrial Zone Substations and other ancillary equipment.
1.2
EXTENT OF CONTRACT
The Contract is on a turnkey basis and provides for all parts of the work, excluding civil works, to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer.
1.2.1
Work Description
The Contract covers the design, manufacture, inspection and testing at the maker's works and at site, packing for export shipment, insurance, transport and delivery to site or store, unloading, customs clearance, complete erection, testing and setting to work and maintenance for a period of twelve (12) months of the works described below and detailed in the Schedules at the fixed scheduled prices: 1.2.1.1 Pyla Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply and installation of a double busbar 9 bay Outdoor 132kV Gas Insulated Switchboard: o o o o 2 Transformer Bays 4 Line Bays 2 Bus Section Bays 1 Bus Coupler Bay
Supply and installation of 2 x 40MVA 132/22-11kV Power Transformers and 2 x Earthing Transformers Cut, divert and terminate 2 x 800mm2 to new GIS Lay and terminate 1 x 300mm2 132kV cables between power transformer and GIS (2 Transformers) Lay and terminate 3 x 630mm2 medium voltage cables between power transformer and existing 11kV switchgear and 1 x 300mm2 medium voltage cable between power transformer and earthing transformer (2 Transformers) Protection and Control:
Page 3 of 11
1 Automated System (IEC 61850) Signals of existing substation to be transferred to new system from existing ABB RTU200 / COM 500 with IEC 61850-5-104. These signals shall be provided by EAC. It is the contractors responsibility to program the new automation system to accept these signals and also include a mimic diagram of the M.V. switchboard on the HMI.
o o o o o
2 Transformer Protection & Control Panels.. 4 Line Protection & Control Panels 1 Bus Coupler & Bus Section Protection & Control Panel. Busbar Protection. 1 Transformer Voltage Regulation Panel to include 3 AVR relays of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers using the minimum circulating current principle, manual step up and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control Engineering, Wiring, Testing and Commissioning of the complete system, i.e. new equipment, interconnections with existing, to deliver a complete system.
300Ahr DC Battery System.
For Transmission System operational reasons, the installation of the substation equipment shall be carried out in two consequent phases, as per the Tender Drawings, without a time delay in between. The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. 1.2.1.2 International Airport Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply and installation of a 7 bay outdoor 132kV Gas Insulated Switchboard o o o 3 Transformer Bays 3 Line Bays 1 Bus Section Bay
Supply and Installation of 3 x 40MVA 132/22-11kV Power Transformers and 3 x Earthing Transformers Cut, divert and terminate 2 x 800mm2 to new GIS Lay and Terminate 1 x 300mm2 132kV cables between power transformer and GIS (3 Transformers)
Page 4 of 11
Lay and Terminate 3 x 630mm2 medium voltage cables between power transformer and existing 11kV switchgear and 1 x 300mm2 medium voltage cable between power transformer and earthing transformer (3 Transformers) Protection and Control o 1 Automated System (IEC 61850) Signals of existing substation to be transferred to new system from existing ABB RTU200 / COM 500 with IEC 61850-5-104. These signals shall be provided by EAC. It is the contractors responsibility to program the new automation system to accept these signals and also include a mimic diagram of the M.V. switchboard on the HMI.
o o o
3 Transformer Protection & Control Panels. 3 Line Protection & Control Panels. 1 Transformer Voltage Regulation Panel to include 3 AVR relays of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers using the minimum circulating current principle, manual step up and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control Engineering, Wiring, Testing and Commissioning of the complete system, i.e. new equipment, interconnections with existing, to deliver a complete system.
For Transmission System operational reasons, the installation of the substation equipment shall be carried out in three consequent phases, as per the Tender Drawings, without a time delay in between. The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. 1.2.1.3 Larnaka Commercial Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply of one 40MVA 132/22-11kV Power Transformer and one Earthing Transformer. The power and earthing transformer shall be delivered to Larnaka Commercial Centre substation, where they shall be placed on their respective basis inside the transformer cells. Installation of three Protection Panels. SCADA signals to be connected to existing system with IEC61850 protocol.
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price.
Page 5 of 11
1.2.1.4
Dhekelia GIS Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply and Installation of two Protection Panels. SCADA signals to be connected to existing system with IEC61850 protocol.
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. 1.2.1.5 Free Industrial Zone Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply and Installation of two Protection Panels. SCADA signals to be connected to existing system with conventional copper wires.
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. 1.2.1.6 Protaras Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply of a 21-panel medium voltage switchboard to be delivered to EAC Larnaka Stores. This switchboard shall be installed by EAC personnel and as a result the contract includes for the training of EAC personnel so as to be certified for the installation of the switchboard. An IEC 61850 system as per drawing TK42/304 that will be able to handle all the SCADA signals as detailed in Chapter Items of Equipment, shall be provided. This shall manage the data exchange between the switchboard and the Control Centre. This communication shall be based on protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. 1.2.1.7 Limassol Marina Primary Substation
The contract includes the following: Supply of a 17-panel medium voltage switchboard to be delivered to EAC Larnaka Stores. This switchboard shall be installed by EAC personnel and as a result the contract includes for the training of EAC personnel so as to be certified for the installation of the switchboard. An IEC 61850 system as per drawing TM/LIM96 that will be able to handle all the SCADA signals as detailed in Chapter Items of Equipment, shall be provided. This shall manage the data exchange between the switchboard and the Control Centre. This communication shall be based on protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
Page 6 of 11
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. 1.2.1.8 Miscellaneous
The contract includes the following: Training Course for two people (One Engineer and one Technician) that will enable them to be qualified for the erection and commissioning of the medium voltage switchboards Secondary Injection Test Set Type Omicron CMC353 with the Software Options VE002904 Advanced Protection Omicron Switch Box CP SB1 Micafluid AG Vacuum Pump System, Type Micafluid VPU900
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price.
1.3
CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS
The following shall be the Contract Terminal Points:
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
Pyla Substation
132 kV GIS Switchgear - Outgoing Cable Feeders
Termination work of two Dhekelia outgoing circuits and two Power Transformer circuits is included in this contract. Termination work of all other circuits is not included. 1.3.1.2 22 kV Switchboard
The termination of two incoming 11kV feeders (Transformer Feeders) to the 11kV switchboard is included in this Contract. Control & Protection cabling required to complete the circuits is included in the contract. 1.3.1.3 Communication Panel
In the case of current differential protection relays through fibre optic media, the Contractor shall be responsible for connecting and terminating up to the multiplexer communication panel, which shall be provided by others, or the main fibre optic termination box as specified elsewhere in this Contract. 1.3.1.4 Fire Alarm and Fire Fighting Control Panels
The control cables required for the connection of the fire alarm and fire fighting control panels, which shall be provided by others, to the substation control centre for remote indication, are included in this contract.
Page 7 of 11
1.3.1.5
132 kV and 22 kV Power Cables
All 132 kV and the 22 kV power cables required for the completion of works at the substation shall be provided by the Purchaser. All accessories and works required for connecting these power cables will be the responsibility of the Supplier/Contractor. The Supplier/Contractor will not be responsible for the guarantee of the power cables but will be responsible for the guarantee of all connections.
1.3.2
1.3.2.1
International Airport Substation

132 kV GIS Switchgear - Outgoing Cable Feeders
Termination work of two Free Industrial Zone outgoing circuits and three Power Transformer circuits is included in this contract. Termination work of all other circuits is not included. 1.3.2.2 22 kV Switchboard
The termination of two incoming 11kV feeders (Transformer Feeders) to the 11kV switchboard is included in this Contract. Control & Protection cabling required to complete the circuits is included in the contract. 1.3.2.3 Communication Panel
In the case of current differential protection relays through fibre optic media, the Contractor shall be responsible for connecting and terminating up to the multiplexer communication panel, which shall be provided by others, or the main fibre optic termination box as specified elsewhere in this Contract. 1.3.2.4 Fire Alarm and Fire Fighting Control Panels
The control cables required for the connection of the fire alarm and fire fighting control panels, which shall be provided by others, to the substation control centre for remote indication, are included in this contract. 1.3.2.5 132 kV and 22 kV Power Cables
All 132 kV and the 22 kV power cables required for the completion of works at the substation shall be provided by the Purchaser. All accessories and works required for connecting these power cables will be the responsibility of the Supplier/Contractor. The Supplier/Contractor will not be responsible for the guarantee of the power cables but will be responsible for the guarantee of all connections.
1.3.3
1.3.3.1
Larnaka Commercial Substation

Protection Panels
All cables necessary for the correct operation of the protection panels shall be installed by the contractor. 1.3.3.2 Communication Panel
In the case of current differential protection relays through fibre optic media, the Contractor shall be responsible for connecting and terminating up to the multiplexer communication panel, which shall be provided by others, or the main fibre optic termination box as specified elsewhere in this Contract.
Page 8 of 11
1.3.4
1.3.4.1
Dhekelia GIS Substation

Protection Panels
1.3.5
1.3.5.1
Free Industrial Zone Substation

Protection Panels
1.4
PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
The Tenderer shall include the provision of all labour, technicians; testing and supervisory engineers to install test and commission the plant supplied under the Contract to the agreed program and shall include all costs associated with the activity including the cost of providing all necessary test equipment. The Tenderer shall fully consider the Regulations regarding the use of local labour for site works and clarify in his offer where expatriate staff will be used on site activities. Directions and instructions given by the Engineer's Representative or the Purchaser to the supervisors shall be interpreted as having been given to the Contractor. The supervisors shall be well qualified by long training and experience in the installation and operation of equipment of the type covered by the Specification. They shall liaise with the Engineer and the Purchaser's staff in respect of the installation, testing and placing into operational service of the substation equipment supplied under other contracts leading to commissioning of the complete substation or extension and for this purpose the English language shall be used.
1.5
BUILDINGS
Unless otherwise specified all substation buildings, foundations, walls, roof coverings, concrete floor fittings, ducts and pipework embedded in the foundations, trenches with floor plates for cables, etc., will be provided under other contracts. Tenderers should take into consideration the following: dimensions specified as per drawings.
Page 9 of 11
applied maximum load (including impulse load) on the floor of the GIS switchgear room should not exceed 20 kN/m2. the available crane in the GIS room can carry a maximum load of 5.000 kg.
The magnitude of the loadings from plant or equipment onto foundations must be stated by the Tenderer. The loadings shall be confirmed by the dates given in the appropriate schedule. The Tender Drawings show the preferred layouts of all plant, equipment and buildings. Dimensions in these Drawings have been based on typical sizes of plant and equipment. In any case the width of Line, Cable and Transformer bays should no exit 1000mm for switchboards with 31,5kA rated short circuit withstand current and 1200mm for switchboards with 40kA rated short circuit withstand current. The Contractor should ascertain for himself during the tender stage that the plant he proposes to supply will be suitable for the arrangements shown on Tender Drawings, and the Contract Price is deemed to include the cost of any modified layout to meet the Employer's design principles. Failure of the Engineer or Employer to comment on drawings submitted by the contractor during the tender stage which show modified arrangements not complying with Tender Drawings and Design Principles shall not be accepted as approving such arrangements; any modifications proposed should be clearly stated in the Schedule of Departures.
1.6
TOOLS AND APPLIANCES
The following tools and appliances may be purchased under this Contract. The Tenderer's full list with itemized prices and details is to be given in the Schedule of Special Tools and Equipment of this Specification. (a) One set of any special tools or gauges required for the normal maintenance of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract. (b) One set of any special lifting and handling appliances required for the normal maintenance of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract. (c) One set of any special tools, gauges or other test equipment required for the dismantling, re-assembly, checking or adjustment (but not normal maintenance) of the whole of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract. Each tool or appliance is to be clearly marked with its size and/or purpose. Each set of tools and appliances under category (a) above, together with the smaller items under (b) & (c) above, are to be suitably arranged in fitted boxes of mild steel construction, the number of boxes being determined in relation to the layout of the Plant and equipment in question. If the weight of any box and its content should be such that it cannot conveniently be carried it is to be supported on steerable rubber-tyred wheels. Each box is to be fitted with a lock and is to be painted black and clearly marked in white letters with the name of the Plant or equipment for which the tools and appliances therein are intended. The tools and appliances with the appropriate boxes are to be delivered to the Purchaser together with the switchgear.
Page 10 of 11
The price of such equipment as detailed in the Schedules shall remain fixed for the duration of the Contract.
1.7 1.7.1
SPARES General
The Tenderer shall complete the appropriate Schedules with a list of spares in addition to any specifically stated and provide unit prices for the spares which he recommends should be held in stock for the maintenance of the plant for at least 5 years of normal operation. 1.7.1.1 Programmed Maintenance Spares
Items for which the Contractor anticipates that demands will arise in the normal operation of the plant. The Contractor shall quote estimates of annual consumption of each item over each of the first five years. 1.7.1.2 Strategic/Breakdown Spares
Items for which the Contractor anticipates that demands may arise through breakdown which could jeopardize the availability or safety of the plant. The Contractor shall state his recommended stock holding for such items. The spares prices shall remain valid for at least twelve months after placing the contract provided also that a reasonable time will be provided after the contractor makes all necessary information available to enable determining the spares requirement. The Contractor shall indicate the items which he recommends should be manufactured at the same time as the main plant. For each of these items he must inform the Engineer the latest date by which orders are to be placed for concurrent manufacture. The Purchaser may order all or any of the spares so recommended at his discretion. The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Deliveries the minimum period required by him for the delivery of the spares from the date of the receipt by him of the Purchaser's order. The spares will be charged against the Provisional Sum included in the Schedule of Prices and are to be supplied at the prices listed in the Schedule of Spares subject to the qualification that, if any spares should be ordered after the dates referred to in this clause the price may be subject to adjustment. All spares supplied are to be strictly interchangeable with the parts for which they are intended to be replacements and are to be treated and packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the Site and labeled for easy identification. Packing shall be on individual items or sets basis where appropriate. Labeling shall be such that spares can be correctly identified from reference quoted in the operation and maintenance manuals provided. All labeling shall be legible without unpacking the items.
1.7.2
Commissioning Spares
The Tenderer shall make his own provision for spares required during erection and commissioning without resorting to the use of the spares ordered and supplied under the contract.
Page 11 of 11
ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS
132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment
SECTION 6
EAC SPECIFICATION 14-019

Transmission Substation Equipment
EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010
Table of Contents
1. 1.1 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.34 3.35 3.36 3.37 3.38 3.39 4. 4.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................................7 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................7 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................................................8 NORMATIVE REFERENCES ..............................................................................................................................8 INFORMATIVE REFERENCES ...........................................................................................................................8 LIST OF REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................................8 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................16 DESIGN CRITERIA............................................................................................................................................16 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................................22 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................................................26 DRAWINGS........................................................................................................................................................26 PROGRAM OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................29 PROGRESS REPORTS AND MEETINGS ........................................................................................................30 INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.........................................................35 PACKING OR PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DISPATCH ....................................................................37 CABLE DRUMS AND CABLE SEALING..........................................................................................................40 ERECTION MARKS...........................................................................................................................................40 TRANSPORT TO SITE ......................................................................................................................................40 ERECTION .........................................................................................................................................................41 CLEANING AND PAINTING..............................................................................................................................41 LABELS, NUMBER PLATES, AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION DISCS ...........................................................42 LOCKS ...............................................................................................................................................................43 TROPICALIZATION...........................................................................................................................................43 NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS, AND WASHERS ........................................................................................................44 RIVETS...............................................................................................................................................................44 FORGINGS ........................................................................................................................................................45 CASTINGS .........................................................................................................................................................45 WELDING...........................................................................................................................................................45 GALVANIZED WORK........................................................................................................................................45 PIPE WORK AND VALVES...............................................................................................................................46 OIL OR COMPOUND FILLED CHAMBERS......................................................................................................48 OIL LEVEL INDICATORS..................................................................................................................................48 THERMOMETER POCKETS .............................................................................................................................48 CHROMIUM PLATING.......................................................................................................................................49 PRESSURE GAUGES .......................................................................................................................................49 SMALL WIRING.................................................................................................................................................49 TERMINAL BOARDS ........................................................................................................................................51 ELECTRICAL INSULATION..............................................................................................................................52 EARTHING CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................................53 ELECTRIC MOTORS .........................................................................................................................................53 CONTROL SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS.................................................................................................54 INDICATING LAMPS AND FITTING .................................................................................................................55 AUXILIARY SWITCHES ....................................................................................................................................55 ENCLOSURES OF APPARATUS, HEATERS, AND VENTILATORS ..............................................................55 INSULATING OIL, COMPOUND AND GAS......................................................................................................56 CABLE BOXES AND CABLE BOX ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................56
INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ........................................................................................................................................58 UNLOADING AND STORAGE AT SITE............................................................................................................58
132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc
Page 2 of 365
4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8
ERECTION AND CHECKING AT SITE .............................................................................................................58 CLEANING OF SITE..........................................................................................................................................58 ABNORMAL WORKING TIME ..........................................................................................................................58 CONTRACTOR'S AND SUB-CONTRACTOR'S STAFF ...................................................................................59 SAFETY FOR WORKMEN AND PUBLIC .........................................................................................................60 SAFETY RULES, CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES, AND PERMITS TO WORK ...............................................61 TAKING OVER CERTIFICATES .......................................................................................................................61 ACCESS TO SITE..............................................................................................................................................61 DAY WORK........................................................................................................................................................62 SITE REGISTER OF LIFTING TACKLE............................................................................................................62 SITE SERVICES ................................................................................................................................................62 TRAINING OF THE PURCHASER'S PERSONNEL..........................................................................................65 EXAMINATION OF WORK BEFORE COVERING UP ......................................................................................65 SYSTEM OF WORKS AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AT SITE ................................65
132kV SF6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR ..............................................................................................................67 TYPE OF SWITCHGEAR AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................67 CURRENT RATINGS.........................................................................................................................................68 CONNECTIONS TO OUTGOING CIRCUITS.....................................................................................................68 DESIGN PRINCIPLES 132 kV GIS SWITCHGEAR .......................................................................................68 SEALING ENDS.................................................................................................................................................74 LOCAL, REMOTE, AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL ......................................................................................76 CIRCUIT BREAKERS........................................................................................................................................77 LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES .........................................................................................................................81 LOCKING FACILITIES ......................................................................................................................................81 ISOLATING AND EARTHING SWITCHES .......................................................................................................81 INTERLOCKING ................................................................................................................................................83 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS .................................................................................................84 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS...........................................................................................................................86 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ...........................................................................................................................88 EARTHING SYSTEM .........................................................................................................................................89 SURGE ARRESTERS........................................................................................................................................89 GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................................................90
OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................92 SWITCHGEAR - DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................92 CLEARANCES...................................................................................................................................................92 RADIO INTERFERENCE ...................................................................................................................................92 CIRCUIT-BREAKERS........................................................................................................................................92 CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS................................................................................................98 SURGE ARRESTERS......................................................................................................................................102 ISOLATORS AND EARTH SWITCHES ..........................................................................................................103 OUTDOOR BUSBARS ....................................................................................................................................108 STEEL STRUCTURES ....................................................................................................................................113 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................120 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................................................120 DEFINITIONS...................................................................................................................................................120 ABBREVIATIONS............................................................................................................................................123 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................124 SYSTEM STRUCTURE....................................................................................................................................127 NETWORK CONTROL CENTRE COMMUNICATION ....................................................................................129 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................130 LOGICAL NODES............................................................................................................................................131
Page 3 of 365
7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15 8.16 8.17 9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 10. 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13
STATION CONTROL UNIT..............................................................................................................................141 OPERATOR CONSOLE ..................................................................................................................................143 BAY UNITS ......................................................................................................................................................147 SWITCHGEAR INTERLOCKING SYSTEM.....................................................................................................151 ENGINEERING PC AND SOFTWARE ............................................................................................................152
CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR NON-AUTOMATED SUBSTATIONS ..........................................................153 ARRANGEMENT OF FACILITIES...................................................................................................................153 CONSTRUCTION OF CUBICLES ...................................................................................................................153 CONTROLS .....................................................................................................................................................155 INDICATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................157 SUPERVISION RELAYS .................................................................................................................................157 BUSBAR VOLTAGE SELECTION ..................................................................................................................158 SYNCHRONISING ...........................................................................................................................................159 INDICATING LAMPS .......................................................................................................................................160 ALARM SCHEMES..........................................................................................................................................161 RELAYS, MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND FUSES ..........................................................................162 INSTRUMENTS................................................................................................................................................163 CABLE TERMINATIONS.................................................................................................................................164 TESTING FACILITIES .....................................................................................................................................164 EARTHING.......................................................................................................................................................164 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND TELEMETERING CABINETS....................................................................165 MULTICORE CABLES AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.................................................................................166 TRANSDUCERS ..............................................................................................................................................166
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................................................169 General ............................................................................................................................................................169 Protective IEDs ...............................................................................................................................................169 Test and Earthing Facilities...........................................................................................................................174 132 kV Feeder Protection...............................................................................................................................175 Transformer Protection..................................................................................................................................180 132 kV Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail Protection.....................................................................................183 Auto-Reclosing Function ...............................................................................................................................184 Synchronizing Check Function .....................................................................................................................185 Intertrip Send/Receive Teleprotection Equipment ......................................................................................186 Tripping Relays...............................................................................................................................................186 Trip Circuit Supervision Schemes ................................................................................................................187 Segregation.....................................................................................................................................................187 22-11 kV Feeder Protection ...........................................................................................................................187 MEDIUM VOLTAGE GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE ...................................190 SWITCHGEAR TYPE.......................................................................................................................................190 CURRENT RATINGS.......................................................................................................................................190 DESIGN AND CONTRUCTION .......................................................................................................................190 COMPARTMENTS CONTAINING SF6 ............................................................................................................191 COMPARTMENT COUPLINGS .......................................................................................................................191 CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPARTMENT ...........................................................................................................191 OPERATING MECHANISM .............................................................................................................................192 ISOLATING FACILITIES .................................................................................................................................193 EARTHING FACILITIES ..................................................................................................................................193 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FAULT-MAKING EARTHING SWITCHES .............................................193 EARTHING OF METAL PARTS ......................................................................................................................194 CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................................................................................194 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS.........................................................................................................................194
Page 4 of 365
10.14 10.15 10.16 10.17 10.18 10.19 10.20 10.21 11. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 12. 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 13. 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 13.10 13.11 13.12 14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS .........................................................................................................................195 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEM............................................................................................196 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE .........................................................................................................................196 INTERLOCKS AND CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................197 LOCKING FACILITIES ....................................................................................................................................197 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS ...............................................................................................197 BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................................198 CIRCUIT LABELS............................................................................................................................................198 POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS.......................................................................................................199 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................199 MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS...........................................................................................................204 TANKS .............................................................................................................................................................206 COOLING PLANT............................................................................................................................................210 VOLTAGE CONTROL .....................................................................................................................................212 TERMINAL BUSHINGS ...................................................................................................................................215 CABLES AND TERMINATIONS......................................................................................................................217 TEMPERATURE AND ALARM DEVICES AND MARSHALLING CUBICLES ...............................................217 DRYING OUT ...................................................................................................................................................220 OIL....................................................................................................................................................................221 EARTHING AND AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS ..........................................................................................222 STATION DC EQUIPMENT....................................................................................................................................225 BATTERY CELLS............................................................................................................................................225 BATTERY MOUNTING, CONNECTIONS, AND ACCESSORIES...................................................................227 DC CONTROL & CHARGING EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................228 DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS ...........................................................................................................235 POWER AND MULTICORE/MULTIPAIR CABLES UP TO 132kV........................................................................238 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................238 132/66kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES............................................................................................243 22 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES..................................................................................................248 AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES UPTO 1.000 V ................................................................248 MULTIPAIR CABLES ......................................................................................................................................250 INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE SUBSTATION BUILDING.....................251 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES AND ANCILLARY EARTHWORKS IN TRANSMISSION SUBSTATIONS..253 TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY CABLES AND IDENTIFICATION OF CORES ............................................261 TERMINATION OF CONTROL CABLE SCREENS ........................................................................................261 TERMINAL COLOURING AND LABELLING..................................................................................................261 TERMINAL BOXES AND CABLE MARSHALLING KIOSKS .........................................................................261 DRAWINGS......................................................................................................................................................263 LV AC SWITCHBOARD .........................................................................................................................................265 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ..........................................................................................................................265 RATINGS .........................................................................................................................................................265 MAIN BUS-BARS ............................................................................................................................................266 TEMPERATURE RISE.....................................................................................................................................266 CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURE ...............................................................................................................266 LV CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................................................................................................................................267 INSTRUMENTS................................................................................................................................................269 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS.........................................................................................................................269 TERMINATION CABLES.................................................................................................................................270 EARTHING.......................................................................................................................................................270 INCOMING SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONTROL AND INTERLOCK SCHEME .................................270
Page 5 of 365
15. 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 16. 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 17. 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.8 17.9 18. 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 18.11 18.12 18.13 18.14 19.
SUBSTATION EARTHING .....................................................................................................................................272 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................272 BASIS OF DESIGN..........................................................................................................................................272 EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................................................................272 JOINTS AND BRANCHES ..............................................................................................................................272 GUARDS ..........................................................................................................................................................273 FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................................................274 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................274 OPTICAL FIBERS............................................................................................................................................274 FIBER JOINTS.................................................................................................................................................276 TERMINATION CABLES.................................................................................................................................276 TESTING ..........................................................................................................................................................277 INSPECTION AND TESTING.................................................................................................................................278 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................278 SUB-CONTRACTORS .....................................................................................................................................278 MATERIAL TESTS ..........................................................................................................................................279 WORKS TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................279 SITE TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................280 TEST CERTIFICATES .....................................................................................................................................281 REJECTION OF PLANT ..................................................................................................................................282 LIST OF TESTS ...............................................................................................................................................282 INSPECTION PLAN AND PROCEDURES......................................................................................................303 ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT.........................................................................................................................................305 132 and 66kV OUTDOOR TYPE SWITCHGEAR ...........................................................................................305 METAL ENCLOSED GIS SWITCHGEAR .......................................................................................................310 Current and Voltage Transformers ...............................................................................................................314 POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS ................................................................................................317 22 kV SWITCHGEAR.......................................................................................................................................321 PROTECTION AND CONTROL CUBICLES ...................................................................................................330 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM .........................................................................................................335 REMOTE CONTROL CUBICLES AND PANELS............................................................................................336 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SIGNALS ...............................................345 MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES......................................................................358 LV AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD ......................................................................................................................360 SUBSTATION DC EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................................360 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ...................................................................................................................................362 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSORS ..........................................................................................................363 SPECIFICATION DRAWING LIST .........................................................................................................................364
Page 6 of 365
1. 1.1
SCOPE GENERAL
This specification includes the design, manufacture, inspection and testing at maker's works, packing for export shipment and delivery of 132kV, 66kV and 22kV switchgear and ancillary equipment. When specified it also includes erection and commissioning. The Contractor is responsible for making good defective material within the guarantee period. The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price. Test requirements and test methods are included which are intended to demonstrate the capability of the offered equipment and their compliance to the declared values in the Schedules of Particulars that are attached to this document.
Page 7 of 365
2. 2.1
REFERENCES NORMATIVE REFERENCES
This specification incorporates by dated or undated reference, provisions from other publications. These normative references are cited at the appropriate place in the text and the publications are listed in paragraph 2.3 below. For a dated reference, only the cited edition applies: any subsequent amendments to or revisions of the publication apply to this specification only when incorporated in the reference by amendment or revision. For undated references, any amendments to, or the latest edition of, the cited publication applies.
2.2
INFORMATIVE REFERENCES
This specification refers to other publications that provide information or guidance. Editions of these publications current at the time of issue of the standard are listed in the paragraph below, but reference should be made to the latest editions.
2.3
LIST OF REFERENCES
Normative references
EN 197-1 EN 729 EN 755 EN 837 EN 1435 EN 1559 EN 1780 EN 1977 EN 10025 EN 10027 EN 10029 EN 10113
Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common cements Quality requirements for welding. Fusion welding of metallic materials Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions, metrology, requirements and testing Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of welded joints Founding. Technical conditions of delivery Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Designation of unalloyed and alloyed aluminium ingots for remelting, master alloys and castings Copper and copper alloys. Copper drawing stock (wire rod) Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery conditions Designation systems for steels Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates 3 mm thick or above Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels
Page 8 of 365
EN 10137 EN 10143 EN 10147 EN 10155 EN 10210 EN 10220 EN 10244 EN 12540
Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural steels in the quenched and tempered or precipitation hardened conditions Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on dimensions and shape Continuously hot-dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip. Technical delivery conditions. Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance. Technical delivery conditions Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural steels. Technical delivery requirements Seamless and welded steel tubes. Dimensions and masses per unit length Steel wire and wire products. Non-ferrous metallic coatings on steel wire. Zinc or zinc alloy coatings Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of nickel, nickel plus chromium, copper plus nickel and copper plus nickel plus chromium Specification for high-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use. Cast aluminium alloy enclosures for gas filled highvoltage switchgear and control gear Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy enclosures for gas-filled high-voltage switchgear and control gear Specification for wrought steel enclosures for gas filled high voltage switchgear and controlgear Specification for welded composite enclosures of cast and wrought aluminium alloys for gas filled high voltage switchgear and controlgear Electromagnetic compatibility Specification for cast resin partitions for metal-enclosed gas filled high-voltage switchgear and controlgear Electronic equipment for use in power installations Metric cable glands for electrical installations Common test methods for cables under fire conditions. Test for resistance to vertical flame propagation for a single insulated conductor or cable Common test methods for cables under fire conditions
EN 50052
EN 50064 EN 50068 EN 50069
EN 50081 EN 50089 EN 50178 EN 50262 EN 50265
EN 50266
Page 9 of 365
EN 50299
Oil-immersed cable connection assemblies for transformers and reactors having highest voltage for equipment Um from 72,5kV to 550kV Rotating electrical machines Instrument transformers. Current transformers Instrument transformers. Inductive voltage transformers Instrument transformers. Combined transformers Instrument transformers. Method for measuring partial discharges in instrument transformers Instrument transformers. Capacitor voltage transformers Instrument transformers. Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance Instrument transformers. Electronic voltage transformers Instrument transformers. Electronic current transformers Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories Environmental testing Basic and safety principles of man-machine interface, marking and identification. Coding principles for indicators and actuators Power transformers Surge arresters. Non-linear resistor type gapped surge arresters for a.c. systems Surge arresters. Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. systems Surge arresters. Selection and application recommendations Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1kV Semiconductor convertors Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V On-load tap-changers Electrical Protection relays Low-voltage fuses Reactors Fluids for electrotechnical applications Unused mineral insulating
EN 60034 EN 60044 1 EN 60044 2 EN 60044 3 EN 60044 4 EN 60044 5 EN 60044 6 EN 60044 7 EN 60044 8 EN 60051 EN 60068 EN 60073 EN 60076 EN 60099 1 EN 60099 4 EN 60099 5 EN 60137 EN 60146 EN 60168 EN 60214 EN 60255 EN 60269 EN 60289 EN 60296
Page 10 of 365
oils for transformers and switchgear EN 60372 EN 60383 1 Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units. Dimensions and tests. Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V. Ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems. Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria. Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V. Insulator strings and insulator sets for a.c. systems. Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) Mineral oil-impregnated electrical equipment in service. Guide to the interpretation of dissolved and free gases analysis Graphical symbols for diagrams Inductive voltage dividers Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes. Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells Ceramic and glass insulating materials Electrical measuring transducers for converting a.c. electrical quantities to analogue or digital signals Optical fibres. Measurement methods and test procedures Insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables. Common test methods Specification for circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for household and similar installations Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Testing and measurement techniques. Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology Programmable controllers Hollow pressurised and unpressurised ceramic and glass insulators for use in electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1000 V Common specifications for high voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 60383 2
EN 60439 EN 60529 EN 60599 EN 60617 EN 60618 EN 60623
EN 60672 EN 60688 EN 60793 EN 60811 EN 60898 EN 60947 EN 61000-4-3
EN 61082 EN 61131 EN 62155
EN 62271 - 1
Page 11 of 365
standards EN 62271 - 100 EN 62271 - 102 EN 62271 - 103 EN 62271 - 104 EN 62271 - 106 EN 62271 - 200 EN 62271 - 203 EN 62271 - 209 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. High-voltage alternatingcurrent circuit-breakers High voltage switchgear and controlgear. High-voltage alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches Specification for high-voltage switches. Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and less than 52 kV Specification for high-voltage switches. High-voltage switches for rated voltage of 52 kV and above High-voltage alternating current contactors and contactor-based motor starters A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear an controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and less than 52 kV Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 72.5 kV and above Cable connections for gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above 52 kV. Fluid-filled and extruded insulation cables. Fluid-filled and dry-type cable-terminations Cable connections for gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 72,5kV and above Fluid-filled and extruded insulation cables Fluid-filed and dry type cable-terminations Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products - Structuring principles and reference designations Writing paper and certain classes of printed matter. Trimmed sizes. A and B series Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications and test methods Plastics. Determination of burning behaviour by oxygen index Technical drawings. Scales Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint systems Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. Zinc and aluminium coatings. Guidelines Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation Dimensions of ball and socket couplings of string insulator units. Conductors of insulated cables Electric cables - Tests on extruded oversheaths with a special
EN 62271 - 305
EN 81346 EN ISO 216 EN ISO 1461 EN ISO 4589 EN ISO 5455 EN ISO 12944 EN ISO 14713 IEC 60085 IEC 60120 IEC 60228 IEC 60229
Page 12 of 365
protective function IEC 60273 IEC 60332 IEC 60354 IEC 60376 IEC 60376A IEC 60376B IEC 60480 IEC 60502 IEC 60815 IEC 60840 Characteristic of indoor and outdoor insulators for systems with nominal voltage greater than 1000V Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Guide to loading of oil-immersed power transformers Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride First supplement: Section thirteen Mineral Oil Content Second supplement - Clause 26 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride Guide to the checking of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) taken from electrical equipment Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions. Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages above 30kV (Um = 36kV) up to 150kV (Um = 170kV) Test methods and requirements Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V - Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria Communication networks and systems in substations Specification for SI units and recommendations for the use of their multiples and of certain other units Specification for copper-tin-phosphorous alloy rods and sections Specification for threads for light gauge copper tubes and fittings Specification for high-voltage busbars and busbar connections Specification for aluminium conductors and aluminium conductors, steel reinforced for overhead power transmission. Specification for colours for identification, coding and special purposes Packaging Code Specification for colours of light signals Electric cables. Accessories. Bitumen-based filling compounds Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors
IEC 61109
IEC 61850 ISO 1000 BS B 24 BS 61 BS 159 BS 215 BS 381C BS 1133 BS 1376 BS 1858 BS 2484 BS 2562
Page 13 of 365
BS 2569 BS 2765 BS 2950 BS 3288 BS 3643 BS 3692 BS 3941 BS 4190 BS 4504 BS 4872 BS 5000 BS 5207 BS 5308 BS 5467 BS 6121 BS 6231 BS 6346 BS 6360 BS 6399 BS 6622
Specification for sprayed metal coatings. Protection of iron and steel against corrosion and oxidation at elevated temperatures Specification for dimensions of temperature detecting elements and corresponding pockets Specification. Cartridge fuse-links for telecommunication and light electrical apparatus Insulator and conductor fittings for overhead power lines ISO metric screw threads ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification Specification for voltage transformers ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated) Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required Specification for rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications Specification for sulphur hexafluoride for electrical equipment Instrumentation cables Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric cables having thermosetting insulation Mechanical cable glands. Specification for PVC-insulated cables for switchgear and controlgear wiring Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric cables having PVC insulation Specification for conductors in insulated cables and cords Loading for buildings Specification for cables with extruded cross-linked polyethylene or ethylene propylene rubber insulation for rated voltages from 3.8/6.6 kV up to 19/33 kV Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric cables having thermosetting insulation and low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire Specification for crude vegetable fats Code of practice for design of high-voltage open terminal stations
BS 6724
BS 7207 BS 7354
Page 14 of 365
BS 7430 BS 7655 BS 7668 BS 7884
Code of practice for earthing Specification for insulating and sheathing materials for cables Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections in weather resistant steels Specification for copper and copper-cadmium stranded conductors for overhead electric traction and power transmission systems
Page 15 of 365
3. 3.1 3.1.1
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS DESIGN CRITERIA Site Operating Conditions
The climate is sub-tropical and the following meteorological information is set out for guidance only. No responsibility or any claims based on this information will be accepted. Nevertheless, the values given below shall be taken into account in designing the works. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Altitude of sites above sea level: Maximum outdoor ambient shade or indoor temperature for design purposes: Minimum temperature: Relative humidity: Thunderstorms per year: Number of strokes to earth per km2 per year: Earthquake loading for design purposes: Wind Speed/pressure for design purposes Condition of atmosphere Below 1000m 50 oC -5 oC 100 % 30 4 Refer to Clause 3.1.9 40 m/s at 10m / 575 N/m Occasionally dust and salt laden
For current rating calculations of busbars and busbar connections the following assumptions shall be made: Copper 1 2 3 4 5 Aluminium
Maximum operating temperatures Wind speed Emissivity factor Absorption factor Solar radiation General Design Information W/m2 m/sec
Refer to Clause 6.8.1

0,6 0.5 0,5 1050 0,6 0,6 0,6 1050
3.1.2
Phase Rotation and Colour-Phases shall be distinguished as Brown (L1), Black (L2), and Grey (L3) with phases reaching their maximum values in that order in an anti-clockwise rotation.
Page 16 of 365
1 2 3 4 5 6
Nominal system voltage between phases (kV) Rated voltage (kV) Nominal system voltage variation (%) System nominal Frequency (Hz) System nominal Frequency range(Hz) System Frequency range during disturbances(Hz) Rated short-circuit and throughfault capability, Vassilikos, Dhekelia and Moni S/S Rated short-circuit and throughfault capability, other Substations DC time constant at rated shortcircuit breaking current DC time constant at rated shortcircuit breaking current generator circuit breakers
220 245
132 145 +/-10
66 72,5 +/-6 50 49,5-50,5 47,0-52,0
22/11 24/12 -
0,400
+10/-6
40kA for 1s
31,5kA for 1s
40kA for 1s 31,5kA for 1s 45ms
25 kA for 1s 25 kA for 1s 45ms
20kA for 3 s 20kA for 3 s 45ms
50 kA for 1s 50 kA for 1s 45ms
8 9
45ms
10
318ms
Solid Earthing of the 22/11kV neutral or of zigzag earthing transfor mer
11
Earthing of System
Solid Earthing
12 13 14 15 16
AC supply voltage for auxiliary equipment DC supply voltage for auxiliary equipment Closing Tripping Initiating power supply for indications and alarms
400/230 Vac 10% 110 Vdc 2-wire 110 Vdc 110 Vdc 110 Vdc
DC voltages stated are nominal battery voltages and due allowance shall be made for all connected equipment to operate safely when batteries are under normal float charge or boost charge conditions.
Page 17 of 365
The equipment provided under this Contract is to be capable of operating reliably within the following voltage ranges: (a) DC Equipment: From 80% nominal voltage up to 110% nominal voltage (125 V for 110 V DC supply). (b) AC Equipment: From 80% nominal voltage up to 110% nominal voltage.
3.1.3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Co-ordination of Substation Insulation

Nominal system voltage (kV) Rated system voltage (kV) Assumed highest switching surge Impulse withstand voltage (1,2/50 sec) (kV) Impulse withstand voltage (1,2/50 sec) for transformers (kV) Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min) (kV) Impulse withstand level of isolator gap Minimum external creepage distance (mm) Minimum substation clearances (Outdoor Equipment): Phase to earth (mm) Phase to phase (mm) Between terminal of same phase (mm) Finished concrete level to base of post insulator (mm) Section (mm) Height from ground to the nearest unscreened live conductor in air (mm) 2100 2400 1783 2440 4250 3530 1270 1473 1473 2440 3500 3530 685 786 786 2440 3050 3530 279 330 330 2440 2590 3530 200 250 250 2440 2590 3530 7700 950 750 395 220 245 132 145 66 72 22 24 11 12
Not greater than 3:1 650 550 275 325 325 140 125 125 50 75 95 28
115% of rated insulation level 4620 2310 770 385
Note 1: The above clearances are applicable only to equipment not subject to impulse voltage tests. They apply for conditions of maximum swing and sag. Note 2: The minimum creepage distance measured from the metal cap to the base over the surface of the insulator shed (expressed in millimetres per unit of nominal voltage
Page 18 of 365
between phases) shall not be less than 35mm per kV (nominal voltage) for outdoor insulators. The minimum protected creepage distance shall not be less than thirty five per cent of the total creepage distance. The protected creepage distance refers to that part of the insulator, which is protected against rain at right angles to the axis of the bushing. If the use of "Anti-fog" or "Anti-pollution" type or other insulators with deep sheds or skirts is intended the Tenderer shall include a description and fully dimensioned drawing of the insulators..
3.1.4
1 2 3
Surge Arrester Basic Requirements

Nominal discharge current Line discharge class as per EN 60099-4 Discharge Current Withstands High Current 4/10 s Low Current 2000 s (minimum) 100kA crest 700A crest Polymeric 10kA crest 3
Housing
3.1.5
1 2 3 4 5
Minimum Factors of Safety for Outdoor Switchgear and Equipment

2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5
Busbar or other connections based on elastic limit or 0.1% proof stress: Complete insulator units based on mechanical test: Insulator metal fittings based on elastic limit: Steel structures based on elastic limit of tension members and on crippling loads of compression members: Foundations for structures against overturning or up-rooting under maximum simultaneous working loading:
3.1.6
1 2 3
Characteristics of Associated Transmission Lines

220 395 950 132 275 650
Normal transmission voltage between phases (kV) Wet power frequency withstand voltage (kV) Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV)
Phase conductor
4 5
Phase conductor 13,5 kN
Earthwire
Maximum tension in each line conductor on the substation landing gantry (kN) 220 kV feeders
40 kN
9 kN OPGW
Rubus
Page 19 of 365
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
220 kV feeders but operated 132 kV 132 kV feeders 132 kV feeders but operated 66 kV Number of circuits per tower Number of phase conductors per circuit Number of earthwires Typical impedance values:

Rubus UPAS or Parakeet UPAS or Parakeet

2 2 1 2 1 1
OPGW Willow or OPGW Willow or OPGW
Positive sequence (Z1) Zero sequence (Z0) Power Quality
N.A. N.A.
0,42 <740 Ohms / km 1,21 <730 Ohms / km
3.1.7
The system nominal values and range of variation under normal conditions and during system disturbances are included in the table of clause 3.1.2 above. In addition the negative sequence component of the phase voltage must not exceed the value of 5% under normal operating conditions. The frequency variations must be limited to the values below: Minimum temporary frequency of 47 Hz for 5 sec Maximum temporary frequency of 52 Hz for 3600 sec. Maximum rate of change of frequency of 0,5 Hz/sec.
3.1.8
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The electromagnetic environment comprises: (a) conducted emissions and susceptibility (b) radiated emissions and susceptibility (c) conditions leading to electrostatic discharge The Works shall conform to the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the above listed phenomena. 3.1.8.1 Susceptibility to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
The Works shall be immune from the effects of: (a) 5W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU equipment (0.25m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and covers in place).
132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc Page 20 of 365
(b) Cell phones when operated in the 900MHz frequency band within the same rooms as the equipment (0.25m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers in place). (c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals. (d) An electromagnetic field, with field strength of 10V/m, measured by the method specified in EN 61000-4-3. 3.1.8.2 Production of Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure that there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and no interference to the operation of similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent rooms. 3.1.8.3 Susceptibility to Conducted Electromagnetic Energy
The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the following types and levels of conducted electromagnetic interference. (a) Impulse Voltage Withstand as defined and recommended in EN 60255-22 for equipment required to operate in environments subject to Electrical Interference Class II. (b) High Frequency Disturbance as defined and recommended in EN 60255-22 for equipment required to operate in environments subject to Electrical Interference Class II and shall be applied to the AC power supply terminals of the equipment. (c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 50 Hz. (d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shall be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz. 3.1.8.4 Production of Conducted Electromagnetic Interference
The Works shall not introduce conducted interference, which disturbs its own internal operation or generates interference on the incoming power supply, which causes maloperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others. 3.1.8.5 Electrostatic Discharge
During normal operation, the Works shall be immune from any levels and types of electrostatic discharge (ESD), which can be found in a typical office environment. The Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any special precautions to be taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are under maintenance. 3.1.8.6 EMC Standards
The Tenderer shall indicate: With which, if any, standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with such standards exists. Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EC 1992 directive on EMC.
3.1.9
Earthquake Withstand
The sites are subject to seismic activity and disturbances with a modified Mercalli intensity of 8,0, which should be taken into account in the plant design. For the purpose of design
calculations, the earthquake stresses may be determined based on maximum horizontal and vertical ground accelerations (seismic coefficient) of 0,15g. For equipment contained in the circuit breaker, which will fail by fracture of a brittle component the adopted design stress using the modified seismic coefficient shall provide for a factor of safety of not less than 2. The seismic design of the substation equipment shall be based on a recognized design code, as far as such codes are applicable to the plant in question. Tenderers shall state which design code they propose to use. Tenderers shall include evidence of tests or studies conducted or still to be conducted to prove the earthquake resistance of the equipment offered. Details of equipment similar to that offered and which has been subject to any serious earthquakes shall be stated. Calculations to show design factors used, design stresses, seismic response spectra, factors of safety, inherent damping, mode of failure etc shall be submitted by the Contractor. Drawings showing the weight and location of the centres of gravity of the principal components of each piece of equipment, reports of tests and studies conducted to determine damping factors and natural periods of vibration should be submitted.
3.2 3.2.1
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION General
Notwithstanding any descriptions, drawings or illustrations which may be submitted with the Tender, all details will be deemed to be strictly in accordance with the Specification and the standard specifications and codes referred to therein unless a departure is listed in the Schedule of Departures and the departure has been formally accepted at the date of Contract award.
3.2.2
Contractor's Responsibilities
Unless stated specifically to the contrary in the Tender with full supporting explanations, the Contractor will be deemed to have concurred as a practical manufacturer with the design and layout of the Works as being sufficient to ensure reliability and safety in operation, freedom from undue stresses and satisfactory performance in all other essentials as a working plant. The Contractor is to include the whole of the Works that are described in or implied by the Contract Document. All matters omitted from the Contract Document, which may be inferred to be obviously necessary for the efficiency, stability and completion of the Works, shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. Works shown upon the drawings and not mentioned or described in the Specification and Works described in the Specification and not shown on the drawings will nevertheless be held to be included in this Contract and their execution is to be covered by the Contract Price in the same manner as if they have been expressly shown upon the drawings and described in the Specification.
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Design and Construction

General
In complying with the requirements of the Specification, both with respect to arrangement and detail, design is to conform to the best current engineering practice. Each of the
several parts of the Plant is to be of the maker's standard design provided that this design is in general accordance with the Specification. All systems and equipment supplied shall have proved satisfactory on other installations when operated similarly in a similar environment. Panels provided for installation in the same room shall be of same design, colour and appearance. In addition, panels provided as extensions or for erection in the same room as existing boards shall be of similar design, colour and appearance to the existing boards. Equipment mounted on such panels shall likewise be of style and scaling similar to the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all connections of equipment to be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully compatible with and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existing equipment. The characteristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The Contract Works shall be designed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs and for operation in which continuity of service is the first consideration. All apparatus shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at the sites and under such sudden variations of load and voltage as may be met under working conditions on the system and short circuits, including those due to faulty synchronizing, within the rating of the apparatus. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other Contracts. The essence of design should be simplicity and reliability in order to give long continuous service with high economy and low operation and maintenance cost. I addition designs should be such us to avoid long supply interruptions, in case of maintenance and repairs after faults. Particular attention should be paid to internal and external access in order to facilitate inspection, cleaning and maintenance. The design, dimensions and materials of all parts are to be such that they will not suffer damage as a result of stresses under the most severe service conditions. Fully detailed specifications of the several parts of the Plant are to be submitted describing particularly the materials to be used. The materials used in the construction of the Plant are to be of the highest quality and selected particularly to meet the duties required of them. Mechanisms are to be constructed to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion. Workmanship and general finish are to be of the highest class throughout. Corresponding parts throughout the Contract plant shall be interchangeable and all spare parts must fit in place accurately without additional machining. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate this quality. All equipment is to operate without undue vibration and with the least possible amount of noise and is not to cause a nuisance. All equipment is to be designed to minimize the risk of fire and any damage, which may be caused in the event of fire. All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short-circuit due to animals, birds and vermin. Openings in ventilated enclosures shall be so constructed to
prevent the entry of vermin and insects. The use of materials, which may be liable to attack by termites or other insects, is to be avoided. 3.2.3.2 Construction of Cubicles
Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2mm (14SWG). The construction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other reinforcement where necessary to prevent distortion or the maloperation of relays or other apparatus by impact, having regard to the number and size of cut-outs and the size of the panel. The front of the panel is to have a smooth well-finished surface. Each cubicle shall form a complete enclosure and is preferably to be associated with only one circuit of main equipment. The enclosures shall afford IP31 degree of protection for indoor and IP54 for outdoor cubicles, as categorized by EN 60529 in accordance with this Specification. Cubicles shall be so constructed that the front panel or the equipment-mounting panel is removable without disturbing the remainder of the cubicle structure. Close fitting, lockable and lift-off rear access cubicle steel doors shall be provided and hinged to lie back flat to avoid restricting access. Doors shall be secured by integral handles and provision shall be made for padlocking. Handles and padlocks shall not be more than 1,5 meters above floor level. Top and bottom doors shall not be interlocked and cross stiffeners shall not impede access to the cubicle. Moulded gaskets of non-aging material shall be used to provide close sealing. All cubicle doors shall be closed by handle that operates on a 3-point closing device (e.g., Espagnolette type). The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a Matt white surface and an interior lamp suitable for the local LV AC supply and controlled by a door operating switch, shall be fitted at the top of each section. Anti-condensation heaters shall also be fitted in each section and each cubicle shall be well-ventilated top and bottom through vermin proof louvers fitted with brass gauze screens. Unless otherwise approved, panels shall be suitable for floor mounting and shall provide for bottom entry of power and multicore cables via vermin proof plates and hardwood sealing bushes. Equipment and terminals shall be readily accessible and shall require a minimum of disturbance of associated and adjacent equipment for access. To assist in achieving this, cubicle widths shall not be less than 600 mm wide and the depth shall not exceed the width. The width between apparatus mounted on the cubicle side shall not be less than that which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and for apparatus mounted on the panels. The arrangement of panel wiring and multicore cable terminal boards shall be in accordance with the relevant Clause of this Specification. The floor plates of cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cable terminations but separate removable gland plates shall be provided within the cubicles, so located as to provide adequate working clearance for terminating the cables. Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinged front panels, these shall be designed to minimize shock and wiring shall be so arranged as to impose no strain on terminations. No equipment whatsoever shall be mounted on rear access doors.
All sections of a composite cubicle shall be suitably labelled in accordance with the Specification and each section or panel shall also be readily identified by labels at the rear with the access doors either open or closed. The arrangement and mounting of all devices shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The exterior finish and colour of all cubicles shall be to the approval of the Engineer. 3.2.3.2.1 Bay Cubicles
Bay control and protection cubicles must be provided for each primary circuit. It is preferable that the cubicle be a section of the individual bay panel. However in certain cases it can be separate self-standing panels. 3.2.3.2.2 Outdoor Cubicles
They shall be complete with any supporting steelwork necessary for mounting on concrete foundations, steelwork or plant as appropriate. Cubicles shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable gland plates etc., for termination of multicore cables. Door shall be fitted with weatherproof sealing material suitable for the climate conditions at site. The cubicles shall comply with enclosure category IP54 but shall also be well ventilated through louvers having a brass gauge screen attached to a frame and secured to the inside of the cubicle. Any divisions between compartments within the cubicles shall be perforated to assist air circulation.
3.2.4
Relays, Miniature Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Ancillary Apparatus
All relays shall be mounted in sup-positions that no part requiring inspection or adjustment is less than 450 mm or more than 2 meters above floor level. Where practicable the clearances between relay stems or connecting studs shall not be less than 30 mm and in no case less than 25 mm. Unless otherwise stated all relays for front of panel mounting shall be flush pattern and withdrawable. Relays associated with the three phases shall be marked with the appropriate phase identification and the fuses and links shall also be suitably labelled. In addition to the labelling to identify relays on the front of panels, all relays and components shall be identified from the rear of the panels. The use of permanently energized relays shall be kept to a minimum and where approved these shall be of a type having a low burden, to prevent drain on the battery. Isolating links and fuses of approved type shall be provided on each panel to facilitate the isolation of all sources of electrical potential to permit testing or other work on the panel without danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels. Carriers and bases shall be of moulded plastic material coloured white for links and black for fuses. Fuse carriers shall be clearly marked with the correct fuse rating. As an alternative to fuses and links, miniature circuit breakers will be accepted.
Page 25 of 365
Where miniature air circuit breakers are used on control, protection and alarm supplies, tripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed. Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type; re-wirable type fuses will not be accepted. Fuse holders shall be designed to lock the cartridges firmly into position without the use of screw clamping devices. Except on panels forming extensions to existing boards where the mounting of fuses and links shall conform with the existing panels, MCBs fuses and links associated with tripping circuits and protective gear test circuits shall be positioned at the bottom of the front face of relay and control boards. Other links, fuses and MCB's shall be accommodated within the cubicle or at the rear of the cubicle above the cubicle doors. Fuses and links shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate identification. Spare fuses and MCBs of at least 50% of each type and size shall be provided and delivered to the Purchaser. Links in current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type having size M6 hexagon nuts. M5 size may be used provided the material used is phosphor bronze or stainless steel. All incoming circuits in which the voltage equals or exceeds 125 volts shall be fed through insulated fuses and/or links, the supplies being connected to the bottom terminal, which shall be shrouded. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is withdrawn. Resistance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are on a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided with stud terminals. Set screws shall not be used.
3.3
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
The Contractor shall design in "The International System of Units" (SI Units) in accordance with ISO 1000 Where plant and equipment designs already exist in Imperial units, dimensions and tolerances of layouts and terminal points shall be presented in SI Units to a degree of accuracy of conversion from the original unit, which permits precise matching with mating components. Contract drawings produced specifically for this Contract and plant manuals shall be in SI Units. SI Units shall be used in all correspondence, technical schedules and in the Operating Maintenance Instructions.
3.4 3.4.1
DRAWINGS General
Drawings shall be prepared in accordance with EN 61082, 61355, 60617 and 81346. All drawings shall be on EN ISO 216 using the preferred "A" series size sheets with multiple
Page 26 of 365
sheets of the same drawing all the same size. The maximum dimensions in one direction shall not exceed 420mm and the minimum drawing size shall not be less than 210mm x 297mm. Drawings shall be specifically prepared for this Contract unless the Engineer approves existing standard drawings.
3.4.2
Drawings Submitted with the Tender
The Tender shall be accompanied by the drawings and performance curves referred to in the Schedules and any other drawings necessary to describe the plant offered.
3.4.3
Manufacturing and Erection Drawings
At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare a register of all drawings, which he proposes to produce, which he shall maintain and issue at regular intervals. The register shall record dates of issue and approval status against each issue. Drawings shall be subdivided into groups of drawings in subject matter. The register layout shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Before the work is put in hand, dimensioned drawings and diagrams showing all details of the Plant and materials to be used are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No wiring or connection diagrams shall be submitted for approval unless prior approval has been obtained for schematic diagrams, which is to include control and protection schematics, showing the facilities being provided and the working of the schemes. Electrical schematic diagrams shall show, in a simple manner, the connections between all apparatus included in the Contract and also those connections to associated equipment which may be supplied under a separate contract. All schematic diagrams shall include a schedule of apparatus, which shall explain any symbols or abbreviations used. The schematic drawings of the devices and equipment shall show all available connections and terminations (including unused ones) and shall include cross references. All wiring diagrams shall show clearly the details of multicore cables terminated in the equipment, whether such multicore cables are supplied under the Contract or not. Wiring diagrams shall be drawn as viewed from the back of the panels. Where wiring diagrams take the form of schedules, each schedule shall include a view of the back of the panel with the position of all terminals identified. Electronic circuit diagrams and component layout drawings are to be supplied in order to enable full repair and testing by the Purchaser of all electronic equipment supplied under the Contract. In cases where the Contractor is unable to provide any of the above, required information, it should be stated at the time of Tendering. The drawings are to be submitted as soon as possible after the commencement date and in any case in sufficient time to permit modifications to be made if such are deemed necessary by the Engineer without delaying the initial deliveries or the completion of the Contract Works. The drawings submitted are to be modified as necessary if requested by the Engineer and re-submitted for final approval. In no case shall the Contractor proceed with manufacture before the manufacturing specification, drawings and design data are approved. Comments or approval shall be given by the Engineer within thirty days from receipt by the Engineer. Any manufacturing work carried out prior to such approval will be at the Contractor's own risk and expense. The Contractor's program shall allow for the time required for the necessary comment and/or approval by the Engineer.
Page 27 of 365
If the Contractor requires urgent approval of any drawing in order to avoid delay in the delivery of the Contract Works, he is to advise the Engineer to such effect when submitting the drawing. The Engineer will not be held responsible if he is unable to approve or comment on the submitted drawing within the time requested by the Contractor. If the Engineer fails to approve or comment on the drawings submitted by the Contractor within the specified period the Contractor may, after advising the Engineer in writing, proceed with manufacturing at the manufacturer's works in accordance with the program. One full size copy of each drawing, diagram or report shall be furnished for approval of the Engineer, by airmail if from another country. The same copy of documents shall be sent to the Engineer in electronic form by e-mail. Within thirty days after receipt, the Engineer will advise the Contractor by e-mail in one of the following ways: (a) "Approved - Category I (b) "Approved Except as Noted" - Category II (c) "Modification required" - Category III (d) "For information only, no approval required" - Category IV. The notation "Approved" and "Approved Except as Noted" authorize the Contractor to proceed with fabrication of the plant covered by the drawings subject to the agreed amendments, if any, indicated. When the Contractor receives the advice that a plant drawing is "Approved" by the Engineer, he must then forward within 14 days one copy of this drawing directly to the Engineer. When the Contractor receives the advice "Approved Except As Noted" the Contractor may either re-submit a modified drawing for approval or accept the noted modification and forward within 14 days one copy, suitably amended as above. No examination or consideration by the Engineer of proposals, drawings or documents submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer, nor the approval expressed by him with regard thereto, either with or without modifications, shall absolve the Contractor from any responsibility or liability imposed upon him by any of the provisions of the Contract documents.
3.4.4
Numbering of Drawings
All drawings shall bear a title in English, including the site and description of the drawing subject and the serial number of the Main Contract, the revision letter, the scale, an indication of the method of drawing, together with an approved Contract Reference. The title block shall include a space in a prominent location of the Purchaser's name ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS, substation site, Contract No. and drawing number. A blank area of 100 mm x 70 mm shall be left on all drawings above the title block for the Engineer's acceptance stamp. Amended or redrawn drawings shall have the revision letter inserted in each drawing in a table which shall also include a brief description of the revision, date and authorization signature. The drawing title block shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
Page 28 of 365
3.4.5
Contract Drawings
After all items of Plant have been manufactured, one complete set of each drawing being fully revised and previously approved, is to be provided in electronic printout (pdf format) produced by the vector form CAD software such as Eplan, Elcad, and /or dwg / dxf form, depending on the application. Electronic copies of a workable set shall be finalized and included in the set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals described in the relevant chapter of this specifications in the original vector form of the available CAD software and in dwg /dxf form as applicable. The Tenderer should ascertain for himself during the tender stage that this requirement is to be fulfilled otherwise a statement shall be included in the relevant schedule of Departures.
3.5 3.5.1
PROGRAM OF WORK Manufacturing Progress Information
Within one month of acceptance of the Tender, the Contractor is to forward to the Engineer a chart detailing the plant manufacture, delivery, installation and commissioning program etc. for the complete contract work for his comment or approval. Copies of the approved chart, as required by the Engineer, are to be provided by the Contractor. The chart is to indicate the various phases of work for all items of the Contract from the commencement of the Contract to its final completion, e.g., design, submission of drawings, ordering of materials, manufacture delivery, installation, cabling testing and commissioning. The works program shall take into consideration work carried out by different parties involved (e.g., civil contractor etc.) and shall define the time at which the various operations controlling the site progress will take place such as submission of civil works layout drawings, supply of anchor bolts for structures etc. All instructions for work on existing plant shall be requested from the Purchaser at least one month in advance. The dates by which access to sites or buildings are required to achieve the program shall be stated. The program shall indicate the dates by which drawings will be submitted indicating separately dates for arrangement and layout, schematics, wiring diagrams and cable schedules. The arrangement drawing submission dates shall detail separately the date by which all information required to finalize civil works designs will be available. If at any time during the execution of the Contract it is found necessary to modify the approved chart, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer and submit a modified chart for approval. Such approval is not to be deemed to be consent to any amendment to the date of completion of the Contract.
3.5.2
Project Schedule/Program
The Contractor shall submit within one month of Contract award a master program subdivided in such a way as to give full information on the following: Design/Document submissions Placing of orders for manufacture Periods of manufacture
Page 29 of 365
Work tests Factory Inspections Transportation and Shipment Plant Erection Plant Commissioning Delivery of Spares and Tools Training of purchasers Staff
The erection and commissioning section shall be particularly detailed to clearly show required power system shutdown and durations. The master program must be consistent with the guaranteed dates of delivery of information, drawings and equipment as required by the contract, and included in the Order Letter and is to cover all phases of the works for all items of the Contract, from the commencement of the Contract to its final completion. Sub-programs based on and containing similar information to the master program shall be provided by the Contractor on a per-site basis and in the same number of copies as the master program at the discretion and request of the Engineer. Both the master and sub programs shall be of clear presentation to illustrate the relevant calendar dates/activity durations. The approval program shall be marked up by the Contractor to record the actual and forecast progress for the purpose of Contract control and shall be submitted to the Engineer at monthly intervals. In the event of any unscheduled delays occurring, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer and advise the policy or methods to be implemented to eliminate or minimize such delays. All programs shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and once approved shall not be amended unless specifically agreed by the Engineer.
3.6 3.6.1
PROGRESS REPORTS AND MEETINGS Progress Reports
For the duration of the Contract the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in duplicate by the fifth (5th) day of each calendar month, an approved overall project progress report for the previous month. The project report shall include as a minimum the following items: 3.6.1.1 Summary
The Contractor shall submit in writing, brief but concise progress reports indicating: (a) The state of progress in design, specification, sub-ordering, manufacture, erection and commissioning of a specified and agreed list of key items of plant. (b) A statement of any delays and the reasons why they have occurred. (c) An assessment of the effect of such delays on the attainment of specified key dates in the Contract (not necessarily Contractual key dates). (d) A statement of the measures, if any, being taken or proposed to be taken to minimize the effect of the delay.
Page 30 of 365
(e) An estimation of the completion date of the project, based upon the programs outlined in Clause 3.5 of these Conditions. 3.6.1.2 Project Schedule/Program
Copies of the programs outlined in Clause 3.5 of these Conditions shall also be included. 3.6.1.3 Updated Schedules
The following updated schedules shall be included: Equipment/Material approval status Drawing Schedule Equipment Schedule
The drawing schedule shall detail the current status of the individual drawings. The equipment schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and the individual equipment/materials, identified as one of the following categories: Submitted for Approval Approved Approved Except as Noted Modification Required No Approval Required % Manufactured Works Tested Factory Inspected Under Transportation/Shipment Site Inspected % Erected % Commissioned (SA) (AP) (AE) (MR) (NA) (MA) (WT) (FI) (TR) (SI) (ER) (CO)
Key dates relating to the above shall also be shown. The equipment identified shall be sub-divided only up to main component parts. Any changes within the equipment schedule since the last issue shall be highlighted by including the revision number of the latest issue of the schedule next to the particular item. Any equipment removed shall still be detailed but shall be indicated as deleted. 3.6.1.4 Health and Safety Plan
All project works shall comply with all relevant Cyprus laws and regulations regarding the health and safety at work. Particular attention is drawn to the Tenderer that in accordance with regulation 172/2002, the Tenderer is obliged to submit with his Tender proposal for the appointment of a qualified Safety Coordinator and a health and safety plan (referred to in this specification as the "plan") at the stage of design. Likewise, a qualified Safety coordinator shall be appointed for the construction works before the commencement of such works. As guidance, to the Tenderer, the following basic requirements for the plan are specified here below. The Tenderer is obliged to read all the requirements of the above regulation and any other law or regulation associated with, before preparing this plan.
Page 31 of 365
A copy of the plan shall be always maintained on site in the health and safety file (referred to as the "file"). Upon completion of the works, the plan shall be updated and amended, if required, and the file shall be submitted to the Engineer. The prerequisite for the preparation of the plan is to define and assess all risks involved in the works and to determine how these risks can be avoided or how can the works be protected from them. At the design stage the plan shall include among other things the following:
A schedule of all stakeholders being known at the design stage (owner, Safety Coordinator, designers, project manager, contractors, sub-contractors, etc). A project definition, including work description, topographical maps, demarcation, schedule of works at milestone level, etc. Site information such as neighbouring buildings, structures, other installations, traffic, ground characteristics, any constraint or requirement implied by the Purchaser or other Authority, etc. Flow of traffic and access paths to public or private buildings. Design principles including preventive measures against risks associated with the construction works and proposed working procedures and codes of practice that might be implemented in connection with the works covered under this contract. Construction drawings and other documents associated with the design and any other specific information that might be useful to the construction team and is relevant to health and safety issues. Definition of risks associated with the materials or use of materials. Site organization, including site office, stores, and health facilities locations. Procedures relevant to the revision of the plan in accordance with any possible amendments during the construction works, the management of any design revisions and the cooperation between the subcontractors involved. Any information or requirement relevant to the preparation of the plan at the construction stage and necessary for the file in connection with work on the line throughout its life, such as maintenance, dismantling etc.
Supporting information for the above requirements, necessary to be provided by the Purchaser is available in the tender documents. At the construction stage, the plan shall include among other things the following:
Description of all tasks associated with the construction work. Health and safety policy and formulation of targets. Constraints affecting the execution of the works. Organization structure of the project team and the assignment of roles and responsibilities for each individual member. Description of the management system on health and safety issues.
Page 32 of 365
Communication procedures and coordination of the works of subcontractors Detailed mapping showing all site facilities and installations, including flow of traffic, storage, waste disposal, etc. Information on all standards and legislation relevant to health and safety and environmental issues that must be implemented. Criteria for the appointment of subcontractors and suppliers in order to secure

The competency of subcontractors in respect to safety at work and no health risks. The provision of all necessary information from the suppliers regarding the safe transportation and use of all materials. The use of suitable machinery and equipment and adequately and sufficiently maintaining it throughout the whole period of construction works. The sufficient training of all machinery operators.
Procedures for providing sufficient information to all stakeholders who might be affected from the works. Procedures for the establishment of the necessary cooperation and coordination of all subcontractors involved including meetings to secure that the works will be running in safety with no risk on health. Procedures in cases that, during the construction works, design works should be required, including procedure for design work approval. Effective management of all tasks and activities involving safety and health risks. The management of these tasks shall include among others the following:

Identification and written assessment of risks. Determination of safe procedures and methods of work including where necessary design and calculations, temporary supports, assembly manuals, operation and maintenance manuals of all mechanical and other equipment such as lifting devices, scaffoldings etc., permit to work certificates in confined areas adjacent to electrical conductors etc, and details of safety measures for risks which are impossible to avoid.
Such activities are indicatively shown in the relevant regulation. Maps, diagrams and procedures to secure the flow or diversion of traffic in a safe manner, access to private or public land or buildings and safety measures. Procedures in anticipation of emergencies, such as escape or action plans. Procedures for the notification of accidents and dangerous events such as falling of scaffoldings, excavations, etc and procedures for researching such events, including the maintaining of statistics. Facilities for the personal hygiene of personnel. Procedures for the information and training of all personnel in relation to the organization of site and program of works, the risks and the required safety measures, the part of the
Page 33 of 365
plan which must be familiar with their commitments and obligations as implied by the legislation and any other relevant useful information.
Procedures for employee consultations and involvement in issues related with the health and safety, such as organizing safety committees. The establishment of rules governing the operation of the site addressed to contractors/subcontractors/employees/visitors, suppliers. Procedures for the collection and entry of all data to the file relating to any alteration to the planned work, so that the file includes the right information describing the work as this has been constructed. Procedure for auditing that work is being running in accordance with the provisions of legislation, the rules of the site and the plan. Financial Report
3.6.1.5
A financial report comprising a summary sheet of invoicing/payments to date plus payment status against a payment schedule of individual items as agreed in the Contract. The payment schedule shall take the form of a matrix and shall include a total comprising of specific sub-totals against an agreed item of equipment/work/specification requirement. The payment schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and once agreed shall be modified only in accordance with the current completion/payment status of the equipment/work/specification requirement. 3.6.1.6 Site Report
A site report containing a summary of those details required by these Conditions in addition to the following: (a) Site Manpower forecasts and returns (including arrival and departure date of supervisory staff). (b) Plant and Machinery returns (including arrival and departure dates). (c) Site Erection and Commissioning progress made during the month. (d) An accident report related to personnel injuries. (e) A damage report related to plant and machinery. (f) A fully detailed schedule of works proposed for the following month ahead including erection, commissioning, etc. (g) A schedule of equipment shipment and site arrival dates (anticipated and actual).
3.6.2
Notification of Delay
In every case of delay or anticipated delay, from whatever cause, in fulfilment of the Contract by the Contractor, which is likely to postpone delivery or completion dates provided in the Contract, the Contractor will notify the Purchaser in writing within seven days after Contractor becomes aware of the cause of the delay and the changed date of delivery. Such notification does not relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities and obligations.
Page 34 of 365
3.6.3
Meetings
If during the execution of the Contract the Engineer considers the progress position of any section of the work to be unsatisfactory, he will be at liberty to call such meetings, either at his office, or at the Contractors works, as he deems to be necessary. If required by the Engineer, a responsible representative from the Contractors works is to attend such meetings. Access to the Contractors and Sub-Contractors works is to be granted to the Engineer at all reasonable times for the purpose of ascertaining progress.
3.7 3.7.1
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Purpose
The purpose of the manual is to collect all information necessary to allow the purchaser: to understand the operation of the equipment, to operate it under normal and accident conditions, to maintain it under satisfactory conditions, to carry out all operations which may be necessary for the maintenance necessary in case of incident or accident.
3.7.2
Contents
The details are to cover the main plant and all associated ancillary equipment as supplied under the Contract. It will not be sufficient to incorporate manufacturer's standard brochures as part of the text unless they refer particularly to the equipment supplied and are free of extraneous matter. The instruction manuals shall conform to the following format: 3.7.2.1 Index
The index system shall provide rapid and easy access to particular subjects, drawings and illustrations. It should include a master index and a sub-index to each main section of the manual. 3.7.2.2 Description
This section shall include basic data on the Plant: (a) Descriptions of the Plant both for individual items and for the system into which items are assembled. (b) Drawings sufficient for the understanding of descriptions. (c) Flow sheets or single line and block diagrams, which explain the functioning and logic of the system. Where related systems are shown on composite diagrams, individual systems shall be identified by colour, or coding as agreed. (d) Schedules which provide assembled references to items of a like kind, e.g. Valve Schedules, Piping Schedules, Operational Limit Schedule, etc.
Page 35 of 365
(e) Data sheets, which assemble in a concise format relevant technical details of a plant item or system. The purpose of a data sheet is to provide quick reference to the essential facts omitting all reference to general descriptions operating or maintenance principles and instructions. 3.7.2.3 Installation
It shall include installation drawings and systematic procedures for installation. 3.7.2.4 Operation
This section shall include basic systematic instructions on how to operate the Plant both with regard to individual items and to systems under all patterns of normal and abnormal conditions. The instructions shall include reference to the applicable operation limits. 3.7.2.5 Maintenance
This section shall comprise the maintenance procedures for the items of the Plant and shall include: (a) The step-by-step procedures for maintenance including assembly and disassembly instructions. (b) The checks to be made, including the limits of fits and other tolerances. (c) A fault diagnosis guide, where appropriate in particular where it concerns electronic equipment. (d) The spares required. (e) The special tools required. (f) Drawings sufficient to illustrate the maintenance procedures, spares and special tools including where appropriate exploded views and isometrics to give maximum instructional content. The necessary electronic circuit diagrams and component layout drawings for all electronic equipment supplied should be provided in order to enable full testing and repair of such equipment. (g) Lubricant schedule. (h) Ball and roller bearing schedule.
3.7.3
Manual Presentation
Drawings and diagrams shall wherever practicable be reduced to a convenient size and bound into the manual. The reduced size drawings and diagrams shall be completely legible and suitable for reproduction. Drawings, which are referred to several times in the text, shall be either of the "throw clear" type or be repeated as necessary. Throw-clear drawings are to be included at the back of the relevant sub-sections, and their locations noted in the Section drawing index. Detailed engineering drawings necessary for maintenance and mentioned in the text but not included in the manual because of size reduction difficulties, should nevertheless be listed in the drawing index, the words 'NOT INCLUDED' being entered against them. Drawings are to be identified at the bottom right corner by title and number. The name of the main Contractor, but not that of any Sub-Contractor, may also be inscribed upon the cover after the description of the Plant.
Page 36 of 365
The name of the Purchaser and substation or other identification followed by a classification of the plant (e.g., 132 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER) is to be inscribed upon the spine of the cover and, if the instructions are contained in several books, these are to be marked with the appropriate volume number.
3.7.4
Manual Delivery Time
Copies of the draft composite maintenance and operating manuals covering all plant supplied under the contract shall be submitted to the Engineer at least two months before the earliest delivery of plant, in accordance with the general clauses of the Specification. Where appropriate these shall be subdivided to cover each substation site. In case of power transformers, separate manuals shall be prepared for each size of transformer included in the Contract. In the event that amendments or alterations to the draft manual are required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit revisions for approval without delay so that the final document can be supplied within the date specified. Not later than the time of delivery of the Plant covered by the Contract at least three copies of the approved version of the instructions incorporating amendments required by the Engineer shall be delivered to the Purchaser. Where more than one substation is covered by the Contract, at least three sets shall be supplied for each substation, each set covering all transformer types and sizes supplied for the substation. If the complete text of the manual is too bulky then it should be sub-divided and produced in multi-volume form. Should any changes/modifications be required to the operation and maintenance instructions arising from operation, failure, repair, modification etc. of the works during the Maintenance Guarantee period, the Contractor shall incorporate such changes/modifications into the operation and maintenance instructions as required. Incorporation of such changes/modifications by the Contractor shall be to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer and is to be effected not later than the Contractors application date for issue of the Final Taking Over Certificate. A further three sets of manuals for each substation site and for each spare equipment are to be reproduced as a book or books of approximately A4 size and bound into durable covers inscribed in permanent form upon the front generally in the form of the title page to this document except that the references to Specification, Conditions of Contract, Drawings, etc. will be replaced by Operating and Maintenance Instructions. The finished books are to be handed to the Engineer not later than six months before the completion of the guarantee period. The same manuals shall also be provided in electronic format as described in chapter 3.4.
3.8
PACKING OR PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DISPATCH
The recommendations of BS 1133 Packaging Code are to be observed. Packing shall be such that it affords adequate protection to the enclosed materials against mechanical damage during transport to its final destination, including any transition during shipment. All plant shall be packed suitable for open storage for up to three months following arrival in Cyprus, if required, taking into consideration high humidity and salty atmosphere.
Page 37 of 365
A maximum amount of shop assembly consistent with export shipping requirements is required in order to reduce field erection work. Where shipment by container is intended the packing requirements stated below for noncontainerised shipments shall apply for any part container loads. Containers shall be of the fully enclosed weatherproof type (i.e. metal sides and roof) unless the size of plant to be shipped necessitates otherwise in which case the type of container and method of shipping shall be subject to approval. For non-container shipments packing shall be stout close-boarded wooden cases of adequate thickness, suitably braced and banded and lined internally with water-resistant material. Certain types of outdoor equipment may be crated, provided that adequate protection of vulnerable parts is assured. All pipe flanges shall be fitted with wooden covers not less than 40mm larger in diameter than the flange. These shall be wired or bolted provided that the ends are adequately protected and the enclosing bands or wires are robust. For full container shipments a degree of crating may still be required depending on the type of equipment involved and the Contractor shall state his intentions and obtain approval. Adequate battens and braces shall be provided to prevent movement of equipment within the container. Where appropriate due to the weight or nature of the equipment pallet type bases shall be provided to assist in loading and unloading. Indoors electrical equipment, whether shipped in containers or packing cases, must be enclosed in welded polythene envelopes inside the packing cases. The envelopes should be sealed and have sufficient desiccant inside to absorb the initial moisture content plus an allowance for leakage. When in cases or crates or containers, all items shall be so secured that they are not free to move and cannot work loose in transport. If rotating parts are shipped within their bearings or mountings they must be adequately braced and restrained to prevent relative movement. Bags of loose items shall be placed in a supplementary case, each bag having stitched on to it a metal label indicating the number and nature of its contents. Where a filler material is used in a case to restrict movement or provide additional protection it must be inorganic and non-hygroscopic. All surfaces liable to corrosion shall be thoroughly cleaned and special steps, adapted to the nature of the materials and the time interval between packing and unpacking shall be taken to prevent corrosion. These steps may constitute the greasing of surfaces, the application of a protective coat; enclosure of the items in a hermetically sealed container, consisting of paper, cellophane, plastic or zinc; the addition of vapour phase inhibitor paper to the package; or other approved means. Steps shall be taken to ensure that insulated materials cannot be damaged by moisture, mould, insects or rodents. Items that include materials liable to be damaged by moisture shall be packed in hermetically sealed containers in which some approved, non-harmful or toxic dehydrant, has been inserted. Cases shall be marked both with large lettering to show which side up the case is to be, and, if the contents are fragile, marked "FRAGILE" in large letters and the international wineglass symbol. In the case of container shipments individual crates or equipment on pallets shall also indicate any special handling or movement requirements or weight
limitations. Packages shall be marked with their place of destination in such a way that rough handling or the effect of weather cannot remove or obliterate the marking. Each separate package shall be marked with the gross weight and for all lifts over two tons marks on the cases or equipment shall show where the weight is bearing and the correct positions for the slings. The cases shall, whenever possible, be so packed that they can safely be placed any side uppermost and no reliance shall be placed on the ability of those who will handle the case to read written instructions or to understand pictorial ones. Cases that have to be slung in a certain way shall, as far as possible, be so constructed that they cannot conveniently be slung in any other way and packages shall preferably be so large that they cannot be easily rolled over or thrown about; thus when practicable small cases shall be crated together to form one larger unit. Crates shall be sufficiently strong to be capable of being slung from the outside even when provision is also made for slings to be attached direct to a major article inside. Special steps shall be taken to guard against theft during transport. No small items, such as padlocks, nameplates and so forth, which could be torn off or unscrewed, shall be accessible. Cases, crates, barrels and drums shall be handed in such a manner as to obstruct the theft of any of the timber used for packaging, and the bands shall be so secured that they are not rendered ineffective by shrinkage of the wood. The materials for each substation should be packed separately and suitable markings to the approval of the Engineer shall be made on all cases, crating etc. to distinguish the materials for each substation. A descriptive and fully itemized list shall be prepared of the contents of each packing case or container. A copy of this list shall be placed in a waterproof envelope under a metal or other suitable plate securely fastened to the outside of one end of the case or container and its position adequately indicated by stencilling. Where appropriate drawings showing the erection marking instructions of the items concerned shall be placed inside the case or with the equipment in the container. All stencilled markings on cases and crates, or other markings on descriptive metal tabs fixed to cable drums, bundles of structural steelwork and so forth, shall be applied in two places with a material which cannot wash off and shall be additional to any erection of other marks or impressions which may be specified elsewhere. Components accessories or materials not included in the main shipment as a result of an oversight or the negligence of the Contractor, shall, unless otherwise agreed by the Purchaser, be shipped by air mail or air freight on the Contractor's expense. During transit mechanical shock indicators shall be fitted on each of the following equipment to indicate how the specific equipment was handled during transit and to determine if detailed inspection is required at site: Power Transformers GIS Panels Circuit Breakers Surge Arresters Outdoor Current and Voltage Transformers 22 kV Switchgear Panels
Page 39 of 365
3.9
CABLE DRUMS AND CABLE SEALING
Cable shall be supplied on strong non-returnable drums arranged to take a round spindle of a section adequate to support the loaded cable drum during installation and handling. The drum shall be lagged with strong closely fitting battens, which shall be securely fixed to prevent damage to the cable. Wooden drums shall be constructed of seasoned timber to prevent shrinkage of drums during shipment and subsequent storage on Site. Each drum shall be clearly marked in a manner which cannot be obliterated with the particulars of the cable including voltage, length, conductor size, number of cores, type of protective covering, section number, gross and net weights, together with the direction for rolling. Empty drums shall remain the property of the Purchaser if he so chooses. The Contractor shall be responsible to transfer to the Purchasers Stores, as will be advised by the Purchaser, of all empty drums that the Purchaser will decide to retain. Any other drums or other leftover packing materials will be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own expenses. The ends of lead sheathed cables shall be sealed by plumbing a cap or disc on the lead sheath. The ends of PVC sheathed cables shall be suitably sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture. The end of the cable left projecting from the drum shall at all times be securely protected against damage.
3.10
ERECTION MARKS
All plant requiring erection at site shall be marked with distinguishing numbers and/or letters corresponding to those on the approved drawings and material lists or shipping documents. All erection marks shall be legible and clearly visible, where relevant erection Marks shall be stamped before galvanizing. Colour banding to an approved code is to be employed to identify members of similar shape or type but of differing strengths of grades.
3.11 3.11.1
TRANSPORT TO SITE General
The Contractor shall arrange and carry out under his own responsibility and supervision the local transport from the port of destination to the Site. The Contractor shall, at his own convenience, gather all necessary information and arrange for all necessary provisions in order to obtain accurate information about unloading at the port of destination and inland transport facilities as well as prevailing conditions, particularly the safe load bearing capacity of highways and bridges. The Contractor shall bear all expenses related therewith. The Contractor shall use every reasonable means and care to prevent any of the highways or bridges on the route to Site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of the Contractor or any of his Sub-Contractors and in particular select, choose and use vehicles and restrict and distribute loads so that any such extraordinary traffic that will inevitably arise from moving of Contractors equipment and material from and to the Site shall be limited as far as reasonably possible and so that no damage or injury may be occasioned to such highway and bridges.
Page 40 of 365
If during the carrying out of the work or at any time thereafter the Contractor receives any claim arising out of the execution of the Works in respect of damage or injury to the highways or bridges, he shall immediately report the same to the Engineer and thereafter he shall make the settlement of any payment of all sums due in respect of such claim and in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses in relation thereto without any obligation to the Purchaser. The unloading and storage at Site shall be carried out by the Contractor, who for these purposes shall make all necessary provisions and arrange for all necessary equipment.
3.11.2
Receiving of Equipment & Issuing of Damage Reports
The Contractor shall submit receiving reports to the Engineer to cover each individual shipment received and checked at the jot site. Each shipment on arrival at job site shall be unloaded, opened and carefully checked for any damage in transit and the Contractor shall immediately submit a damage report, countersigned by the Engineer to the Insurance Company with copy to the Engineer, where damage has occurred in Marine Transportation. A copy of the damage report shall also be sent to the registered/appointed surveyor. In all cases of irreparable damages, the Contractor shall immediately notify the relevant manufacturer(s). He shall also immediately notify the Engineer of the actions he will be initiating and undertaking in order to repair or replace the damaged part(s) and of the consequences this damage will have on the completion date of the Works. Any repairs proposed by the Contractor will be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.12
ERECTION
The Maintenance Instructions shall include any special precautionary measures, which must be taken during erection or subsequent maintenance. These special precautions must be strictly observed when the equipment is installed, tested and commissioned. Special care shall be taken not to injure galvanized or other specially treated surfaces during erection and also to prevent or remove any rust streaks or foreign matter deposited on galvanized surfaces during storage or transport or after erection. In operational substations all work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the EAC Permit to Work system. Failure of personnel to adhere to this system may result in personnel being dismissed from the site.
3.13
CLEANING AND PAINTING
All iron and steel structures shall be protected against corrosion in accordance with EN ISO 12944 and EN ISO 14713 and shall withstand the environment for at least 10 years without maintenance. The Tenderer is to submit with his offer details of painting and finishing covering the extent of surface treatment required on items in works and prior to dispatch. Before painting or filling with oil, gas, or compound, all non galvanized parts including tanks and accessories, shall be thoroughly cleaned free from rust, scale, burrs, sharp corners, grease and moisture by shot blasting, pickling and rinsing or other approved process. Any protective coatings are to be applied after tests have been carried out.
Page 41 of 365
Pickling shall be preceded by suitable solvent or alkaline cleaning for removal of deposits of oil, grease etc., where necessary. The finished surface shall be in a suitable condition to provide good adhesion properties to the primary coat. Pipes, valves and other similar parts of the Plant which are subject to hydraulic test and are not readily accessible for drying out are on completion of tests at the manufacturer's works to be drained out by washing with an approved de-watering oil prior to protection for shipment. All surfaces shall be prepared for coating in accordance with BS 2569. All paint is to have appropriate standard finish, requiring at least two finishing coats on prepared surfaces properly filled in to provide a smooth finish. The insides of control cubicles, cabinets etc., where condensation is liable to occur are to receive the same number of coats. All bright metal parts are to be covered before shipment with an approved protective compound and protected adequately during shipment to Site. After erection these parts are to be cleaned with correct solvent and polished bright where required. The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of touch-up paint for making good minor damages, which may occur during transport. The colour and shade of all painted external surfaces shall be to BS 381C colour, 631 Light Grey or similar. All internal surfaces, which require painting, shall be white. Instrument, relay and ancillary panel mounted equipment shall be consistently finished and details submitted for approval by the Engineer. The SF6 pipes shall be painted yellow but all pipes associated with one gas zone shall be separately identified with an individual colour band every 300 mm. Colours of equipment other than above and all shades are to be proposed by Contractor and agreed with the Engineer.
3.14
LABELS, NUMBER PLATES, AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION DISCS
Each main and auxiliary item of plant is to have attached to it in a conspicuous position, a rating plate of material that cannot be corroded upon which is to be engraved any identifying name, type or serial number, together with details of loading conditions under which the item of Plant in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram plates as may be required by the Engineer. Where labels are provided for making clear the method of operation of apparatus they shall be concise and preferably diagrammatic in form. Danger labels and fire protection equipment labels shall be fitted in appropriate places. All labels shall be submitted for approval and shall be in English unless otherwise specified. Equipment rating plates and serial numbers shall be located in a conspicuous and easily readable position. All switchgear shall be clearly and permanently identified with circuit designation, front and rear, number plates, and phase discs of appropriate colours. Labels, number plates and their fixing screws for outdoor use shall be of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material. Where the use of vitreous enamelled labels is
Page 42 of 365
approved, the whole surface including the back and edges shall be properly covered and protective washers shall be provided front and back on the fixing screws. Danger notices shall have red lettering on a white background or they may be pictorial if approved by the Engineer. All other labels and number plates shall have black lettering on a white background. Equipment Main labels on panels, cubicles, kiosks, junction and control boxes and similar equipment Control and changeover switches and similar items Fuses and links Relays and contactors Label Size (mm) 125X50 Lettering (mm) 20X1,5
70X30 35X15 60X20
12X1,5 5X1 5X1
3.15
LOCKS
Padlocks or other approved locking devices for circuit breakers, isolating devices, control switches, screened enclosures, and other equipment shall be supplied under this Contract. On electrical plant at all voltage levels switches on the local and remote control and protection panels shall be locked as follows: Control Switches: Discrepancy Switch: Control Selector Switch: Cylinder or fixed interference lock (key removable in neutral position only) Fixed interference lock (key removable in neutral position only) Cylinder or fixed interference lock (key removable in each position)
Where locks are called for under this Specification, these shall be of an approved dead latch type or padlocks as appropriate. Three keys shall be supplied for each lock and all locks and keys shall be non-interchangeable. Where a set of locks is provided under any particular section of the Plant, a group master key shall be supplied in addition. All locks and padlocks shall be of brass and where they are fitted to switchboards or similar cubicles shall have the visible parts chromium plated. Keys and locks shall be impressed with the manufacturer's serial number. The padlocks and keys shall be engraved with an agreed identifying code or inscription.
3.16
TROPICALIZATION
In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard is to be given to the humid conditions under which equipment is to work. Some relaxation of the following provisions may be
Page 43 of 365
permitted where equipment is hermetically sealed but it is preferred that tropical grade materials should be used wherever possible.
3.16.1
Metals
Iron and steel are generally to be painted or galvanized as appropriate. Indoor parts may alternatively have chromium or copper-nickel plating or other approved protective finish. Small iron and steel parts (other than rustless steel) of all instruments and electrical equipment, the cores of electromagnets and the metal parts of relays and mechanisms are to be treated in an approved manner to prevent rusting.
3.16.2
Screws, Nuts, Springs, etc
The use of iron and steel is to be avoided in instruments and electrical relays wherever possible. Steel screws are to be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated, or when plating is not possible owing to tolerance limitations, are to be of corrosion-resisting steel. Instrument screws (except those forming part of a magnetic circuit) are to be of brass or bronze. Springs are to be of non-rusting material, e.g., phosphor bronze or nickel silver, as far as possible.
3.16.3
Rubbers
Neoprene and similar synthetic compounds, not subject to deterioration due to the climatic conditions, are to be used for gaskets, sealing rings, diaphragms, etc.
3.17
NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS, AND WASHERS
Nuts and bolts for incorporation in the plant are preferably to conform to ISO Metric Coarse to BS 3643, BS 3692 and BS 4190. Other sizes or threads are permitted for threaded parts not to be disturbed in normal use or maintenance. Where the Contract includes nuts and bolts of different standards, then the tools to be provided in accordance with this Specification are to include spanners, taps and dies for these nuts and bolts. Fitted bolts are to be a driving fit in the reamed holes they occupy, are to have the screwed portion of a diameter such that it will not be damaged in driving and are to be marked in a conspicuous position to ensure correct assembly at Site. On outdoor equipment all bolts, nuts and washers shall be of non-corroding materials where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and elsewhere where specifically required by the Engineer. All washers are to be included under this Contract, including locking devices and anti-vibration arrangements, which are to be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Taper washers are to be fitted where necessary. Where there is risk of corrosion, bolts and studs are to be finished flush with the surface of the nuts.
3.18
RIVETS
Rivets are to conform to the appropriate British Standard and for general use pan heads are preferred. Rivets on bearing surfaces are to be flat counter-sunk, driven flush. Whenever practicable, riveting is to be done by hydraulic tools and rivets must completely fill the holes when closed. If loose, or if the heads are badly formed, cracked or eccentric
Page 44 of 365
to the shank or do not bear truly on the plate or bar, such rivets are to be cut out and replaced. All surfaces to be riveted must be in close contact throughout.
3.19
FORGINGS
All important forgings are to be jointly examined at the maker's works by the Engineer and by a representative of the Contractor during forging and heat treatment and are to be examined by the latest methods for the detection of defects.
3.20
CASTINGS
All castings are to be as free from blowholes, flaws and cracks as is practicable. No welding, filling or plugging of defective parts is to be done without the sanction of the Engineer and then only with his approval in writing. All cast-iron is to be of close-grained quality and is to be corrosion-resistant for those parts in contact with seawater. Cast-iron is not to be used for any part of the equipment which is in tension or which is subject to impact stresses. This clause is not intended to prohibit the use of suitable grades of cast-iron for parts where service experience has shown it to be satisfactory.
3.21
WELDING
Where fabrication welds are liable to be highly stressed, the welders or welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate section of BS 4872 Part 1, or other relevant International Standard Specification. The Engineer reserves the right to visit the Contractor's Works at any reasonable time during the fabrication of the items of Plant and to familiarize himself with the progress made and the quality of the work to date. All tests are to be carried out in accordance with the relevant International or other approved Standards. Where required by the Engineer, non-destructive examination of the finished weld is to be made. If the examinations be by radiograph means, then the recommendations of EN 1435 where applicable are to be followed and the resulting negatives are to be made available to the Engineer.
3.22
GALVANIZED WORK
All materials to be galvanized are to be of the full dimensions shown or specified and all punching, cutting, drilling, screw tapping and the removal of burns is to be completed before the galvanizing process commences. All galvanizing is to be done by the hot dip process with spelter, not less than 98% of which must be pure zinc and in accordance with EN 729 or EN 10244 as applicable. No alternative process is to be used without the approval of the Engineer. Bolts are to be completely galvanized including the threads, but the threads are to be left uncoated in the case of nuts. The zinc coating is to be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible. Unless otherwise specified the average thickness of zinc coating for iron and steel articles shall be in accordance with EN 729 and that for steel wires to EN 10244. The Engineer
Page 45 of 365
may select for test as many components to be weighed after pickling and before and after galvanizing as he may think fit. All galvanized parts are to be protected from injury to the zinc coating due to abrasion during periods of transit, storage and erection.
3.23 3.23.1
PIPE WORK AND VALVES Internal Cleaning of Pipes
The Contractor is to be responsible for ensuring that the internal surface of all pipelines is thoroughly clean both during erection and before the pipeline is placed in commission. The procedure adopted by the Contractor is to include the following: (a) Thorough cleaning of all internal surfaces prior to erection to remove accumulations of dirt, rust, scale, etc., and welding slag due to site welding before erection. (b) Thorough cleaning of all pipe work after erection by blowing through to atmosphere to ensure that no extraneous matter is left in the system. The Contractor is to provide all necessary facilities for carrying out these requirements.
3.23.2
Pipe Work
All pipe work shall be designed for the appropriate conditions and shall comply with requirements of the latest Standard. All pipes, bends, and tees shall be truly cylindrical and uniform in section. The pipes shall be of appropriate approved material, shall be seamless and shall be suitable to withstand the stresses and strain involved in the operation of the Plant. Branches shall be welded onto the pipes in an approved manner - alternatively cast steel tees may be provided subject to the approval of the Engineer. Cast steel tees bends or fittings shall be of similar analysis to the adjoining pipes. Care shall be taken that the internal diameter of all castings is the same as that of the pipes to which they are joined. Castings without ample fillets at the points of attachment of flanges and branches will be rejected. All pipes shall be adequately anchored and expansion loops and bends shall be provided where required and shall preferably be arranged horizontally. The Contractor will be responsible for the design and positioning of all provisions for expansion. All piping systems shall be arranged to allow adequate falls in the direction of the flow except where otherwise approved by the Engineer. Adequate provision shall be made for air release, pressure relief, and drainage on all pipe work. Isolating valves, complete with padlocks and hose connections, shall be provided at the take off points of all such drains. Special care shall be taken to ensure that no permanent stresses are set up in any pipeline or items of connected plant when closing lengths are jointed. Except where otherwise specified all piping shall have full penetration butt welded connections with a minimum number of flanged joints necessary for maintenance.
Page 46 of 365
All terminal points and at points where castings adjoin and where, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is undesirable to use a butt-welded joint, a flanged joint of approved design shall be provided. Pipes and attachments shall be properly aligned and jigged prior to welding. If tack welds are used the tacks shall be fused into the first runs of weld deposited. All flanged joints and bolting materials shall be liberally smeared with an adequate graphite solution during erection and/or assembly to assist subsequent maintenance. Gauges shall not be mounted directly on the pipes but shall be secured to a wall or structure which is free from vibration.
3.23.3
Pipe Supports
The whole of the pipe work and accessories included in this Contract are to be supported and mounted in an approved manner. All necessary slings, saddles, structural steelwork, foundation bolts, fixing bolts and all other attachments are to be supplied. Supports shall be arranged so that any valve or fitting can be withdrawn without any additional support being required and without disturbing the rest of the plant. No pipe shall be supported from another pipe. The number and positions of all supports and the maximum weight carried by a support is to be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.23.4
Valves
All valves shall be of approved design and manufacture. Where valves are of a similar make, size and type they shall be interchangeable with one another. Valves shall have bolted connections. Light pattern valves are not acceptable for any service. All valves shall be of the full way gate type unless otherwise specified and when in full open position, the bore of the valve shall not be obstructed by any part of the gate. The internal diameter of all valves at the ends adjacent to the pipe work shall be similar to the internal diameter of the connecting pipe work. All valves over 50 mm nominal bore shall have outside screwed spindles, the screwed thread on the spindle shall not pass through or into the stuffing box. Where valves are exposed to the weather, protective covers shall be provided for the spindles, which shall be to the approval of the Engineer. All valves shall be closed by rotating the handwheel in a clockwise direction when looking at the face of the handwheel. The face of each valve handwheel shall be clearly marked with the words "OPEN" and "SHUT" and with arrows adjacent to indicate the direction of rotation to which each refers. All valves over 50 mm bore shall have indicators to show readily whether the valves are open or shut. In the case of valves with extended spindles, indicators shall be fitted to both the valve spindle and the operating pedestal. Each valve handwheel shall have fitted firmly in position on top of the handwheel, a permanent stainless steel nameplate with inscribed lettering to indicate the system with which the valve is associated and an identification number corresponding to the number allocated to the valve on the system flow diagram. The identification system shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Valves shall be installed with their spindles above or at the horizontal position, no valves shall be erected in the inverted position. Hand operated valves shall be easily operable by one man. Adequate means of easy lubrication shall be provided for all valves and operating extension components. Cast iron shall not be used in the manufacture of any valves. Plastic or composition hand wheels will not be accepted. All non-return valves shall be of an approved type and manufacture and head loss through the valves shall be to approval. The bodies shall be provided with removable access covers to enable the internal parts to be examined or renewed without removing the valve from the pipeline. The bodies shall be stamped with an arrow to indicate the correct flow direction. Non-return valves shall not be fitted in vertical pipe runs. Valves which it will be necessary to lock in the open or closed position are to be provided with a non-detachable locking arrangement by locking pins which shall be of an anti-rattle design so as not to add to noise emission. Such locking pins shall incorporate 8mm holes for padlocks. Filter valves shall be fitted with locking plates.
3.24
OIL OR COMPOUND FILLED CHAMBERS
All joints of fabricated oil or compound filled chambers, other than those, which have to be broken, are to be welded and care is to be taken to ensure that the chambers are oil-tight. Defective welded joints are not to be caulked but may be re-welded subject to the written approval of the Engineer. Suitable provision is to be made for the expansion of the filling medium in all oil or compound filled chambers and the chambers are to be designed to avoid the trapping of air or gases during the filling process. Design shall permit the temperature of any chamber, which is to be compound filled, to be raised such that the compound does not solidify during the filling process. All wiring in the vicinity of oil-filled chambers is to be insulated with oil-resisting insulation of approved quality.
3.25
OIL LEVEL INDICATORS
Oil level indicators of approved design are to be fitted to all oil containers. The indicators are to show the level at all temperatures likely to be experienced in service, are to be marked with the normal level at 20oC clearly visible from normal access levels and are to be easily dismantled for cleaning. In addition, the normal filling level of all removable containers is to be marked on the inside.
3.26
THERMOMETER POCKETS
Thermometer pockets and instrument connections of an approved pattern are to be fitted in such positions as may be determined to suit the operation and testing of the plant to the approval of the Engineer. A thermometer pocket is to be fitted adjacent to each point of
connection for distant remote temperature indication unless specifically stated to the contrary. Where necessary, the pocket is to be of approved alloy material suitable for the required service. All thermometer pockets are to comply with the requirements of BS 2765.
3.27
CHROMIUM PLATING
The chromium plating of those components of the Plant where specified and where offered by the Contractor is to comply with the requirements of EN 12540.
3.28
PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges are to comply with the requirements of EN 837. All pressure gauges are to be fitted with stopcocks immediately adjacent to each gauge and all pressure gauge piping is to be fitted with an isolating valve at each point of connection to the main system. Where pressure gauges are mounted on panels, the stopcocks are to be suitable for the connection of a test gauge. Where a difference in level exists between the situation of the gauge and the point at which pressure is to be measured, appropriate compensation is to be made in the dial reading and the dial must be marked with the amount of compensation applied. Where the compensation would amount to two percent or less of the total movement indicated under normal conditions, it may be ignored. All pressure gauges are to be clearly identified by means of labels of approved type and lettering. All pressure gauge piping is to be of corrosion resistant steel or copper tube.
3.29 3.29.1
SMALL WIRING General
All wiring shall be neatly run and securely fixed in cleats, bunched in neat forms or run in approved wiring troughs or tubes not susceptible to corrosion. The number of wires in any one bunch or tube shall not exceed 20 and the duct-filling ratio shall not exceed 75%. The practice of doubling back wires on themselves in a trough to absorb slack is not acceptable. Where bunched or handled wires are run in troughs the maximum number in each bunch or bundle shall be retained at 20. Cleats shall be of moulded or metal-reinforced insulating material and shall be of the limited compression type. Insulated strapping shall be used for bunched wires. Wiring troughs shall be of insulating material. Wherever practicable, wiring shall be accommodated on the sides of the cubicles and the wires for each circuit shall be separately grouped. Back of panel wiring shall be so arranged that access to the connecting stems of relays and other apparatus and to contacts of control and other switches is not impeded. Where provision is made for addition of equipment not required initially, means shall be adopted for supporting and termination wiring during the interim period. Except where terminals are approved by the Engineer for use with bare conductors, crimped plated connectors of approved type are to be used to terminate all small wiring.
All wiring shall have insulation incapable of supporting combustion. Cores shall be multistranded. The size of wiring cores shall be selected with due regard to thermal requirements, voltage drop and mechanical strength. Particular attention is to be paid to fatigue failure of cores due to flexing or vibration including damage at terminations, which require disconnection for test purposes. All panel wiring is to comply with the requirements of BS 6231, Type A or B, as appropriate. Conductors are to be copper and have a cross section equivalent to 30/0,25mm (1,5mm2), 50/0,25mm (2,5mm2), 7/0,67mm (2,5mm2) or 1/1,78mm (2,5mm2) but single stranded conductors should only be employed for rigid connections which are not subject to movement or vibration during shipment, operation or maintenance. Flexible conductors of smaller sizes shall only be employed with written approval. For new switchboards the coloured wiring shall comply with the following code: Colour of Wire Brown (L1) / Black (L2) / Grey (L3) Green or Green/Yellow Circuit Particulars First, second and third phase connections, respectively, when directly connected to the primary circuit or connected to the secondary circuits of current and voltage transformers. Connections to earth AC neutral connections, earthed or unearthed, connected to the secondary circuit of current and voltage transformers. AC connections other than those above and connections in AC/DC circuits. Connections in DC circuits.
Blue
Brown (L+) / Grey (L-)
Alternatively, where equipment is wired in accordance with a manufacturer's standard, wiring may be carried out in a single colour except that all connections to earth shall be green or green/yellow. If extensions are involved to existing plant which has already coloured wiring, the existing wire colouring scheme shall be retained. Wiring diagrams must indicate wire colours and are to be drawn as viewed from the back of the panel. Numbered ferrules shall be fitted to internal wiring and to all multi-core cable tails. Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with the established numbering system for existing substations. For new substations the Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer of a standard system of numbering for small wiring. Each wire shall have a letter to denote its function, e.g. control of circuit breaker, current transformer for primary protection, voltage for instruments, metering and protection. A number identifying the individual wire shall follow the function letter. Every branch of any connection shall bear the same identification mark. At points of interconnection where a change of numbering cannot be avoided double ferrules are to be provided. Where it is necessary to identify branches, which are commoned (e.g., current transformer leads), different identification marks for the branches may be employed only if they are
commoned through links, or are connected to separate terminals which are then commoned by removable connections. Numbering shall read from the terminals outwards on all wires. Unused cores in multicore cables shall be ferruled U1, U2, etc. at both ends and connected to individual spare terminals. Ferrules shall be of white insulating material with glossy finish to minimize adhesion of dirt. They shall not be affected by damp or oil and shall be clearly and permanently marked in black. The ferrules shall be of sleeve type so fitted that they cannot slip along the cable or be removed from the cable without re-terminating. The ferrules on all wiring directly connected to circuit breaker trip coils, tripping switches, etc., are to be of a colour, preferably red, different from that of the remainder and marked "Trip" or "T" in white. All wiring shall be taken to terminal boards and wires shall not be teed or jointed between terminal points. Electrical wiring and instruments are to be so located that leakage of oil or water cannot affect them. Where plastic material is used for ducting etc. it shall be tough and shall be able to resist shock tests for reinforced enclosure equipment. Inflammation of the plastic due to exposure to flame shall not propagate beyond the combustion area when the flame is removed. All metallic cases of instruments, control switches, relays, etc., are to be connected by means of copper conductors of not less than 2,5 mm2 section to the nearest earth bar. These conductors may be bare or have insulation coloured green.
3.29.2
External Wiring
Control and indication cables erected on the surface of transformers, for example, between Buchholz relay, thermal point terminal boxes and the marshalling box, shall be suitable for continuous operation at temperatures up to and including 105 oC. Heat resisting grade PVC is approved for this purpose but the use of mineral insulated cables is not permitted. The wiring shall enter the bottom compartment of the kiosk through the gland plate in such a manner that the rear is kept clear for access. External wiring shall have a minimum cross section of 2,5 mm2.
3.30
TERMINAL BOARDS
Screw type terminals shall utilize a pressure plate arrangement; single point screw terminations will not be accepted. The size of screws for screw clamps is not restricted provided that the screws are captive; otherwise they shall comply with the requirements for bolt and stud terminals. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent pairs of terminals. The height of the barriers and the spacing of the terminals shall be such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals.
Page 51 of 365
Terminations shall be grouped according to function and labels shall be provided to show the group function. Connections to terminals shall be made using pre insulated reinforced crimped-end pieces. Terminals of Voltage and Current Transformer Tripping circuits shall be of the slide-type test/disconnect type and shall have facility for inserting banana type testing terminal to both the incoming and to the outgoing terminal. Connections to relays shall be made using screwed lugs clamped to the conductors with an insulating sleeve. All terminal boards are to be mounted in accessible positions and, when in enclosed cubicles, are preferably to be inclined towards the rear doors to give easy access to terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. Spacing of adjacent terminal boards is to be not less than 100 mm and the bottom of each board is to be not less than 200 mm above the incoming cable gland plate. Separate terminations are to be provided on each terminal strip for the cores of incoming and outgoing cables including all spare cores. Acceptable types of terminals are: (a) Screw or stud type used with crimped ring type termination for high current connections. All studs are to be provided with nuts, washers and lock washers. (b) Insertion clamp type such as the Klippon type SAK6 or the Phoenix type UK10 or similar equivalent to the approval of the Engineer, whereby the crimped termination is clamped between plates by a screw having a suitable locking device. Terminal entries are to be shrouded such that no current carrying metal is exposed. Tapped holes are to have not less than three full threads. Screws are to be of plated steel, stainless steel or phosphor bronze and size M3 and M4. Terminal assemblies are preferably to be of the unit form suitable for mounting collectively on a standard assembly rail, secured from the front and giving the required number of ways plus at least ten percent extra terminals as spares. Relevant manufacturer's catalogues are to be supplied with the offer. If requested by the Purchaser samples of terminals are to be provided for inspection and approval. For voltages in excess of 125 V, circuit terminals are to be segregated from other terminals and are to be fitted with non-flammable plastic covers to prevent contact with any live parts. They are to have warning labels, with red lettering, mounted thereon in conspicuous position. All connections are to be made at the front of the terminal boards and no live metal is to be exposed at the back.
3.31
ELECTRICAL INSULATION
All insulating materials are to be suitably finished so as to prevent deterioration of their qualities under the specified working conditions. Plastics, elastomers, resin-bonded laminates and inorganic materials are to be of suitable quality selected from the grades or types in the appropriate British Standard.
Page 52 of 365
3.32
EARTHING CONNECTIONS
All necessary studs, connectors and earth bars are to be provided to permit the connection of each switchboard, motor or other electrical equipment supplied under the Contract to the substation general earthing system. The provisions for earthing are to be such that no reliance is to be placed on the conductivity of metal-to-metal joints without the use of special connectors. All control or relay panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 85 mm2 cross-section run along the bottom of the panels and arranged so that the bars of adjacent panels can be joined together to form a common bus. All joints shall be tinned. The common earthing busbar of control and relay panels shall be connected to the main station earthing system via a copper earthing connection of not less than 85 mm2. Metal cases of instruments and metal bases of relays on the panels shall be connected to this bar by conductors of a sectional area of not less than 2,5 mm2. Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in them and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type; having M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads.
3.33
ELECTRIC MOTORS
All motors are to be in accordance with BS 5000, Part II or EN 60034 and, unless otherwise specified shall have cooling type ICO1 suitable for continuous operation and direct on-line starting. They are to be suitable in all respects for service under the conditions at site. Main conductor and slot insulation is to be non-hygroscopic and in accordance with Class B of IEC 60085. Motors are to be capable of operating continuously at rated output at any frequency between 48 and 51 cycles per second and at 85% of the nominal voltage without injurious overheating. Motors are to be designed to operate for a period of not less than five minutes at a voltage of 25% below the nominal value and at normal frequency without injurious overheating. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor is to demonstrate that the motors comply with this requirement. A miniature circuit breaker or fuses with thermal overcurrent protection shall protect each motor. The starting current at full voltage is not to exceed six times the rated full load current. Motor bearings are to be of the rolling type and the cage locating the balls or rollers is not to be in contact with the races. All bearings are to be fitted with oil or grease lubricators. Vertical shaft motors are to have approved thrust bearings. The ends of motor windings are to be brought out to terminal boxes and the arrangement is to be such as to permit easy changing over of any two-phase leads. All terminals are to be of the stud type of adequate size for the particular duty, marked in accordance with EN 60034 and to be enclosed in a weatherproof box, which is to be securely fixed to the motor frame.
Page 53 of 365
All terminal boxes are to be fitted with an approved sealing chamber, conduit entry or adaptor plate, as required, together with the necessary fittings to suit the type of cable supplied. Motors shall be provided with a 9 mm diameter earthing stud and lock nuts. The material surrounding the stud shall have a flat surface for an area of 30 mm diameter. For motors below 1 kW a 6 mm diameter earthing stud may be fitted. Holding down bolts shall not be used for earthing purposes. The following protection shall be provided: Motors up to 1 kW: Motors more than 1 kW: fuses, thermal or magnetic overload fuses, thermal overload, single-phasing protection
3.34
CONTROL SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS
Control switches and pushbuttons shall comply with EN 60947.
3.34.1
General
Control switches for electrically operated circuit-breakers are to be of pistol grip or, where specified, of approved discrepancy type and arranged to operate clockwise when closing the circuit-breakers and anti-clockwise when opening them. They are to be designed to prevent accidental operation. When switches of the discrepancy type are approved, operation is to be effected by two independent movements. Where necessary, control switches are to be capable of being locked in appropriate positions but control switches for circuit breakers are to be of the non-locking type with spring-return to the "neutral" position. Such switches are to be controlled by independent springs, the use of contact springs alone for restoring not being acceptable. All pushbuttons are to be of the non-retaining type made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling and fitted to avoid any possibility of sticking. The contacts of all switches and pushbuttons are to be strong and to have a positive wiping action when operated. All control switches are to be provided with labels complying with the requirements of this Specification in addition to clear indication as to the direction of each operation, for example, "open", "close", etc.
3.34.2
Electrical Control Locations
Equipment may be electrically controlled from a number of different control points as specified in the appropriate sections of this Specification. The control positions shall be designated as follows: 3.34.2.1 Local Control
Located adjacent to the item of plant to facilitate maintenance, inspection and emergency operation. 3.34.2.2 Remote Control
Located at a substation control room where specified items of Plant are monitored and controlled by direct cable connection.
3.34.2.3
Supervisory Control
Located at a System Control Centre where principal items of plant at a number of substations are remotely controlled via a telecontrol system.
3.35
INDICATING LAMPS AND FITTING
Indicating lamps fitted into the fascias of switch and instrument cubicles or panels are to be adequately ventilated. Lamps are to be easily removed and replaced from the front of the panel by manual means preferably not requiring the use of extractors. The bezel of metal or other approved material holding the lamp glass is to be of an approved finish and to be easily removable from the body of the fitting so as to permit access to the lamp and lamp glass. The lamps are to be clear and are to fit into a standard form of lamp holder. The rated lamp voltage should be ten percent in excess of the auxiliary supply voltage, whether AC or DC. Alternatively, low voltage lamps with series resistors will be acceptable. The lamp glasses shall comply with BS 1376 and EN 60073 and are to be in standard colours, red, green, blue, white and amber. The colour is to be in the glass and not an applied coating and the different coloured glasses are not to be interchangeable. Transparent synthetic materials may be used instead of glass, provided such materials have fast colours and are completely suitable for use in tropical climates.
3.36
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
Where appropriate, each item of Plant is to be equipped with all necessary auxiliary switches, contactors and mechanisms for indication, protection, metering, control, interlocking, supervisory and other services. All auxiliary switches are to be wired up to a terminal board on the fixed portion of the plant, whether they are in use or not in the first instance. All auxiliary switches and mechanisms are to be mounted in approved accessible positions clear of the operating mechanisms and are to be protected in an approved manner. The contacts of all auxiliary switches are to be strong and to have a positive wiping action when closing. Banks of auxiliary switches and associated terminal boards are to be arranged to facilitate extension when required. Also, all auxiliary switches are to be replaced when damaged or maintained, without having to dismantle the entire bank or take the wires of adjacent switches away.
3.37
ENCLOSURES OF APPARATUS, HEATERS, AND VENTILATORS
Enclosures for electrical apparatus are to afford the following degrees of protection classified in EN 60529 (a) Metal housing of switchboard - IP54 - also provision of a thermostatically controlled 230 Vac anti-condensation heater and screened drainage holes. (b) Auxiliary switches and associated terminals - IP54 - as (a) but with heater control switch common to other apparatus on the same circuit.
(c) Junction boxes - IP54 (d) Instruments - IP65 (e) Motors - IP54 Operating boxes, kiosks, cubicles and similar enclosed compartments forming part of auxiliary equipment shall be adequately ventilated to minimize condensation. All contactor or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. Anticondensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided inside each cubicle or where necessary each cubicle compartment. They shall be shrouded and located so as not to cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. A thermostat shall be arranged to switch off the heater supply when the ambient temperature exceeds 30-35oC. Means shall be provided at each unit for isolating the supply. A common switch with a neon gas type lamp labelled "Cubicle heaters on" shall be mounted at a convenient point such that it will not require movement in the event of extension units being added.
3.38
INSULATING OIL, COMPOUND AND GAS
The Contractor shall supply the first filling of all oil, compound and gas required for the operation of the plant. The oil shall be in accordance with EN 60296 uninhibited, nonlabelled, Class I and on testing at works shall comply with these Standards. The compound shall comply with BS 1858. The SF6 gas shall comply with BS 52O7 (EN 60376). These shall be delivered in strong hermetically sealed drums or suitable containers. Where other types of filling media are used in current transformer chambers and other parts of the equipment they shall be of an approved type. Where drums are stored on Site in the open, they shall be kept in a horizontal position. All oil or oil-derived compounds shall be PCB free. A certificate shall be provided at the tender stage guaranteeing that none of the equipment offered utilizes PCB's and each shipment shall be accompanied by a certificate confirming that all equipment in the shipment is free from PCB's. Furthermore, all shipments shall be accompanied by a Material Safety Data Sheet, which shall give the composition, the characteristics and instructions for the correct and safe use and disposal.
3.39 3.39.1
CABLE BOXES AND CABLE BOX ACCESSORIES Cable Boxes
Cable boxes shall be unfilled and shall be suitable for dry terminations for the number, type and size of cables specified in the Schedule of Requirements. Air clearances to earth and between phases shall not be less than the figures stated in Table 3 of BS7354. Provision shall be made for earthing the body of each cable box. Boxes shall be arranged for cables entering vertically from below. To provide full accessibility and to enable the cables to be prepared in their final position in the cable box, the gland plate and the front cover down to the gland plate shall be separate and removable.
The cable boxes shall be supplied complete with the required connecting bars including, any supporting insulators, on which the cable connectors will be attached. Where cable boxes are provided for three-core or four-core cables, the sweating sockets on the outer phases shall be inclined towards the centre to minimize bending of the cable cores.
3.39.2
Cable Terminations
The bushing contacts for the 22 kV XLPE cables shall comply with EN 50181 and they shall be of the bolted type. The cable sealing ends shall be dry and suitable for the above bushings and comply with the requirements of HD 629.1.S1.
3.39.3
Cable Glands
Where lead sheath cables are to be used wiping cable glands to BS 2562 shall be provided under the Contract. Glands for single core cables are to be insulated from the box. The insulation is to include a metallic "island" layer for testing purposes. In addition, removable connectors for bonding across the gland insulation are to be provided. The gland insulation is to be capable of withstanding a dry high voltage test of 2kVrms AC for one minute. Where XLPE cables are to be used compression type cable glands to EN 50262 shall be provided under the Contract.
Page 57 of 365
4. 4.1
INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES UNLOADING AND STORAGE AT SITE
The Contractor shall unload all imported equipment and material at the Contractor's store or at the Site or at the Purchaser's store, as the case may be, using suitable unloading equipment from trucks and trailers and delivery vehicles as the case may be. Items of permanent installation shall be properly and neatly stored in areas designated by the Engineer and shall be protected to prevent damage or deterioration of any type. Storage methods shall be such as to cause minimum inconvenience to others and shall be arranged to facilitate inspection and withdrawing from stores. All equipment and material storage shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.2
ERECTION AND CHECKING AT SITE
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the execution of the Works and performance of erection work carried out by his own personnel, by his Sub-Contractor's personnel or by locally engaged skilled or unskilled personnel. The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying himself as to the correctness of the electrical and mechanical connections to all equipment supplied under the Contract before such equipment is brought into commission. The Contractor shall supply and provide all erection and construction equipment and material, both for temporary and permanent work, tools, tackles, stores, etc., as well as consumables required for the execution and completion of the Works. All works at the site shall be carried out in such a manner as not to obstruct the operations of other Contractors on the site or interfere with the operation of the Purchaser's existing installations on the Site, and the Contractor shall co-operate with other contractors and the Engineer to attain this end.
4.3
CLEANING OF SITE
The Contractor shall keep the site on which he erects or stores plant, reasonably clean, removing all waste material resulting from the Works as it accumulates and as reasonably directed. The use of a waist skip on site is mandatory for the collection of all waist material on a daily basis. If the Contractor fails to remove rubbish within 48 hours of the determined date, the rubbish will be removed by others and the cost back-charged to the Contractor. On completion of the Works the Site shall be left clean and tidy to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any damage done to buildings, structures, plant or property belonging to the Purchaser shall be made good at the Contractor's expenses.
4.4
ABNORMAL WORKING TIME
Where the Contractor intends to work outside normal working hours he shall give adequate advance notice to the Engineer so that the Engineer or the Engineer's representative can be present during the work. It shall be understood that all prices quoted involving work within operational substations are based on work being carried out during normal EAC working hours. Where for reasons of system operation requirements it is necessary to carry out work in operational
Page 58 of 365
substations outside normal working hours and this is requested by the Purchaser/Engineer, the Contractor will be entitled to premium time payment which will be calculated from the difference in the rates entered in the appropriate Schedule for installation and supervisory staff. Where the Contractor requires work to be carried out within EAC operational substations outside normal hours and such work requires the attendance of the Purchaser's personnel, then the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the extra cost incurred by the Purchaser.
4.5
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUB-CONTRACTOR'S STAFF
The carrying out of all the work included in the Contract shall be supervised by a sufficient number of qualified representatives of the Contractor and full facilities and assistance shall be afforded for the Engineer to check the Works. The Contractor shall provide and employ in connection with the execution and maintenance of the work: Only such engineers as are qualified and experienced in their respective fields to give proper supervision to the work they are required to supervise. Only such assistant engineers as are skilled and experienced in their respective fields and such sub-agents, foremen and leading hands as are competent to give proper supervision to the Work they are required to supervise. Only such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as necessary for the proper and timely execution of the Works.
The Purchaser/Engineer shall be at liberty to object and to require the Contractor to remove forthwith any person employed by the Contractor for the execution of the work under this Contract, who in the opinion of the Purchaser/Engineer is insufficiently qualified for his intended duty, misconducts himself, or is incompetent, or negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or whose employment is otherwise considered by the Purchaser/ Engineer to be undesirable, and such person shall not be again employed on this Contract without the written permission of the Purchaser/Engineer. Any person so removed shall be replaced without delay by a competent substitute, subject to the provisions of further stipulations in the following sub-clauses. The Tenderer shall nominate in his Tender a Project Manager from among his senior staff, who will be empowered with the authority to undertake the entire project on behalf of the Contractor. The Project Manager shall be in charge of coordination of the works and for liaison with the Purchaser and the Engineer. The Tenderer shall also nominate the Site Manager who shall be present at Site during working hours and any orders or instructions, which the Engineer or his representative may give to him, shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor. The Tenderer in his Tender shall nominate persons for each of the job allocations associated with the execution of the Contract. The Tenderer shall include full curriculum vitae of the nominated persons at the time of the Tender to establish that the personnel comply with the minimum qualifications required as indicated in the following clause. The Tenderer shall also indicate the period for which these persons are expected to be available in their respective posts. The posts shall not be for less than the period up to the completion of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit a chart showing the proposed manpower strength for each month of the whole of the construction period.
4.6
SAFETY FOR WORKMEN AND PUBLIC
The Tenderer shall submit with his offer a manual detailing the procedures, rules and regulations pertaining to "Safety and Engineering Practices" according to which he proposes to undertake the Works. Following Award of Contract this manual shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and once approved shall be strictly complied with by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors. The Contractor and his Sub-Contractors shall also comply with all applicable Governmental safety and sanitary laws, regulations and ordinances, as well as the established safety rules and practices of the Purchaser. The Contractor shall provide means for the protection of personnel and properly maintain warning signs and lights, barricades, railings and other safeguards as required by the conditions and the progress of the Work. During erection and commissioning the Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding, ladders, platforms with toe boards and hand-rails essential for proper access of workmen and inspectors, cover or rail-off dangerous openings or holes in floors, and afford adequate protection against material falling from a higher level on the personnel below. The Contractor must take particular precaution to warn the Engineer within a reasonable time in advance of forthcoming activities in the works, which may affect the normal operation of the existing plant, or the personnel engaged in it. The maximum personal safety must be afforded to personnel either directly engaged on this Contract or who in the normal course of their occupations find it necessary to utilize temporary works erected by the Contractor or to frequent the working area. In this respect the Contractor shall nominate a person or persons from his staff, whom will identify themselves by their passport, as competent persons for receiving the "Permits to Work". In each and every case involving a connection between the Plant supplied under this Contract and any other existing plant which may or may not be in service the Contractor must make suitable arrangements as regards the time and manner in which the connection is made subject only to the approval of the Engineer and the Purchaser's Representative who is in charge of the existing plant. Where cases arise involving the operation of the plant, or work on plant in operation, or whenever required by the Purchaser's representative, the Contractor must obtain a written "Permit to Work" signed by a person duly authorized by the Purchaser and countersigned by the Engineer. All accidents shall be promptly reported to the Engineer's representatives at Site with copies to the Purchaser, the Engineer and the Government. The Contractor shall make full arrangements and be responsible for the diversion of traffic, including arranging permission from road authorities, fixing and maintenance of signs, caution boards and provision of night signals and temporary traffic lights. All this work shall be undertaken by the Contractor to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer. All costs associated with this work shall be deemed to be included in the agreed Contract Price.
Page 60 of 365
4.7
SAFETY RULES, CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES, AND PERMITS TO WORK
For the installation, testing, taking over, commissioning and final acceptance of the Works, the Contractor is required to adopt a safe and orderly procedure approved by the Engineer and to comply with such safety regulations and safety procedures as may be issued from time to time by the Purchaser or by the Engineer on his behalf. Where a shut down of the existing system is required to enable work to proceed, reasonable notice shall be given to the Engineer and a program agreed. Before work commences a Permit to Work shall be issued by the Employer to a representative of the Contractor, such person to be agreed with the Engineer as being a responsible person. Before a Permit to Work will be issued, the Contractor shall submit full details of all work to be carried out with points of isolation and where modifications to existing panel wiring are involved. Marked up copies highlighting the changes are to be submitted showing the extent to which modifications on a specific circuit being the subject of the Permit may affect schemes common to the substation and switchboard. The recipient of a Permit to Work shall satisfy himself that the Employer has made the equipment to be worked on dead, locked off any disconnectors, switches, or circuit breakers from which such equipment may be energized, posted any necessary warning notices and earthed the equipment in an approved manner. The Contractor shall also be responsible for staff under his control observing the limitations of access stated on the Permit and shall ensure that such staff is fully informed of the areas covered by the Permit. He shall also be responsible for informing all staff (including Employer's and Engineer's staff) employed on work covered by a Permit, when the Permit has been cancelled. Any equipment or section of line not included in the Permit shall be considered to be live and be roped off and Danger Notices posted in prominent positions. Access to the work zone shall be along and only along an agreed safe path. When each item or section of Plant has been installed and prior to energizing or alternatively when the equipment is to be installed in an area where its proximity to existing "live" equipment constitutes a hazard, a "Clearance Certificate" shall be issued by the Engineer's Representative and signed by the Contractor. This Certificate shall inform the Contractor that the equipment shall henceforth be subject to the Purchaser's regulations and that no more work thereon shall be undertaken unless a valid Permit to Work card has been issued by the Employer.
4.8
TAKING OVER CERTIFICATES
When the Works, or any Section of the Works, has been completed and passed the Tests on Completion, the Contractor shall agree with the Engineer's Representative a proposed date for taking over as referred to in the Contract Conditions. This will be confirmed by the Engineer by the issue of a Taking Over Certificate to the Contractor.
4.9
ACCESS TO SITE
Arrangement for access to EAC Operational substations shall be made in the first case through the Engineer's Representative. All Contractors personnel entering operational substations will require official passes and arrangement for the issue of these should be made with the Electricity Authority of Cyprus.
Page 61 of 365
The Contractor will be responsible for security of the new substation Site until it comes under EAC control period to commissioning. Vehicles will not normally be permitted into operational substations and where necessary to perform the works, prior arrangements shall be made.
4.10
DAY WORK
Work on Site authorized by the Engineer to be carried out on a time and material basis shall be the subject of a Site Instruction (SI) issued by the Engineer's Representative and suitably endorsed to that effect. The Purchaser will not be bound to pay for any work at time and material rates carried out unless an SI signed by the Engineer's Representative has been issued. Time and Material Sheets shall be submitted in duplicate at weekly intervals to the Engineer and shall show the number of the SI authorizing the work, the Site at which the work is carried out, the date of the work, all men and material and plant employed and their respective time periods and rates. The Contractor shall submit Time and Material Sheets to the Engineer for signature at the end of each working week while the Work is in progress. Day work invoices shall be submitted in duplicate to the Engineer at monthly intervals for certification, supported by Suppliers' invoices for all materials.
4.11
SITE REGISTER OF LIFTING TACKLE
During Plant erection the Government Inspector or other authorized person may wish to examine the register containing the test certificates of all lifting tackle used in the course of the Work, such as cranes, hoists, shackles, eye-bolts, trunnions, slings and any special handling equipment. The Contractor shall prepare the register at the start of erection and after commissioning shall hand it over to the Engineer's Representative on Site.
4.12 4.12.1
SITE SERVICES Living Accommodation
The Purchaser will not provide any housing accommodation for the Contractor's expatriate or locally recruited staff and the Contract Price is to include the cost of such accommodation as may be necessary. No living accommodation will be allowed on the Site.
4.12.2
Office Accommodation
The Contractor is to provide such temporary buildings as may be necessary for office accommodation and sanitary arrangements for his site staff during the erection of the Works and the cost of these shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. The sanitary accommodation shall be kept in a clean and orderly condition to the approval of the Engineer and the Public Health Authorities. The sanitary accommodation shall be removed on completion of the Work and all trenches shall be chemically treated and completely back filled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.12.3
Storage and Workshop Facilities
The Contractor should make his own arrangements for unloading and storing of materials and equipment and for providing workshop facilities and the cost of these will be deemed
to be included in the Contract price. At the absolute discretion of the Purchaser the Contractor may be permitted to use the substation sites for temporary storage of materials or equipment if this will not interfere with the freedom of access to the sites or with other works being or planned to be carried out at these sites or with the safe operation of the substations and the safety of the personnel.
4.12.4
Electricity Supply
The Purchaser will make available to the Site a supply of electrical energy at 400 volts, 3phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz for power and lighting (maximum power: 50 kVA). The supply will be made available at the substation's LVAC Distribution Board (either existing or to be provided and installed by the Contractor). The Contractor will be responsible for providing and maintaining the whole of the installation beyond the panel, as required for his operations on the site. All portable lights must be low voltage and the Contractor is to provide for his own use all necessary transformers, with centre points earthed. The design, location, utilization and maintenance of the installation must receive the approval of the Engineer or his authorized representative, who may require the disconnection or alteration of any parts, which in his opinion may be dangerous. All local Electricity Regulations and Ordinances shall be strictly observed in the distribution and use of the supply. The supply of electricity will be free of charge for construction purposes provided that the Contractor uses it economically. The supply of electricity will be available at all hours, but the Purchaser will not be held responsible for any loss, damage, inconvenience caused directly or indirectly by a total or partial interruption of the supply.
4.12.5
Water Supply
The Contractor will have to make his own arrangements for provision of any water supply required at the sites, either potable or non-potable.
4.12.6
Compressed Air
The Contractor is to make his own arrangements for a supply of compressed air necessary for the construction of the Plant.
4.12.7
Lifting Facilities
Lifting facilities are not available on site. The contractor is in charge of these facilities.
4.12.8
Contractors Employees
The Contractor is to fulfil all his obligations in respect of accommodation, feeding and medical facilities for all personnel in his employ, as necessary to ensure satisfactory execution of the Contract. He is also to comply with the requirements of all relevant local Statutory Employment Regulations. The Contractor is to be responsible for the behaviour on site of all personnel employed by him.
Page 63 of 365
4.12.9
First Aid Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate first aid facilities on the Site to the approval of the Engineer and the Public Health Authorities. At least one of his staff shall be fully qualified in the knowledge and administration of first aid at each site.
4.12.10
Watching, Lighting, and Fencing
The Contractor shall in connection with the Work provide and maintain at his own cost all lights, guards, fencing and watching when and where necessary or requested by the Purchaser/Engineer or by any duly constituted authority for the protection of the Work or for the safety and convenience of the public or others.
4.12.11
Fire Fighting Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and maintain to the approval of the Engineer and the local Fire Authority adequate portable fire fighting equipment on the Site during the performance of his service until the issue of the Initial Taking Over Certificate(s).
4.12.12
Signboard
The Contractor shall, after having obtained the Purchaser's/ Engineer's approval, erect and maintain at the Site two painted signboards of minimum size 2x1m, one lettered in English and the other in Greek giving the Contractor's name and the names of the Purchaser, of the Engineer, if other than the Purchaser and of the Project, the date of commencement and the date of completion.
4.12.13
Erection Progress Report
(a) The Contractor's Site Manager shall submit weekly statements of the number and qualifications of the site personnel employed every day. (b) He shall furthermore, submit to the Engineer at monthly intervals detailed progress reports, including charts. These reports shall clearly demonstrate the Work performed and man-hours effected during the past month, and the actual stage of the Work compared with the Work scheduled to be performed during the past month, and compared with the contractual progress of Work schedule, special events having occurred during the period of the said report and the anticipated Work to be performed during the coming month. These reports shall be submitted not later than the 5th day of the month for the period covering the previous month. (c) The Contractor's Site Manager shall immediately inform the Engineer's representative of special events, which may influence the smooth progress of Work, and of accidents that occurred on Site. (d) Periodical meetings will be held between the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor's Site Manager. The frequency shall be agreed upon according to actual requirements.
4.12.14
Site Records
The Contractor shall maintain a field copy at Site wherein all records of tests and plans shall be entered. Also sketches and records of the field works shall be shown in this field copybook. The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field deviations from the approved drawings if any and as approved by the Engineer.
4.13
TRAINING OF THE PURCHASER'S PERSONNEL
(a) During the construction and erection of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for the instruction and training of operation and maintenance personnel appointed by the Purchase for this Work as may be necessary. This training shall be carried out at both Contractor's/ Sub-Contractor's premises or manufacturer's works and site. (b) The training carried out at the Contractor's/ Sub-Contractor's premises or at manufacturer's works shall be undertaken by means of simultaneous, lectures, films, slides, models, manuals, drawings etc. In order that this training may be given the Contractor shall be responsible to make all arrangements and provide all assistance as necessary. (c) The training carried out at site shall be similar to that detailed in paragraph (b) above except that all instruction material shall become the property of the purchaser and the installed equipment shall be used in place of simulators. (d) The Tenderer shall submit with his Tender details of the proposed training. (e) The Contractor shall submit a fully detailed training program to the Engineer for approval at least eight weeks prior to the proposed date of the training, but no later than four weeks prior to the start of the trail operation of the plant.
4.14
EXAMINATION OF WORK BEFORE COVERING UP
(a) No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the Engineer and the Contractor shall afford full opportunity for the Engineer to examine and measure any work which is about to be covered up or put out of view and to examine foundations before permanent work is placed thereon. The Contractor shall give due notice to the Engineer whenever any such work or foundations is or are ready or about to be ready for examination. The Engineer shall, without unreasonable delay, unless he considers it necessary and advises the Contractor accordingly, attend for the purposes of examining and measuring such work or of examining such foundations. (b) The Contractor shall for the purposes of examination uncover any part or parts of the work or make openings in or through the same as the Engineer may, from time to time, direct. In such an event and after examination the Contractor shall reinstate and make good such part or parts referred to above, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.15 4.15.1
SYSTEM OF WORKS AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AT SITE System of Works
The Contractor shall progress the works in a systematic pattern and shall not interfere with any other Works at the site not relating to the Contract's execution; moreover, he shall keep and hand over the site clean and free from all unwanted materials, garbage and refuse affecting public health and shall hand over the work after being completed in good working condition. If the Contractor fails to perform these works, the Purchaser shall have the right to undertake the same at the Contractor's expense without any objection, notice or resort to the courts.
Page 65 of 365
4.15.2
Cooperation with Other Contractors
If the construction of the Works provides for work to be done at the site with another Contractor, or the Purchaser's employees or others, the Contractor shall make every effort to cooperate with such persons without interfering with their affairs. Furthermore, he shall provide them with the required facilities, implement the instructions issued by the Engineer in this connection and advise the Engineer of any differences that may arise between them. The decisions issued by the Engineer in this respect shall be final and binding on the Contractor and he shall not claim any compensation or extension of the Contract period by virtue of the foregoing.
Page 66 of 365
5. 5.1
132kV SF6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR TYPE OF SWITCHGEAR AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The switchgear shall be of the SF6 gas insulated metal-enclosed type suitable for accommodation within a building or if so specified suitable for outdoor installations and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing at the Site. The design and performance of the switchgear shall comply with this Specification and the latest revision of the relevant International and British Standards. Deviations from these specifications and standards shall be stated in the appropriate Schedule. The drawings issued with this Specification indicate proposed equipment layouts for 132 kV relay and control equipment. It is recognized that final layouts will depend on the type of switchgear offered, and on the manufacturer's recommendations, but overall sizes of substations should be kept as per the specification drawings. Attention should be paid to the amount of spare space shown in the specification drawings which shall not be reduced. Particular emphasis is placed on the provision of adequate clearance between chambers to facilitate maintenance. It is not desirable to compress the layout of the equipment unduly in order to minimize the space required. The design of the switchboard shall be such as to permit easy operation and easy replacement of any item and to enable extensions to be added at either end with the minimum of disturbance to the installed equipment and without complete shutdown of the substation. Where duplicate busbar equipment is supplied, the design shall allow high voltage testing of busbars after extension with the second busbar in service. The equipment offered shall be adequately protected from all types of system voltage surges and any equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and above that specified shall be included. The design shall include all facilities necessary to enable the performance of the specified site checks and tests. Circuit-breakers, isolators, earth switches, VTs, CTs, cable termination chambers and any other chambers and components must be capable of withstanding a gas overpressure of 130% of normal operating pressure continuously. Where duplicate busbar switchgear is specified, busbar selector isolators shall be provided as specified in the schedules to facilitate the changeover of individual circuits from one busbar to the other with the circuit on load and a bus coupler closed. In no case the repair of a gas leakage or any other fault shall require the taking out of service of more than half the switchboard. Where single busbar equipment is specified suitable for future conversion to double busbar the Tenderer shall describe clearly all steps required in connection with the changeover with at least half of the substation remaining in service at all times. The Tenderer shall also demonstrate the repair steps to be taken for an arc fault leading to the loss of gas at the most critical location and the extent of interruption to supplies.
Page 67 of 365
5.2
CURRENT RATINGS
The temperature rise of the busbars, connections, isolators, fuses, contacts, cable boxes, trunking connections, etc, which form part of the contract works, when operating continuously at the specified rating or under short circuit conditions and at the specified site rating under the specified maximum design ambient conditions, shall not exceed the values specified in EN 62271 1, EN 62271 - 203 or equivalent National Standard. Any de-rating to meet the site ambient conditions shall be taken into account and shall be declared in the schedules. Every part of the switchgear shall also withstand, without mechanical or thermal damage, the instantaneous peak currents and rated short-time currents pertaining to the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker. Except as otherwise specified rated duration of short-circuit shall be taken as one second. The primary rating of the current transformers shall not differ from that of the associated circuit breakers.
5.3
CONNECTIONS TO OUTGOING CIRCUITS
SF6 immersed cable sealing end chambers or SF6 insulated bus ducts and/or open type terminal bushings shall be provided as specified for the outgoing circuits.
5.4 5.4.1
DESIGN PRINCIPLES 132 kV GIS SWITCHGEAR General
The design of the SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear with either copper or aluminium busbars shall comply with all the relevant EN 62271 standards. Deviations from any of these shall be stated in the tender. The switchgear shall be supplied complete with auxiliary equipment necessary for safe operation, routine and periodic maintenance and repairs. The switchgear shall be designed to permit the removal and extension of any part without unnecessary outages or disturbance to adjacent items of plant and it shall also be possible to maintain a supply from one section of busbar whilst extending the other. The Tenderer is required to demonstrate clearly in his submission the capability of the switchgear design in these respects. Control facilities shall be simple and clearly designated with the respective function and instructions on operation and maintenance shall be unambiguous. All main and operating parts of the switchgear shall be suitably labelled. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to primary switches, aux. switches, gauges and valves. Circuit identifying labels shall be fitted at the front and rear of each individual circuit assembly and on the local control cubicle. The switchgear to be supplied shall have rated impulses and power frequency withstand voltages equal to or greater than the specified levels at the minimum operating SF6 gas density or pressure. The actual guaranteed withstand voltages applicable to the maximum filling pressure at 20oC minimum and nominal SF6 gas pressures shall be given in Schedules.
Page 68 of 365
The minimum clearances between phases and from phase to earth at the minimum working density shall be consistent with the specified impulse withstand level. In the event of leakage from any compartment, the power frequency voltage that the equipment shall withstand with SF6 at atmospheric pressure shall be according to EN 62271. In case the Tenderer offers a GIS range of equipment from a recent technology, deriving from an existing range of equipment and providing some advantages in terms of capacity, reliability and/or monitoring, the experience of the Tenderer in designing, manufacturing and erecting large scale GIS projects and in having supplied large quantities of GIS bays of a proven design at home and abroad, will be considered in assessing the Tenderers ability to comply with the required successful commercial operation period.
5.4.2
Enclosures
The material of enclosures shall be aluminium and shall be designed to minimize losses and heating due to circulating currents. The metal enclosure shall be capable of withstanding the normal and transient pressures to which it is subjected in service. It shall also withstand the mechanical and thermal effects of internal arc faults and to definitely prevent burning through within a rated shortcircuit and earth-fault duration of 0,3 seconds for single encapsulation construction and 0,2 seconds for three-phase encapsulation. The effects of any arc shall confine only to the compartment where the arc has ignited. The Tender shall include information on the effect of an internal fault in any section of the plant supported by the results of type tests carried out. The electrical connection between adjacent enclosures shall be continuous without use of external connecting straps.
5.4.3
Division into Compartments
The switchgear units and busbar systems shall be divided into several gas-filled compartments, sealed from each other by gas-tight partitions so that any leakage may be quickly localized. The various gas zones shall be further sub-divided when necessary to restrict any internal arcing damage, particularly within sections of busbars and to enable gas-handling procedures to be completed with the minimum of delay. The partitions should confine any internal faults to a respective section of the switchgear. Busbars have to be segregated in independent gas-zones corresponding to each bay. The number of gas compartments shall be such as to limit the amount of switchgear that has to be isolated and taken out of service as a result of gas leakage, planned maintenance or internal faults. Proposals for the partitioning of gas zones shall be clearly indicated on the drawings submitted with the tender. Gas volumes and duration of gas handling procedures shall also be indicated in the technical schedules. Total time for gas evacuation and filling of the largest chamber shall not exceed the relevant requirements of this Specification. On duplicate busbar switchgear, busbar chambers shall be so arranged as to allow maintenance on one busbar, i.e., gas removal, and retain the other busbar and circuits in service.
Page 69 of 365
The equipment and connections within each compartment shall be so arranged as to allow ready removal and replacement of any section when the necessary parts are in service. This feature should also permit the erection and testing of extension units alongside equipment already in service with the minimum of outage time being required for final connections. All external gas pipe work shall be connected via vacuum couplings of proven design, which will enable joints to be broken and remade without loss of gas. The Tenderer is required to demonstrate clearly in his submission the capability of the switchgear design in these respects. Each pressure compartment shall be provided with a suitable device to allow for automatic pressure relief. The pressure relief must operate before any part of the enclosure can explode or burn through. It must be possible to locate an internal fault quickly and exactly. All relief devices shall be located such that operation of the devices shall not endanger personnel working on the equipment or in the vicinity of the equipment, but shall be accessible for resetting or overhaul after operation. Where necessary the devices shall be fitted with cowls to deflect any gasses or fragmented parts away from locations where personnel may be expected to be present. Gas compartments shall be fitted with permanent connection points for filling, emptying and gas treatment without moving the switchgear. Enclosures shall be clearly marked to identify gas compartment zones, disconnectors, circuit breakers, earthing switches, and other primary devices contained therein. The method proposed shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All gas pipe work shall be colour coded and where more than one pipe follows a common route, each pipe shall be ring coded and at regular intervals to identify the gas zone with which it is associated.
5.4.4
Enclosures and Conductor Expansion
Enclosures shall have reliable provision to absorb thermal expansion created by temperature cycling. Suitable arrangements shall be provided for the thermal expansion and contraction of the busbars and busbar chambers without application of stress to the supporting structure or detriment to the current carrying capacity or gas volume. The design of sliding type current carrying connectors and joints shall be such that they meet the aforementioned conditions over the full permitted range of movement. Where such joints may be made or adjusted on site, full details of alignment procedure, together with any necessary alignment tools or gauges shall be described in the maintenance manual and included in the supply of special tools. Evidence shall be provided to verify that enclosures have been designed and tested in accordance with established pressure vessel codes. Voltages induced in the enclosures shall not be allowed to exceed reasonable safe limits. All chambers throughout the equipment shall be earthed at an approved number of points. All necessary earthing bars and associated fixings shall be provided. Each enclosure shall be provided with lifting points to facilitate maintenance or repair works.
Page 70 of 365
In order to compensate for any small variations in floor level each compartment shall be fitted with means of adjustment (jacking screws or similar). Such adjustments shall be fully described in the maintenance manuals provided by the manufacturer.
5.4.5
Gas Density, Monitoring, and Alarms
The nominal operating density of the SF6 insulating gas shall be as low as compatible with the requirement for electrical insulation. It must be fully ensured that there is no possibility of the liquefying of the gas at minimum ambient temperature. The auxiliary heating of gas is not allowed. The nominal density shall be at least 15% higher than the density at which the tests of the insulation level of the switchgear are made. Each separate compartment or gas zone must be provided with its own device for monitoring continuously the gas density or alternatively pressure with a temperature compensated gas pressure monitor. These devices shall be arranged to give individual compartment indication in the local control units and initiation of remote alarm and automatic tripping. These shall be set in two stages. The first stage shall operate an alarm to warn that the gas pressure/density is falling to a critical level. The second stage shall initiate automatic isolation of the gas section concerned by tripping associated circuit breakers and disconnectors as appropriate. Tripping shall be wired into the main protection circuits and shall only be initiated when both alarm and trip conditions exist. The philosophy of the automatic shut down sequence shall be submitted with the Tender and agreed with the Engineer during initial contract discussions. A lockout feature with remote indication shall be provided for circuit breakers whenever SF6 gas pressure is less than that permitted by the design satisfactory operation. Each gas compartment shall be fitted with a manometer with trip or block and alarm facilities. It shall be possible to remove each gas density relay and manometer while the compartment to which it is fitted remains in service. Spurious alarms shall not occur during normal operation of the switchgear.
5.4.6
Gas Filters
Means shall also be provided to facilitate the regular maintenance checking of moisture content. Each gas compartment shall be fitted with static filters to absorb any moisture, which may be present. In addition filters for removal of SF6 decomposition products shall be provided in those compartments in which arcing or corona discharge can take place. The filters shall be effective for the duration of time between major overhauls. It shall be possible to replace the active materials without extensive dismantling.
5.4.7
SF6 Immersed Insulation
Busbars and switchgear items shall be supported in the enclosures by insulators of materials compatible with SF6 gas and the products of gas decomposition. Gas barrier insulators and bushings, including gas-oil and gas-air bushings shall comply with the specified conditions for sealing of enclosures. The Engineer shall be advised of design pressures used and may require test evidence to substantiate performance under extremes of differential pressure and temperature.
Page 71 of 365
The surfaces of insulation in contact with SF6 shall not be glazed or otherwise treated with silica compounds or other materials, which may deteriorate in the presence of decomposed gas or arcing products. Alternative glazing or surface treatment, which is compatible with SF6 and its by-products, may be acceptable subject to proven durability. The insulators should be free at all times of partial discharges at all voltage levels within the working range and shall be tested for voids and partial discharges during manufacture. SF6 immersed insulation shall otherwise comply with the relevant clauses for insulators and bushings.
5.4.8
Sealing of Enclosures
To prevent ingress of moisture or leakage of gas during the service life of the equipment, the sealing materials used at all joints and interfaces shall satisfy the following requirements: (a) Not affected by SF6 gas or by SF6 decomposition products (b) Non-hygroscopic, containing no silicon (c) Non-aging and non-shrinking (d) Retain resilience for long periods under stress (e) Stable under all temperature conditions Seals including those at compartment partitions shall continue to function correctly throughout the temperature and pressure ranges in service and the pressure differentials, including vacuum and test pressures, during erection, maintenance and subsequent revisions. Expansion bellows and diaphragms, and pressure relief devices shall be designed to be free of leakage under the same conditions as stated for seals. Where the use of cast aluminium is envisaged the Manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer evidence of tests carried out for porosity and extended pressure testing to show the quality of the castings used.
5.4.9
Gas Losses
The Manufacturer should be prepared to guarantee the equipment for a gas loss of not more than 1,0% per annum in any single gas compartment.
5.4.10
SF6 Bus Ducts
SF6 insulated bus ducts shall be provided on the specified circuits and shall be of the phase isolated type or 3-phase encapsulated as specified. The enclosures shall be constructed from materials that will prevent overheating at the specified rated currents. The bus ducts shall be terminated with either outdoor type porcelain-clad bushings or with facilities for direct termination on transformers, as stated in the Schedules. Where direct termination on transformers or shunt reactors is called for, the bus ducts shall be constructed with the limitation on dimensional tolerances, between phases and from the ground, required by the manufacturer of the connected equipment.
Expansion joints, flexible connections, and adjustable mountings shall also be provided to compensate for reasonable tolerances in the manufacture of associated equipment to which the SF6 switchgear may be connected and to ensure that unreasonably excessive accuracy is not required when installing such equipment. The design of bus ducts must make full allowance for thermal expansion by means of transverse erectable contact assembly and enclosure, and for associated transformer vibration by means of elastic bellows provided at the transformer end. The bus ducts and their supports shall be designed and tested for the specified rated normal and short time current and for the maximum system voltage and specified test voltages. The ducts and their supports shall include any non-magnetic material or insulation necessary to prevent overheating or the induction of overvoltage in secondary circuits.
5.4.11
Gas Handling
The tender shall include a complete specification for the gas to be used for the initial filling of the plant. The gas shall fulfil the requirements of IEC 60376 and 60480. Details of the method of taking gas samples from each compartment while in service shall be given in the tender. Details shall also be given as to the degree of gas deterioration that can be tolerated before treatment or replacement of the gas is necessary. Instructions of the gas treatment necessary to return it to a satisfactory operating condition shall be given. Under normal operating conditions, the period between gas treatments shall be at least 15 years.
5.4.12
HV Cable Testing Facilities
Testing flanges shall be provided where relevant on each circuit for HV withstand testing of main cables and switchgear. Each testing flange shall be positioned in an independent gas zone compartment, which shall be independent of adjacent disconnector and earthing switch gas sections. Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that any section of busbars insulated by SF6 gas is not subjected to any cable testing voltage unless able to withstand such voltages. Where line disconnectors are provided, only the disconnectors shall be opened during cable tests. Removable bolted links or similar can be provided as alternative. In such a case the design of the link and connections shall ensure that when removed the resulting gap can withstand the impulse and power frequency test voltages applicable to the switchgear, and the HV DC test voltage applicable to the cable, for a period of 15 minutes, when the chamber is filled to the minimum rated working SF6 gas density or pressure. Details on the facilities provided and the method used shall be given in the appropriate Schedule.
5.4.13
Circuit Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
Feeder circuits shall each be equipped with a circuit disconnector and not less than three earthing switches. These earthing switches shall comprise of two maintenance earthing switches, connected on each end of the feeder circuit breaker, and a high speed makeproof earthing switch, between the circuit disconnector and the connection to an overhead line or cable.
Page 73 of 365
Transformer circuit modules shall be equipped with not less than two maintenanceearthing switches, connected on each end of the transformer circuit breaker. Bus coupler and bus section modules shall be equipped with a busbar disconnector on each side of the circuit breaker and not less than one maintenance earthing switch between each busbar disconnector and its associated circuit breaker, connected to the circuit breaker end. Bus section modules shall also contain a high-speed make-proof earthing switch on the busbar side of each busbar disconnector.
5.4.14
Disconnector and Earthing Switch Operating Mechanisms
Disconnector and earthing switch operating mechanisms shall comply with EN 62271 102 and shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure free action and shall be unaffected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanisms shall be as simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts.
5.4.15
Cable Feeder and Transformer Connections
Connections shall be suitable for the specified continuous and short circuit current ratings. Where necessary, expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate differential movements between the switchgear phase terminals and cable conductors. The manufacturer of the switchgear is required to coordinate design of SF6 filled enclosures with that of cable sealing ends supplied by other manufacturers such that the integrity of gas and/or oil pressure compartment is maintained. Facilities shall be provided for high voltage DC testing and conducting cable fault location measurements of the cable installation.
5.4.16
Position Indicators
Position indicators shall be provided for all disconnectors and earthing switches to show whether the main contacts of these switches are in the fully open or closed positions. Indicators shall be of a reliable mechanical design and be positively driven in both directions by the final drive stage of the contact operating mechanism. Each indicator shall be clearly visible to operating staff at operating control points and access routes provided under this contract.
5.5 5.5.1
SEALING ENDS General
Where applicable the metal enclosed cable sealing end chamber necessary for enclosing the cable sealing end insulator suitable for termination of transformers and HV power cables shall be supplied as part of this Contract. Design shall be in accordance with EN 62271 - 305. The dimensions of the enclosure which are necessary to accommodate the transformer bushing and cable sealing end shall be determined by the switchgear supplier who will be responsible for the dielectric performance of the combined arrangements.
Page 74 of 365
The dimensions and terminal arrangements, together with details of the filling medium of the sealing end shall be submitted for the Engineers approval before manufacture can commence. When the contract requirements do not include the supply of the outgoing feeder cables then the stress cones for connection to the outgoing feeder cables will be supplied by the cable manufacturer under a separate Contract. The surrounding housing will be supplied by the SF6 switchgear manufacturer. The Tenderer shall submit drawings showing clearly the limits of his supply. Particulars of the HV outgoing cables will be given on elaboration of Contract. The cable sealing end arrangement in transformer cells shall be clear of the transformer to allow removal of the transformer without disturbing the main cables. For circuits equipped with double cable isolation, provision shall be made to be able to remove the gas from either cable chamber whilst maintaining the other cable in service. Gas monitoring of the chamber in service shall be maintained at all times and each chamber shall be separately monitored. Fully cabled circuits shall provide access for test facilities at one end of the circuit. In chambers equipped for 132 kV cable sealing ends a disconnecting link must be provided to allow easy isolation between the cable sealing end and the main connections. It must be possible to remove this link without removal/refitting of the main connections. The design of the link when removed shall be sufficient to withstand HV DC testing of cable and the full insulation requirements specified for the switchgear. Design of cable termination equipment must ensure that the following conditions are maintained throughout the life of the equipment: (a) The insulating material, either gas or oil, from inside the cable does not escape and penetrate the switchgear enclosure. (b) The SF6 gas does not enter the cable from the enclosure. (c) The cable sealing end does not introduce moisture into the gas in the sealing end enclosure. (d) The sealing end is capable of withstanding the cable test voltages and differential pressures without damage including overpressure of +30% of normal operating pressure. (e) Disconnecting links that can be renewed/replaced in a time that does not exceed 10 hours for the complete operation, i.e., including degassing, vacuum, and regassing. Both the earthed and high voltage ends of the cable sealing end shall adequately seal off the SF6 gas insulation by bolted flanges provided with multiple rings and gaskets which shall be coordinated with the cable sealing end design/manufacturer. Sealing ends shall be designed with joint faces, which will ensure leak-free operation and exclude the entry of air, dust or moisture. Arrangements employing fluid or semi-fluid filling media shall have flanged joints, the faces of which shall be machined. The fixing bolt centres for the flanged joints shall not exceed 100 mm. Filling orifices and drain plugs shall be so positioned as to enable efficient handling of the media and to discourage the formation of voids when filling. Expansion space not less than 8% of the total volume of the filling medium at 15oC shall be provided. The internal surfaces of cable boxes shall be
Page 75 of 365
cleaned of all scale and rust and after cleaning and priming, shall be finished with a hard setting paint compatible with the filling medium. End covers shall be provided to enable completion of erection and testing of the switchgear in the absence of cable terminations. The design and sealing end pressure shall be coordinated by the switchgear supplier so as to minimize the risk of SF6 gas penetration into the transformers or HV power cables and to accommodate any movement due to expansion. Where required to reduce local heating where single core cables are adopted, non-magnetic gland plates shall be provided or alternatively, not-magnetic inserts.
5.5.2
Insulation and Earthing
Sealing ends and cable boxes shall be provided with all fittings including flexible connections where necessary. Approved means for grading the voltage stress shall be provided at the terminal insulation of cables operating at voltages in excess of 12 kV between phases. Screwed, tapered or stepped brass wiping glands shall be provided and, where required by the Engineer, glands shall be insulated from the box or chamber in an approved manner. An earthing strip shall be provided and combined armour and earthing clamps shall be fitted to all armoured cable terminations. Gland insulation shall be capable of withstanding a dry high voltage test of 10 kV DC for one minute during cable sheath test. Provision shall be made for earthing the body of each sealing end or cable box.
5.5.3
Material
Moulded insulators used in the manufacture of cable sealing ends and terminal boxes shall be sound and free from defects. The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and climatic conditions, ozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid temperature changes likely to arise when operating in the Site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning. When an insulator bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further insulators bearing this mark shall be submitted, and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators which have been rejected in such a way that there shall be no possibility of such insulators being re-submitted.
5.6
LOCAL, REMOTE, AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL
Operation will normally be from a remote or supervisory position but facilities shall be provided for operation locally by electrical release and any direct manual release from stored energy devices when the circuit breaker is isolated for maintenance. It shall be possible to padlock each local control function in the open position. Position indication of these devices shall be provided via auxiliary contacts on their operating mechanisms and the Contract shall include the supply and fitting of the necessary local/remote and remote/supervisory control switches, as well as, of the necessary auxiliary switches, contactors, etc., as well as, their wiring and necessary cabling to the respective equipment terminal boards.
Page 76 of 365
5.7 5.7.1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS General
Circuit breakers shall be of the SF6 type. Operating mechanisms shall be with individual self-contained spring operated mechanisms. Tenderers shall include proof that a satisfactory period of commercial service of not less than three years has been obtained with the type and rating of the circuit breaker offered. Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimum maintenance. Tenderers shall specify the maintenance requirements necessitated by climate and environmental conditions. Circuit breakers shall operate on the principle of self-generating gas pressure within the interrupter for arc extinction, e.g., puffer type.
5.7.2
5.7.2.1
Operating Duty and Performance

General
The requirements of EN 62271-100 with respect to type tests, service, operation and the making and breaking of fault current shall apply to the specified circuit breakers. 5.7.2.2 Test Certificates
Circuit breakers shall be covered by test certificates issued by an accredited Testing Authority certifying the operation of the circuit breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit breakers. The test duty shall be not less onerous than the requirements of EN 62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender. 5.7.2.3 Rate-of-Rise of Restriking Voltage
Attention is drawn to the requirements of International Standards wherein the standard values of rated transient recovery voltage are stated. Where not specifically stated in the test certificates submitted with the Tender, the Tenderer shall certify that the TRV to which the circuit breaker was subjected during the short circuit tests was the most severe condition that could be imposed by the available test plant for a first phase-to-clear factor of 1,5. Any device incorporated in a circuit breaker to limit or control the rate of rise of restriking voltage across the circuit breaker contacts shall likewise be to the Engineer's approval and full descriptions of any such device shall be given with the test certificates. Evidence shall be submitted with the tender to verify that when interrupting transformer secondary faults the transient recovery voltage conditions that could arise will not exceed the tested interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker proposed. 5.7.2.4 Interrupting Duties
In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by the switching of transformer magnetizing current and of capacitive current associated with overhead line-charging, cable-charging, or capacitor banks as may be applicable. The circuit breakers shall have a rated cable charging breaking current of at least 160 A at rated voltage without exceeding the maximum switching overvoltage, which is included in EN 62271 100.
Page 77 of 365
Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting currents associated with short-line faults and the out-of-phase switching conditions that may occur in service. Circuit breakers shall be of the restrike-free type only. Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for the above duties shall be submitted with the Tender. Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the circuit breakers are capable of, before maintenance is required. 5.7.2.5 Opening Time
Circuit breaker opening time shall be as fast as possible and shall preferably not exceed 50 ms.
5.7.3
Contacts, Arcing Chambers, and Insulation
Separate arcing contacts shall be provided on circuit breakers to protect the main contacts from burning during operation and shall be arranged to ensure that arcing after commutation of the main current always occurs in the arcing zone between the arcing contacts. Designs shall permit rapid repair or replacement of contacts of circuit breakers and removal of complete interrupting chambers of SF6 circuit breakers. Static and moving seals shall be designed to prevent any leakage of gas or ingress of moisture whilst in service and without deterioration. Pressure sensitive devices to prevent switching at SF6 gas operating pressures outside the declared limits of operation shall be included. Where single rods or tubes are utilized for operating the moving contacts of circuit breakers, they shall be securely pinned at each end to prevent rotation or displacement of the contacts. Tubes shall be plugged in an approved manner where contacts or other parts are fixed to the tubes.
5.7.4
5.7.4.1
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms

General
The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be one of the types specified in this Chapter. Circuit breaker operations shall be made with the shunt closing and opening releases energized at 110%, 100% and 85% of the rated supply voltage. All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with delayed auto-reclose whether or not this feature is specified in the Schedules. When specified in the Schedules, mechanisms shall also be suitable for high-speed three-phase auto-reclose to the duty cycle stated. The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical tripping pulse being applied to the circuit breaker during the closing stroke, or of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit breaker shall open fully and in such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated breaking current.
Page 78 of 365
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make repeated attempts to close the circuit breaker when the control switch is held in the CLOSE position in the event of failure to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of a trip signal being given to the circuit breaker. The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated in EN 62271 - 100, and in addition over the range of all operating conditions of the batteries and chargers supplied under this Contract. Each part of the operating mechanisms shall be of substantial construction, utilizing such materials as stainless steel, brass, or gunmetal, where necessary, to prevent sticking due to rust of corrosion. The overall design shall be such as to reduce mechanical shock to a minimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stresses, vibration, or other causes. An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit breaker operating mechanism to show whether the circuit breaker is open or closed. The colour for the open position shall be (0) red and for the closed position shall be (I) green. Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit breaker mechanisms. The circuit breaker shall preferably be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three phases. Each phase shall incorporate a mechanical indicator or other approved means of position indication where operating mechanism designs do not utilize mechanical coupling between phases. Where circuit breakers comprise three independent units, it shall be possible to make independent adjustments to each unit to ensure simultaneous operation of the three phases. For three-phase operation, the three units shall make and break the circuits simultaneously. Pole discrepancies shall be less than 5 ms on closing (three phases). In the event of any phase failing to complete a closing operation, provision shall be made for automatic tripping of all three phases of the circuit breaker or for a remote alarm in the event of any phase failing out of synchronism. Power closing mechanisms shall be recharged automatically for further operations as soon as the circuit breaker has completed the closing operation and the design of the closing mechanisms shall be such that the circuit breaker cannot be operated inadvertently due to external shock forces resulting from short circuits, circuit breaker operation, or any other cause. Circuit breaker operating mechanisms capable of storing energy for at least two complete CLOSE-OPEN operations without recharging are preferred. Mechanisms incapable of storing energy for at least two complete operations shall utilize the substation DC supply for recharging the mechanism; other auxiliary mechanisms shall preferably utilize the LV AC supplies for recharging duties. If a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation within a predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and an alarm initiated. When in operational service all mechanisms shall be arranged to lock out should the energy system employed reach a state that it is inadequate to successfully complete a
close or trip operation under all specified duties. Alarms shall be provided to indicate a lock out condition and advance warning that the conditions are deteriorating towards a lock out condition. Alarms shall be delayed for sufficient time for the energy system to be restored to normal conditions following breaker operation. The circuit breakers shall be provided with facilities for measurement of contact resistance and timing tests without removal of covers or SF6 gas. Means shall be provided for the local manual "non-electrical" tripping of the circuit breaker, preferably by a shrouded push button and facilities shall be provided for locking off this means of tripping. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism so as to render the electrical tripping inoperative. The circuit breaker shall be provided with two separate tripping coils. The two trip coils shall be kept electrically separate. Where possible, circuit breakers shall be provided with slow acting manually powered operating devices for inspection and maintenance purposes only. It shall not be possible to slow close a circuit breaker when in normal service condition. Suitable interlock shall be provided between slow and fast acting circuit breaker operation during maintenance. Where heaters are provided in mechanism housings, these shall be permanently connected. Means for locking shall be provided for the doors of each mechanism housing. 5.7.4.2 Spring Operated Mechanisms
Spring operated mechanisms shall be arranged for motor charging but means shall be provided for charging by hand. No electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism during this process shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment. A spare normally open spring-drive limit switch shall be provided. It shall be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit breaker in either the open or closed positions. In normal operation, recharging of the operating springs shall commence immediately and automatically upon completion of the closing operation. The time required to power charge the spring should not exceed 30 seconds. Closure whilst a spring charging operation is in progress shall be prevented and release of the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged. Spring closing mechanisms shall be designed such that it is not possible for a fully charged spring to be released inadvertently due to external shock or vibration caused by the breaker opening under short circuit conditions or any other cause. Means shall be provided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open position without the circuit breaker attempting to close. The state of the charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device which shows "SPRING CHARGED" when operation is permissible and "SPRING FREE" when operation is not possible. The indications shall be visible through glazed access doors or openings of the mechanisms cabinet. Provision shall also be made for remote and supervisory indication of the state of the charge of the operating springs.
Page 80 of 365
5.8
LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES
All elements necessary for the control and monitoring of the bay shall be housed in the local control cubicle which in itself should be integrated with the switchgear bay. The bay units should be connected to the local control cubicles by means of control cables with coded multiple connectors manufactured and tested at the factory. Control and monitoring shall be preferably be achieved by digital circuit breaker control and monitoring devices. The following essential functions shall be implemented on the bay control level: (a) Fully interlocked local actuation and position indication of all switching elements (b) Display of all indications necessary for operation and monitoring (c) Transfer of all bay information to the substation control and protection equipment
5.9
LOCKING FACILITIES
Locking devices shall be provided for securing each control switch in the "neutral" position, each control selector switch in all positions and for securing each isolator and earthing switch operating handle in either the "open" or "closed" position. The following locking facilities shall be provided: (a) Circuit breaker mechanisms in the open position and any associated manual operating device in the neutral position. (b) Isolating switches in both open and closed positions. (c) Control position selector switches in all positions provided. (d) Operating cubicle access doors. (e) Gas system isolating valves in open or closed positions. Locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that they will remain serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operation or maintenance for continuous periods of up to two years and with suitable maintenance shall be fit for indefinite service.
5.10
ISOLATING AND EARTHING SWITCHES
Isolating and earthing switches shall be arranged to permit safe maintenance of any section of the equipment when the remainder is alive. Isolating devices shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers, isolators and earthing switches, as necessary, to prevent the possibility of making or breaking load current. Power operated drives shall be provided which shall be suitable for local, remote, and supervisory control (supervisory control of earth switches is not required) and should be fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. It should be possible to lock-off the manual and local facilities and padlock the mechanism in the open and closed positions with the motor automatically disengaged. The motor-operating mechanism shall be provided with an interlocking magnet for continuous duty to prevent mechanically the
manual operation and at least electrically the motor operation when the interlocking magnet is off-circuited. Wherever the manual crank is inserted into the drive for manual operation, the electrical supply for the control of the device shall be automatically disconnected. Each isolator and earth switch shall have its own separate power supply. The motor circuit shall be provided with a two-pole overload-tripping device with an alarm contact. Where a chain of interlocking contacts is used each switch shall be sub-fused. The motor-operating mechanism shall be of pulse-operated type, that is, the mechanism shall complete its action although the interlocking voltage is off-circuited during operation. There shall be separate electrical circuits for motor, control, and interlocking. An actuated control pulse shall not affect any operation when there is no voltage in the motor circuit. The colour for the open position (0) of the disconnector shall be red and for the closed position (I) green. Local mechanical position indicators shall be provided for all switches and shall be clearly visible from ground level.
5.10.1
Isolating Switches
Isolating Switches (disconnectors) shall be of the metal enclosed design and shall generally comply with the requirements of EN 62271 - 102, EN 62271 - 104 and EN 62271 - 203. Isolating switches shall be arranged for operation while the equipment is alive, but will not be required to break current other than the charging currents of associated connectors or load currents shared by parallel circuits under the varying operating conditions which the specified interlocking permits. Isolators shall be housed in compartments partitioned from the circuit breakers and the busbars or circuit side with which they are associated. It shall be possible with such partitioning and with the isolator compartments maintained at full gas pressure, to carry out high voltage insulation withstand tests on outgoing circuits or on sections of busbar, without taking adjacent equipment or sections of busbars out of service. When called for load making and breaking switches with fault making capability shall be provided which shall be suitable for switching on load without detriment to the equipment and under normal duties up to the circuit rating specified. Switch mechanisms shall be so designed that the isolator cannot be opened or closed inadvertently due to forces which may occur in service or under short-circuits, by forces due to currents passing through it and shall be self-locking in both the "open" and "closed" position. The mechanism shall open and close all three phases simultaneously. Disconnectors incorporating metallic screens between contacts shall be interlocked to prevent operation of the metallic screen or closing of contacts if the contacts are not fully open or if the metallic screen is not fully withdrawn. The insulation level for the isolating distance between disconnector contacts shall be 15% higher than that for the remainder of the equipment In the event of gas leakage the disconnector shall be capable of withstanding the rated phase-to-phase voltage at normal atmospheric SF6 gas pressure.
5.10.2
Maintenance Earthing Switches
Earthing switches shall generally comply with the requirements of EN 62271 - 102 and EN 62271 - 203. Earthing switches integrally mounted with disconnectors or separately mounted shall be provided for earthing already isolated sections of gas-insulated switchgear in order to provide safe maintenance. Motor operated mechanisms shall be provided but it shall be possible to operate the switch manually in emergency conditions. The earthing switch, when in the closed position shall have a short-time current withstand as specified with a minimum duration of one second. No burning or welding of contacts shall occur. Provisions for testing purposes shall be incorporated in the design of earthing switches to facilitate primary current injection tests, contact timing, voltage drop measurements, and other low voltage checks without the necessity to open gas filled compartments. Detailed means of performing these tests shall be provided in the appropriate Schedule. Fully insulated designs of earthing switches shall incorporate removable earth links suitable for the short-time current rating specified. It shall be possible to apply maintenance earths on either side of the test zone for safety reasons. All earthing switchgear shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers and disconnectors so that it shall not be possible to close an earthing switch onto a live circuit or to make the circuit alive when the earthing switch is closed. Facilities for padlocking earthing switches in the open and closed positions shall be provided together with means for isolating the motor drives.
5.10.3
High-Speed Earth Switches
For safe earthing of the busbars and feeders, high-speed fault-making spring driven earth switches shall be provided. Such operation of the earthing switch shall not endanger adjacent compartments, cause contamination, or damage to the extent that immediate removal from service for overhaul is necessary. The mechanisms shall be electrically operated with provision for local manual operation. With earthing switches of the highspeed fault-making type it shall not be possible to complete a slow close operation. Each section of busbar, which can be electrically isolated from other sections of busbar by means of isolators or circuit breakers, shall incorporate high speed earthing switches as specified above. The short-circuit making current of the earth switch shall be according to EN 62271 102. Facilities integral with the earthing switch for primary current injection or low voltage checks shall be insulated from earth and incorporate a disconnectable earth strap. These earthing switches shall otherwise be in accordance with the requirements for maintenance earthing switches.
5.11
INTERLOCKING
An interlocking scheme shall be provided which takes into account the following basic requirements:
Page 83 of 365
(a) To safeguard maintenance personnel who may be working on one section of the equipment with other sections live. (b) To prevent incorrect switching sequences which could lead to a hazardous situation to plant, equipment and personnel. The interlocking scheme shall be electrical for all operational interlocks and preferably of the mechanical type for maintenance safety interlocks but shall be effective when the equipment is being controlled locally, under emergency hand or from a remote or supervisory position. All mechanical interlocks shall be applied at the point at which hand power is used so that stress cannot be applied to parts remote from that point. All electrical interlocks shall so function as to interrupt the operating supply and a system of interlocks shall be provided which shall cover the emergency hand operation of apparatus which is normally power operated. Failure of supply or connections to any electrical interlock shall not produce or permit faulty operation. Electrical bolt interlocks shall be energized only when the operating handle of the mechanism is brought to the working position. Visible indication shall be provided to show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Means, normally padlocked, shall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a failure of interlock supplies. All isolating devices shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers and isolators in the same station so that it shall not be possible to make or break current on an isolating device unless a parallel circuit in that station is already closed. Earthing switches shall be interlocked such that they cannot be operated unless the associated isolator is open and line voltage is not present. In double busbar stations where provision for on-load changeover of busbars is specified, the busbar isolating devices shall be so interlocked with the appropriate busbar coupling and sectioning equipment that sections or sets of busbars cannot be paralleled by means of the busbar isolating devices unless a parallel circuit is already closed through the circuit breakers of the appropriate busbar coupling and sectioning equipment. In all other circumstances, the busbar isolating devices of equipment other than busbar sectioning and coupling equipment shall be so interlocked that their respective circuit breakers can only be coupled to one set of busbars at a time. It shall not be possible to parallel sections of busbars except through the circuit breakers of the busbar coupling and sectioning equipment. The busbar selector isolators of a circuit are not expected to remain closed once load transfer is completed and an alarm shall provide a warning if both busbar isolators of a transferred circuit are left closed.
5.12 5.12.1
AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS General
Circuit breakers, isolators, and earthing devices shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches, to relay circuit information for the purpose of control, protection, indication, and metering at the substation site as required by the relevant section of the Specification.
Page 84 of 365
The fitting of auxiliary relays to achieve the number of auxiliary contacts required will not be acceptable. Auxiliary switches shall be of an approved design and be positively driven in both directions. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free housing and shall be mounted in an accessible position clear of the opposing mechanisms. Auxiliary switches shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when closing. Contacts, which signal the position of an isolator or earth switch, shall operate in accordance with EN 62271 - 102. Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of the circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed. Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by the auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will not be accepted in lieu of the auxiliary switches except as specifically approved by the Engineer. All auxiliary switches/contacts shall be wired out to a terminal board in the local marshalling kiosk whether they are in use or not in the first instance and shall be arranged in the same sequence on all equipment. Where adjustable linkages are provided to facilitate the timing of the auxiliary switches with respect to the main equipment, approved locking devices shall be fitted. Auxiliary switches and contactors shall be capable of operation within the same voltage limits as specified for the associated circuit breaker close and trip coils. The auxiliary switches shall comply with the following requirements:
5.12.2
The mechanical drive to auxiliary switches shall be of robust design with positive operation in both directions. All adjustments to linkages shall be preset and locked at the works where practicable. It shall not be necessary to disturb this setting at site after commissioning. Disconnection and reconnection of the drive linkage in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions shall not entail any disturbance of the setting. The take-off for the drive to the auxiliary switches shall be as near as possible to the final drive shaft of the mechanism. Unless otherwise agreed, passing contacts shall be so arranged that the time the contacts are in engagement shall be a minimum of 10 ms. The switch assembly shall be so constructed that each individual contact can be arranged to operate relative to the drive in suitable steps but each complete bank shall be preset at the manufacturer's works. Where contacts are arranged for break before make, the period when both contacts are open shall tend towards the minimum practicable. Contacts shall be faced with either silver or silver alloy. Alternative materials with comparable performance may be used subject to approval. The thickness of the facing material shall be such that at the end of the mechanical and electrical life tests there is still a layer of facing material at the point of contact. Contacts shall have a self-cleaning action and have adequate contact pressure. Auxiliary switches shall be designed for use under the specified climatic conditions and the contacts shall be either of the totally enclosed type or provided with tightly fitting covers over the contacts.
Page 85 of 365
It is intended that designs of auxiliary switches to this specification should require little or no maintenance and adjustment on site. Bearing and sliding surfaces shall either not require lubrication or shall be lubricated for life. The lubrication shall not adversely affect the electrical performance of the switch.
5.12.3
Duties
Switches shall be suitable for the duties under which they are likely to be subjected. The switches shall have adequate making and breaking capacity and adequate through current capacity suitable for use in, for example, current transformer, interlocking and control circuits.
5.12.4
Number of Contacts and Timing
In addition to the number of contacts required for the substation control and monitoring, there should be at least 20% extra contacts available as spares of each type of contacts.
5.13
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear instruments and/or metering equipment and shall comply with EN 60044 1 and the requirements of this Specification. Current transformers shall be of the toroidal core type preferably encapsulated in epoxy resin. Where indicated on the associated schematic diagram they shall be located on both sides of the circuit breaker to avoid "blind zones" in protection coverage. Current transformers including primary conductors shall have a short time current rating and duration not less than that of the associated switchgear. All current transformers shall have sufficient overload capacity to permit continuous operation with currents up to 120% of the rated current of the associated equipment and for transformer circuits up to 150% of the maximum continuous rating of the associated transformer. All current transformers shall be installed with the P1 (one) terminals adjacent to the busbars. The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each transformer shall be clearly indicated at the respective terminals and in addition labels shall be fitted in a readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer. Current transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in themselves, and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible position and as near to the current transformer as possible. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type, have M6 nuts, and provision for attaching test leads. Magnetization and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each type and rating of current transformer. Where the Contractor wishes to provide current transformer ratios differing from those specified he should first obtain approval in writing from the Engineer for each specific instance. The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval together with details of the protection, instrumentation or measuring equipment with which each current transformer is to be used.
Page 86 of 365
Where specified in the schedules, current transformers having accuracy classes between 0,1 and 1 may be provided with an extended current rating in accordance with EN 60044 up to an equivalent primary current rating not exceeding that of the associated switchgear circuit current rating. Current transformers for balanced protective schemes, including neutral current transformers where appropriate, shall have identical turns ratio and shall have magnetization characteristics to the approval of the Engineer for each specific instance. Current transformers provided for protective gear purposes shall have overcurrent and saturation factors not less than those corresponding to the design short circuit level of the system. The accuracy class of all protection current transformers shall be 5P or better and with an accuracy limit factor of 20. The rated burden of the protective cores applies to the lower rated current. The Contractor shall ensure that the capacity of the current transformers provided is adequate for operation of the associated protective devices and instruments. Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the secondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connection required for each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use shall be shown on the appropriate schematic and connection diagrams. All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by means of separate insulated leads to a terminal board, mounted at a height of 100 cm +/- 5 cm from the gland plate, in the Local Control cubicle. All terminal boards in Relay and Control Panels, which carry shorting/disconnecting links for Current transformers, should be mounted at 100 cm +/- 5 cm from the respective gland plates. Terminal boards shall have shorting/disconnecting links to allow testing with the circuit in service and on load. The rated insulation and inter-turn insulation levels for secondary windings should be according to EN 60044-1 Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs their suitability to withstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be ensured, otherwise, saturable interposing current transformers fitted. Where supplied, the interposing winding shall be earthed at the control panel. The instrument security factor of the measuring cores in all connections shall not be greater than 5. Where more than one ratio is specified and post CTs with multiple windings are tendered, it shall be possible to select either ratio for each winding without alteration to the number of primary turns. All ratio adjustment shall be made on the secondary side. Neutral current transformers are to be of the outdoor totally enclosed, porcelain bushing type complete with suitable mounting steelwork as specified and complete with terminal box for secondary connections. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval, before commencement of manufacture, the calculations on the burdens of all current transformers, which are supplied under the Contract. It shall be possible to carry out primary injection testing of the CTs when the switchgear is fully assembled, or retesting of the CTs during the service life of the switchgear without interruption of supply to adjacent circuits or to dismantle the switchgear or to break down the cable termination, if applicable. The appropriate Schedule shall be completed to state the testing facilities provided in the design for site testing.
Page 87 of 365
The current transformer particulars as specified in EN 60044 shall be given on an accessible plate mounted external to the current transformer.
5.14
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall comply with EN 60044 and the requirements of the Specification. Voltage transformers of metal-enclosed design shall be compatible with the switchgear and contain no hygroscopic insulating material, which could affect the SF6 gas in either the voltage transformer or the associated switchgear chamber. Electromagnetic voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging the capacitance of lines, cables, and switchgear, which may remain connected to them during switching operations. The Contractor shall declare any limitations of the equipment for this duty. It shall not be possible for voltage transformer secondary windings to be connected directly in parallel, except through interposing voltage transformers associated with the synchronizing scheme. To prevent any possibility of back energizing a VT secondary winding via synchronizing circuits, circuit breaker auxiliary contacts which are of the late make early break type shall be employed. Voltage transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, synchronizing equipment, voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers, and metering. When a polarizing source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall be provided. The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformers shall not exceed the permissible limits prescribed in EN 60044 - 2. All transformers shall have measuring accuracy class between 0,1 and 1,0 as specified in the Schedules. Where required for protection duty the relevant protection accuracy will also be stated in the Schedules. All transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the total connected burden, which shall not be less than that stated in the Schedules. Maximum burdens imposed by transducers upon VT secondary circuits (including transducer auxiliary power source where applicable) should be taken into account in determining the output rating. Voltage transformers shall be capable of carrying continuously without injurious heating 5O% burden above their rated burden. Suitable voltage transformer secondary miniature circuit breakers shall be provided as close to each voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled to indicate their function, phase identification, etc. For single-phase voltage transformers separate earth links for each secondary shall be provided and each neutral lead shall be connected together at a single earth point in the local control cubicle. Earthing of the VT HV winding shall be through a link separate from the LV winding. A minimum of two suitable main secondary miniature circuit breakers per phase shall be provided to allow implementation of secondary circuit failure supervision with self-reset alarm indication. Protection, synchronizing, instrumentation, etc, circuits shall be distributed and protected between as many secondary circuits as required in order to satisfy the independency and reliability of the individual systems. Suitable type of auxiliary
contacts of adequate number shall be provided with the MCBs for satisfying the requirements of the protection synchrocheck and alarm systems. It shall not be possible for the voltage transformer secondary circuits to be connected in parallel. All transformers shall have a rated voltage factor of not less than 1,2 continuously and 1,5 for 30 seconds. When meters are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connected directly to the same circuit as the current transformers then the voltage signals shall be wired through auxiliary contacts to break the circuit automatically when the circuit breaker is open. Voltage transformers on feeder circuits shall be located on the feeder side of the circuit breaker outside the protected zone covered by the busbar protection. They shall however be included in the protected zone afforded by the feeder protection. Primary connections shall have the same short time current rating as the associated switchgear. Each secondary winding of the voltage transformers shall be protected by suitable approved miniature circuit breakers and links, which shall be located as close as possible to the voltage transformer, preferably within a suitable terminal box. All secondary winding connections, including both ends of the secondary winding shall be brought out to the miniature circuit breakers and links. The MCBs and links shall be connected to approved isolating terminal blocks for termination of multicore cables. A metallic label shall be provided and fixed at the voltage transformer clearly indicating the connections required for each winding. The neutral point of each voltage transformer secondary circuit shall be earthed at one point only at the local control panel via a separate removable link of approved design. The earth link shall be situated in an accessible position and suitably labelled. A magnetization curve shall be provided for each voltage transformer for the Engineers approval. The location of the voltage transformers to be installed on the primary switchgear shall be approved by the Engineer.
5.15
EARTHING SYSTEM
All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall be electrically connected to each other and shall also be connected to the earthing system. Any necessary terminals on any part of the equipment required for this purpose shall be provided by the Contractor.
5.16
SURGE ARRESTERS
If due to system conditions it is deemed necessary to incorporate surge arresters at the GIS Substation in addition to those at the line entries then these shall be of the metal enclosed design. Surge arresters shall be of the gapless metal oxide type. Metal oxide arresters shall be of proven design with type tests to EN 60099-4 or equivalent, demonstrating that thermal runaway or premature aging does not occur in service. They shall have proven records for the specified site conditions.
Page 89 of 365
Metal-enclosed arresters shall be in their own gas zone, which shall be monitored. Operation of over-pressure devices shall only allow the release of gasses to atmosphere. Arresters shall be entirely suitable for operation under the system conditions specified including system voltage rises on unloading long transmission lines charging currents without damage. The arresters shall be of the station class, shall have a rated discharge current of 10.000 A, at least discharge class III, and shall be equipped with pressure relief devices. Individual surge arrester monitoring units shall be connected to each surge arrester separately. The surge arrester monitoring units should record the number of discharges, the amplitude of the surges together with their date and time, the total leakage current and the resistive current through the arrester. The measurements should be stored in the surge arrester monitoring units, and should be collected with the aid of a handheld cordless transceiver, which then should be transferred to a computer for statistical analysis.
5.17
GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT
Gas handling equipment shall be provided at the GIS installation to permit emergency topping up of gas in the switchgear in the event of leakage. In addition, a mobile gas-handling unit, the size of which shall allow full mobility within the area of the installation, shall be included for the complete sampling, testing, filtering, drying, extraction, and refilling of SF6 gas. This unit shall be self-contained and comprise of wheeled trolley housing, all necessary compressors, gauges, piping and controls etc., together with a gas storage tank with usable capacity not less than that specified. The unit shall be capable of evacuating air from the switchgear compartments and replenishing them with gas at the end of a maintenance period. Facilities shall also allow for circulation of the gas from a compartment through filters in order to extract moisture pressure. This plant should be capable of evacuating and storing the largest quantity of gas specified and of evacuating the largest volume specified to a vacuum of 20 mm Hg. These two operations should not require an operating time in excess of 4,5 h. The plant should also be capable of extracting air at atmospheric pressure from the largest volume chamber to a vacuum of 1 mm Hg in a time not exceeding 2 h. The plant should be capable of returning gas to the equipment and recirculating used gas through filters in order to achieve the specified moisture level for the gas in service. The filling time for the largest volume specified from a vacuum of 1 mm Hg to normal working pressure should not exceed 2 h. Details of the filling and evacuating apparatus included together with a description of the filling and evacuating procedures shall be provided at the time of tendering. Where specified additional mobile or static storage shall be provided for use in combination with the gas trolley and to extend storage facilities. All necessary pipe work, flexible hoses, couplings, valves, pressure and vacuum gauges shall be included to enable interconnection between the switchgear compartments, gas trolley and storage tanks and the cylinders provided by major producers of SF6 gas.
Page 90 of 365
An approved portable SF6 gas leakage detector shall also be provided for each substation.
Page 91 of 365
6. 6.1
OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT SWITCHGEAR - DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE
The switchgear shall be suitable for outdoor location and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing on site. It shall be designed to comply with this Specification and relevant International Standards where applicable. Deviations from these Specifications and Standards shall be stated in the appropriate schedule. In all cases the ancillary plant necessary to complete installation of the equipment shall be included in the Contract. The disposition of plant in the substation is to be such that the operation of any item of plant under the specified service conditions shall in no way create a condition that could adversely affect the performance of adjacent circuit breakers or any associated equipment. The Contractor is to ensure that the complete substation installation will satisfy the requirements of this Specification and the appropriate Standards in respect of insulation, fault levels, mechanical stress etc., and any additional equipment found to be necessary to obtain these conditions shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Price.
6.2
CLEARANCES
The clearances and positions of apparatus including the access facilities shall permit safe maintenance of any section of the apparatus while the remaining sections are alive. Electrical clearances between live metal work and earth shall be not less than those in the appropriate sections of BS 7354, or the clearances and dimensions given in this Specification and attached drawings whichever is the greater. The layout and design of plant and equipment on the substation site shall provide for ready access for operation and maintenance whilst the remaining sections of equipment are alive. Working clearances provided between isolated equipment and nearest live metal work shall not be less than the British Standard section clearances.
6.3
RADIO INTERFERENCE
Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise electrical discharge and radio interference. Type tests for electrical discharge and radio interference shall be carried out by the Contractor and submit relevant test report with tender.
6.4 6.4.1
CIRCUIT-BREAKERS General
Circuit-breakers shall be of the SF6 type with individual self contained. Operating mechanisms shall be with individual self-contained spring operated mechanisms. Hydraulic operating mechanisms although not preferred shall be considered. Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimum maintenance. Tenderers shall specify the maintenance requirements necessitated by climate and environmental conditions.
Page 92 of 365
Circuit breakers shall operate on the principle of self-generating gas pressure within the interrupter for arc extinction, e.g. puffer type or thermal blast. A lockout feature shall be incorporated to prevent operation of the circuit-breaker whenever the gas pressure falls to a value below which it would be incapable of performing in accordance with its rated duty. Gas monitors shall be temperature compensated. An alarm feature shall also be incorporated to give indication of failing gas pressure prior to the lockout of the circuit breaker. Suitable facilities shall be included for gas sampling and for draining and replenishing the gas volume for maintenance. Absorption of moisture and the decomposition products of arcing or discharge in the gas shall be achieved by integral filters.
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
Operating Duty And Performance

General
The requirements of EN 62271-100 in respect of type tests, service operation and the making and breaking of fault current shall apply to all types of circuit-breakers. 6.4.2.2 Test Certificates
Circuit-breakers shall be covered by test certificates certifying the operation of the circuit-breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit-breakers. The test duty shall not be less onerous than the requirements of EN 62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender. 6.4.2.3 Rate-of-Rise of Restriking Voltage
Attention is drawn to the requirements of International Standards wherein the standard values of rated transient recovery voltage are stated. Where not specifically stated in the test certificates submitted with the Tender, the Tenderer shall certify that the TRV to which the circuit-breaker was subjected during the short circuit tests was the most severe condition that could be imposed by the available test plant for a first phase-to-clear factor of 1.5. Any device incorporated in a circuit-breaker to limit or control the rate or rise of restriking voltage across the circuit breaker contacts shall likewise be to the Engineer's approval and full descriptions of any such device shall be given with the test certificates. 6.4.2.4
Reclosure Duty
Circuit breakers shall be suitable for both high and slow speed single shot auto-reclosure with three-pole switching. Circuit breakers must be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by out-of-synchronism conditions associated with auto-reclosure.
6.4.2.5 Interrupting Duties
In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit-breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by
Page 93 of 365
the switching of transformer magnetising current and of capacitor current associated with overhead line-charging, cable-charging or capacitor banks as may be applicable. Circuit-breakers shall be capable of interrupting current associated with short-line faults and the out-of-phase switching conditions that may occur in service. Circuit-breakers shall be of the restrike-free type only. Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit-breakers for the above duties shall be submitted with the Tender. Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the circuit-breakers are capable of before maintenance is required.
6.4.2.6 Insulation Co-ordination
The insulation strength across the open circuit breaker shall be at least 15 per cent greater than the line to ground insulation strength for all impulse, switching surge and power frequency voltage conditions.
6.4.2.7 Opening time
Circuit breaker opening time shall be as fast as possible and shall preferably not exceed 50 ms. 6.4.3 General Arrangement
Circuit-breakers shall be suitable for mounting directly on concrete pads and shall include any necessary supporting steelwork. The arrangement of the switchgear on site shall be such that adequate access shall be available for normal routine maintenance and the replacement of either a complete breaker or any component parts of the assembly. Evidence shall be provided that enclosures subject to pressures in excess of normal atmospheric pressure during service operation have withstood approved pressure tests without leakage, permanent distortion or any temporary distortion such as might cause maloperation of the circuit-breaker. Means shall be provided to allow easy access for the inspection and maintenance of fixed and moving contacts and other enclosed components.
6.4.4
Contacts, Arcing Chambers And Insulation
Separate arcing contacts shall be provided on circuit-breakers to protect the main contacts from burning during operation and shall be arranged to ensure that arcing after commutation of the main current always occurs in the arcing zone between the arcing contacts. Designs shall permit rapid repair or replacement of contacts of circuit-breakers and removal of complete interrupting chambers of SF6 circuit breakers. Static and moving seals shall be designed to prevent any leakage of gas or ingress of moisture whilst in service and without deterioration. Pressure sensitive devices to prevent switching at SF6 gas pressures outside the declared limits of operation shall be included.
Page 94 of 365
Where single rods or tubes are utilised for operating the moving contacts of circuit-breakers, they shall be securely pinned at each end to prevent rotation or displacement of the contacts. Tubes shall be plugged in an approved manner where contacts or other parts are fixed to the tubes. Circuit-breakers shall not comprise of materials that are liable to deterioration or create undesirable chemical action when in contact with SF6 and its by-products under service conditions. Precautions to minimise the presence of moisture and other by-products of arcing in SF6 design shall be incorporated. Noise made by the circuit-breaker when operating under all specified conditions shall not be such as to cause a nuisance to residents beyond a radius of 100m.
6.4.5
6.4.5.1
CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATING MECHANISMS

General
The circuit-breaker operating mechanism shall be one of the types specified in this Chapter. All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with delayed auto-reclose whether or not this feature is specified in the schedules. When specified in the schedules mechanisms shall also be suitable for high-speed three phase auto-reclose to the duty cycle stated. The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical tripping pulse being applied to the circuit-breaker during the closing stroke, or of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit-breaker shall open fully and in such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated breaking current. The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make repeated attempts to close the circuit-breaker when the control switch is held in the CLOSE position in the event of failure to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of a trip signal being given to the circuit-breaker. The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated in EN 62271 - 100. Each part of the operating mechanisms shall be of substantial construction, utilising such materials as stainless steel, brass or gunmetal where necessary to prevent sticking due to rust of corrosion. The overall design shall be such as to reduce mechanical shock to a minimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stresses, vibration or other causes. An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit-breaker operating mechanism to show whether the circuit-breaker is open or closed. Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms. Each phase shall incorporate a mechanical indicator or other approved means of position indication where operating mechanism designs do not utilise mechanical coupling between phases. The circuit-breaker shall preferably be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three phases.
Page 95 of 365
Where circuit-breakers comprise three independent units it shall be possible to make independent adjustments to each unit. For three phase operation the three units shall make and break the circuits simultaneously. In the event of any phase failing to complete a closing operation, provision shall be made for automatic tripping of all three phases of the circuit-breaker or for a remote alarm in the event of any phase failing out of synchronism. Power closing mechanisms shall be recharged automatically for further operations as soon as the circuit-breaker has completed the closing operation and the design of the closing mechanisms shall be such that the circuit-breaker cannot be operated inadvertently due to external shock forces resulting from short circuits, circuit-breaker operation, or any other cause. Circuit-breaker operating mechanisms capable of storing energy for the operating sequence O-0.3S-CO-3 min-CO. If a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation within a predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and an alarm initiated. When in operational service all mechanisms shall be arranged to lock out should the energy system employed reach a state that it is inadequate to successfully complete a close or trip operation under all specified duties. Alarms shall be provided to indicate a lock out condition and also advance warning that the conditions are deteriorating towards a lock out condition. Alarms shall be delayed for sufficient time for the energy system to be restored to normal conditions following breaker operation. The circuit-breakers shall be provided with the facilities for measurement of contact resistance and mechanical and electrical timing of the contact. Full details of the facility provided shall be stated in Schedule of particulars without removal of covers or SF6 gas. Means shall be provided for the local manual "non-electrical" tripping of the circuit breaker preferably by a shrouded push button with facilities for locking off. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism for rendering the electrical tripping inoperative. The circuit breaker shall be provided with two tripping coils. The two trip coils shall be kept electrically separate. Where possible, circuit-breakers shall be provided with slow acting manually powered operating devices for inspection and maintenance purposes only. It shall not be possible to slow close a circuit-breaker when in normal service condition. Suitable interlock shall be provided between slow and fast acting circuit breaker operation during maintenance. Where heaters are provided in mechanism housings, these shall be permanently connected. Where two-stage heaters are provided, one stage shall be permanently connected and the other switched. Means for locking shall be provided for the doors of each mechanism housing. 6.4.5.2 Spring Operated Mechanisms
Spring operated mechanisms shall be arranged for motor charging but means shall be provided for charging by hand. No electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism
Page 96 of 365
during this process shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment. A spare normally open spring-drive limit switch shall be provided. When fully charged the spring mechanism shall have sufficient stored energy for the operating sequence refer to above. It shall be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit breaker in either the open or closed positions. In normal operation, recharging of the operating springs shall commence immediately and automatically upon completion of the closing operation. Closure whilst a spring charging operation is in progress shall be prevented and release of the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged. The time required to power charge the spring should not exceed 30 seconds. The state of the charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device which shows "SPRING CHARGED" when operation is permissible and "SPRING FREE" when operation is not possible. The indications shall be visible glazed access doors or openings of the mechanisms cabinet. Provision shall also be made for remote and supervisory indication. Provision shall also be made for remote and supervisory indication of the state of the charge of the operating springs. Means shall be provided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open position without the circuit breaker attempting to close. 6.4.5.3 6.4.5.3.1 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS General
Circuit-breakers shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches and contactors, where permitted, to relay circuit information for the purpose of control, protection, indication and metering at the substation site as required by the relevant section of the Specification and in addition shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for position indication to the central system control room via the remote supervisory system. Auxiliary switches shall be of an approved design and be positively driven in both directions. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free housing and shall be mounted in an accessible position clear of the opposing mechanisms. Auxiliary switches shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when closing. Micro switches will not be acceptable. Not less than six spare auxiliary switch ways shall be provided with each circuit-breaker. Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of the circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed. The contacts of all auxiliary switches shall be strong and shall have a positive wiping action when closing. Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by the auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will not be accepted in lieu of the auxiliary switches except as specifically approved by the Engineer. Auxiliary switches and contactors shall be capable of operation within the same voltage limits as specified for the associated circuit-breaker close and trip coils. The auxiliary switches shall comply with the following requirements:
Page 97 of 365
6.4.5.3.2
The mechanical drive to auxiliary switches shall be of robust design with positive operation in both directions. All adjustments to linkages shall be preset and locked at the works where practicable. It shall not be necessary to disturb this setting at site after commissioning. Disconnection and reconnection of the drive linkage in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions shall not entail any disturbance of the setting. The take-off for the drive to the auxiliary switches shall be as near as possible to the final drive shaft of the mechanism. Unless otherwise agreed, passing contacts shall be so arranged that the time the contacts are in engagement shall be a minimum of 10 ms. The switch assembly shall be so constructed that each individual contact can be arranged to operate relative to the drive in suitable steps but each complete bank shall be preset at the manufacturer's works. Where contacts are arranged for break before make, the period when both contacts are open shall tend towards the minimum practicable. Contacts shall be faced with either silver or silver alloy. Alternative materials with comparable performance may be used subject to approval. The thickness of the facing material shall be such that at the end of the mechanical and electrical life tests there is still a layer of facing material at the point of contact. Contacts shall have a self-cleaning action and have adequate contact pressure. Auxiliary switches shall be designed for use under the specified climatic conditions and the contacts shall be either of the totally enclosed type or provided with tightly fitting covers over the contacts. It is intended that designs of auxiliary switches to this specification should require little or no maintenance and adjustment on site. Bearing and sliding surfaces shall either not require lubrication or shall be lubricated for life. The lubrication shall not adversely affect the electrical performance of the switch. 6.4.5.3.3 Duties
In addition to the number of contacts employed for control interlocking, the following minimum requirements for auxiliary switches in respect of number contacts and timing shall be provided. Minimum Number of Contacts: 12 N.O. and 12 N.C. Timing: N.O. contacts with the exception of two sets of this type shall close in about 10 milliseconds after the making of the main circuit breaker and shall open in about 10 milliseconds before the separation of the main circuit breaker contacts. The two remaining sets shall close in about 5 milliseconds before the making of the main circuit breaker contacts and open simultaneously with the main circuit breaker contacts. N.C. contacts shall close 10 milliseconds after the opening of the main circuit breaker contacts and open at least 10 milliseconds before the making of the main circuit breaker contacts.
6.5 6.5.1
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS GENERAL
The CTs & VTs shall be suitable for outdoor location and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing on site. They shall be designed to comply with this
Specification and relevant International Standards where applicable. Deviations from these Specifications and Standards shall be stated in the appropriate schedule. In all cases the ancillary plant necessary to complete installation of the equipment shall be included in the Contract. The disposition of plant in the substation is to be such that the operation of any item of plant under the specified service conditions shall in no way create a condition that could adversely affect the performance of adjacent equipment.
6.5.2
CLEARANCES
The clearances and positions of apparatus including the access facilities shall permit safe maintenance of any section of the apparatus while the remaining sections are alive. Electrical clearances between live metal work and earth shall be not less than those given in this Specification and attached drawings whichever is the greater.
6.5.3
RADIO INTERFERENCE
Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise electrical discharge and radio interference. Relevant tests for electrical discharge and radio interference if applicable shall be carried out by the Contractor and submit relevant test report with tender.
6.5.4
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be of the wound or capacitor type as specified in the Schedules and shall comply with EN 60044 2 / EN 60044 5 , BS.3941 and the requirements of these Specifications. Voltage transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, synchronising equipment voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers and metering. Capacitor type voltage transformers shall be suitable for use as line couplers for the operation of carrier accelerated tripping and communication systems and the top of all voltage transformers shall be suitable for mounting wave traps. Wave or line traps will be supplied under another contract. All voltage transformers shall be supplied complete with High Frequency Drain coil and High Frequency grounding switch housed either in the voltage transformer terminal box or housed in a suitable separate cubicle, which is to be mounted on the voltage transformer, steel support. Electromagnetic voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging the capacitance of line, cables and switchgear, which may remain connected to them during switching operations. The contractor shall declare any limitations of the equipment for this duty. When a polarising source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall be provided. Capacitor voltage transformers shall be designed to minimise the possibility of ferroresonance occurring. The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformers shall not exceed the permissible limits prescribed in EN 60044. All transformers shall have measuring accuracy class between 0.1 and 1.0 as specified in the Schedules. Where required for protection duty the relevant protection accuracy will also be stated in the Schedules.
Page 99 of 365
All voltage transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the burdens connected to them, which shall not be less than stated in the Schedules. Maximum burdens imposed by transducers upon VT secondary circuits (including transducer auxiliary power source where applicable) should be taken into account in determining the output rating. They shall be capable of carrying continuously without injurious heating 50% burden above their rated burden. All transformers shall have a continuous rated voltage factor of not less than 1.2. When meters are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connected directly to the same circuit as the current transformers then the voltage signals shall be wired through auxiliary contacts to break the circuit automatically when the circuit breaker is open. Voltage transformer secondary fuses or miniature circuit-breakers shall be provided as close to each voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled to indicate their function, phase identification, etc. A minimum of two main secondary fuses per phase shall be provided to allow implementation of fuse failure supervision with reclosing alarm when specified in the Schedules. Protection, synchronising and instrumentation, etc circuits shall be distributed between the two main secondary circuits and then sub-fused at the local control panel in accordance with the appropriate schematic diagram. For single-phase voltage transformers, both ends of each secondary winding shall be brought out to insulated links. For three-phase voltage transformers, each phase end shall be brought out to fuses or mcbs and the neutral of the secondary winding shall be brought out to insulated links. Where a residual winding is required the open delta shall be brought out to insulated links. The fuses and links shall then be brought out to insulated terminals located in a terminal box. Secondary fuses shall be provided in the terminal box such that they can be removed with the equipment alive and shall be labelled to indicate their function. For single-phase units separate earth links for each secondary winding shall be provided. Each of the neutral leads shall be connected together at a single earth point in the local control cubicle. Secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall not be paralleled. Magnetisation curves for each type of voltage transformer shall be submitted for approval. Voltage transformers shall be provided complete with galvanised steel supporting structures such that the earthed end of the porcelain insulators is not less than 2440 mm above ground level.
6.5.5
Current transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear instruments and/or metering equipment and shall comply with EN 60044 1 and the requirements of this Specification. Current transformers using oil impregnated paper as the insulant may be of the bar, single or multi-turn primary and shall be hermetically sealed. The porcelain of current transformers shall comply with this Specification.
Each current transformer shall be impregnated and filled with oil of the grade specified in BS148. The following facilities shall be provided: Visual means of determining from ground level the level of oil within the transformers. Oil drain cock and sampling device. Earth terminal of adequate dimensions so arranged that the earth connection couldnt be inadvertently removed.
All current transformers shall be installed with the PI (one) terminals adjacent to the busbars. The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each transformer shall be clearly indicated at the respective terminals and in addition labels shall be fitted in a readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer. Primary winding conductors shall be not less than 100 mm2 section and shall have a one second short time current rating not less than that of the associated switchgear. Current transformer secondary circuits shall be complete and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible position and as near to the current transformer as possible. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type have M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads. Magnetisation and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each type and rating of current transformer. Where current transformers are used for extending an existing protection scheme the Contractor shall ensure that they are correctly matched. Where the Contractor wishes to provide current transformer ratios differing from those specified he should first obtain approval in writing from the Engineer for each specific instance. The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval together with details of the protection, instrumentation or measuring equipment with which each current transformer is to be used. Each current transformer shall be capable of providing the necessary output to operate the related connected devices satisfactorily at the lead burdens involved including bay controllers/transducers associated with SCADA. Where specified in the schedules, current transformers having accuracy classes between 0.1 and 1 may be provided with an extended current rating in accordance with EN 60044 up to an equivalent primary current rating not exceeding that of the associated switchgear circuit current rating. Current transformers for balanced protective schemes, including neutral current transformers where appropriate, shall have identical turns ratio and shall have magnetisation characteristics to the approval of the Engineer for each specific instance. All current transformers shall have a maximum continuous primary current rating not less than the primary current rating of the bay in which they are installed. Current transformers provided for protective gear purposes shall have overcurrent and saturation factors not less than those corresponding to the design short circuit level of the system. The output of each current transformer shall be as specified in the relevant schedules of requirements with an accuracy limit factor of 15 and the Contractor shall
Page 101 of 365
ensure that the capacity of the current transformers provided is adequate for operation of the associated protective devices and instruments. Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the secondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connection required for each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use shall be shown on the appropriate schematic and connection diagrams. All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by means of separate insulated leads to a terminal board mounted in the Local Control cubicle. Terminal boards shall have shorting/disconnecting links to allow testing with the circuit in service and on load. The rated insulation and inter-turn insulation levels for secondary windings should be according to EN 60044-1 The accuracy class of all CTs is as specified in the relevant schedules of requirements. Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs their suitability to withstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be ensured or saturable interposing current transformers fitted. Where supplied, the interposer winding shall be earthed at the control panel. Where more than one ratio is specified and post CTs with multiple windings are tendered, it shall be possible to select either ratio for each winding without alteration to the number of primary turns. All ratio adjustment shall be made on the secondary side. Neutral current transformers are to be of the outdoor totally enclosed, porcelain bushing type complete with suitable mounting steelwork as specified and complete with terminal box for secondary connections. Current Transformers shall be provided complete with galvanised steel supporting structure such that the earthed end of the porcelain insulators is not less than 2440 mm above ground level.
6.6 6.6.1
SURGE ARRESTERS General
All surge arresters shall be of the Metal Oxide type for outdoor use and shall be housed in polymeric housing sealed against the entry of moisture and oxygen. Surge arresters shall be bottom supported or suspended on tower cross-arms and fitted with suitable insulators to facilitate the connection of the surge counter. On the live side the arresters shall be fitted with a suitably rated aluminium alloy clamp. The clamp for the 120kV rated surge arrester should be able to accept an AAAC conductor with 2510% mm diameter. For the 60kV rated surge arrester the clamp should be able to accept an AAAC conductor size of 1210% mm diameter. The earth end of the surge arresters as well as both sides of the surge arrester monitoring unit should accept a copper conductor of 14,510% mm. Surge arrester monitoring units must be suitable for connecting on the common earth of a three phase set of gapless surge arresters and should be housed within a weatherproof housing suitably treated to withstand corrosive atmospheres.
Page 102 of 365
The surge arrester monitoring units should record the number of discharges, the amplitude of the surges together with their date and time, the total leakage current and the resistive current through the arrester. The measurements should be stored in the surge arrester monitoring units, and should be collected with the aid of a handheld cordless transceiver, which then should be transferred to a computer for statistical analysis. The surge arrester monitoring units should be maintenance free meeting general design requirements.
6.6.2
Galvanizing
All iron and steel used in the assembly of the arrester shall be galvanised after all sawing, sheaving, drilling, punching, filing, bending and machining is completed. The zing coating is to be of uniform thickness, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible. It shall adhere firmly and completely to the surface of the steel and is not to blister or be in any way removable during handling or erection. Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coating of at least 600 g of zinc per square meter of surface and be not less than 0,084 mm in thickness, and shall withstand the tests set out in the relevant standards. The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or adversely affect the mechanical properties of the material. After galvanizing holes shall be free from nodules of spelter. If any galvanized part is found to be damaged or abraded and/or if rust spots or other defects in galvanizing develop during the period of guarantee, then the affected material is to be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. To facilitate transport, lifting lugs, jacking pads or other handling devices capable of supporting each unit when fully erected and ready for service shall be provided.
6.6.3
Insulators
Insulators of polymer housing and silicon rubber sheds shall satisfactorily withstand the climatic and service conditions specified. The strength of insulators as given by the electromechanical test load shall be such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads shall be not less than two and a half. Designs shall be such that stresses during expansion and contraction in any part of the insulators do not lead to development of defects. Outdoor insulators shall remain unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working conditions. Insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.
6.7 6.7.1
ISOLATORS AND EARTH SWITCHES ISOLATOR
All isolating and earthing devices shall be designed for outdoor installation and shall be complete with supporting steelwork.
All power driven isolators shall be suitable for local, remote and supervisory control and should be fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. It should be possible to lock-off the manual and local facilities and padlock the mechanism in the open and closed positions with the motor automatically disengaged. The motor-operating mechanism shall be provided with an interlocking magnet for continuous duty to prevent mechanically the manual operation and electrically the motor operation, when the interlocking magnet is off-circuited. Wherever the manual crank is inserted into the drive for manual operation, the electrical supply for the control of the device shall be automatically disconnected. Each power driven isolator shall have its own separate power supply. The motor circuit shall be provided with a two pole overload tripping device with an alarm contact. The motor-operating mechanism shall be of pulse-operated type, i.e. the mechanism shall complete its action although the interlocking voltage is off-circuited during operation. There shall be separate electrical circuits for motor, control and interlocking. An actuated control pulse shall not affect any operation when there is no voltage in the motor circuit. The colour for the open position (O) of the disconnector shall be red and for the closed position (I) green. Local mechanical position indicators shall be provided for all switches and shall be clearly visible from ground level. Isolators shall preferably be of the single throw double air break, centre rotating post type or of the double rotating post type with single air break and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Pantograph or semi-pantograph designs, or other alternatives if applicable, will be considered. The minimum total air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall be of a length to withstand a minimum impulse withstand level of at least 115 per cent of the specified impulse insulation rating to earth and shall in no case be less than the minimum corresponding figure for the isolating distance as given in EN 62271 - 102. Isolator switches shall be designed for live operations and will not require to switch current other than the charging current of open busbars and connections or load currents shunted by parallel circuits or transformer HV magnetising currents. Main contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and arcing contacts, if provided, shall be to the Engineers approval. The mechanisms of all isolators and earthing switches shall be capable of being locked and secured by padlock in the open and closed positions. Reliable and maintenance free electrical bolt interlocking is required in addition, for operation and maintenance of all isolators. Service conditions require that isolating switches shall remain alive and in continuous service for periods of up to two years in corrosive atmosphere over a wide temperature range and without operation or maintenance. The contacts shall carry their rated load and short-circuit currents without overheating or welding and at the end of the two year period the maximum torque required at the operating handle to open a three-phase isolator should be within the capabilities of one man (i.e. approx. 250N). All isolators fitted with earthing devices shall be mechanically coupled or interlocked with the main isolator so that the earthing device and main isolator cannot be closed at the same time.
Isolator operating mechanisms shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure free action and shall be unaffected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanisms shall be as simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts. Approved grease lubricating devices shall be fitted to all principal bearings, which are not of the selflubricating type. The mechanisms shall be housed in a weatherproofed enclosure complete with auxiliary switches, anti-condensation heater, terminal blocks and cable gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the supporting steelwork shall be galvanised. Isolator mechanisms shall be so designed that the primary contacts cannot be opened by forces due to currents passing through them, and shall be self-locking in both the "open" and "closed" positions. The mechanism shall open and close all poles simultaneously. Each isolator shall be provided with auxiliary switches coupled to the main drive mechanism and with sufficient signalling contacts for indication, control, interlocking and other services as specified. Signalling contacts shall be arranged and operate in the manner specified in the relevant clauses of the specified standards.
6.7.2
EARTH SWITCH
Earth switches shall be manually operated and shall be combined with and interlocked with their associated isolating device. Earth switches shall otherwise conform to the applicable requirements for isolators. The earthing switch, when in the closed position, shall be capable of carrying the rated short time current for one second without the contacts burning or welding.
6.7.3
INTERLOCKING FACILITIES
All isolating devices and earthing switches shall be provided with an interlocking system, which ensures safe operation of the equipment under all service conditions. Interlocks shall be of the electrical bolt type. Earthing switches shall be electrically interlocked with all associated isolators so that is impossible to close either switch or isolators without first opening the other. Electrical bolt interlocks shall be electrically energised only when the operating handle of the mechanism is brought to the working position. Visible indication shall be provided to show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Approved means, normally padlocked shall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a failure of interlock supplies.
6.7.4
LOCKING FACILITIES
Locks and locking facilities shall be provided on isolating and earthing switches in both open and closed positions and shall be additional to the electro-mechanical interlocking devices specified. Provision for locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that locks will remain serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operation or maintenance for continuous periods of up to two years and with suitable maintenance shall be fit for indefinite service.
Page 105 of 365
6.7.5
6.7.5.1
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
General
Isolator auxiliary switches must be generally in accordance to EN 62271 - 102, with regard to definitions and terms, rating and operating sequence unless otherwise specified. The contact material, type (preferably wiper contact type) and driving mechanism must be such as to ensure best quality and maximum reliability. The auxiliary switches are classified to the following categories according to their function: Switches connected to CT circuits for high impedance busbar protection. Switches connected to control, protection, interlocking and position indication circuits. Switches connected to supervisory signalling circuits (SCADA) suitable for maximum interrogation current of the order of 2mA. Switches connected to alarm circuits for non-normal closure or complete opening of the main contacts (intermediate position). All of the auxiliary switches with make contact or normally open (NO) type shall not indicate closed position unless it is certain that the movable contacts will reach a position in which the rated normal current, the peak withstand current and the short-time withstand current can be carried safely (EN 62271 - 102). Switches of category (d) are excluded. All of the auxiliary switches with break contact or normally closed (NC) type shall not indicate open position unless the movable contacts have reached a position such that the clearance between contacts is at least 80% of the gap or the isolating distance, or unless it is certain that the movable contacts will reach their fully open position (EN 62271 - 102). Switches of category (a) and (d) are excluded. The sequence of operation of category (a) switches must be such that the normally open (NO) contact makes before the normally closed (NC) contact breaks and vice versa so as to ensure that the CTs are never open circuited during isolator operation. The sequence of operation of category (d) switches must be such that the normally open (NO) contact makes in any other position of the isolator than the one specified above. 6.7.5.2 Busbar isolators - Double busbars
The busbar isolators must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:

6.7.5.3
6 NO and 6 NC of category (a) 10 NO and 10 NC of category (b) 1 NO and 1 NC of category (c) 2 NO of category (d)
Isolators - Single Busbars
The line isolators must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:
10 NO and 10 NC of category (b) 1 NO and 1 NC of category (c)
Page 106 of 365
6.7.5.4
2 NO of category (d).
Earth switches
The Earth Switches must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:
6.7.6
6 NO and 6 NC of category (b) 1 NO and 1 NC of category (c) 2 NO of category (d) GALVANIZING
All iron and steel used in the assembly of the isolator and earth switch shall be galvanised after all sawing, sheaving, drilling, punching, filling, bending and machining is completed. The zinc coating is to be of uniform thickness, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible. It shall adhere firmly and completely to the surface of the steel and is not to blister or be in any way removable during handling or erection. Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coating of at least 600 g of zinc per square meter of surface and be not less than 0,084 mm in thickness, and shall withstand the tests set out in the relevant standards. The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or adversely affect the mechanical properties of the material. After galvanizing, holes shall be free from nodules of spelter. If any galvanized part is found to be damaged or abraded and/or if rust spots or other defects in galvanizing develop during the period of guarantee, then the affected material is to be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
6.7.7
INSULATORS
All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the climatic and service conditions specified. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanical test load shall be such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads shall be not less than two and a half. Designs shall be such that stresses during expansion and contraction in any part of the insulators do not lead to development of defects. Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall completely cover all exposed parts of the insulators. Outdoor insulators shall remain unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working conditions. Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed. Porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal and where necessary approved water and oil resistant yielding material shall be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces shall be accurately ground and free from glaze. Fixing materials used shall be of approved quality applied in an approved manner and shall not be chemically active with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service.
Where cement is used as a fixing medium, the cement thickness shall be as small and as even as possible and care shall be taken correctly to centre and locate the individual parts during cementing.
6.8 6.8.1
OUTDOOR BUSBARS BUSBARS, CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTIONS
Busbars and busbar connections shall be of electrolytic copper or aluminium or as specified. The busbars may consist of either stranded conductors or tubes as specified in the schedules and indicated on drawings. Approved non-ferrous metal spacers shall be used for stranded conductors having hollow cores. Material used for busbars, busbar connections and their supports, whether insulated or otherwise, shall not be stressed beyond two fifths of its elastic limit or its 0.1% proof stress, whichever is applicable. Satisfactory provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of busbars and busbar connections with variation in temperature. Where aluminium busbars and connections are used, tubular conductors shall be of alloy E91E to EN 755 and stranded conductors to BS 215 or other equivalent recognised Standard. The number and diameters of the individual wires forming the finished conductor and the thickness of the tubes shall be subject to approval. Copper busbars and connections shall be in accordance with BS 7884, BS 159 and EN 1977 or other equivalent recognised Standard, in respect of current rating and material analysis. Busbars, conductors and their fittings should have smooth surface finish and be suitably designed in accordance with the relevant Standards in order to avoid corona and RIV interference. The maximum allowable height of sharp protrusions should not exceed 1.5mm. Any defects should be smoothed out and should be blended with the adjoining surfaces. The maximum permissible temperature of unprotected, bare busbars or busbar connections when carrying rated current shall be: Bus Material AAC OR AAAC Al Cable Al Pipe Cu Pipe Cu Pipe Compressed Terminals 90oC 90oC NA NA NA Pad Connection 90oC 90oC 90oC 75oC 75oC Bolded Connection NA NA 70oC 75oC 70oC Welded NA 90oC 90oC NA NA
Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction with variation in conductor temperature and busbars shall be arranged so that they may be readily extended in length with a minimum of disturbance to existing equipment. The design of joints and connections shall be such as to permit ready dismantling. All necessary terminals and connectors shall be provided under this Contract including those required between equipment provided in this Contract and in other Contracts.
Page 108 of 365
Busbars shall normally be in continuous lengths between supports. Connectors shall be of approved type, and, if necessary, type tested. Connections dependent upon site welding techniques will not be accepted. Busbars and connections shall be so arranged and supported that under no circumstances, including short circuit conditions, can the clearances between live metal and earth or earthed metalwork or between other conductors be less than the specified distances. Relevant calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All clamps, and fittings necessary for attaching the busbars and busbar connections to their insulated supports, together with all connectors, terminals and accessories required for attaching the connections to the busbars, switchgear, transmission lines and power transformer bushings shall be provided. Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be of approved types and shall be as light as possible. Those for aluminium conductor shall preferably be compression type in accordance with BS 3288. Suspension and tension clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and separating the individual strands. Tension assembly sets of busbar connections should include at one end adjustable turnbuckles to enable adjusting the conductor sag. Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or failure of the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 percent of the ultimate strength of the conductor as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees. All clamps and fittings and their components shall be electro-chemically compatible with the conductor material and those made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised. Where dissimilar metals are in contact approved means shall be provided to prevent electro-chemical action or corrosion. Unless, otherwise approved, joints and surfaces of copper or copper alloy fittings shall be tinned. Hollow stranded copper conductors shall be supported against crushing at clamping positions by sweating solid or plugging. The open ends of all tubes shall be fitted with caps. Conductors and connectors provided for extending existing connections at each substation shall be as nearly as possible identical with the existing equipment. Busbar supports shall be designed and constructed so that resonant vibrations are eliminated or reduced to negligible proportions. Any required damping will be assumed to be included in the Contract. All bolts and nuts shall be locked in an approved manner. Where bolted connections are used for current carrying joints torque spanners shall be used for tightening bolts and nuts. Also where necessary washers shall be provided under bolt heads and nuts to spread the load and reduce the effect of compressive creep of aluminium under pressure. Torque values must be quoted on drawings. Where current carrying surfaces of connections are bolted together such surfaces shall have the oxide film removed and shall be cleaned and de-greased. A coating of approved jointing compound shall be applied to contact surfaces and voids before bolting. The bending of tubular aluminium sections shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in respect of the angle and length of any such cranked connection.
Page 109 of 365
6.8.2
6.8.2.1
INSULATORS, BUSHINGS AND FITTINGS

Material
Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified and the glaze shall not be dependent upon the insulation. Glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall completely cover all exposed parts of the insulators. Insulator fittings shall remain unaffected by atmospheric conditions due to weather, proximity to the coast, fumes, ozone, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working conditions. Paper insulators shall be of approved design and method of manufacture, and shall retain their insulating characteristics in service. Special precautions shall be taken to exclude moisture from paper insulation during manufacture and assembly. The surfaces of all paper insulators shall be finished with approved non-hygroscopic varnish, which cannot be easily damaged. Toughened glass shall be sound and free from defects or blemishes, which might adversely affect the life of the insulator. All exposed glass parts shall have a smooth surface. 6.8.2.2 Design
All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the specified climatic and service conditions. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanical test load shall be such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads shall be not less than two and a half. Designs shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulators and fittings do not lead to development of defects. All insulators shall be manufactured in one piece. Jointing of solid or hollow porcelain is not permitted except by use of metal fittings. Damaged insulators may not be repaired without the written consent of the Engineer. Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed. Porcelain or glass shall not engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary, approved water and oil resistant yielding material shall be interposed between the porcelain or glass and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces shall be of approved quality applied in an approved manner and shall not be chemically active with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Where cement is used as a fixing medium, the cement thickness shall be as small and as even as possible and care shall be taken to correctly centre and locate the individual parts during cementing. 6.8.2.3 Identification
Each insulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trademark, the year of manufacture and the insulator reference. Marks shall be visible after assembly of fittings and shall be imprinted and not impressed. For porcelain insulators, the marks shall be imprinted before firing and shall be clearly legible after firing and glazing. Glass insulators shall be similarly marked in an approved manner.
Page 110 of 365
When a batch of insulators has been rejected no further insulators from this batch shall be submitted, and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected batch in such a way that there is no possibility of the insulators being subsequently resubmitted for tests or supplied for the Purchaser's use. 6.8.2.4 Suspension and Tension Insulators
Pins and caps shall be made of drop forged steel and malleable cast iron/spheroidal graphite iron/drop forged steel respectively, duly hot dip galvanised having the necessary strength to enable the completed unit to satisfy the requirements of EN 60137 and EN 60383. All pins shall be equipped with a suitable zinc sleeve to act as a corrosion retardation ring. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised to give a minimum average adherent coating of zinc equivalent to 790 g/m2 (110m coating) and the zinc used for galvanising shall be of grade Zn 99.95. The coating must be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible and shall withstand the tests set out in EN ISO 1461 zinc coating shall be applied following necessary treatment and after all saving, shearing, drilling, punching, filing, bending and machining is completed. The specified coupling designations shall be of the type 16A, 16B and 20 as detailed in the schedule of requirements and in accordance with IEC 60120 and BS 3288. Locking devices for the insulator units shall be phosphor bronze supplied in the hard condition, the composition of which shall comply with BS B 24, or stainless steel split pins to EN 60372. The locking devices shall be such that when set under any condition of handling or service nothing but extreme deformation shall allow separation of the insulator units or fittings or shall cause any risk of the locking devices being accidentally displaced. The design shall be such as to allow easy removal for replacement of insulator units or fittings without the necessity to remove the insulator string from the cross-arms. Locking devices shall be incapable of rotation when in position. The shell shall be made of a toughened glass. The dielectric material shall have performance and characteristics in accordance with EN 60672 class G 120. The profile of the skirt shall be in accordance with the profile parameters defined in IEC 60815. The cement shall be inert chemically and shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings. Cement shall be aluminous cement, which is not subjected to an expansion phenomenon. In accordance with ASTM C151 the cement expansion limit shall be lower than 0.12%.
6.8.2.5
Post Type Insulators
Post insulators shall be of the cylindrical post type or made up of interchangeable pedestal post units, sufficiently strong to withstand all shocks which may be met in operation. Post type insulators of uniform composition shall be designed so that they can be used either upright or under hung. 6.8.2.6 Suspension and Tension Clamps and Fittings
Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be as light as possible. Suspension and tension clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and separating the individual strands.
Page 111 of 365
Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or failure of the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 per cent of the ultimate strength of the conductor. Suspension clamps shall be free to pivot in the vertical plane, and shall permit the complete conductor to slip before failure of the latter occurs. The outermost point of clamping pressure shall not be less than two conductor diameters inside the outermost point of contact between the conductor and its supporting groove (the conductor being assumed to be horizontal). The supporting groove, beyond the latter point, shall be curved in the vertical plate to a minimum radius of l50 mm and for a sufficient distance to allow for the conductor leaving the clamp at the maximum inclination to be obtained in service. The mouth of the supporting groove shall also be slightly flared in plan. The grooves in the clamping piece or pieces shall be bell-mouthed at each end. All conductor grooves and bell-mouths shall, after galvanising, be smooth and free from waves, ridges or other irregularities. Bolted type tension clamps shall be radiused at the mouth as specified for suspension clamps, and the above specified requirements for the conductor grooves shall be observed where applicable. In tension clamps in which the conductor is necessarily cut approved means shall be taken to treat the cut ends of the conductors to prevent ingress of air or moisture. The mechanical efficiency of such tension clamps shall not be affected by methods of erection involving the use of "come along" or similar erection clamps before, during, or after assembly and erection of the tension clamp itself. Tension insulator sets and clamps shall be arranged to give a minimum clearance of l50 mm between the jumper conductor and the rim of the live end of the insulator unit or string. Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised. All bolts and nuts shall be locked. All bolt threads shall be greased before erection. All split pins for securing the attachment of fittings of insulator sets shall be of stainless steel and shall be backed by washers of approved size and thickness. The factor of safety of the fittings when supporting the maximum working load shall not be less than 2.5 based on the elastic limit of the material. 6.8.2.7 Arcing Horns and Rings
Where specified arcing horns or rings of approved type, size and material shall be attached in an approved manner to bushing and post type insulators and to the conductor clamp fittings, but not to the clamps themselves, of all suspension and tension insulator sets. Tension insulator sets shall have arcing rings at their outboard end, unless otherwise specified. The design of the arcing horns or rings shall be such as to reduce, as far as reasonably possible, cascading and damage to the conductors, clamps, insulator units, bushings, insulators and to other fittings under all flashover conditions. The arcing horns or rings shall be of substantial design in order to minimise the damage to them when flashover occurs and to bear the weight of a man during cleaning operations.
Page 112 of 365
6.9 6.9.1
STEEL STRUCTURES GENERAL
Steel structures shall be provided under this Contract for supporting the insulators, switchgear, overhead conductors, busbars, earthwires and other equipment and fittings generally as shown on the drawings and called for in the Specification. Structures shall be designed to meet the conditions specified for electrical clearances and to give at least the minimum phase, earth and section clearances for the electrical connections. Line entry gantries, busbar support gantries and earth screen masts are to be manufactured ONLY to the approved designs that are included in the specifications. The structures shall include all necessary access ladders to give access to the various levels of the high-level equipment and shall incorporate all necessary screens to comply with the requirements of this Specification. The design and arrangement of supporting structures shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Such structures shall be rigid and self-bracing against all dead, wind, earthquake, pull-off and other applied loads. Wherever such an arrangement can be adopted, structures shall be braced by horizontal beams at intermediate or high level to provide an integrated framework such that all bending moments shall be distributed in the structures with zero overturning moments at ground level. At or near ground level, all uprights shall be provided with holding down bolts provided under this Contract. Rolled steel sections, flats, plates, bolt and nut bars shall, unless otherwise approved, consist of mild steel to EN 10025, EN 10027-1 Grade S235J2G3 or such other standard as may be approved. High tensile steel where approved shall be to the requirements of EN 10025, EN 10027-1 Grade S355J2G3 or such other standard as may be approved. Steel shall be free from blisters, scale or other defects. Bolt holes are not to be more than 1.5mm larger in diameter than the corresponding bolt diameter. The design is to be such as to keep the number of different parts as small as possible and is to facilitate transport, erection and inspection. Pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoided, and all parts of the structures shall be properly drained. Steel sections forming the framework shall be heavily galvanised in accordance with this Specification. Galvanising shall consist of a coating of nominal thickness 0.140 mm (993 g/m3 average coating weight for any individual test area) in accordance with EN 729 , EN ISO 12944 and EN ISO 14713. Bolts and nuts shall be galvanised and fitted with spring washers. Taper washers are to be added where necessary. Threads of bolts shall be spun galvanised and the threads of nuts shall be oiled. No bolt shall be of less diameter than 6mm. All members shall be cut to jig and holes shall be drilled or punched to jig. Parts shall be carefully cut and holes accurately located so that when the members are in position the holes can be accurately aligned before being bolted up. Drifting of holes will not be ted. Stress diagrams and calculations shall be submitted as required by the Engineer and the dispositions and sections of all members and the design of joints and fittings shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Page 113 of 365
6.9.2
LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR DESIGN PURPOSES
The structures shall be designed to meet the maximum of the total forces calculated vectorially from the following loadings: Self weight of conductor, insulators and electrical apparatus. Wind loading Short circuit forces including "snatch" in the case of bundled conductors. Seismic forces Loads arising during assembly and erection
Seismic forces shall be applied as a horizontal force parallel and alternatively transversely to the conductor axis and shall be equal in value to the seismic coefficient times the vertical self-weight load and applied at the centre of gravity of the structure. Wind loading and seismic forces shall not be assumed to act simultaneously. Allowance shall be made for any additional loads to which structures or structure parts may be subjected during their erection and the erection of conductors and other equipment.
6.9.3
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE TENDER
The ultimate stress in compression members shall not exceed a figure obtained from an approved basis to be entered in the Schedule of Particulars based on the elastic limit strength. The maximum allowable slenderness ratio for various classes of members shall not exceed the values given in clause Design Criteria of this Specification.
6.9.4
FACTORS OF SAFETY
The minimum factor of safety based upon elastic limits under the maximum simultaneous resultant working loads and conditions shall be 2.5. When considering the effect of the self-weight of the structure in either structural or foundation calculations a factor of 1.1 times the actual structure self-weight for both uplift and compressive loads shall be used for both normal unbalanced loading conditions.
6.9.5
LOAD COMBINATIONS
The following loading combinations shall be considered in the design of structures to the requirements of assumed working load and factors of safety referred to above. 1.0 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. Load Combination 1 - High Wind Self weight. A wind pressure of 960N/ m2 applied to one and a half times the projected area of the members of lattice structures. A wind pressure of 575N/ m2 applied to conductors and electrical equipment. Tensions associated with line terminating tower to be as defined in the Specification.
Page 114 of 365
2.0 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 3.0 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4.
Load Combination 2: Short Circuit, Maximum Normal Wind Dead weight. A wind pressure of 450 N/m2 applied to one and a half times the projected area of the members of one face of lattice structures. A wind pressure of 255N/m2 applied to conductors and electrical equipment. Tensions associated with line terminating tower to be as defined in the Specification. Conductor temperature at time of short circuit: 50oC. Short circuit load Load Combination 3: Earthquake and Short Circuit at Minimum Temperature, No Wind. Dead weight. Earthquake load in the most unfavourable direction. Short circuit load. Conductor temperature for short circuit.
Details and fastenings shall be designed to have a factor of safety against failure not less than the main members of the structure. For the purposes of calculating the maximum wind load which may be applied to structures it shall be assumed that the wind may blow in any horizontal direction with wind strength and dynamic wind pressure as stated in the specification. The associated forces on electrical equipment and structures are to be calculated using BS6399 or approved equivalent. The force due to short circuit current is to be based on the maximum force resulting from a "2 phase to earth" short circuit using the specified fault levels and with appropriate factors to cover: 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. A fully asymmetric condition. The relationship between system frequency and natural frequency of the vibration of the equipment concerned. A dynamic factor for sudden application of the short circuit force.
6.9.6
APPROVAL OF DESIGNS
The Contractor shall submit for approval loading diagrams for each type of structure Subsequently the Contractor shall submit outline drawings, wire clearance diagrams, force calculations of an approved format indicating the design load for each member under every loading case and a summary setting out for each member the critical design load, member size, L/R ratio, permissible load, material and end connection details.
Page 115 of 365
After agreement to the structure design, the Contractor shall prepare and submit General Arrangement and Erection Drawings, calculations of design foundation loads, foundation designs and drawings (where appropriate), and anchor bolt and stub setting diagrams. All drawings, calculations and details shall be available before commencement of any type tests.
6.9.7
DESIGN CRITERIA
Maximum ratio of effective unsupported length of steel members to the relevant radius of gyration (L/R) shall not exceed: For leg members For other load bearing compression members 120 200
For redundant members without calculated stress 250 For tension members of tower cross-arm hangers 350 All other tension members 500
In no case shall the outstanding flange to thickness ratio exceed 16 i.e., Where: b = flange width t = flange thickness
bt < 16 t
The minimum thickness and diameter of material used in members and bolts shall be as follows: For leg members For other members carrying calculated stresses For redundant members without calculated stress Gusset plates Minimum bolt diameter for members carrying calculated stress Minimum bolt diameter for redundant members without calculated stress 6,0mm 4,8mm 3,2mm 6,0mm 16,0mm 12,0mm
Each member whose longitudinal axis makes an angle less than 45 degrees with the horizontal shall be of sufficient section to withstand independently of all other loadings a concentrated load of l00 kgf applied normal to the longitudinal axis at any point along its length. The minimum angle between any two intersecting members shall be 15 degrees with 20 degrees preferred. Members shall be of such size, shape and length as to preclude damage or failure from vibration or stress reversal.
Page 116 of 365
6.9.8
APPARATUS AND CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS
Slack spans from overhead line terminating towers complete with tension insulator strings and conductors will be supplied under another Contract. Connections from these slack spans to the substation equipment shall be made under this Contract. All structures shall be provided with such holes, bolts and fittings as may be necessary to accommodate insulators, isolating switches and other apparatus provided under the Contract. Means shall be provided for fixing and bonding copper strips to the steelwork at sufficient points to ensure efficient earthing. Earth connections shall be made to a vertical face clear of the ground. Foundation bolts shall not be used for attachment of earth connections. Structures carrying isolators and earth switches shall be pre-drilled to accommodate earth bonding for earth conductor to the base of the plant item in accordance with the approved earthing drawing.
6.9.9
SAFETY AND ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
To facilitate safe inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be provided with ladders or step bolts, inter-circuit screens, guards and other facilities in suitable positions as detailed in the approved drawings that are appended in this specification. If required step bolts of an approved type shall be at not more than 450 mm centres starting as near as practical to the base and continuing to 1 m below the top of the structure. It is noted on the drawing that step bolts are to be removed after construction for a distance of 2.0 m above ground level. Adequate clearance shall be provided between the step bolts and any obstruction which might interfere with their use. The bolts shall have a shoulder, shall not be less than 16 mm in diameter, project not less than 150 mm, and be fixed with nut, washer and nut. If ladders are required they shall be incorporated into the structure either integrally or separately and shall start 2.0 m above ground level. The rungs shall be not less than 300 mm wide and regularly spaced at intervals of 225 mm. Protection must be provided equivalent to a cage with three back straps and hoops at l,500 mm intervals.
6.9.10
FABRICATION
All members of prefabricated frames shall be cut to jig and all holes shall be punched or drilled to jig. All parts shall be carefully cut and holes accurately located so that when the members are in position the holes will be truly opposite to each other before being bolted up. The drilling, punching, cutting and bending of all fabricated steelwork shall be such as to prevent any possibility of irregularity occurring which might introduce difficulties in the erection of the structures on the site. All bends in High Yield Steel over 5 shall be made hot. For material below 12 mm thick the preferred range is 600-650C and above this thickness the range should be 850950C.
Page 117 of 365
Punching of holes will only be permitted for Mild Steel members less than 20 mm thick and for High Yield Steel less than 14 mm thick, and in no case shall a hole be punched where the thickness of the material exceeds the diameter of the punched hole. Approved steel gauges of the stud type shall be provided to enable the Engineer to carry out such checking of members as may be considered necessary. Built members shall, when finished, be true and free from all kinks, twists and open joints and the material shall not be defective or strained in any way. Where possible pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoided but if unavoidable they shall be properly drained. In order to check workmanship when presented for inspection not less than one per cent of the members corresponding to each type of structure shall be selected at random and assembled to form part of complete structures in the presence of the Engineer at the fabricator's works. If the structures are fabricated or galvanised by sub-contractors the Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer at no extra cost to the Contract, provide a resident inspector at the works of each sub-contractor during the time that the bulk of the steelwork is being fabricated or galvanised.
6.9.11
LONG TENSION MEMBERS
All members carrying tension only shall be detailed shorter than the theoretically required length. Members 3,000 mm or less in length shall be detailed 3 mm shorter. Un-spliced members greater than 3,000 mm in length shall be detailed shorter to a maximum reduction of 6 mm. For spliced members 1.5 mm for each lap splice and 3 mm for each butt splice shall be added to the amount computed for the overall length, as described above, by which the member is to be shortened. The Contractor's shop details shall indicate the amount by which each member has been shortened.
6.9.12
BOLT AND NUTS
All metal parts shall be secured with bolts and nuts with single flat or tapered washers. All nuts and bolts shall conform to an approved Standard, which shall not be inferior to the requirements of the appropriate ISO Recommendations. Nuts and heads of all bolts shall be of the hexagonal type. All nuts and bolts shall wherever possible be so placed that the bolt head is either on the outside of the structure or underside of all horizontal members. If bolts and nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of an ordinary spanner a suitable spanner shall be provided. When in position all bolts shall project through the corresponding nuts by at least three threads, but such projection shall not exceed 10 mm. No screwed threads shall form part of a shearing plane between members. All bolts and screwed rods shall be galvanised including the threaded portion(s) to a minimum average coating weight of 305 g/m2. The threads of all bolts and screwed rods shall be cleared of spelter by spinning or brushing. A die shall not be used for cleaning the threads unless specially approved by the Engineer. All nuts shall be galvanised with the exception of the threads, which shall be oiled. The nuts of all bolts attaching insulator sets, droppers and earth conductor clamps to the towers shall be locked in an approved manner, preferably by locknut.
Page 118 of 365
The bolts of any one diameter on a structure shall be one grade of steel.
6.9.13
ERECTION MARKS
Before galvanising, all members, including all plates and fabricated parts shall be stamped with distinguishing numbers and letters to correspond with approved drawings and material lists. The number of letters shall be at least 16 mm in size, and shall be clearly legible after galvanising.
6.9.14
EARTHING SCREEN
The contract includes ONLY the supply of the necessary earth masts to the requirements of the detailed drawings that are attached to this specification together with the necessary copper strip, 30mm X 5mm, to connect the overhead conductor screen (supplied by others) to the substation earthing system. The rest of the materials shall be supplied by others under a separate contract.
Page 119 of 365
7. 7.1
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM SCOPE
This part of the specification covers the requirements for the procuring of a substation automation system based on IEC 61850 standard, Communication Networks and Systems in Substations. It covers design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing and commissioning. Offered substation automation systems shall provide interoperability of equipment from different manufacturers and minimum-change solutions for interoperability of equipment from different generations. It shall take into account all the automation functions in the substation and cover communications within the station level, the bay level and between these two levels. It also coves the establishment of communication between the substation and the National Control Centre based on IEC 61870-5-101 standard including testing and commissioning of all the required signals.
7.2
DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this specification the following terms and definitions apply. Bay A substation consists of closely connected subparts with some common functionality. Examples are the switchgear between an incoming or outgoing line and the busbar, the buscoupler with its circuit breaker and related isolators and earthing switches, the transformer with its related switchgear between the two busbars representing the two voltage levels, the diameter in a 1 breaker arrangement, virtual bays in ring arrangements (breaker and adjacent isolators), etc. These subparts very often comprise a device to be protected such as a transformer or a line end. The control of the switchgear in such a subpart has some common restrictions like mutual interlocking or well-defined operation sequences. The identification of such subparts is important for maintenance purposes (what parts may be switched off at the same time with a minimum impact on the rest of the substation) or for extension plans (what has to be added if a new line is linked in). These subparts are called bays and managed by devices with the generic names bay controller and bay protection. The functionality of these devices represents an additional logical control level below the overall station level that is called bay level. Physically, this level must not exist in any substation; i.e. there may be no physical device bay controller at all. Bay level functions are functions using mainly the data of one bay and acting mainly on the primary equipment of one bay. In the context of this part of specification a bay means any subpart of the substation like a line feeder, a
Page 120 of 365
Bay Level Functions
diameter or a transformer feeder. The definition of a bay is considering some kind of a meaningful substructure in the primary substation configuration and some local functionality or autonomy in the secondary system (substation automation). Examples for such functions are line protection or bay control. These functions communicate via the logical interface 3 within the bay level and via the logical interfaces 4 and 5 to the process level, i.e. with any kind of remote I/Os or intelligent sensors and actuators. Interfaces 4 and 5 may be hardwired. Device A mechanism or piece of equipment designed to serve a purpose or perform a function. e.g., breaker, relay, or substation computer. Communication relevant properties are described in a proper device related model. A diameter applies to a 1--breaker arrangement and comprises the complete switchgear between the two busbars, i.e. the 2 lines and the 3 circuit breakers with all related isolators, earthing switches, CTs and VTs. It has some common functionality and relationship both for operation, maintenance and extensions A function is called distributed when two or more logical nodes that are located in different physical devices perform it. Since all functions communicate in some way, the definition of a local or a distributed function is not unique but depends on the definition of the functional steps to be performed until the function is completed. In case of loosing one LN or one included communication link the function may be blocked completely or show a graceful degradation if applicable. Functions are tasks, which are performed by the substation automation system. Generally, a function consists of subparts called logical nodes, which exchange data with each other. By definition, only logical nodes exchange data and, therefore, a function that exchanges data with other functions must have at least one logical node. As a consequence, only data contained in logical nodes can be exchanged. Any device incorporating one or more processors with the capability to receive or send data/control from or to an external source, e.g. electronic multifunction meters, digital relays, controllers. An entity capable of executing the behaviour of one or more specified logical nodes in a particular context and delimited by its interfaces. If not stated otherwise intelligent electronic devices have an internal clock by definition providing e.g. time tags. This adds the requirement of a system wide time synchronization of all these clocks if applicable.
Diameter
Distributed Function
Function
Intelligent Electronic Device
Page 121 of 365
Interchangeability
The ability to replace a device from the same vendor, or from different vendors, utilizing the same communication interface and as a minimum, providing the same functionality, and with no impact on the rest of the system. The functions representing the interface of the SAS to the local station operator HMI (human machine interface), to a remote control centre TCI (telecontrol interface) or to the remote engineering workplace for monitoring and maintenance TMI (telemonitoring interface). These functions communicate via the logical interfaces 1 and 6 with the bay level and via the logical interface 7 and the remote control interface to the outside world. Logically, there is no difference if the HMI is local or remote. In the context of the substation there exists at least a virtual interface for the SAS at the boundary of the substation. Same holds both for the TCI and TMI. These virtual interfaces may be realised in some implementations as proxy servers. The ability of two or more intelligent electronic devices from the same vendor, or different vendors, to exchange information and use that information for correct cooperation. Interoperability is a prerequisite of interchangeability The communication link between logical nodes. A logical node (LN) is the smallest part of a function that exchanges data. A LN represents the function within a physical device; it performs some operations for that function. A LN is an object defined by its data and methods. Logical nodes related to primary equipment are not the primary equipment itself but its intelligent part or image in the secondary system, i.e. local or remote I/Os, intelligent sensors and actuators, etc The communication link between physical devices. A physical device is equivalent to an intelligent electronic device as used in the context of this standard. A PICOM (Piece of Information for COMmunication) is a description of an information transfer with given communication attributes between two logical nodes. It contains also the information to be transmitted and, in addition, requirement attributes like performance. All power system equipment and switchgear is often called primary equipment or primary system.
Interface Related Station Level Functions
Interoperability
Logical Connection Logical Node
Physical Connection Physical Device PICOM
Primary System
Page 122 of 365
Process Level Functions
Process level functions are all functions interfacing to the process, i.e. basically binary and analogue I/O functions like data acquisition (incl. sampling) and issuing of commands. These functions communicate via the logical interfaces 4 and 5 to the bay level. Process related station level functions are functions using the data of more than one bay or of the complete substation and acting on the primary equipment of more than one bay or of the complete substation. Examples of such functions are station wide interlocking, automatic sequencers or busbar protection. These functions communicate mainly via the logical interface 8. All components and systems to operate, protect, monitor, etc.. The secondary system allows operating and monitoring the primary system. In case of full application of numerical technology, the secondary system is synonymous with the substation automation system. These functions refer to the substation as whole. There are two classes of station level functions; i.e. Process related station level functions and Interface related station level functions The logical system is a union of all (via its logical nodes) communicating application functions performing some overall task like management of a substation. The physical system is composed of all devices hosting these functions and the interconnecting physical communication network. The boundary of a system is given by its logical or physical interfaces. Examples are industrial systems, management systems, information systems, etc. Within the scope of this specification, system refers to substation automation systems always if not mentioned otherwise.
Process Related Station Level Functions
Secondary System
Station Level Functions
System
7.3
GPS HMI I/O IED IF ISO LAN LC LN MMS NCC OSI PC PD
ABBREVIATIONS
Global Positioning System (time source) Human Machine Interface Input and Output contacts or channels (depending on context) Intelligent Electronic Device (Serial) Interface International Standard Organization Local Area Network Logical Connection Logical Node Manufacturing Message Specification Network Control Centre Open System Interconnection Physical Connection Physical Device
Page 123 of 365
PICOM SAS TCI TMI
Piece of Information for COMmunication Substation Automation System Telecontrol Interface (for example, to NCC) Telemonitoring Interface (for example, to engineers workplace)
7.4 7.4.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Introduction
The Substation Automated System shall monitor and control the entire substation and shall be based on IEC 61850. It shall be a fully integrated system and has to fulfil all secondary tasks of the substation. The system shall provide interoperability between all devices. Communication between these devices has to fulfil all the requirements of protection and control functions that are described in this specification. It shall fulfil at least the following functions but not being limited to: Telecontrol interface to upstream network control/process control centre with communication protocol IEC 60870-5-101 interface to IEDs (intelligent electronic devices, e.g. protection devices, voltage regulators, bay computers) Control of switchgear devices, e.g., CBs, isolators, earth switches, etc. Switchgear alarm and status monitoring Switchgear alarm and status display Acquisition, pre-processing and display of measured values Operational metering Sequence of event recording (SOE) Archiving of data comprising of measured values, event and alarm data, including those obtained from the protection relay Tap changer control Feeder protection Switchgear interlocking Automatic Control Sequences Synchrocheck Monitoring of station batteries and battery charger, LV AC control panel, fire alarm control panel, HV and MV room temperatures and other devices of the substation Tools (engineering PC with 21 inch screen and software both locally and remotely) for analysing engineering data and interrogating relays including updating of parameters and settings
Functions required for this specific project are listed in this specification or marked in the relevant single line diagrams and other protection and control drawings that are included in the specification documents.
Page 124 of 365
Control devices shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilities for the operation of the plant and equipment at the associated substation. In addition, the plant shall be remotely controlled and supervised from network control centres or process control centres. The equipment for this purpose shall be an integral part of the substation control and monitoring system. The substation control and monitoring system including the communication equipment, all necessary DC and power frequency equipment connections, auxiliary switches, relays and changeover switches shall be provided under this Contract. The Supplier shall be responsible under this Contract for the provision of interface cubicles complete with terminal blocks with isolating facilities and shorting links, where required for connection to interposing relays and transducers supplied under this Contract.
7.4.2
Experience
Control and protection manufacturers Approved by EAC are the following: AREVA France, UK ABB Sweden, Switzerland, Germany SIEMENS Germany GE Multilin Canada
The approved manufacturer that shall provide the equipment shall be responsible for the configuration and commissioning of the system including controllers, relays, other system devices and communication equipment as well as the SCADA signals. The tenderer of the substation automation system must have at least 20 years experience in development, design, engineering and system implementation. A reference list including at least the details as shown below must accompany the offer. IEC 61850 implemented systems must also be listed in the reference list and their status (in progress or commissioned) must be indicated. Customer Substation Name Country Voltage Level Number of Bays Order Date Date Commissioned Protocol type
7.4.3
System Operation
The system shall be state of the art design. It shall be easy to operate, maintain and extend. Modifications of the configuration shall require no knowledge in source code programming languages. Monitoring and control of the whole plant shall be possible via Human Machine Interface (HMI) facilitated with a suitable printer and a 21-inch screen.
Page 125 of 365
To ease trouble-shooting, LEDs shall display bit patterns which indicate the status of components and modules and give fault information in case of failure. Modern Service and Diagnostic tools have to indicate to the operator the status of the system, e.g. connector missing, external voltage missing, etc.
7.4.4
System Safety and Reliability
The apparatus and modules of the microprocessor-based substation protection and control system shall be self-monitoring. Failure of a module or component shall be immediately detected and displayed thus guaranteeing the highest availability. Depending on the type of fault detected the affected module shall either be reset or blocked. Failure of a single module may not impact operation of other system components. Self-monitoring and diagnostics shall comprise of: Live monitoring for modules and apparatus by reply check procedures Monitoring of internal auxiliary voltages Memory checks Software supervision by watchdog circuit Continuous monitoring of all serial connections LEDs on the I/O-modules to indicate internal and external faults Software tools for the diagnosis of the faults and for remote access
A loss off power may not cause the loss of configuration data. An additional battery shall not be necessary. After restoration of power the system shall restart automatically. During start-up all output contacts shall be reset and blocked until after the completion of the restart with all settings being set to the default status. To enhance availability neither fans nor mechanical disk drives or any other constantly moving mechanical components are acceptable for use in the bay units or the Station Control Unit. The complete system shall be connected to the 110 V DC station batteries. All necessary rectifiers/inverters shall be provided.
7.4.5
Maintenance
Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shut-off of the whole substation automation system. To ease maintenance and to reduce repair time, defective modules may be replaced without switching off the Station Control Unit CTs shall be automatically be shortened when a related module is drawn out. Spare processor modules requiring customized configuration data for operation shall be pre-loadable. Being pre-loaded they shall be ready for operation immediately after replacement without the need of loading any additional software or configuration data.
Page 126 of 365
7.4.6
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
To avoid electromagnetic interference causing malfunction the system shall be suitable for operation under the ambient conditions present in medium up to high voltage substations. Microprocessor based bay units as well as the systems Station Control Unit must be shielded and be based on hardware components designed for operation under such conditions. These components shall be tested according to applicable international standards. A copy of test certificates shall be furnished to the Purchaser.
7.5 7.5.1
SYSTEM STRUCTURE General
The functions of the substation automation system shall be allocated logically on three different levels, station, bay/unit, and process. These functions shall communicate by logical interfaces 1 10 as described by Figure 7-1. The devices of the substation automation system may be installed physically on different functional levels. Process level and bay level functions may be integrated in a single device.
Figure 7-1 Levels and logical interfaces in the substation automation system The meaning of the interfaces IF1: protection-data exchange between bay and station level IF2: protection-data exchange between bay level and remote protection IF3: data exchange within bay level IF4: CT and VT instantaneous data exchange (especially samples) between process and bay level IF5: control-data exchange between process and bay level
IF6: control-data exchange between bay and station level IF7: data exchange between substation (level) and a remote engineers workplace IF8: direct data exchange between the bays especially for fast functions like interlocking IF9: data exchange within station level IF10: control-data exchange between substation (devices) and a remote control centre The devices of a substation automation system may be installed physically on different functional levels (station, bay, and process). NOTE: The distribution of the functions in a communication environment may occur through the use of Wide Area Network, Local Area Network, and Process Bus technologies. The functions are not constrained to be deployed within/over any single communication technology. (1) Process level devices such as remote process interfaces like I/Os, intelligent sensors and actuators connected by a process bus as indicated in Figure 7-1 (2) Bay level devices such as control, protection or monitoring units per bay (3) Station level devices such as the station computer with a database, the operators workplace, interfaces for remote communication, etc. Figure 7-2 shows the required communication in the substation automation system which can be either with hardwired process interface or mixed hardwires and process bus. In both cases CTs and VTs shall be conventional and tripping shall be initiated by hardwires.
Engineering PC Substation level
Station HMI
Station Control Unit
Telecontrol
Engineering PC Substation level
Station HMI
Station Control Unit
Telecontrol
Bay level
Bay Units (Control & Metering)
Protection
Bay level
Bay Units (Control & Metering)
Protection
Process level
Switchgear
CTs/VTs
Process level
Switchgear
CTs/VTs
Figure 7-2 Substation Communication Architecture
7.5.2
Communication Architecture
Communication shall be based on a 100 Mbit/s redundant switched Ethernet ring as per Figure 7-3. The ring redundancy shall provide a recovery time at less than 300ms. The system shall provide mechanisms as specified in SNMP in order to locate the failure of the system. The Ethernet Switches shall support the following standards: Priority tagging specified in IEEE 802.1P and Q. Automatic address learning and aging SNMP V2 Auto-sensing / Auto-negotiation function capable of being disabled. Cabling:
Outside a cabinet 100Base FX shall be used. The cables shall be rugged and suitable for outdoor use. Inside the cabinets shielded twisted pair (STP) CAT 5 is required. The fiber optic connectors shall be MTRJ or ST. The connectors to the devices shall be RJ45
Figure 7-3 Communication Architecture
7.5.3
Communication Stack
An overview of the communication stack is shown in Figure 7-4. The link layer shall conform to ISO/IEC 8802.3 standard.
Figure 7-4 The mapping of the IEC 61850 data model and services
7.6
NETWORK CONTROL CENTRE COMMUNICATION
The communication Network Control Centre shall be based on the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. The Network Control Centre uses a 2-wire, 1200-baud, ABB type 23WT22 Modem and therefore Station Control Unit shall be equipped with a compatible Modem. The required SCADA signals are as detailed in Chapter Items of Equipment
Page 129 of 365
7.7 7.7.1
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Interoperability
The system shall support interoperability between the IEDs from different suppliers, by supporting the following: (1) The devices shall be connectable to a common bus with a common protocol (2) The devices shall understand the information provided by other devices (3) The devices shall perform together a common or joint function if applicable Evidence shall be provided that conformance tests were performed to verify that the communication behaviour of the supplied devices is compliant with the interoperability specification of IEC 61850.
7.7.2
CATEGORIES OF FUNCTIONS
The system shall be based on the following categories of functions: 1) System support functions a) Network management b) Time synchronization c) Physical device self-checking 2) System configuration or maintenance functions a) Node identification b) Software management c) Configuration management d) Operative mode control of Logical Nodes e) Setting f) Test mode g) System security management 3) Operational or control functions a) Access security management b) Control c) Operational use of spontaneous change of indications d) Synchronous switching (point-on-wave switching) e) Parameter set switching f) Alarm management g) Event (management and) recording h) Data retrieval i) Disturbance/fault record retrieval
Page 130 of 365
4) Local process automation functions a) Protection function (Generic) b) Bay interlocking c) Measuring, metering and power quality monitoring 5) Distributed automatic support functions a) Station-wide interlocking b) Distributed synchrocheck 6) Distributed process automation functions a) Breaker failure b) Automatic protection adaptation (Generic) c) Load shedding d) Load restoration e) Voltage and reactive power control f) Infeed switchover and transformer change g) Automatic switching sequences
7.8
LOGICAL NODES
The following logical nodes are defined, depending on the project and the application as described by the drawings and diagrams of this specification.
1.0 Logical Nodes 1.1 Logical Nodes for protection functions 1.1.1 Protection Logical Node Transient earthfault protection 61850 PTEF IEEE Description Transient earth faults happen if there is a fault to ground (isolation breakdown) in compensated networks. The fault disappears very fast since there is not sufficient current to feed it. No trip happens but the fault direction/location has to be detected to repair the faulted part. At least the degradation of the impacted line/cable is reported Underspeed device is a device that functions when the speed of a machine falls below a pre-determined value Distance relay is a relay that functions when the circuit admittance, impedance, or reactance increases or decreases beyond a predetermined value. The change of the impedance seen by PDIS is caused by a fault. The impedance characteristic is a closed line set in the complex impedance plane. - The reach of the distance protection is normally split into different zones (e.g. 14 forward and 1 backward) represented by dedicated characteristics. Voltage per Hertz relay is a relay that functions when the ratio of voltage to frequency exceeds a preset value. The relay may have an instantaneous or a time characteristic. Undervoltage relay is a relay which operates when its input voltage is less than a predetermined value.
Zero speed and underspeed protection Distance protection
PZSU PDIS
14 21
Volt per Hz protection
PVPH
24
(Time) Undervoltage protection
PTUV
27
Page 131 of 365
Directional power /reverse power protection
PDPR
32
Directional power relay is a relay which operates on a predetermined value of power flow in a given direction, or upon reverse power flow such as that resulting from the motoring of a generator upon loss of its prime mover This directional power relay is a relay which operates on a predetermined value of earth fault power flow in a given direction in compensated networks
Directional earth fault protection for compensated networks based on wattmetric principle Undercurrent/underpower protection Loss of field/Underexcitation protection
PWDE
32
PUCP
37
PUEX
40
Reverse phase or phase balance current protection
PPBR
46
Phase sequence or phase-balance voltage protection
PPBV
47
Motor start-up protection Thermal overload protection
PMSU PTTR
48, 49, 51, 66 49
Undercurrent or underpower relay is a relay that functions when the current or power flow decreases below a predetermined value Field relay is a relay that functions on a given or abnormal low value or failure of machine field current, or on an excessive value of reactive component of armature current in an ac machine indicating abnormal low field excitation. Underexcitation results in under power Reverse-phase or phase-balance current relay is a relay that functions when the polyphase currents are of reverse-phase sequence, or when the polyphase currents are unbalanced or contain negative phase-sequence components above a given amount Phase-sequence or phase-balance voltage relay is a relay that functions upon a pre-determined value of polyphase voltage in the desired phase sequence or when the polyphase voltages are unbalanced, or when the negative phase-sequence voltage exceeds a given amount. By supervising the motor start-up, these protection prevents any overload of the motor Machine or transformer thermal relay is a relay that functions when the temperature of a machine armature winding or other load-carrying winding or element of a machine or power transformer exceeds a predetermined value See above (49) See above (49) Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-rise relay is a relay that functions instantaneously on an excessive value of current or on an excessive rate of current rise Ac time overcurrent relay is a relay when the ac input current exceeds a predetermined value, and in which the input current and operating time are inversely related through a substantial portion of the performance range See above (PTOC/51) with voltage control/dependency
Rotor thermal overload protection Stator thermal overload protection Instantaneous overcurrent or rate of rise protection AC time overcurrent protection
PROL PSOL PIOC
49R 49S 50
PTOC
51
Voltage controlled/dependent time overcurrent protection Power factor protection
PVOC
51V
PPFR
55
(Time) Overvoltage protection DC-overvoltage protection Voltage or current balance protection
PTOV PDOV PVCB
59 59DC 60
Power factor relay is a relay that operates when the power factor in an ac circuit rises above or falls below a predetermined value Overvoltage relay is a relay which operates when its input voltage is more than a predetermined value See above (PTOV/59) Voltage or current balance relay is a relay that operates on a given difference on voltage, or current input or output, of two circuits
Page 132 of 365
Earth fault protection/Ground detection Rotor earth fault protection Stator earth fault protection Interturn fault protection AC directional overcurrent protection Directional earth fault protection DC time overcurrent protection Phase angle or out-of-step protection
PHIZ
64
Ground detector relay is a relay that operates on failure of machine or other apparatus insulation to ground See above (PHIZ/64) See above (PHIZ/64) See above (PHIZ/64) Ac directional overcurrent relay is a relay that functions on a desired value of ac overcurrent flowing in a predetermined direction See above (PDOC/67) DC overcurrent relay is a relay that functions when the current in a dc circuit exceeds a given value Phase-angle measuring or out-of-step protective relay is a relay that functions at a predetermined phase angle between two voltages or between two currents or between voltage and current Frequency relay is a relay that responds to the frequency of an electric quantity, operating when the frequency or change of frequency exceeds or is less than a predetermined value Differential protective relay is a protective relay that functions on a percentage or phase angle or other quantitative difference of two currents or some other electrical quantities See above (PDIF/87) See above (PDIF/87) See above (PDIF/87) See above (PDIF/87) Special for transformers are inrush currents with dedicated harmonics which have to be considered by the transformer protection See above (PPDF/87) The complexity of the busbar node with changing topology up to a split into two or more nodes needs special means like a dynamic busbar image.- It has to be considered that at least a second busbar protection algorithm exists which is based on the direction comparison of the fault direction in all feeders. See above (PDIF/87) See above (PDIF/87) Description Acquisition functions for voltage and current waveforms from the power process (CTs, VTs), and for position indications of binary inputs. Also calculated values like power and calculated binary signals may be recorded by this function if applicable. The disturbance recording evaluation is needed as a server for HMI on station level (or even on a higher level) or for calculation of combined disturbance records.
PREF PSEF PITF PDOC
64R 64S 64W 67
PDEF PDCO PPAM
67N 76 78
Frequency protection
PFRQ
81
Differential protection
PDIF
87
Phase comparison protection Differential line protection Restricted earth fault protection Differential transformer protection Busbar protection
PPDF PLDF PNDF PTDF
87P 87L 87N 87T
PBDF
87B
Motor differential protection Generator differential prot. Logical Node Disturbance recording (bay/process level : acquisition)
PMDF PGDF 61850 RDRE
87M 87G IEEE
1.1.2 Protection Related Functions
Disturbance recording (station level : evaluation)
RDRS
Page 133 of 365
Automatic reclosing
RREC
79
Breaker failure
RBRF
50BF
Carrier or pilot wire protection Fault locator
RCPW
85
Ac closing relay is a relay that controls the automatic reclosing and locking out of an ac circuit interrupter. After any successful protection trip the automatic reclosing tries 1 to 3 times to reclose the open breaker again with different time delays assuming a transient fault Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-rise relay is a relay that functions instantaneously on an excessive value of current or on an excessive rate of current rise. In case of a breaker failure the fault is not cleared. Therefore, neighbouring breakers have to be are tripped Carrier or pilot-wire receiver relay is a relay that is operated or restrained by a signal used in connection with carriercurrent or dc pilot-wire fault relaying. The fault locator calculates out of the protection information (e.g. the fault impedance of the LN distance function) the location of the fault in km
RFLO
Synchrocheck / Synchronizing or Synchronism-Check
RSYN
25
Power swing blocking
RPSB
78
Synchronizing or synchronism-check device is a device that operates when two ac circuits are within the desired limits of frequency, phase-angle and voltage, to permit or to cause the paralleling of these two circuits. To avoid stress for the switching device and the network, closing of circuit breaker is allowed by the synchrocheck only, if the differences of voltage, frequency and phase angle are within certain limits. Phase-angle measuring or out-of-step protective relay is a relay that functions at a predetermined phase angle between two voltages or between two currents or between voltage and current
1.2 Logical Nodes for Control 1.2.1 Control Logical Node Alarm handling (Creation of group alarms and group events) 61850 CALH Description For the communication, there is no difference between alarms and events, if a time tag is added to any data transmitted. If several events or alarms have to be combined to group alarms, a separate, configurable function is needed. The related LN may be used to calculate new data out of individual data from different logical nodes. Remote acknowledgement with different priority and authority shall be possible. The definition and handling of alarms is an engineering issue. The switch control LN handles all switchgear operations from the operators and from related automatics. It checks the authorization of the commands. It supervises the command execution and gives an alarm in case if improper ending of the command. It asks for releases from interlocking, synchrocheck, autoreclosure, etc. if applicable.
Switch controller Controls any switchgear, i.e. the devices described by XCBR and XSWI
CSWI
Page 134 of 365
Point-on-wave breaker controller Controls a circuit breaker with point-onwave switching capability
CPOW
The point-on-wave breaker controller LN provides all functionality to close or open a circuit breaker at a certain instant of time, i.e. a certain point of the voltage or current wave. It is started by request either from CSWI or RREC. For closing it compares similar as RSYN the voltages on both sides of the breaker to get the minimum stress. This holds also if one of the voltages is zero. For opening the point of minimum stress is calculated referring to the current wave. The selection command activates the voltage selection. It calculates the point of minimum stress and issues a closing or opening (depending on the intended command) execute command with an absolute time referring to the requested point-on-wave. For these calculations the conditions in all three phases are considered. If switching per phase is applicable three execution times are provided. Interlocking may be totally centralized or totally decentralized. Since the interlocking rules are basically the same on bay and station level and based on all related position indications the different interlocking LNs may be seen as instances of the same LN class Interlocking (IL). 1) Interlocking of switchgear at bay level All interlocking rules referring to a bay are included in this LN. Releases or blockings of requested commands are issued. In case of status changes affecting interlocking blocking commands are issued. 2) Interlocking of switchgear at station level All interlocking rules referring to the station are included in this LN. Releases or blockings of requested commands are issued. Information with the LN bay interlocking is exchanged
Interlocking function at station and/or bay level
CILO
1.2.2 Interfaces, logging, and archiving Logical Node Operator interface control local at bay level control at station level 61850 IHMI Description 1) Front-panel operator interface at bay level to be used for configuration, etc. and local control 2) Local operator interface at station level to be used as work place for the station operator The role of the different HMI is not fixed for most of the functions and is defined in the engineering phase. Remote control interface or Telecontrol interface ITCI Telecontrol interface to be used for remote control from higher control level Basically, the TCI will communicate the same data as the station level HMI or a subset of these data The role of the different interfaces is not fixed for most of the functions and defined in the engineering phase Remote monitoring interface / Telemonitoring interface ITMI Telemonitoring interface to be used for remote monitoring and maintenance using a subset of all information available in the substation and allows no control. The role of the different interfaces is not fixed for most of the functions and defined in the engineering phase Archiving IARC Archiving to be used as sink and source for long-term historical data, normally used globally for the complete substation on station level
Page 135 of 365
1.2.3 Automatic Process Control Logical Node Automatic tap changer control 61850 ATCC Description Automatics to maintain the voltage of a busbar within a specific range using tap changers. This node operates the tap changer automatically according to given setpoints or by direct operator commands (manual mode).
Automatic voltage control Reactive control Earth fault neutralizer control (control of Petersen coil) Zero-voltage tripping
AVCO ARCO ANCR
Automatics to control the voltage of a busbar within a specific range independent of the means used Automatics to control the reactive power flow in a substation within a specific range using capacitors and/or reactances. The grounding of the transformer star point influences the short circuit in a network. This grounding is dynamically determined by a Petersen coil (LN ENF) controlled by ENFC. If a line connected to a substation is without voltage longer than a predefined time, the line is switched off automatically. In contrast to the PTUV having settable deviation from the nominal voltage, AZVT is a binary function only (voltage/no voltage) Several functions are sequences. They are collected in the LN type Generic automatic process control (GAPC). This is a generic node for all undefined functions. These sequences may be implemented with standard PLC languages. The data access and exchange is completely the same as for all other LNs. Examples are 1) Load shedding to shed in overload situations in a very selective way parts of the consumers to avoid the collapse of the network. This load-shedding function may not be restricted on frequency criteria only like PFRQ but include actual power balance etc. 2) Infeed transfer switching to detect a weak infeed e.g. to an industrial plant and to switch over to another feeding line. Boundary conditions have to be considered like the synchronization of motors if applicable 3) Transformer change to switchover in case of overload to another transformer or to distribute the load more evenly to all related transformers on the busbar. 4) Busbar change To start by one single operator command a sequence of switching operations resulting in a busbar change of a dedicated line or transformer if applicable 5) Automatic clearing & voltage restoration to trip all circuits connected to a busbar after detecting zerovoltage conditions (black-out) and to close the same breakers following certain pre-defined rules
AZVT
Automatic process control Means a generic , programmable LN for sequences, unknown functions, etc.
GAPC
Page 136 of 365
1.2.4 Metering and Measurement Logical Node Measuring for operative purpose 61850 MMXU Description to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands like rms values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes like power flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested accuracy for these functions has to be provided. Note: The measuring procedures in the protection devices are part of the dedicated protection algorithm represented by the logical nodes Pxyz. Protection algorithms like any function are outside the scope of the communication standard. Therefore, the LN Mxyz shall not be used as input for Pxyz. Fault related data like fault peak value, etc. are always provided by the LNs of type Pxyz and not by LNs of type Mxyz. Metering for commercial purpose MMTR to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate the energy (integrated values) out of the acquired voltage and current samples. Metering is normally used also for billing and has to provide the requested accuracy. A dedicated instance of this LN may take the energy values from external meters e.g. by pulses instead directly from CTs and VTs. Sequences and imbalances e.g. for stability purpose Harmonics and interharmonics e.g. for power quality purpose 1.3 Physical device 1.3.1 Common identification and behaviour Logical Node Logical node device 61850 LLN0 Description This LN is containing the data related to the IED of Physical Device (PD) independent from all included logical nodes (device identification/name plate, messages from device self-supervision, etc.). This LN may be used also for actions common to all included logical nodes (mode setting, settings, etc.) if applicable. This LN doesnt restrict the dedicated access to any single LN by definition. Possible restrictions are a matter of implementation and engineering. 1.4 System and device security Logical Node General security application 61850 GSAL Description Containing logs about security violations MSQI to acquire values from CTs and VTs and to calculate the sequences and imbalances in a three/multi-phase power system. to acquire values from CTs and VTs and to calculate harmonics, interharmonics and related values in the power system mainly used for determining power quality.
MHAI
Page 137 of 365
1.5 LNs related to primary equipment 1.5.1 Switching devices and substation parts Logical Node The LN circuit breaker covers all kind of circuit breakers, i.e. switches able to interrupt short circuits Without point-on-wave switching capability with point-on-wave switching capability The LN switch covers all kind of switching devices not able to switch short circuits Load breakers Disconnectors Earthing switches High-speed earthing switches XSWI 89 52 Line switch is a switch used as a disconnecting, loadinterrupter, or isolating switch on an ac or dc power circuit (IEEE 89). If there is a single-phase switch this LN has an instance per phase. These three instances may be allocated to three physical devices mounted in the switchgear. 61850 XCBR IEEE 52 Description AC circuit breaker is a device that is used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal conditions or to interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency conditions (IEEE 52). If there is a single-phase breaker this LN has an instance per phase. These three instances may be allocated to three physical devices mounted in the switchgear.
1.5.2 LN for Monitoring by Sensors Logical Node Insulation Medium Supervision Monitoring and Diagnostics for Arcs 61850 SIMS IEEE Description LN to supervise the insulation medium e.g. the gas volumes of GIS (Gas Insulated Switchgear) regarding density, pressure, temperature, etc. LN to supervise the gas volumes of GIS (Gas Insulated Switchgear) regarding arcs switching or fault arcs LN to supervise the gas volumes of GIS (Gas Insulated Switchgear) regarding signatures of partial discharges
SARC
Monitoring and SPDC Diagnostics for Partial Discharge 1.5.3 Instrument Transformers Logical Node Current transformer 61850 TCTR IEEE
Description There is one instance per phase. These three/four instances may be allocated to different physical devices mounted in the instrument transformer per phase. There is one instance per phase. These three/four instances may be allocated to different physical devices mounted in the instrument transformer per phase. Description Connects in different configurations (, Y, two/three windings) the voltage levels of the power system Device allocated to YPRT allowing changing taps of the winding for voltage regulation Variable inductance (plunge core coil) allowing adaptive grounding of transformer star point to minimize the ground fault current To bypass the resistor of a resistive grounded transformer star point for fault handling
Voltage transformer
TVTR
1.5.4 Power Transformers Function Power transformer Tap changer Earth fault neutralizer (Petersen coil) Power shunt 61850 YPTR YLTC YEFN
YPSH
Page 138 of 365
1.5.5 Further power system equipment Function Auxiliary network Battery Bushing Power Cable Capacitor bank Converter Generator Gas isolated Line (GIL) Power overhead line Motor Reactor Rotating reactive component Surge arrestor (Thyristor controlled) frequency converter Thyristor controlled reactive component 1.5.6 Generic process I/O Function Generic I/O 61850 GGIO Description Outputs like analog outputs, auxiliary relays, etc. not covered by the above-mentioned switchgear related LNs are sometimes needed. On the other side, there are additional I/O's representing not predefined devices like horn, bell, target value etc. There are input and outputs from nondefined auxiliary devices also. For all these I/O's, the generic logical node GIO is used to represent a generic primary or auxiliary device (type X, Y, Z). Description LN to provide the time to the system (setting and synchronization) LN to start , collect and process all data for system supervision LN to start tests by using process signals but avoiding any impact on the process (blocking of process outputs) 61850 ZAXN ZBAT ZBSH ZCAB ZCAP ZCON ZGEN ZGIL ZLIN ZMOT ZREA ZRRC ZSAR ZTCF ZTCR Description Generic node for information exchange with auxiliary networks (power supplies) Provides data about battery status and for control of the charging/de-charging cycles Provides properties and supervision of bushings as used for transformers or GIS-line connections Supervised power system element Controls reactive power flow Frequency conversion incl. AC/DC conversion Generic node for information exchange with generators Mixture of data from SIMS, SARC and SPDC Supervised overhead line Generic node for information exchange with motors Controls reactive power flow Controls reactive power flow Generic node for information exchange with surge arrestors Frequency conversion incl. AC/DC conversion Controls reactive power flow
1.6 LNs related to system services Function Time master System supervision Test generator 61850 STIM SSYS GTES
7.8.1
Substation Configuration Language
The engineering of the Substation Automation System shall be supported by the Substation Configuration description Language (SCL), which shall provide the means to exchange standardized configuration data between engineering tools. SCL should be capable of reading and editing all of the SCL files defined in IEC 61850-6:

System Specification Description (SSD file extension) Substation Configuration Description (SCD file extension) IED Capability Description (ICD file extension)
Page 139 of 365
Configured IED Files (CID file extension)
Engineering of a substation automation system may start either with the allocation of functionally pre-configured devices to switchyard parts, products or functions, or with the design of the process functionality, where functions are allocated to physical devices later, based on functional capabilities of devices and their configuration capabilities. Often a mixed approach is preferred: a typical process part such as a line bay is pre-engineered, and then the result is used within the process functionality as often as needed. For SCL, this means that it must be capable of describing: a) A system specification in terms of the single line diagram, and allocation of logical nodes (LN) to parts and equipment of the single line to indicate the needed functionality. b) Pre-configured IEDs with a fixed number of logical nodes (LNs), but with no binding to a specific process - may only be related to a very general process function part. c) Pre-configured IEDs with a pre-configured semantic for a process part of a certain structure, for example a double busbar GIS line feeder. d) Complete process configuration with all IEDs bound to individual process functions and primary equipment, enhanced by the access point connections and possible access paths in subnetworks for all possible clients. e) As item d) above, but additionally with all predefined associations and client server connections between logical nodes on data level. This is needed if an IED is not capable of dynamically building associations or reporting connections (either on the client or on the server side). Case e) is the complete case. Both cases d) and e) are the result after SAS engineering, while case a) is a functional specification input to SAS engineering, and b) and c) are possible results after IED pre-engineering. The scope of SCL as defined in this standard is clearly restricted to these purposes: 1) SAS functional specification (point a) above), 2) IED capability description (points b)and c) above), and 3) SA system description (points d) and e) above) for the purpose of system design, communication engineering and the description of the engineered system communication for the device engineering tools in a standardised way.
Figure 7-5 shows the usage of SCL data exchange in the above mentioned engineering
process. The IED configurator shall be the specific tool that shall be able to import / export data It shall provide IED specific settings and generate IED specific configuration files, or it shall load the IED configuration into the IED. IEDs shall be compatible of IEC61850, by accompanied either by an SCL file describing its capabilities, or by a tool, which can generate this file from the IED.
Page 140 of 365
the use a system SCL file to set its communication configuration, as far as setting is possible at all or it is accompanied by a tool which can import a system SCL file to set these parameters to the IED.
The System configurator shall be able to import / export data (files) defined by IEC 61850 - 6. It shall import configuration files from several IEDs, as needed for system level engineering, and used to add system information shared by different IEDs. It shall then generate a substation related configuration file, which shall be fed back to the IED configurator for system related IED configuration.
Figure 7-5 Reference model for information flow in the configuration process
7.9
STATION CONTROL UNIT
The Station Control Unit shall be a multi-micro processor computer system. Different microprocessors are to perform different tasks such as database and system management or communication. Software as well as configuration data shall be stored in non-volatile EPROM, EEPROM or NV RAM. The Station Control Unit shall be easy configurable and extendible by plugging additional modules into free slots and if required, adding extension racks to increase the number of slots. Only the configuration data is to be updated. The extensions shall not require any firmware modifications. The different slots of the Station Control Unit shall be interconnected via an internal bus integrated into a back plane. Future extensions shall not require any modifications.
7.9.1
Tasks
The Station Control Unit shall permanently monitor itself and all subsystems and shall poll data from the bay units and I/O modules. This data shall comprise of time tagged switchgear status information, system status information, alarms, measured values, metered values and fault records from protective IEDs. The Station Control Unit shall
Page 141 of 365
update the real-time system database and transmit selected data to its communication processors, which shall pass it on to the network control centre or the HMI(s). The Station Control Unit shall be capable to connect and exchange data via the communication bus with other substation control and monitoring systems or operator stations. Control and monitor via HMI of all substations connected to this LAN shall be possible. Beside those general tasks mentioned the Station Control Unit shall be able to perform enhanced automation functions which include: Station wide automatic control sequences Station wide interlocking Processing of analogue values, e.g., threshold monitoring and alarming Command output time monitoring including the reset of the output contacts after successful switching
7.9.2
Time Synchronization
The Station Control Unit is to include an interface for time synchronization by GPS signals. Synchronization shall also be possible with messages from the Network Control Centre or by one pulse per minute from an external clock. It shall synchronize all IEDs via its interfaces. It must be possible to synchronize the whole system from one source.
7.9.3
I/O-Modules
Slots for different types of I/O-modules shall be an integral part of the Station Control Unit. The Station Control Unit should be fully extensible. It must be possible to replace the modules without switching off the Station Control Unit. Further requirements to be fulfilled: The modules shall be protected against touch by a module capsule consisting of housing shell and cover. They shall have a protection rating of IP20 and provided with ESD protection. Real time acquisition of process changes Spontaneous acquisition of events Operating and diagnostic indicators: All modules shall be equipped with LEDs on the front of the housing capsule for the indication of operating states, and internal and external errors. Process indicators: The digital input, control output and control modules should be equipped with LEDs indicating the status of the process inputs and outputs. The process indicators shall be directly assigned to the connection terminals on the front of Coding element: Confusion of the connection cables has to be prevented by snapping in a coding element on each of the function modules and on the front plug connector.
Page 142 of 365
7.10 7.10.1
OPERATOR CONSOLE Components
An operator console shall be made up of a PC with operating system Windows XP Professional running a HMI software package. It is to be connected to the Station Control Unit(s) via a substation LAN. Up to two HMIs should be connectable to this LAN. Future extensions shall be possible. A printer shall be provided to continuously print out the chronological event list and to print out historical event data and records of analogue values.
7.10.2
Functional Requirements
The HMI shall display switchgear status by a customized overview and by detailed single line diagrams with colour mimic display of the different switchgear components which represent status including, but not being limited to, measured values, metered values and transformer tap position. On-line alarm list and event list shall provide additional information on historical and present substation status. Multi window capability is required to present detailed information from different plant sections simultaneously on one screen. The system shall be suitable to be extended to multi-display mode to control the plant from different locations. Typical display update time shall be one second. A printer shall continuously print out time tagged event and alarm data. The HMI package is to include all software and configuration data for this plant as described below. Additional tools shall be delivered to modify the configuration on-line without any programming or knowledge in source code, e.g. display design, alarm and event processing and display. To meet future requirements and to ease the system integration into existing computer systems of the Purchaser the software shall be open providing: Access to its database for other applications using ODBC/SQL Capability to integrate objects from other applications (OLE) Dynamic data exchange with other windows applications (DDE) API and related development kit to access the functions of the package with thirdparty software
All displays shall be fully graphical; the colour screen shall present customized displays. An overview diagram shall show a simplified single line diagram of the entire substation intended to give a rapid overview on the switchgear layout and its status. The overview diagram must show: Which feeder is connected to which Busbar How the Busbar sections are interconnected In which feeder there are alarms ready to be acknowledged Busbar voltages Buttons to open other windows
In the overview diagrams, no control or acknowledgement shall be permissible. The operator has to select a detail diagram where the action may be carried out.
Via buttons in the overview diagram windows presenting detail diagrams of different plant sections can be opened. Those detail diagrams show all relevant information of feeders, such as: Status of switches, operational equipment, auxiliary equipment Alarms Metered values Measured values, e.g., current, voltages, power
In the detail picture details of station components can be controlled. 7.10.2.1 Event and Alarm List
The system shall display an event and an alarm list on the screen and archive this information on the hard disc of the PC. Via buttons in the overview diagram the related window is opened. One line shall be displayed for each event and alarm comprising the following information: Time tag with date, hour, minute, second, millisecond, Information with Voltage level Bay Text of the information Value Cause Destination of the command/information
The memory management for the lists shall be configurable by the operator to modify the time period for recording. Software tools shall be available to export data from the database to a mass memory to keep a copy of all historical sequence of event data. Serious alarms displayed in the alarm list requiring to be acknowledged by the operator shall be marked. 7.10.2.2 Switchgear Control
Sequence of single operation steps. If an operation step is not permissible it shall be rejected by the system. No more than one command shall be executed at the same time. A new command may not be released before the previous one has been executed or cancelled. To control a circuit breaker or switch the operator shall have to run through the following procedure: Selecting the switch: A click with the left mouse button on the switch symbol opens the popup window for choosing the actuating direction. The mouse pointer has to change its appearance if the mouse is within a region in the picture where mouse clicks are possible. ToolTips shall give the user additional information.
Page 144 of 365
Selecting the actuating direction: Choosing the actuating direction by clicking the corresponding button in the popup window shall define the command and open the popup window for command output. Outputting the command: Upon clicking the Execute button in the popup window, the command shall be executed.
The colour of the switch symbol has to depend upon its state. For the following states, different colours have to be defined: Normal state Value not up to date HMI state not OK
The switch symbol has to flash spontaneously as soon as the value of the tag assigned to it has changed and spontaneous has been indicated as the cause, e.g. if a circuit breaker was opened by a protection trip. During command output, the switch symbol has to start flashing as soon as the set actuating direction (ON or OFF) has been chosen. It shall stop flashing when the command is terminated or aborted. 7.10.2.3 Display and Archiving of Analogue and Metered Values
The HMI is to store historical analogue data continuously with a time interval userdefinable from 500 ms to 1 day in the database. The archived data shall cover measured analogue values and metered values. The data is to be displayed in diagrams and charts. The operator may select the values and the time period to be displayed, zoom the diagrams and read out values. Settings for recording and display e.g. time resolution or values to be stored can be modified by the operator on-line. An additional tool that comprises at least the functions listed below shall be available to process the data stored in the data base: Read out the data from the data base Display the data in diagrams and tables Calculate and display average values (15 min, per hour, per day) Calculate and display minimum and maximum values (15 min, per hour, per day)
The management and the size for the database shall be configurable by the operator. 7.10.2.4 Reporting
The system shall support the operator in creating and printing user-defined reports. The data for these reports shall cover: Current event and alarm data Archived event and alarm data Diagrams and charts of archived analogue values
Page 145 of 365
Hard copies Operator reports System configuration data
The layout shall be user defined, a print preview shall ease the design. Printing of predefined reports can be initiated by events, time schedules, or by the operator. 7.10.2.5 Password Protection
To minimize the risk, which might be caused by unauthorized access, the system must be password protected. Different groups of users with different jurisdictions shall be definable, e.g., for monitoring only, for monitoring and control, for configuration, or for supervision.
7.10.3
Operation Levels and Control Mode Selection
Each of the hierarchical operation levels shall have the possibility to block commands from all higher levels. The operation level having currently the proper authority to control the switchgear shall be indicated at the HMI screen and the control centre. A change in control authority shall be logged in the event list. The following modes of operation shall be provided: (a) LOCAL LEVEL Mode selected via local/remote switch at the process level: LOCAL: Emergency control via push buttons that are independent of the control or interlocking system. REMOTE: Operation either from BAY LEVEL or Station Level or Control Centre Level (b) BAY LEVEL Mode selected at Bay panel: LOCAL/EMERGENCY: Operation without interlocking function. This mode shall be used as back-up control when the control system is down. LOCAL: Operation with interlocking function via an independent interlocking unit. REMOTE: Operation either from STATION LEVEL or Control Centre Level (c) STATION LEVEL Mode of control selected via the HMI: Local: Operation via HMI at the station control room.
Page 146 of 365
Remote: Operation from the control centre.
7.11 7.11.1
BAY UNITS Bay Control and Monitoring
The bays shall be controlled and monitored through the bay controller situated in indoor installations at the GIS local control cubicles and for outdoor installations at the protection cubicle. Communication with primary equipment can be either with conventional copper wires or through a process bus. The Circuit Breaker, Isolators and Earth Switches shall incorporate the following protection and monitoring: motor protection (I>) short circuit protection (I>>) supervision of motor running time SF6-monitoring calculation and recording of the SF6-density permanent evaluation of the SF6- gas values indications: loss of SF6 alarm general lockout SF6
trip coil circuit supervision
7.11.2
7.11.2.1
Transformer Control and Monitoring

Voltage Regulating Relays
Automatic Voltage Control of Transformers shall be initiated by Voltage Regulating Relays mounted at the 22kV Incoming Cubicles, supplied by one of the following manufacturers: Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen Germany Eberle - Germany ABB - Relays and Network Control
The reference voltage to the relay shall be obtained from the LV side of a voltage transformer of ratio 22000-11000/110, having accuracy class 0,5 to EN 60044 - 2. The relay voltage reference balance point shall be adjustable. The relay bandwidth shall preferably be adjustable to any value between 1,5 and 2,5 times the transformer tap step percentage, the nominal setting being twice the transformer step percentage. The relay shall be insensitive to frequency variation between the limits of 47Hz and 51Hz. The relay shall be complete with a time delay element adjustable between 10 and 120 seconds. The relay shall also incorporate an under voltage blocking facility which renders
Page 147 of 365
the control inoperative if a reference voltage falls below 80% of the nominal value with automatic restoration of control when the reference voltage rises to 85% of nominal value. The LV voltage transformer supply to the voltage regulating relay shall be monitored for partial or complete failure with the exception when the circuit breaker controlling the 2211kV side is open or when the tap changer is on manual control. The relay shall have the following characteristics: Adequate free programmable analogue ports and binary inputs and outputs Communication interfaces for connection with Bay Level
The unit shall perform the following functions but not limited to: Parallel control of 3 Transformers Control using circulating current method based on Isin and Isin (S) principle. Control of motor drive unit using the step-by-step method Adjustment of all configurations for the measuring transformers Parameter setting with a PC via a front serial port (software to be included) Remote/Supervisory control Raise/Lower pushbuttons Auto/Manual pushbuttons Voltage and Current reference adjuster Measurement (U, I, cos) and Event Recordings Tap Position indication Transformer Monitoring
7.11.2.2
The Transformer shall be monitored for the following: Buchholz Gas Winding Temperature Stage 1 Oil Temperature Low Oil Level Marshalling Kiosk AC Fail OLTC AC Fail Monitoring of fans AC fail
In addition to trips initiated by differential, restricted earth fault, or overcurrent relays, direct trips via copper conductors shall be given to the relevant circuit breakers under the following conditions:
Page 148 of 365
Buchholz Oil surge OLTC Oil surge Winding temperature Stage 2 Pressure Relief Operated Buchholz Oil Surge Earthing Transformer
7.11.3
Bay Units for Transmission Feeders
At the bay level, Bay Units shall communicate with their respective bays via either conventional copper wires or thought a process bus. They shall collect all switchgear information provided and transmit it to the Station Control Unit. They shall be the input for all ac-analogue values from CTs and VTs. The analogue values shall be sampled at a high rate and pre-processed to calculate a variety of measurement values. The CTs and VTs shall also be directly connected to the Protection devices via direct copper wires. It shall be equipped with a large LCD where process and device information can be displayed as a one-line diagram or as text in different lists. Their general tasks cover: Controlling of the switchgear via keyboard and display Control figure in display can consist of several pages Implementation of automation sequences Interlocking via pear to pear communication Standalone operation without the Station Control Unit Release of commands Trip Circuit monitoring Supervision of the communication channels Cyclic check of the A/D converters Supervision of the auxiliary voltages Calculation of the rms values of current and voltage Calculation of P, Q, S, , cos, sin, f Synchro-check Display measured values and status information. Self-monitoring routines
Bay Units shall be built in a compact closed housing with terminal blocks mounted at the rear side. To ensure proper earthing a threaded pin must be welded on the housing and
Page 149 of 365
the surface surrounding the pin must be coated with high circuit capacity conducting material.
7.11.4
Bay-Units for Distribution Feeders
Bay Units shall include all the necessary functions for the protection of distribution feeders and the control and monitor of the circuit breakers. All the necessary information concerning the feeder should be transmitted to the Station Control Unit via the communication interface. It shall be equipped with a large LCD where process and device information can be displayed as a one-line diagram or as text in different lists. Their general tasks cover: Protective Functions (Options as per specification drawings): Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Characteristics according to EN 60255 standard Instantaneous Overcurrent Sensitive Earthfault (Option) Autoreclosing (Option) Under/Over Frequency Under/Over Voltage Breaker Failure Reverse Blocking Switch on to Fault Control Functions: Open/Close of circuit breakers Open/Close of Disconnector Open/Close of earth switch Monitoring of above conditions via double pole auxiliary contacts Bay Interlocking Interlocking via pear to pear communication Monitoring Functions: Self-Monitoring of internal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware and software Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits Trip circuit monitoring Measuring Functions
Page 150 of 365
Current Voltage Real & Reactive power Power factor Other Functions Recording and saving of fault data in chronological order of the last faults Recording and saving of waveform capture Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals and the accumulated interrupted currents Commissioning aids Bay Units shall be built in a compact closed housing with terminal blocks mounted at the rear side. To ensure proper earthing a threaded pin must be welded on the housing and the surface surrounding the pin must be coated with high circuit capacity conducting material.
7.12
SWITCHGEAR INTERLOCKING SYSTEM
The switchgear interlocking system shall be though pear to pear communication of the bay units. It must be so designed, to prevent inadmissible switching commands, to protect persons and to avoid either damage of equipment and blackout of lines or of the entire grid. The function and design of the switchgear interlocking systems shall be extremely reliable and safe. Real-time monitoring and processing of all switchgear positions of the whole substation must be ensured at any time and unclear information, such as intermediate switchgear positions, switchgear fault, faulty data transfer, etc., must never allow switching operations. Mal-operation of control and regulation facilities such as on-load switching of an isolator, out of step operation of on-load tap changer control, CB close during asynchronous status etc., must be blocked. The system shall be designed in such a way that the interlock conditions consider the status of the whole substation. It shall be distinguished between bay and Station wide interlocking conditions. The system shall check all Station wide interlocking conditions depending on bus section or couplers, bus-tie disconnectors, Busbar earthing etc., e.g. to avoid closing of both isolators of a double Busbar feeder when the bus-tie is open. The bay units shall check the interlocking conditions concerning the switchgear status of the respective bay and request the other bay units to acknowledge that the Station wide interlocking conditions are fulfilled before it releases a command. Bay units shall be installed in the bay related control cubicles. Data exchange between bay units, and between individual bay units and Station Control Unit, shall take place via the communication interfaces.
Page 151 of 365
Bay Units shall be equipped with key locks to select local, remote and non-interlocked mode. Via select and execute push buttons control commands may be initiated during local mode operation. Local control must always have priority; commands from higher control levels must be rejected when this mode is activated. Mal-operation of the switching device and the interlocking system itself have to be indicated on the faceplate and signalled to the higher level control system. In case of internal fault, the bay unit must always block execution of commands.
7.13
ENGINEERING PC AND SOFTWARE
All required software, i.e. protection devices, voltage regulating relays, intelligent process devices, system automation, SCL, SCADA , etc., shall be included to ease operation, maintenance and modifications of the complete system. Software should run on a PC with a 32-bit multitasking operating system, preferably Windows XP Professional.
Page 152 of 365
8.
CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR NON-AUTOMATED SUBSTATIONS ARRANGEMENT OF FACILITIES
8.1
Control and relay equipment shall be mounted on panels and boards as specified and shall be erected in permanent buildings on the substation sites or in adjacent buildings as specified. Except where otherwise specified, control boards shall be segregated from metering and protection boards. Unless otherwise approved, the order of the panels shall be as specified reading from left to right facing the board. Panels provided for installation in the same room shall be of same design, colour and appearance. Also panels provided as extensions or for erection in the same room as existing boards shall be of similar design, colour and appearance to the existing boards. Equipment, meters, etc., mounted on such panels shall likewise be of style and scaling similar to the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all connections of equipment to be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully compatible with and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existing equipment. The characteristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Control boards shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilities for the operation of the plant and equipment at the associated substation. In addition, the plant may be remotely controlled and supervised from central system control centres. The system control and communications equipment will be supplied under a separate contract but all necessary DC and power frequency equipment, connections including auxiliary switches, relays, transducers and changeover switches shall be provided under this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible under this Contract for the provision of terminal blocks in relay and control cubicles. All circuits provided under this Contract whether or not they are subject to the system control requirements at the present time, shall be designed and constructed so that the standard facilities specified can be readily provided as required in the future.
8.2 8.2.1
CONSTRUCTION OF CUBICLES General Construction
Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2mm (14SWG). The construction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other reinforcement where necessary to prevent distortion or the maloperation of relays or other apparatus by impact, having regard to the number and size of cut-outs and the size of the panel. The front of the panel is to have a smooth well-finished surface. Each cubicle shall form a complete enclosure and is preferably to be associated with only one circuit of main equipment. The enclosures shall afford IP4l degree of protection for indoor and IP54 for outdoor cubicles, as categorised by EN 60529 in accordance with this Specification. Cubicles shall be so constructed that the front panel or the equipment-mounting panel is removable without disturbing the remainder of the cubicle structure.
Page 153 of 365
Close fitting, lockable and lift-off rear access cubicle steel doors shall be provided and hinged to lie back flat to avoid restricting access. Integral handles shall secure doors and provision shall be made for padlocking. Handles and padlocks shall not be more than 1.5 metres above floor level. Top and bottom doors shall not be interlocked and cross stiffeners shall not impede access to the cubicle. Moulded gaskets of non-ageing material shall be used to provide close sealing. All cubicle doors shall be closed by handle that operates on a 3-point closing device (eg Espagnolette type). The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a matt white surface and an interior lamp suitable for the local LVAC supply and controlled by a door operating switch, shall be fitted at the top of each section. Anti-condensation heaters shall also be fitted in each section and each cubicle shall be well ventilated top and bottom through vermin proof louvers fitted with brass gauze screens. Unless otherwise approved, panels shall be suitable for floor mounting and shall provide for bottom entry of power and multicore cables via vermin proof plates and hardwood sealing bushes. Equipment and terminals shall be readily accessible and shall require a minimum of disturbance of associated and adjacent equipment for access. To assist in achieving this, cubicle widths shall not be less than 600 mm wide and the depth shall not exceed the width. The width between apparatus mounted on the cubicle side shall not be less than that which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and for apparatus mounted on the panels. The arrangement of panel wiring and multicore cable terminal boards shall be in accordance with the relevant Clause of this Specification. The floor plates of cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cable terminations but separate removable gland plates shall be provided within the cubicles, so located as to provide adequate working clearance for terminating the cables. Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinged front panels, these shall be designed to minimise shock and wiring shall be so arranged as to impose no strain on terminations. No equipment whatsoever shall be mounted on rear access doors. All sections of a composite cubicle shall be suitably labelled in accordance with the Specification and labels at the rear with the access doors either open or closed shall also readily identify each section or panel. The arrangement and mounting of all indicating devices, control switches, relays and other apparatus shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The exterior finish and colour of all cubicles shall be to the approval of the Engineer
8.2.2
Control Cubicles
One cubicle may accommodate apparatus associated with not more than two circuits in case vertical barriers must be provided within the cubicle.
8.2.3
Relay Cubicles
Separate cubicles must be provided for the protection relays associated with each primary circuit. Equipment may be mounted on either a removable panel or a rack-type arrangement. Each cubicle shall be provided with a front door. The door shall consist of
Page 154 of 365
a full length and width translucent window contained in a steel frame. The window shall allow a full view of the status of all relays mounted behind the door.
8.2.4
Outdoor Cubicles
They shall be complete with any supporting steelwork necessary for mounting on concrete foundations, steelwork or plant as appropriate. Cubicles shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable gland plates etc., for termination of multicore cables. Door shall be fitted with weatherproof sealing material suitable for the climate conditions at site. The cubicles shall comply with enclosure category IP54 but shall also be well ventilated through louvers having a brass gauge screen attached to a frame and secured to the inside of the cubicle. Any divisions between compartments within the cubicles shall be perforated to assist air circulation. A suitable outdoor marshalling cubicle is to be supplied for each separate bay to be erected at the position shown on the respective drawing. Each such cubicle is to contain all controls and terminations mentioned in these specifications and in addition the cubicles are to have adequate space and termination for marshalling the AC and DC supplies, CT, VT and circuit breaker outputs/signals detailed in the relevant Schedules.
8.3 8.3.1
CONTROLS General
Control panels provided under the Contract shall afford all facilities necessary for the safe and effective control of the plant and equipment being supplied under this and associated contracts. Controls at each substation shall be operated at the battery voltage of the stations, as specified under the appropriate section of this Specification. All switches shall be located at a convenient operating height and so constructed, mounted and wired to facilitate the maintenance of contacts without the need to disconnect wiring. Switches shall have locks incorporated in the design. Control switches must be lockable in the inactive or neutral position and selector switches in all positions. Labels shall clearly indicate all positions and function of each switch.
8.3.2
Control of Circuit Devices

On Local Control Cubicles the control switches for all devices and the lockable local/remote selector switch shall be mounted behind the lockable glass panelled front door. Lockable control switches with spade type handles shall be provided for the maintenance circuit earth and busbar earth switches.
Page 155 of 365
Control switches with pistol grip type handles for circuit breakers and spade type handles for both busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators and circuit earth switches shall be provided. These switches shall be lockable. All control switches shall be effective only when local mode is selected. A semaphore indicator is required for each device as part of the mimic diagram. Each semaphore is to be labelled with the device identification reference. On the Remote Control Panels all discrepancy switches and indicators shall form part of the mimic diagram on the front sheet. The mimic diagram shall be labelled with each primary device identification reference. Discrepancy control switches with locking facilities are required for the circuit breakers, busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators and circuit earth switches as specified in the Schedule of Requirements. Discrepancy indicators are required for the maintenance circuit earth and busbar earth switches. These indicators are to have the same appearance and lamp facilities as discrepancy switches but without either operate positions or locks. A lockable remote/supervisory selector switch shall be mounted on the front sheet for each circuit. The control switches shall be effective only when the control mode selector switches on both the local control cubicle and the remote control panel are in the 'Remote' position. Supervisory control of circuit breakers, busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators and circuit earth switches where specified is to be effective only when the mode selector switch on the local control cubicle is in the 'remote' position and the mode selector on the remote control panel is in the 'supervisory' position.
8.3.3
Control Switches
Control switches shall be of either the handle type or, where specified, discrepancy type and shall be arranged to operate clockwise when closing the circuit devices and anticlockwise when opening. Discrepancy type switches shall be arranged so that two discrete movements are required to effect operation, ie. from either the dressed to open or dressed to close position the switch must be pushed in to permit rotation to the operate positions. Handle type switches shall be so designed that when released by the operator the handle and mechanism shall return automatically to the centred neutral position and interrupt the supply of current to the operating mechanism of the circuit device. Discrepancy switches when released from the operate position shall return automatically to the associated dressed position. When locked it shall not be possible to move discrepancy switches to the operate positions. They shall be free to move to either of the dressed positions. Discrepancy switches shall not be lit when dressed to the same position as the primary device but shall show a steady light when switch and device are in disagreement. The switch shall show a flashing light during the period that the controlled device takes to move fully from one position to the other. A lamp test facility shall be provided in association with any discrepancy switch.
Page 156 of 365
Pistol grip type handles shall be used for circuit breaker control switches and not for any other switch. All control switches shall have additional labelling giving the reference identification of the primary device.
8.3.4
Selector Switches
Selector switches shall have spade type handles. Where key operated switches are specified inserting and turning the key to the required position shall operate these. The key shall be removable in the 'off' position only. All key switches for a particular voltage level at a substation shall have a common lock change number such that with one key available only one switch can be in an operated position at any one time.
8.4
INDICATIONS
Control boards and panels shall be provided with mimic diagrams to the following colour code showing the main power connections in single line schematic format at a convenient height so as to permit ready operation of the circuit-breaker control switches and discrepancy type indicators which shall be incorporated in such diagrams. System Voltage kV 220 132 66 11 Background Colour to BS.381C N.A. Black Golden Brown No. 414 Signal Red No. 537 To be approved
Control switches and pushbuttons shall comply with this Specification. Semaphore indicators shall operate reliably at voltages from 120 to 80 per cent of normal. They shall be arranged so that a supply failure does not at any time create an erroneous indication. Position indication signals of switches and breakers for transmission by the supervisory control scheme shall be derived from separate normally open and closed auxiliary contacts, provided and connected up, under this Contract, to terminal blocks in the associated control panels. All discrepancy lamps shall be arranged to light and give an audible alarm when the position of the circuit breaker or isolating switch is at variance with that of the indicator and shall be arranged to extinguish when the indicator is set to the correct position.
8.5 8.5.1
SUPERVISION RELAYS General
Each auxiliary control circuit but no trip circuit shall be protected by means of two-pole miniature circuit breaker supplied with an auxiliary contact. The auxiliary contacts of all mcb's of the same circuit e.g. isolators and earthing switch motor circuits, heater etc. shall be grouped to give an alarm on the respective control panel annunciator.
In addition to the VT no-volt relay specified for synchronising purposes, the following VT supervision relays are required: A VT fuse fail detector relay mounted in the local control cabinet for alarms and interlocking purposes, to detect failure of all fuses. A VT supply-monitoring relay mounted in the relay panel to detect loss of protection supply for such equipment as distance or directional overcurrent and earth fault protection. This relay should give an alarm when the circuit breaker is closed and one or more phases of the VT output are dead.
Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on d.c. wiring on adjacent circuits, or due to operation of a trip relay contact. Series resistances shall be provided to prevent mal-tripping a circuit-breaker if a relay element is shortcircuited. Relay alarm elements should be equipped with self-resetting flag indicators.
8.5.2
Supply Supervision Relays
Supervision relays shall be provided for both A.C. and D.C. supplies. All protection equipment supplies shall be fully supervised and failure conditions alarmed. Trip circuit supervision relays shall be provided to monitor each trip circuit of the 132kV circuit breakers. The relays shall have sufficient contacts for visual alarm and indication purposes. Supervision relays are required for each protection D.C. supply e.g. Main 1, Main 2, Back-up, Breaker Fail, Intertrip Send/Receive, Trip Relay Reset. Similarly for each trip circuit supply e.g. Trip Circuit 1 and Trip Circuit 2 and for each alarms/indications supply. These supervision relays are to be independent of alarms from the trip circuit supervision scheme specified in the following paragraphs so that the operator can clearly differentiate via the available alarms between loss of supply due to a blown fuse/tripped MCB and failure of a trip circuit supervision relay coil/faulty supervision wiring.
8.5.3
Trip Circuit Supervision Relays
The trip circuit supervision scheme shall monitor the continuity of the circuit breaker trip coils and as much of the associated tripping wires as possible in either the open or closed position and independent of the selected operating position. The relay shall also supervise the alarm supply. The scheme shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The relay shall be able to monitor the coils with the circuit breaker in the open or closed position. The circuit shall be arranged so that any failure of the supervising relay coil (short or open circuit or earth fault) will not prevent a trip signal opening the breaker or cause inadvertent opening of the circuit breaker.
8.6
BUSBAR VOLTAGE SELECTION
For each line feeder a three-phase voltage transformer is to be provided by others, for this reason an automatic voltage selection scheme shall be provided to derive a busbar voltage reference from the circuit voltage transformers. The paralleling of voltage transformer secondary windings is not permitted. The scheme shall employ voltage transformer secondary windings with the neutral point earthed and synchronising across Brown (L1) and Black (L2) phases.
Page 158 of 365
8.7 8.7.1
SYNCHRONISING General
Where specified, manual check synchronising facilities shall be employed for all circuit-breakers controlling feeder circuits, bus section and bus coupler circuits. The system provided under the Contract is to be to the approval of the Engineer and is to be such that the synchronising circuit must be established before the circuit-breaker can be closed. Synchronising systems and equipment provided as extensions to existing systems are to provide identical facilities and be of similar style and design to the existing equipment. Synchronising check relays shall check the phase and magnitude of the voltage difference at synchronising with contacts connected to prevent inadvertent manual synchronising outside acceptable limits. Synchronising check relays shall also be used, where specified, for the automatic reclosing of the feeder circuits equipped with autoreclosing facilities. Synchronising check relays shall not operate when any auxiliary supply is absent. A voltage check feature shall be incorporated to inhibit synchronising if either voltage is less than a preset value, which shall be adjustable in steps from 80% to 90% of nominal rated voltage. The synchronising relay shall prevent closure when the phase difference exceeds 35o, but alternative settings ranging from 20o to 45o at least shall be available also. Closure shall be prevented also if the slip frequency exceeds a setting, which shall be adjustable over the approximate range 0,25% - 0,1%. A guard feature shall be provided to monitor the contacts of the check synchronising relays to ensure that these are not welded together or otherwise permanently closed. Should the latter condition be detected, closing of the circuit breaker shall be blocked. The relay should be capable of operating with either single phase or two phase "running" and "incoming" voltages. The relay should be capable of having two parallel functions: a synchro check function and a voltage check function. A voltage transformer-monitoring relay shall be so wired using normally open and normally closed contacts to block the synchro-check process in case of VT supply failure. Each circuit shall be provided with a synchronising selection switch to enable MANUAL-OFF-CHECK positions to be selected. This switch shall be key operated, the key being released in the OFF position only. In both the MANUAL and CHECK position the synchronising instruments shall be connected to the appropriate voltage transformers and the circuit-breaker closing circuit prepared. This switch shall operate for the remote control mode only and shall be rendered inoperative when supervisory control is selected. The burden imposed on either the running or incoming supply shall not exceed 5 VA. The check synchronising operation shall be initiated by the remote circuit-breaker control switch, this mode of operation shall cause the synchronising selector relay to be sealed in for a period of 5 seconds to ensure completion of the synchronising operation. At the end of this period the equipment shall restore to its de- energised condition.
Page 159 of 365
When supervisory control mode is selected a specific command signal shall cause the synchronising selection arrangement to be made independently of the above MANUAL-OFF-CHECK switch. This will be followed by a breaker close command, which shall be arranged to operate in a similar way to the remote close command. Synchronising facilities will not be used in association with the supervisory control scheme and synchronising signals will not be transmitted.
8.7.2
Synchronising Panel
Where specified, substations shall have a synchronising panel situated preferably in the centre of the control panel suite with a draw out synchronising panel and hinged such that it can be viewed easily from either end of the control panel or it may be mounted at the end of the control board. The synchronising panel shall be equipped with incoming and running voltmeters calibrated in percent, synchroscope, frequency indicator, bright synchronising lamps and synchronising key rest position. A switch shall be provided with each synchroscope to enable it to be disconnected and the voltmeters left in circuit. The connections of regulating voltmeters shall be arranged so that they are connected in circuit by means of the synchronising selection arrangement of any panel equipped with synchronising voltage transformers. Synchronising check relays and under frequency relays, where specified, shall be mounted in either the bus section or coupler control panel.
8.8
INDICATING LAMPS
A switch shall be provided on the bus section or coupler panel labelled "Substation Attended"/"Substation Unattended" so that all indicating lamps can be switched off, if so desired, at unattended substations. Normally energised indicating lamps, if employed, shall in general be normally energised from the station LVAC supply. Lamps and relays incorporated in alarm facia equipment may be arranged for normal operation from the station battery, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Lamp fittings shall allow adequate ventilation and allow for easy removal for replacement of the lamp in the event of failure. All indicating lamps and lamp holder assemblies shall be suitable for continuous operation at the maximum site ambient temperature. Indicating lamps and lamp holders shall be arranged so that replacement of lamps and the cleaning of glasses and reflectors employed can be readily effected. To reduce heating and fouling of the panels, lamps, which are continuously illuminated, shall have the minimum consumption consistent with good visibility of indications in a brightly-lit room. Spare lamps of 100% of each type and size shall be provided.
Page 160 of 365
Indicating lamp glasses on control and relay panels shall conform to the following standard colour code: Colour of Glass Red Green White Amber Blue Indication Device closed Device open Indications normally alight Alarm indication (on which action is necessary) Circuit earthed
Lamp test facilities shall be provided so that all lamps on one panel can be tested simultaneously by operation of a common key. Where alarm facias are specified, all alarm and monitoring indications (apart from circuit-breaker and isolator position indications) shall be incorporated in the facia.
8.9
ALARM SCHEMES
Alarm schemes for equipment at extensions of existing stations shall be linked with and be fully consistent with existing alarm schemes. Alarms shall be sub-divided into trip and non-trip functions and each arranged to operate a common bell or buzzer as specified. Means shall be provided for silencing alarms whilst leaving the bell or buzzer free to sound if any other alarm circuit is energised. Annunciators shall be grouped on a per circuit basis with station alarms on a common panel. Each group shall have accept, reset test push buttons. When an alarm is initiated an audible alarm shall sound and the facia lamp shall flash. Operation of the accept button shall silence the audible alarm and set the facia to show a steady light. An acknowledgement button shall also be mounted on a common panel, which will silence the audible alarm initiated by any annunciator on that suite of panels. The annunciator shall however remain in the flashing mode until individual accepted and reset. Annunciators that are initiated from signals of short duration (fleeting alarms) shall be retained by the equipment through the audible, flashing and steady state sequence. Operation of the reset button shall clear the annunciation but this button shall not be effective until after the alarm has been accepted. Where a fleeting alarm is re-initiated after acceptance but before reset, the annunciator shall return to the first state of audible alarm and flashing facia. Annunciators which are initiated from signals of a long duration (persistent alarms) shall not reset until the initiating device returns to the normal non-alarm state. Annunciator circuits shall be readily adaptable for use with either fleeting or persistent alarm initiation signals. Spare ways shall be fully equipped, half of which should be ready to accept fleeting alarms. The test button on equipment of each circuit shall operate a full functional test sequence on the associated annunciators including the spare ways.
The flasher relays shall be arranged to be cut-out by the auxiliary contacts of the "substation Attended/Substation Unattended" switch, which is specified. When no alarm facia is specified alarms shall be displayed by means of individual lamps mounted on the control panels. Where multi-window alarm fascias are specified, individual display of alarms should be in accordance with the Schedule of Requirements. Where no separate control panel is specified for the Bus Section the common alarms together with the discrepancy indicators for the bus section isolators, should be accommodated on the two control panels, which are adjacent to the Bus Section. The facia legends shall comprise black letters on a white background, which should not be of the 'secret' type. The duration of the lamp flash shall be such that the legend can be easily read with not more than 3 flashes per second. The design of the facia shall be such that a coloured screen or bulb cap can be added at a later date. All lamps shall be accessible from the front. Facilities shall be provided to enable the whole alarm and indication equipment to work into a Remote/Supervisory System. The operation of the substation attended/unattended switch shall not affect the sending of alarms to the control centre. The alarm annunciator equipment shall be equipped with initiation repeat contacts. Where supervisory alarm initiation contacts are not provided directly on a particular device these repeat contacts may be used. The repeat contacts must mimic exactly the operation of the contact on the initiating device so that both remote and SCADA alarm systems operate independently. Where stabilising power packs are used these shall be on a per circuit group basis and output monitored. Failure shall be alarmed on a per circuit basis using an alternative a.c. source. A contact shall also be available and wired out to give a SCADA repeat alarms failure per circuit. Both the audible alarm and all fascias, other than supply failure, shall be cancelled automatically after a time delay. The timer shall be adjustable over wide limits and shall be fitted with an override control switch mounted on the front of the common panel.
8.10
RELAYS, MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND FUSES
All relays shall be mounted in sup-positions that no part requiring inspection or adjustment is less than 450 mm or more than 2 metres above floor level. Where practicable the clearances between relay stems or connecting studs shall not be less than 30 mm and in no case less than 25 mm. Unless otherwise stated all relays for front of panel mounting shall be flush pattern and withdrawable. Relays associated with the three phases shall be marked with the appropriate phase identification and the fuses and links shall also be suitably labelled. In addition to the
Page 162 of 365
labelling to identify relays on the front of panels, all relays and components shall be identified from the rear of the panels. The use of permanently energised relays shall be kept to a minimum and where approved these shall be of a type having a low burden, to prevent drain on the battery. Isolating links and fuses of approved type shall be provided on each panel to facilitate the isolation of all sources of electrical potential to permit testing or other work on the panel without danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels. Carriers and bases shall be of moulded plastic material coloured white for links and black for fuses. Fuse carriers shall be clearly marked with the correct fuse rating. As an alternative to fuses and links, miniature circuit breakers will be accepted. Where miniature air circuit-breakers are used on control, protection and alarm supplies, tripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed. Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type; re-wirable type fuses will not be accepted. Fuse holders shall be designed to lock the cartridges firmly into position without the use of screw clamping devices. Except on panels forming extensions to existing boards where the mounting of fuses and links shall conform with the existing panels, MCBs fuses and links associated with tripping circuits and protective gear test circuits shall be positioned at the bottom of the front face of relay and control boards. Other links, fuses and Mcbs shall be accommodated within the cubicle or at the rear of the cubicle above the cubicle doors. Fuses and links shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate identification. Spare fuses and Mcbs of at least 50% of each type and size shall be provided and delivered to the Purchaser. Links in current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type having size M6 hexagon nuts. M5 size may be used provided the material used is phosphor bronze or stainless steel. All incoming circuits in which the voltage equals or exceeds 125 volts shall be fed through insulated fuses and/or links, the supplies being connected to the bottom terminal, which shall be shrouded. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is withdrawn. Resistance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are on a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided with stud terminals. Setscrews shall not be used.
8.11
INSTRUMENTS
All instruments shall be of the flush mounting type and shall be fitted with non-reflecting glass. All instruments and apparatus shall be capable of carrying their full load currents without undue heating. They shall not be damaged by the passage of fault currents within the rating of the associated switchgear through the primaries of their corresponding instrument transformers. All instruments and apparatus shall be back connected and the
Page 163 of 365
cases thereof shall be earthed. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment of instruments without dismantling. All voltage circuits to instruments shall be protected by a fuse in each unearthed phase of the circuit placed as close as practicable to the instrument transformer terminals, or, where instruments are direct-connected, as close as practicable to the main connection. All power factor indicators shall have the star point of their current coils brought out to a separate terminal, which shall be connected to the star point of the instrument current transformer secondary windings. All indicating instrument scales shall be clearly divided and indelibly marked and the pointers shall be of clean outline. The marking on the dials shall be restricted to the scale marking. Instrument transformer ratios, maker's name and accuracy grades shall not appear on the dials. Busbar voltmeters shall be calibrated while hot. Instrument scales shall be submitted for approval. All instruments mounted on the same panel shall be of similar style and appearance. Instruments shall have 2400 circular scales. Interposing current transformers shall be used in all instances where the instruments or transducers are not designed to carry full fault current.
8.12
CABLE TERMINATIONS
For the reception of external cables removable gland plates shall be provided. All cables shall enter vertically from below and at their point of entry to the equipment fitted boards shall seal them. These shall be of an approved, non-flammable, verminproof material. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20 mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate draining into cable crutches or conduits. Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate.
8.13
TESTING FACILITIES
Testing facilities for secondary injection of current transformers and protective relay systems shall be provided. These facilities shall be such that testing can be carried out without disconnection of any permanent wiring. If these facilities are provided as part of draw-out type relays any test plug appropriate to the design shall be provided.
8.14
EARTHING
All control or relay panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 85 mm2 cross-section run along the bottom of the panels and arranged so that the bars of adjacent panels can be joined together to form a common bus. All joints shall be tinned. mmon earthing busbar of control and relay panels shall be connected to the main station earthing system via a copper earthing connection of not less than 85 mm2 Metal cases of instruments and metal bases of relays on the panels shall be connected to this bar by conductors of a sectional area of not less than 2.5 mm2. Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in themselves and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible
position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type, having M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads.
8.15 8.15.1
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND TELEMETERING CABINETS General
A separate floor mounting marshalling cabinet shall be provided by others to form the interface between the switchgear in the substation yard and the remote supervisory control equipment. The rest of the measuring, indication and control functions shall be marshalled in the remote control panels and/or relay panels. In addition to the standard requirements for control/relay panels and marshalling kiosks specified in this document each termination shall incorporate terminal blocks, each terminal of which, with the exception of those connected to current transformer circuitry, shall be provided with an open-circuiting link which may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring. Terminations connected to current transformers circuitry shall be provided with shorting links on the switchgear side of the terminals, which may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring. Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled with the related circuit description (eg feeder circuit, transformer circuit etc.). The plant side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits. Intermixing of circuit terminations will not be accepted. The SCADA side terminal blocks shall be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications and Control. All cross connections facilities between the terminal blocks shall be supplied under this Contract. All supervisory indicating devices, alarm initiating devices and controls etc. shall be arranged as required to ensure satisfactory operation in conjunction with the supervisory channel. Further, the duration of the pulse employed by the supervisory channel equipment, shall be two seconds and any further delay required by the Switchgear contractor for the satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be arranged under this contract.
8.15.2
Reception of Remote Controls
Wiring to enable the following signals to be received from the tele-metering and supervisory equipment is to be cabled to the marshalling cabinet.
Control (trip/close) of all circuit breakers. Control (open/close) of all power operated disconnectors. Resetting of electrically reset type trip relays.
Interposing relays are to be provided under this contract in the control or relay panels with contacts capable of handling the switchgear tripping and closing currents. The operating coils of these relays are to be suitable for operation from a 50V battery and shall have a resistance to suit the supervisory control scheme automatic checking facility; all relay coil resistances shall be identical and the value required till be determined during the design stage.
Page 165 of 365
8.15.3
Teleprotection Signals
At the protective relay panels, the cables for the teleprotection signals are to be terminated on terminals, which are wired directly to isolating links. This is to enable the teleprotection equipment to be readily isolated from the protective relays and the 110V d.c. tripping and control supplies. Disconnecting links incorporated in the terminal blocks will not be accepted for this purpose. For each discrete intertripping channel, a two-position test switch ("Test/service") is to be installed on the front of the relay panel to enable the functioning of the intertripping channel to be tested. the switch is to be lockable and provided with a lock and duplicate keys. An indication lamp is to be provided for indicating that the test switch is in the "test" position. A pushbutton is to be provided to initiate a test trip signal to the teleprotection equipment. A second indicating lamp shall be provided to indicate that a test trip signal has been received from the remote station.
8.16
MULTICORE CABLES AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Protection and control schemes should, in general, be based on the use of single 1.5 mm2 cores, except where 1/0,9 (0,8) mm telephone cores are specified.
8.17 8.17.1
TRANSDUCERS General
To provide the Supervisory Control Centre with an accurate view of the network situation, transducers shall be required as specified. The transducers will be driven from the substation VTs and CTs. The transducers shall be installed in the respective control panels. The Transducers shall comply with EN 60688 and the requirements listed below. Transducers shall be of the static type. The Transducer output shall be proof against short-circuit and open-circuit conditions and shall be rated to drive a load of up to at least 1000 Ohms connected to the SCADA interface terminals (after allowing for any other loads). User adjustment of Transducer output shall be provided. All necessary instructions for adjustment and calibration shall be provided. The Tenderer shall suggest calibration instruments for the approved types of transducers. Transducers connected to CT secondary windings shall have a short-term overload withstand capability of 25 times rated input current for 3 seconds. Additionally, the current circuits shall withstand twice the rated current continuously. The continuous overload rating of the transducers shall not be less than 1.3 times the rated voltage and 2 times the rated current. The burden imposed upon a CT circuit by a Transducer shall not exceed 1 VA. The corresponding burden imposed upon a VT circuit shall not exceed 2 VA. Auxiliary electrical supplies required for Transducer operation shall be derived by internal connections from the voltage circuit input. Where the VT circuit powers a Transducer the
Page 166 of 365
total burden imposed shall not exceed 10 VA. Self-powered current Transducers shall not impose a burden greater than 3 VA. Shorting and isolating links shall be provided in the secondary current circuits to prevent open circuited CT's under any conditions and to permit disconnecting or testing of current transducers without disturbing the protection circuits. Isolating links for voltage circuits shall be provided. The accuracy shall be class 0.5 or better for voltage and current and between 0.1% and 0.3% of reading for watt and var (but not for the fiducial value). The Transducer response time shall not exceed 0.5 seconds. Ripple current in the Transducer output shall not exceed 0.5% r.m.s. (1.4% peak to peak). The rated input parameters shall be: Input Voltage: Input Current: Frequency: 110 V 1A 50Hz
The Transducer rating label shall include, as applicable:
VT ratio, CT ratio, mA output for rated input (110V, 1A) and the instrument scale for which the Transducer has been calibrated. Circuit diagrams, component layout drawings as well as operation and servicing instructions shall be supplied.
A comprehensive list of recommended spares for three years maintenance shall also be supplied.
8.17.2
Active and Reactive Power Transducers
These Transducers shall provide a dc output current proportional to the ac power or reactive VA input for the measurement of three-phase unbalanced loads and shall be suitable for reversible flows. Where active and reactive power measurements of the same power circuit are required, a single transducer with two corresponding outputs can be used. Output shall be in accordance with the following requirements: Input Voltage (%) Input Current (%) Output (mA) 100 120 4 100 100 +5,333 100 0 12 100 100 18,66 100 120 20
An output greater than 12 mA shall correspond to a power flow out of the busbar of the switchgear concerned whilst an output less than 12 mA shall correspond to a power flow towards the bus bar.
8.17.3
Voltage Transducers
The Transducers will be used for busbar and synchronising voltage measurements.
Page 167 of 365
Output shall be according to the following requirements Voltage Input % 0 60 100 120 Output (mA) 0 4 10,66 20
The voltage Transducers for phase angle measurement shall have an inverted output of 20 to 4 mA, corresponding to an input voltage range of 0 to 264V.
8.17.4
Current Transducers
The output of the Transducers shall be 4-20 mA, corresponding to a measuring range of 0 to 120% of the nominal input.
8.17.5
Frequency Transducers
The output of the Transducers shall be 4-20 mA, corresponding to a measuring range of 45 to 55 Hz.
Page 168 of 365
9. 9.1
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT General
Protective equipment shall be designed to disconnect faulty circuits with high speed and certainty, without interference with healthy circuits. They shall also be so designed that, when properly applied, incorrect operation of the circuit-breakers does not occur as a result of transient phenomena not arising from a faulty condition of the section of line or plant associated with each set of relays but which may occur during fault periods due to disturbances on the system. Protection equipment shall be designed and applied to provide maximum discrimination between faulty and healthy circuits. All equipment is to remain inoperative during transient phenomena, which may arise during switching or other disturbances to the system. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the correct operation of the protective equipment and shall at least 3 months before commissioning submit for approval recommended relay settings, supported by design calculations for all protective equipment being supplied. Within three months of the award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit calculations to demonstrate that the protection shall be sufficiently sensitive to cater for faults under the specified minimum fault levels indicated. The protection equipment and all associated current transformers shall also be suitable in all respects for a prospective system 3 phase fault level at all substations equivalent to the specified switchgear rating. Overall fault clearance times of main protection equipment and circuit breakers (i.e. from fault initiation to arc extinction) of transmission circuits shall not exceed 100 ms. This fault clearance time shall be achieved under all system conditions including maximum dc offset and any time delay caused by the use of capacitive voltage transformers.
9.2 9.2.1
Protective IEDs General
All protective IEDs shall be manufactured by one of the following suppliers, approved by EAC: AREVA France, UK ABB Sweden, Switzerland SIEMENS Germany GE Multilin Canada
Protection equipment shall be numerical and unless otherwise stated only the latest algorithm based protective IEDs that are in commercial operation shall be accepted. Protective IEDs shall be of approved types complying with EN 60255 or equal, shall have approved characteristics and be flush mounted in dust-proof and moisture-proof cases complying with IP 51 according to EN 60529. The connection terminals shall be allocated at the case rear side and shall allow alternatively screw or crimp-snap-in connection.
Protective IEDs shall have an integrated setting keypad and an alphanumeric LCD display. The setting shall be menu-guided and setting values shall be entered as numbers. The setting ranges shall be limited and checked for plausibility. Setting shall be possible on-line without restart of the microprocessor system. The setting values shall only be valid after a final code word check. The display shall normally indicate selectable load values, such as currents or voltages, and shall automatically change over to fault indications, such as faulted phase, tripping time etc, when a system faults occurs. Protective IEDs shall possess an RS 232 serial interface at the relay front for local setting and read-out of data using a PC. Menu-driven operating programs shall be delivered that run on PC's using a Windows operating environment. The numerical protective IEDs shall be multi-functional and additional protection functions such as auto-reclosure, carrier interface or fault locator shall be integrated as software routines. It shall be possible to switch additional functions on or off. The setting parameters of the switched-off additional function shall not be displayed to reduce the number of setting parameters. The protective IEDs shall be self-monitored and relay failures shall immediately be detected. Additionally, the measuring inputs shall be supervised by plausibility checks. This way the availability of the protective IEDs shall be significantly increased. The numerical protective IEDs shall further provide metering function for local display or transmission to local or remote control centres (I, V, P, Q, cos, f, as applicable). The events of the last three faults shall be stored and kept available for read-out by a PC or by the digital substation control. Distance protective IEDs shall store up to 3 s, three voltages and four currents with a resolution of 1 ms. The serial interface and the data protocols for the communication with local control systems shall be standardized according to IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. The function assignment of binary inputs, relay outputs and indications shall be freely programmable. It shall also be possible to build group alarms or group indications. It shall further be possible to store up to four setting groups in impedance and overcurrent protective IEDs. The required setting group can be enabled by digital inputs. All metal bases and frames of protective IEDs shall be earthed except where the latter must be insulated for special requirements. All principal protective IEDs shall be mounted on the front only of each bay panel. Protective IEDs shall be of approved construction and shall be arranged so that adjustments, testing and replacement can be effected with the minimum of time and labour. Protective IEDs shall be capable of being reset without opening the case. Current transformer operated relay coils shall have continuous thermal ratings of not less than the maximum continuous secondary current of the current transformer at the full rating of the circuit in which the current transformer is connected.
Page 170 of 365
All DC protective IEDs used shall operate over the auxiliary supply voltage range specified in EN 62271 1 and 62271 - 100 and shall be compatible under all operating conditions of the battery system installed. Protective IEDs shall be rated for 125V dc and shall be capable of satisfactory operation over the range 88-137,5V without the use of voltage dropping resistors or diodes. Any auxiliary supplies necessary to power solid-state circuits shall be derived from the main station battery and not from batteries internal to the protection. Protective IEDs shall be protected against externally impressed transient voltages, which could reach the circuitry via connections to instrument transformers or the station battery. The routing of cables shall be such as to limit interference to a minimum. Latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall comply with the Impulse Withstand and High Frequency disturbance tests specified in EN 60255, and Type Test reports covering these tests for all latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall be provided. Protective IEDs shall also remain stable under conditions of Radio Interference. Radio Interference tests acceptable to the Engineer shall have been carried out by the Manufacturer and in this case RFI test reports shall be submitted for the Engineers Approval. If such tests have not been carried out, the contractor shall carry out RFI tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer and submit test reports for approval. Reliable shielding against electromagnetic interference shall be assisted by the following measures: Metal relay case Shielded input-transformers Opto-coupler binary inputs DC/DC converter supply Relay outputs Optical fibre serial interfaces
Relay contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents, which they may be required to control in normal service. Separate contacts shall be provided for alarm and tripping functions. Protective IEDs shall not be affected by mechanical shock or vibration, or by external magnetic fields consistent with the place or method of mounting. The contacts shall be capable of repeated operation without deterioration. Relay contacts shall make firmly without bounce. All tripping relays shall be of the high speed, high burden type. Withdrawable pattern protective IEDs shall be designed so that, when in the withdrawn position, associated current transformers shall be automatically short-circuited. An interlock shall be provided to prevent withdrawal of the protective IEDs before disconnection of the contact associated with tripping. Protective IEDs, which rely for their operation on an external DC supply, shall utilize for this purpose the trip supply of the associated circuit breaker. This supply shall be monitored and an alarm provided in the event of failure.
Page 171 of 365
Protective IEDs mounted in panels shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels describing their application and rating in addition to the general-purpose labels. In order to minimize the effects of electrolysis, operation indicator coils and dc relay operating coils shall be so placed in the circuit that they are not connected to the positive pole of the battery except through contacts, which are normally open. Attention is particularly drawn to the tropical climate and relay designs should be entirely suitable for duty under these conditions.
9.2.2
Displays on the Protective IEDs
The following important information must be displayed without operator action: Protection information arising from network disturbances Information about internal faults and monitors, possibly group indications and status indications. These indications may be given by LEDs or LCD displays. For complex systems such as distance protection, it is required to have some of these indications freely programmable in order to meet customer-specific requirements. Protection information about network disturbances, internal faults and monitors shall be indicated with red LEDs. Status shall be indicated with white or yellow LEDs Ready for operation shall be indicated with green LEDs. Freely programmable indications shall be indicated with red LEDs. Protective IEDs must be designed in such a way so as to show the last event. Information must be retained if the power supply fails and displayed when power is restored.
Furthermore, protective IEDs shall display further information on request like fault impedance, fault current at instant of trip command, line primary values etc. The software version must be displayed on request.
9.2.3
Contacts
As with the LED indicators, some contacts must be freely allocated.
9.2.4
Remote Interrogation via Serial Ports
Provision must be available which will allow information to be interrogated from serial ports for off-line PCs and on-line central units. The scope of data depends on the protection type and application like system fault reporting, fault records (currents and voltages, time resolution 1 to 2 ms), status indications, relay monitor, line parameters and setting values. When the protection relay is used for detection and storage of protection information and/or fault record then fault reporting data shall be stored for at least the last three events (three general start signals). The memory shall be arranged in a first-in, first-out manner. The memory capacity shall cover sequences up to 3 sec. Fault records must be started by the general pick-up signal and the preceding 100 ms must also be recorded. When the memory is full, always the earliest record shall be erased.
Page 172 of 365
The relationship between protection information and analogue disturbance values must be definitive. Disturbance data shall also be transmitted to the Substation Controller and shall there be archived together with real time data from the control system. A single tool for evaluation of data from both sources shall be available to ease fault analysis.
9.2.5
External Signal Inputs
It is desirable for complex protective IEDs to have suitable signal inputs to receive individual signals from other protective IEDs.
9.2.6
Fault Reporting
Numerical protective IEDs shall be interrogated both from an integral keypad and from a serial port.
9.2.7
9.2.7.1
Operation from Keypad

Resetting Indicators
Resetting must be possible at the relay but must only affect the indications and not the memory content. The same applies for remote reset. For protective IEDs in individual housings, reset must be possible without opening the case. A reset button must be provided on the front of protective IEDs built into cabinets. 9.2.7.2 Erasure of Stored Information in Memory
It must be possible to erase data stored in memory but the method must be such that accidental erasure is prevented. 9.2.7.3 Selection of Indications
Selection of indications on the LEDs or the LCD display must be possible both locally and remotely. 9.2.7.4 Setting and Interrogation
For setting and interrogation of the set values, protective IEDs must have integral operating elements. These functions must be possible without reference to the handbook menu guide for sufficient instructions on the relay. Inputs, which are outside the design range, must be rejected. Design must prevent accidental or careless alteration of set values by the use of a password. Input of parameters must be in secondary values.
9.2.8
Man-Machine Dialogue via Serial Port
With complex protective IEDs it must be possible to comfortably set and interrogate protective IEDs using an external device. Operation and setting of the various makes and types of protective IEDs must be possible with common PC hardware. Communication shall be based on standard protocols.
9.2.9
Self Monitoring and Failure Annunciation
The protection systems must provide the best possible level of self-monitoring. Failure of the self-monitoring function must be indicated and signalled. The scope of the selfmonitoring must be comprehensively documented. Internal relay faults and monitoring
must be selectively stored as far as technically possible and indicated and signalled as group alarms. The occurrence of a single fault (hardware or software) shall not lead to an over-function in the command range of the relay. For critical relay failures during faults on the protective system, the relay must be able to be selectively blocked. Blocking means disabling of one or more functions. A separate, potential-free contact shall be provided for DC supply monitoring. The signal must be reset and the relay automatically made ready for service when the supply returns.
9.2.10
Serial Communication Interface
For integration into a numerical, co-ordinated protection and control system, protective IEDs must be provided with an additional serial interface. Interfaces and protocols must be unified, to ensure compatibility between different manufacturers. Communication shall use the standard protocol IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. Interfaces must comply with international standard requirements with respect to the insulation and interference values given for circuits, which are connected to external terminals. The "interference radiation test" and "test with electrostatic discharge (ESD)" and the "fast transient disturbance test" must be observed. The necessary measures may also be fitted in the plug module of the corresponding interface. The interface for the connection of external operating and diagnostic equipment must be accessible at the front of the relay. The requirements regarding insulation and interference tests applicable to other interfaces do not apply to these interfaces but it must be permissible to carry out these functions during normal operation of the relay. Protective IEDs relying for their operation on an external DC supply shall utilize for this purpose the trip supply of the station battery. This supply shall be monitored and an alarm provided in event of failure. DC/DC converters shall provide galvanic isolation between the internal static circuits and the external station battery circuits. An integrated DC voltage buffer shall ensure uninterrupted performance of the relay in case of DC voltage interruptions <50 ms.
9.3
Test and Earthing Facilities
Separate test facilities shall be provided for each current and voltage transformer secondary circuit so as to give access for testing of protective IEDs and associated D.C. circuits without any need of taking the circuit out of service. The facilities may consist of either test terminal blocks of approved type for front of panel mounting with provision for automatic short circuiting of current transformer secondary circuits by means of a switch or by movement of links from their normal operating position or any other testing arrangement approved by the Engineer. If any forms of modular protective IEDs or systems are provided for which specialized test blocks or test plugs are available, these should be provided for each complete relay or scheme. If any other specialized test blocks are required to obviate any disturbance to external wiring during testing, monitoring of currents or voltages or to enable secondary injection testing to be carried out, these shall also be provided.
Page 174 of 365
Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one point only. Links shall be provided for isolation of trip circuits such that operational checks may be carried out on individual components with the remainder still in service. The links shall be readily accessible, preferably on the front of the panel and shall be clearly labelled.
9.4 9.4.1
132 kV Feeder Protection General
Only latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall be provided. The autoreclosing and synchronizing check features shall be incorporated in both Main 1 and Main 2 protective IEDs. Each 132kV feeder shall be provided with two main and one back-up protective IEDs. The two main protections shall operate either on different principles or using protective IEDs from different manufacturers. For O/H transmission lines the first main protection shall be based on "distance protection" principles and the second main protection scheme on "current differential" principles. For underground cables the first main protection shall be based on current differential principles and the second main protection shall be based on distance protection principles. Back-up protection shall provide both phase and earth fault overcurrent protection with selectable inverse and definite time characteristics. Each 66 kV feeder shall be provided with only one main and one back-up protection relay. The main protection shall be distance in overhead line feeders and current differential in underground cable feeders. Back-up protection shall be of the same type as that of a 132 kV feeder. Protective IEDs shall be equipped with Protection In/Out switches to enable the isolation of all tripping, fault recordings, alarms etc for testing purposes. An LED on the relay shall indicate if the protection is out of service and this indication shall be repeated into the remote/supervisory system. Feeder protection protective IEDs shall have the following features: Self monitoring facility and power-on diagnostic routine Giving alarm for loss of voltage, algorithm failure etc Event recording (pre-fault) and fault recording data storage Fault locating facility Remote interrogation via a serial link.
9.4.2
Distance Protection
Distance protection shall be of the latest technology and shall be able to provide full numerical processing of all its functions in the device from the acquisition of the measured
Page 175 of 365
values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers. Only protective IEDs having proof of successful commercial use will be accepted. A reference list shall be provided. The relay shall have sufficient programmable and/or non-programmable outputs for independent tripping of duplicated circuit-breaker trip coils. Appropriate number of programmable and non-programmable inputs for monitoring and control purposes shall also be provided. The protection shall operate for all types of phase and earth faults in the protected zone and direction and the operating time on each step shall be substantially independent of the magnitude of fault current. Measuring characteristic of the distance relay shall be of the mho and/or quadrilateral type and shall be suitable for underground cable feeders where specified in the specification documents. Six Independent measuring elements shall be provided for a minimum of four distance zones. The reach of each measuring zone shall be individually adjustable as forward, reverse, or non-directional reaching. Phase and earth fault compensation features shall be incorporated to ensure accurate distance measurements on all types of fault and to allow for variation in the path of earthfault currents returning to the system. The Tenderer will be required to guarantee that the distance relay offered will operate satisfactorily under the system and fault level conditions described herein. Direction determination shall be done with quadrature voltages and voltage memory. Under no circumstances shall the relay operate for reverse faults even when the voltage supplied to the relay falls to zero on all three phases. Nor shall they operate due to the transient response of the line capacitive voltage transformers during or following the clearance of close up faults behind the relay. The relay characteristics shall ensure adequate fault resistance coverage under minimum plant and single outage conditions specified. Distance protection shall be suitable for use with power line carrier signalling equipment or multiplexed fibre optic channels for aided tripping. Failure of the teleprotection equipment or the communications link shall cause the distance relay scheme to revert to a normal distance scheme with correct zone discrimination. Distance protection shall offer the following in-built schemes selectable through software on the relay to allow them to be re-used on future schemes: Basic Scheme Zone 1 extension scheme Permissive underreach scheme Permissive overreach scheme and Blocking scheme.
In the case of the permissive overreach and the blocking schemes it is preferable if separate underreaching measuring elements which trip independently of the end to end signalling are provided for additional reliability. A weak infeed function shall be provided to allow tripping for faults that cannot be detected due to weak or zero infeed.
Page 176 of 365
A switch on to fault (SOTF) feature shall also be provided to ensure instantaneous tripping in the event that the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previous de-energized line. Starting shall be by impedance measuring. Overcurrent starting will not be accepted. The thermal rating of the relay shall be such that the relay shall be undamaged by the continuous application of 1,1 times the nominal voltage, 1,2 times the nominal current transformer output and maximum auxiliary power supply voltage. Distance protection equipment shall be of the high-speed type. The operating speed shall be such that the general protection speed requirement shall be achieved for faults up to 80% of the Zone 1 reach with any communication link between distance protective IEDs out of service and with source/line impedance up to 50/1. Operating times of the protective equipment shall be substantially independent of fault current magnitude. The operating times shall be stated in the Schedules and, in addition, curves showing the effect of variation in line and source impedance and operating current, shall be provided. Tenderers are also required to submit evidence of the degree of tolerance of impedance measurement to varying values of fault arc resistance and by what means this tolerance is achieved. The distance protection shall include a voltage transformer supervision feature to prevent possible unwanted operation in the event of a failure of one, two or three phases of voltages caused by open or short circuit faults in the voltage transformer secondary circuits or due to opening of VT mcbs. In the event of loss of one, two or three phases, the distance relay shall be blocked and a time delayed alarm initiated. The VT supervision shall not operate during energization of the line or of any power system transformers, nor during any other power system primary disturbance. The VT supervision unit shall be faster than the distance relay-measuring units under any circumstances. The distance protective IEDs shall incorporate indicators to show the zone in which the relay tripped and the phase or phases faulted, whether the relay operation was due to an aided trip, switch onto fault, power swing blocking, VT fuse fail or directional earth fault if appropriate. Indication must not be lost in event of a supply failure. Metering facilities shall also be provided. Where specified each distance protection for the 132kV feeders shall incorporate 3-phase autoreclosing and synchrocheck function. Protection protective IEDs shall remain fully operational during and after an auto-reclosing cycle irrespective of load transfer during these periods. In case of parallel feeders means shall be provided to block auto-reclosing feature in case auto-reclosing has already been initiated in the parallel circuit. Selection facilities are required to either block auto-reclose or allow initiation of three-pole auto-reclose as desired. The distance protection shall also include an echo feature to facilitate tripping of the local circuit breaker if a line fault occurs at a time where the remote end circuit breaker is open for maintenance or any other reason.
Page 177 of 365
The distance protection shall also have power swing blocking and current guard reversal facilities. Distance protection shall also incorporate a fault locator. The fault distance shall be displayed in km, in secondary or primary ohms or as a percentage of the protected line. Compensation of the mutual effects of parallel lines shall be possible. The relay shall be accessed both locally through front arrow keys and a liquid crystal display and via a personal computer for reading and setting the relay. Protective IEDs shall be provided also with an additional serial interface for integration into a numerical coordinated protection and control system. Communication with the relay shall be effected via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All the associated software and hardware required to communicate with the relay shall be provided. The relay shall be reset without removing its cover. Tenderers are required to submit AC and DC schematic diagrams with full descriptive literature and sequence of operations. The Tenderer shall submit information on where and how many identical sets of equipment are installed. Design calculations for current transformers for use with the distance protective IEDs shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within three months of contract award. CT design shall be based on a maximum fault level equivalent to the 132 kV switchgear rating and the X/R ratios quoted in this Specification.
9.4.3
Fibre Optic Current Differential Protection
Current differential protection shall consist of a fully numerical and flush mounted current differential protection relay. The relay shall offer phase segregated current differential protection with high sensitivity for two terminal feeders. It shall be suitable for use with a dedicated optical fibre link or a multiplexed 56/64 kbits/s channel. The communication channel shall be monitored by the relay and when it fails an alarm shall be initiated. Continuous channel propagation delay and measurement shall be carried out by the relay. Intertripping commands through differential protection or through plant status inputs to the relay shall also be carried out. The user shall communicate directly with the relay via an alphanumeric liquid crystal display together with a push button keypad. A serial communication facility shall also be provided for interrogating the relay via a PC either locally or remotely. An additional serial communication interface for integration into a numerical co-ordinated protection and control system shall be also provided. Communication with the relay shall be accomplished via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All the associated software and hardware necessary to communicate with the relay shall be provided. Power-on diagnostic tests and continuous self-monitoring shall be carried out by the relay. In the event of failure an error message shall be displayed on the front panel LCD and the relay shall be blocked depending on the type of failure detected. Event and fault recording facilities shall also be provided with the relay.
Page 178 of 365
Plant status and control signals shall be received by the relay via opto-isolated inputs or binary inputs and output relays shall be provided for tripping and signalling. Tripping indication and fault identification facilities shall also be provided. Resetting of the relay shall be made without removing its front cover. Protective IEDs shall be equipped with Protection In/Out switches to enable the isolation of all tripping, fault recordings, alarms etc for testing purposes. An LED on the relay shall indicate if the protection is out of service and this indication shall be repeated into the remote/supervisory system. In case of a multiplexed fibre optic channel the Contract shall include the connection of the protective IEDs to the telecommunication multiplexer equipment, which will be supplied by others. The connection to the relay shall be by means of optical fibres to ensure the integrity and reliability of signal transmission whereas the connection to the multiplexer equipment shall be made via an optical to electrical converter. The optical fibres shall be 50/125 m, multimode 850 nm with suitable optical connectors at the two ends for the connection to the relay and the converter. The converter shall support a G703 interface and shall be physically located inside the multiplexer equipment in the telecommunications room. The multimode fibres, the optical to electrical converter and the cable connecting the converter with the multiplexer equipment shall be provided by the Contract. The interconnecting cable shall be suitably terminated so as to be connected to the converter at the one end whereas on the other end loose wires shall be provided. In case of direct connection of the current differential protective IEDs at the two ends, the fibres shall be single mode 1300 nm or 1550 nm. The connection of the protective IEDs to the optical dedicated channel is made with single mode fibres of 1300 nm or 1550 nm wavelength with suitable optical connector on the one end depending on the relay and with FC/PC type of connector on the other end so as to be connected to the fibre optical connection box.
9.4.4
Back up Overcurrent Phase and Earth Fault Protection
Overcurrent protection shall include a fully numerical, non-directional, flush mounted relay appropriate for both phase and earth faults. The relay shall comprise minimum a two pole phase fault and a one pole earth fault low set and high set overcurrent elements. Both the current and time settings of the relay shall be adjustable, the design of the relay being such that the setting adjustments can be carried out on load without taking the relay out of service. The relay shall have both definite time and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristics according to EN 60255 independently selectable for both phase and earth faults. Relay setting parameters shall be input via the relay front panel function keys and the liquid crystal display. Interrogation with the relay shall be possible also via a PC. An additional serial interface shall also be provided for an integrated numerical co-ordinated protection and control system. Serial communication with the relay shall be implemented via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All required communication software and hardware shall be provided. The relay shall be provided with the appropriate number of programmable inputs and outputs for monitoring its operation and for signalling and tripping purposes respectively.
Page 179 of 365
The relay shall have tripping indication and fault identification facilities either through programmable LEDs on the relay front panel or through the relay LCD display. The relay shall be reset without removing its cover. The relay shall incorporate also the following functions: Display of on load measured current values Trip circuit test Fault recorder Event recorder
The range of current settings for the phase fault elements shall be 0,1 to 2,0 times the rated current in 0,01 steps for the low set and 0,1 to 20 times the rated current in 0,01 steps for the high set. For the earth fault element the current setting shall be 0,05 to 0,8 times the rated current in steps of 0,01 for the low set and 0,05 to 8 times the rated current in 0,01 steps for the high set. Time settings shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 sec in 0,01 steps for the definite time characteristics and for the IDMT characteristics the time multiplier setting shall be adjustable between 0,05 to 1,2 sec in steps of 0,025 sec. High set instantaneous elements with low transient overreach shall be provided. The relay shall be thermally rated such that the operating time of the relay at the highest practical current levels on any combination of current and time multiplier settings shall not exceed the thermal withstand time of the relay.
9.5 9.5.1
Transformer Protection Transformer Differential Protection
Overall differential protection shall be of the low impedance, two winding biased current differential type providing protection for phase and earth faults. The relay shall be a fully numerical, flush mounted and shall contain a biased differential element per phase. Both the bias and the differential current settings shall be individually adjustable. The minimum differential current setting shall not be greater than 20 per cent of the rated load current of the relay. The relay shall have both a low set and a high set differential elements. Protective IEDs shall be three phase units with internal vector group compensation and line current transformer ratio correction eliminating the need for external interposing current transformers. The low set differential protection setting shall be in the range 0,15 to 0,5 of rated current and the high set differential setting shall be between 5 to 20 times the rated current. The relay shall have a dual bias characteristic with the initial slope allowing a maximum of 20% transformer tap changer deviation and current transformers ratio errors. The bias shall increase for higher currents above rated in order to compensate for CT saturation errors under maximum through fault conditions with maximum DC offset in the fault
Page 180 of 365
current. For the purpose of stability calculations, an infinite source is to be assumed and the through fault current calculated using the transformer impedance only. The relay shall provide harmonic stabilization against inrush and over-excitation. The user shall be able to communicate directly with the relay via an alphanumeric liquid crystal display together with the relay front panel function keys and by a PC. A separate serial communication interface shall be provided for an integrated co-ordinated protection and control system. Communication interface shall be IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. The necessary software and hardware required for communicating with the relay shall be provided. Power-on diagnostic tests and continuous self-monitoring shall be carried out by the relay. In the event of a failure, an error message shall be displayed on the front panel LCD and the relay shall be blocked depending on the type of failure detected. Event and fault recording facilities shall also be provided with the relay. Plant status and control signals shall be input to the relay via programmable or nonprogrammable optically isolated binary inputs and the relay shall give a tripping or signalling command through programmable or specifically assigned output relays. Tripping indication and fault identification facilities shall be also provided. Resetting of the relay shall be made without removing its front cover. The relay shall display the magnitude of the phase currents for each input, the differential current and the restraining current. Operation of main and HV back-up protection shall trip both HV and LV circuit breakers
9.5.2
Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Restricted earth fault protection for both transformer windings shall be preferably incorporated in the transformer differential protection relay. When restricted earth fault protection is not integrated within the transformer main protection relay, a separate relay shall be provided. Restricted earth fault protection relays shall preferably be of the high impedance type. The protection shall be connected to class PX current transformers on the transformer neutral connections and shall share the same line current transformers as the biased differential protection. Restricted earth fault protection shall be so arranged that it does not operate with any type of fault external to the transformer winding. The setting of the relay shall be such that it will operate reliably with current of the following magnitude in the primary winding of the neutral current transformer alone: When the protected winding of the transformer is connected to a solidly earthed power system, the fault setting shall be between 10 per cent and 60 per cent of the rated current of the protected winding. When a transformer winding has more than one rating, the percentage setting shall be based on the lowest of the ratings. When more than one transformer winding is connected in parallel, the percentage setting shall be based on the lowest of the rated currents of the individual transformers.
Page 181 of 365
Where the prescribed settings cannot be obtained special approval of the performance shall be obtained. All necessary stabilizing resistors of adequate rating and non-linear overvoltage protection resistors shall be included. The Contractor will be expected to calculate adequate performance of the high impedance restricted earth fault scheme. The method and calculations shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
9.5.3
Back-up Overcurrent Phase and Earth Fault Protection
132 kV transformer back up overcurrent protection shall comprise a 3-pole overcurrent and single pole earth fault relay complying with the requirements described elsewhere in this Document. Additionally, high set overcurrent elements shall be provided for instantaneous overcurrent protection of the transformer main 132kV connections and these shall be of the low transient overreach type.
9.5.4
9.5.4.1
Other Transformer Protection

General
Transformer Buchholz, temperature and tap changer protective devises and relevant intelligent I/O devices shall be supplied and mounted under this Contract. 9.5.4.2 Buchholz Protection
Power and earthing transformers will be supplied fitted with Buchholz devices. The Buchholz device will be of the two element type giving operation under gassing and under surge conditions. 9.5.4.3 Oil and Winding Temperature
Transformers will be provided with oil and winding temperature protection. These will be of the two stage type with adjustable settings giving alarm and trip facilities. 9.5.4.4 Low Oil Level and Pressure Relief Devices
Transformers will be provided with low oil level and pressure relief devices, each of which having contacts for purposes of remote alarms and trips. 9.5.4.5 Tap Change Oil Surge
Transformers will be provided with an oil surge or pressure operated device having contacts for purposes of remote alarm or trip as directed by the Engineer. 9.5.4.6 Earthing Transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection
The LV winding of the Earthing Transformer shall be protected by Restricted Earth Fault Protection. The protection shall be connected to class PX current transformers on the transformer neutral connection and to line current transformers on the LV AC distribution board. The restricted earth fault relay shall comply with the requirements described elsewhere in this document.
Page 182 of 365
9.6
132 kV Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail Protection
The busbar protection shall be of the numerical, low impedance, phase segregated current differential type and shall protect against phase and earth faults. It shall comprise of a central unit (master) situated on the bus-section bay panel and one bay unit for each feeder circuit situated on the bay relay panel. The bay unit shall be the interface between the protection and the primary system process comprising of main CTs, isolators, and circuit breaker and shall perform the associated data acquisition, preprocessing, and control functions. The central unit shall be the system manager. It shall configure the system, contain the system replica, assign bays within the system, manage the sets of operating parameters, act as process bus controller, assure synchronization of the system, and control communication with the station control system. The busbar protection shall give clear indication of the phase involved in the fault and in case of external faults it shall ensure high stability even in case of CT saturation. The measuring current circuits must be continuously monitored. In the event of exceeding a set threshold, phase segregated and busbar section selective blocking and signalling must be provided. The tripping circuits within the device must be continuously monitored. Testing of the tripping paths of the circuit breaker must be provided. The isolator positions and the transition times must be monitored and faults selectively signalled. The busbar protective equipment shall not be affected by harmonic circulating currents such as may be experienced in a multiple earthed power system. The unearthed side of CT circuits shall pass through a two-position bolted type test link before being connected to any common bus-wires or to any other apparatus. In one position the link shall short-circuit the transformers as well as disconnect the unearthed side of the residual circuit from the rest of the equipment and in the other position the link shall give normal connection. It shall be possible to change the test link from one position to the other on load without open circuiting the current transformers. Suitable Klippon type terminals can be utilized for this purpose. Where common circuit-breaker trip coils are used for busbar and circuit protection, the busbar protection shall not use a separate trip supply common to all breakers. Instead, the segregation of trip circuits shall be maintained by taking the trip supply for each breaker from its associated bay panel. Means shall be provided for interrupting, the trip and intertrip functions of the busbar protection while leaving the operation and indication of the equipment otherwise unimpaired. These means shall comprise insulated links, distinctively labelled, and connected in the trip and intertrip circuit connections. One master two-way switch of approved type shall be provided for each zone of the busbar protection. These switches shall include contacts for alarm and indication functions. Means shall be provided to permit tripping and intertripping of individual circuit breakers from test operations of the protection without tripping all circuit breakers connected to the protected busbars. Full provision for testing each part of the equipment shall be made so that it is not necessary to disconnect wires from terminals.
Page 183 of 365
Current transformer rings shall be formed at the protection relay cubicles and not at the switchgear cubicles. Current transformer secondary bus wiring should be suitably dimensioned to reduce current transformer burdens to a minimum. Circuit Breaker failure protection shall be integrated in the busbar protection. The breaker failure protection on circuit breakers shall be initiated by all protection devices, which normally initiate tripping of that breaker. In the event of the circuit breaker failing to open within a pre-selected time, the breaker failure protection shall initiate tripping of all adjacent circuit breakers. It shall also incorporate provision for initiating direct intertripping of any remote infeed via teleprotection channels and the lower voltage circuit breaker on transformer circuits. The protective IEDs shall be accessed both locally through front arrow keys and a liquid crystal display and via a personal computer for reading and setting the relay. Protective IEDs shall be provided also with an additional serial interface for integration into a numerical co-ordinated protection and control system. Communication with the relay shall be effected via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All the associated software and hardware required to communicate with the relay shall be provided. The Contractor will be expected to calculate adequate performance of the busbar protection scheme. The method and calculations shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The calculations should be based on the characteristics of the actual equipment to be used on this Contract e.g. Current Transformers, Relays, wiring etc. and such characteristics should be given in the data section of the calculations.
9.7
Auto-Reclosing Function
For the purpose of this Specification, the following definitions shall apply: (a) Dead Time (DT) -The minimum time interval between the opening of a circuit breaker to eliminate that branch infeed of fault current to the associated part of the network and the subsequent reclosure of that circuit breaker to re-establish supply to the network. (b) Reclaim Time (RT) -The time interval following reclosure during which a primary system fault causes the auto-reclose program to continue as if the fault had been present on reclosure. (c) Close Pulse Time (CP) -The time period during which a continuous closing signal is applied to the circuit breaker mechanism during an auto-reclose cycle. The following requirements shall govern auto-reclosing: Reclosure shall only take place on overhead line circuits and shall be initiated following tripping by the current differential protective IEDs, the distance relay Zone 1 equipment or receipt of a carrier acceleration intertripping signal. Reclosure shall not be initiated in the event of any type of fault in the second or third back-up zones or when the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previously deenergized line.
Page 184 of 365
It shall also be possible to block auto-reclose from other protection, such as busbar protection, overcurrent protection and breaker failure protection. Dead time shall be adjustable in the range between 0,01 - 320 sec. The reclaim time, i.e., the time period following the automatic reclosing of the circuit breaker during which further faults result in three phase tripping and lockout, shall be chosen to match the duty cycle of the circuit breakers, assuming the shortest available dead time is chosen. The reclaim time shall be settable between 0,05 320 sec (the reclaim time commences at the instant the re-close command is given to the circuit-breaker and, therefore, includes the circuit breaker closing time). The closing command shall be limited to the set close pulse time after which time the reclosing equipment shall be automatically reset without resetting the reclaim timer. Where synchronism supervision is applied, the reclosing command shall be blocked if the dead line live busbar check and synchronism check conditions are not fulfilled. A counter shall be provided to record the number of reclosures. Auto-reclosure shall be blocked if the circuit breaker has been switched off manually such that an inadvertent initiation of the auto-reclosure equipment does not close the circuit breaker on a de-energized line. Auto-reclose shall be blocked for a settable time after energizing the line. Facilities shall be provided to initiate the following indications: Autoreclose successful Autoreclose blocked Autoreclose out of service Autoreclose in progress Final trip
Some or all of the above may be required to initiate alarm depending on the nature of the scheme requirements. The automatic reclosing equipment shall be capable to accept a circuit ready contact to prevent automatic reclosing unless the circuit breaker is in a healthy state to enable it to perform a further trip for a permanent fault.
9.8
Synchronizing Check Function
The synchronizing check function shall monitor the magnitudes of the voltage on both sides of the open circuit breaker terminals as well as the phase angles and frequency difference between the voltages. Closing will be permitted when these are within pre-set limits. Separate voltage settings must be allowed for live and dead conditions. The voltage setting shall be adjustable between 40 to 130 Vac in steps of 1 V. The phase angle setting shall be adjustable between 0 to 45 in steps of 1 .
Page 185 of 365
The slip frequency shall be settable between 0 to 1 Hz in steps of 0,01 Hz. Synchronism check function shall be provided for all specified circuit breakers. The synchronizing check function shall also have the following features: Energizing for DL/DB, DL/DB or DL/DB. Different energizing settings for manual close command and auto-reclose command. The system shall allow manual close without the synchronizing function but the following information shall be displayed graphically on the station MMI when using this feature: incoming and running volts slip frequency (synchroscope) and frequency The voltages that must be selected for the synchro-check functions depend on the positions of the breakers and/or the disconnectors. By making use of the auxiliary contacts of the breakers and disconnectors, the control system should provide to the respective relay the right voltage for the synchronism and energizing function.
9.9
Intertrip Send/Receive Teleprotection Equipment
Teleprotection signalling equipment shall be provided under a separate Contract and shall be suitable for operating with optical fibres. Where specified intertrip send/receive teleprotection equipment shall be suitable for high speed intertripping and the operating speed should not exceed 40ms. Provision shall be made to continuously monitor the integrity of the communications circuit and provide an alarm if a fault on the communications circuit is detected.
9.10
Tripping Relays
All tripping relays, where specified shall be of the heavy-duty type suitable for panel mounting. Tripping relays built into protective IEDs shall be preferred. Trip relay contacts shall be suitably rated to satisfactorily perform their required duty and relay operating time shall not exceed 10 ms from initiation of trip relay operating coil to contact close. Where specified latching type relays shall have hand or electrically reset contacts and hand reset flag indicators. Resetting of the flag indicator and the contacts shall be possible without having to open the relay case. Remote resetting should also be possible. Tripping relays rated for operation on a 110 volts battery shall have a normal working voltage of 125 volts and an operating voltage range of 66-143 volts. The minimum operating current shall not be less than 50 milliamps and the trip relay shall not operate when a 10-microfarad capacitor charged to 150 volts is discharged into the tripping relay operating coil. The tripping relay shall have a thermal withstand of 143 volts for 8 hours.
Page 186 of 365
9.11
Trip Circuit Supervision Schemes
Trip circuit supervision shall preferably be provided by the main protective IEDs. The trip circuit supervision scheme shall provide continuous supervision of the trip circuits of the circuit breaker in either the open or closed position. Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on DC wiring on adjacent circuits or due to operation of a trip relay contact. Trip circuit supervision circuits shall prevent false tripping of a circuit breaker if a relay element is short-circuited. Relay alarm elements shall be equipped with self-resetting flag indicators. Sufficient contacts should be provided for alarm and blocking of the close circuit. The relay shall give alarm signals and also block the closing circuit when operated.
9.12
Segregation
Wherever practical physical segregation shall be arranged so that no common plant failure will render First and Second Main protection inoperative. This includes consideration of a multicore cable failure but excludes consideration of a multicore trench failure.
9.13 9.13.1
22-11 kV Feeder Protection General
A numerical, multi-functional, protective and control device shall provide the 22-11kV feeder protection. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other primary power system equipment, shall be processed in a completely digital way. The required functions for the protection of 22-11kV underground feeders are the following: Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent Protection - Characteristics according to EN 60255 standard Directional Overcurrent (Option) Under Frequency Breaker Failure Reverse Blocking Switch on to Fault Trip Circuit Supervision
For the protection of 22-11kV overhead feeders the following additional functions are required: Instantaneous Overcurrent
Page 187 of 365
Autoreclosing Sensitive Earth Fault
The required functions are detailed in the 22-11kV feeder schedules.
9.13.2
Overcurrent Protection
Time-overcurrent protection shall be the main protective function of the relay. It shall have all features as mentioned in Paragraph Back up Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection for 132 kV Feeders. In certain cases the overcurrent protection may be directional. The specific relay requirements are detailed in the 22-11kV feeder schedules. In addition to the above, a reverse blocking function shall be available. All overcurrent elements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device shall be able to be blocked via an external signal to the binary inputs of device. Removal of the external signal to the binary input shall re-enable these elements. The relay shall be provided with Switch-On-To-Fault function. Under this situation, the time delay shall be by-passed via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping.
9.13.3
Sensitive Earth Fault
Sensitive Earth Fault function shall comply to the general requirements of overcurrent protection. It shall have adjustable settings for both operating current and time over a range of at least 1% to 15% of rated CT current and at least 0,5 to 15 seconds for time. The relay shall be equipped with a separate current input to be fed from a core balance neutral CT.
9.13.4
Under Frequency Protection
The Under Frequency protection shall be able to detect any low frequency present in the system and initiate tripping of the feeder if it exceeds the preset frequency value. Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation shall be free from harmonic influences and very accurate. Setting ranges shall be from 45 Hz to 52 Hz in steps of 0,1 Hz.
9.13.5
Breaker Failure Protection
The breaker failure protection shall monitor the reaction of the circuit breaker to a trip signal. If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, a breaker failure trip signal shall be issued and all adjacent circuit breakers that represent sources to the fault shall be tripped. The criteria to determine if the circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip signal shall be both the current flow through the circuit breaker and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact. The initiation of the breaker failure function shall be either from the internal protective function of the relay or from external trip signals via binary inputs. The evaluation of the circuit breaker status shall depend on both a and b type auxiliary contacts connected.
Page 188 of 365
If one of the criteria that led to pickup of the breaker failure scheme is no longer met before the time delay elapses, then the breaker failure timer shall drop out and no trip signals shall be issued. To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization of the binary inputs for external trip signals shall take place. The external signal must be present for the entire period of the delay time, otherwise the time shall reset and no tripping signal shall be issued.
9.13.6
Automatic Reclosing Function
Where specified relays shall be provided with a single shot automatic reclosing function. The function shall be initiated from the instantaneous elements of the overcurrent protection after the circuit breaker has tripped. It shall be possible to easily enable or disable the Autoreclosing function without entering into the menus of the relay. The automatic reclose function shall lockout after unsuccessful reclosure and an LED shall indicate the status. It shall not be possible to close the circuit breaker without resetting the Autoreclose lockout condition. Resetting of the lockout condition shall be possible locally through the MMI or the Energy Centre. The Autoreclosing function shall be able to record the number of operations. The relay shall have provision for adjustment of the dead and the reclaim times. The dead time shall be adjustable between approximately 5 and 20 seconds. The reclaim time (the time period following automatic reclosure during which further fault occurrences result in lockout) shall be adjustable between 5 and 25 seconds, or such values required by the circuit breaker manufacturer. The instantaneous element shall be blocked during the reclaim and when the automatic reclosing function is disabled.
Page 189 of 365
10. MEDIUM VOLTAGE GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE 10.1 SWITCHGEAR TYPE
The specified metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear shall be SF6-insulated, typetested to EN 62271-200 and suitable for indoor installation. The rated voltage shall be 22kV. According to the corresponding version, the switchgear panels (transformer incomers, bus section, feeders, and capacitor bank feeders) have to be equipped with maintenance-free vacuum circuit breakers and three-position switches. The switchgear shall be designed as single-busbar switchgear.
10.2
CURRENT RATINGS
The temperature rise of each current carrying component of the equipment supplied when operating continuously at the specified ratings or under short circuit conditions at the specified site rating or under the specified maximum design ambient conditions shall be according to EN 62271-1. Every part of the switchgear and equipment shall also withstand, without mechanical or thermal damage, the instantaneous peak currents and rated short time current pertaining to the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breakers. Tenderers are requested to state in the Schedule of Particulars the permissible overload rating for the switchgear operating under emergency conditions, complete with its associated auxiliary equipment such as current transformers etc, together with the duration and ambient temperature for which it applies.
10.3
DESIGN AND CONTRUCTION
Metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear shall be designed so that normal service, inspection and maintenance operations, determination of the energized or de-energized state of the main circuit, including the usual checking of phase sequence, earthing of connected cables, locating of cable faults, voltage tests on connected cables or other apparatus and the elimination of dangerous electrostatic charges, can be carried out safely. Operational reliability and personnel safety must be fulfilled and ensured by eliminating any external influence on the primary circuits such as busbar connections and cable Connections. Compartments should be subdivided into the Busbar, Circuit Breaker, Cable Connection and Low Voltage compartments: The busbar and circuit breaker compartments shall be SF6 insulated. Compartments containing SF6 shall be made of a welded, anticorrosive stainless steel enclosure or alternatively aluminium enclosure. These compartments should be interconnected electrically by means of a fully insulated connection system without the need of SF6 gas work on site. A similar system shall also be used to connect the busbar compartments from panel to panel enabling switchgear extension without any SF6 gas work on site. It should also be possible to replace any panel from any position (e.g. the middle) of the switchgear installation without the need to move the adjacent panels. Any work on one section of the switchboard shall not require the shut down of other sections.
132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification Page 190 of 365
Tenderers should submit with their tender a detailed description of the method used on site for switchgear extension and / or panel replacement indicating clearly the technology used to facilitate the described work. The external effects of an internal arc shall be limited by a suitable design to prevent any danger to an operator during the time he is performing his normal duties. Test evidence to verify the design will be required. Pressure shall be relieved through a rear duct directed to the top. The cable and low voltage compartments shall be capable of operating in humid conditions and electric heaters shall be provided to prevent condensation Cast iron shall not be used for any part, which may be subjected to mechanical shock. Insulating materials shall have a high resistance to tracking. The switchboard shall be suitable for installation in a building with a cable basement or trench. All necessary foundation or fixing bolts and rails shall be provided. Electrical wiring in compartments containing primary connections or equipment is to be enclosed in metal conduit or equivalent.
10.4
COMPARTMENTS CONTAINING SF6
Compartments shall be filled with SF6 gas. Gas density must be monitored with temperature compensation. Its status has to be transmitted and signalled to the outside. The pressure of the compartment housings must be relieved through rupture diaphragms away from the operator. The compartments must ensure tightness for a lifetime greater than 30 years according to EN 62271 - 1.
10.5
COMPARTMENT COUPLINGS
Compartment couplings, where used, should be solid-insulated, screened (semiconductive, earthed screen) and covered against mechanical damage with a suitable material. They must enable the connection and separation of all compartments without gas work.
10.6
CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPARTMENT
Circuit breaker compartment shall consist of the high-voltage part containing the circuit breaker poles with the vacuum interrupters and an external operating mechanism. The requirements of EN 62271-100 with respect to type tests, service operation and the making and breaking of fault current shall apply to all types of circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be covered by test certificates, certifying the operation of the circuitbreaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit-breakers. The test duty shall not be less onerous than the requirements of EN 62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for rapid autoreclosure. The rated operating sequence shall be as follows:
132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification
Page 191 of 365
0 - 0,3 sec - CO - 3 min - CO In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by the switching of transformer magnetizing current and of capacitor current associated with overhead linecharging, cable-charging or capacitor banks as may be applicable. Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for the above duties shall be submitted with the Tender. Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the circuit breakers are capable of, before maintenance is required. Circuit-breakers shall be mounted on insulators strong enough to withstand the shock load produced by the circuit-breaker when clearing rated short-circuit current. The live tank shall be of robust manufacture to withstand the internal pressure produced when clearing rated short-circuit currents. The material shall be declared by the manufacturer. Circuit breakers shall either have facility to measure wear of contacts or preferably have automatic compensation for contact erosion.
10.7
OPERATING MECHANISM
The operating mechanism must be maintenance-free for 30 years under normal environmental and service conditions An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit-breaker operating mechanism to show whether the circuit-breaker is open or closed. The indicators shall be driven positively in both directions to show whether the circuit-breaker is in the 'open' or 'closed' position, and shall be operative when the circuit-breaker is in the 'service', 'isolated' and 'earthed' locations All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with rapid autoreclose whether or not this feature is specified in the schedules. Circuit-breaker mechanisms shall be of the trip-free type as defined in EN 62271 and shall have an anti-pumping feature. Each part of the operating mechanism shall be of substantial construction, utilising such materials to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. The overall designs shall be such as to reduce mechanical shock to a minimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stresses, vibration or other causes. In the event of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed position the circuit-breaker shall be arranged to open at normal speed. Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms. The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated in EN 62271 - 100. It shall be possible to charge the mechanism spring with the circuit breaker in either the 'open' or 'closed' positions. It shall not be possible for the circuit breaker to close unless
the spring is fully charged. A visual indicating device, preferably mechanical, shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. The device shall indicate 'SPRING CHARGED', in red on white background when the spring is in a condition to close the circuit breaker and 'SPRING FREE', in black on white background when the spring is not in a condition to close the circuit-breaker. Provision shall also be made for supervisory and, if applicable, remote indication of the state of the spring. Closure whilst a spring charging operation is in progress shall be prevented. If a charged spring is released when the circuit breaker is closed, the circuit breaker shall not open and neither shall such operation result in damage. AC motors shall be used for charging the spring mechanism. Re-charging of the mechanism operating spring shall commence immediately and automatically upon completion of each circuit-breaker closure. The maximum rewind time shall be 35 seconds if a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation within a predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and an alarm initiated. Provision shall be made for making available this alarm to the supervisory Control Centre. An emergency hand operated charging device shall be supplied. No electrical or mechanical operations of the mechanism during this process shall endanger the operation or damage the equipment.
10.8
ISOLATING FACILITIES
The circuit breakers shall be connected to the busbars and feeder circuits through three position switches. The devices shall be off load type but shall be suitable for operation whilst the busbars or feeder circuits are live. It shall not be possible to operate the isolating devices if the circuit breaker is in the closed position. The main isolating contacts shall be silver plated, self-cleaning and shall be mounted in porcelain or cast resin bushings.
10.9
EARTHING FACILITIES
Means shall be provided to earth both outgoing circuits and busbars by either closing an integral fully rated spring-assisted switch or a maintenance earthing switch through a circuit breaker. It shall not be possible to select an earthing position unless the circuit breaker is in the open position. Also, it shall be impossible to return the circuit breaker to the normal service position without bringing first the earthing switch in the OFF position. The earthing switch to be employed for earthing either the outgoing circuits or the busbars of the switchboard shall be fully rated, i.e., it shall be able to make and carry the specified short-circuit rating of the switchboard.
10.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FAULT-MAKING EARTHING SWITCHES

A fault making earthing switch for use with switchgear in accordance with this Specification shall be of the 3-pole type and shall comply with EN 62271 - 102.
Page 193 of 365
The switch shall have a rated short-circuit making current and a rated short-time current at least equivalent to those of the switchgear with which it is to be used. It shall have two positions: "EARTH OFF" and "EARTH ON". The closing of the switch shall be by independent manual operation. It shall not be possible for the operating mechanism to be left in such a condition that any energy stored in the initial part of an incomplete operation remains in the spring when the switch is in the "EARTH OFF" or "EARTH ON" positions. It shall be possible to lock the operating mechanism in either the "EARTH ON" or "EARTH OFF" position. Mechanical indication of the operating position of the switch equipment shall be provided. The indicator shall be positively driven in both directions from the switch operating mechanism so as to show whether the equipment is in the "EARTH ON" or "EARTH OFF" position. The positions shall be clearly indicated and the indicators shall be inscribed "EARTH ON" in black letters on a bright yellow background and "EARTH OFF" in white letters on a Grass Green background.
10.11 EARTHING OF METAL PARTS

Labels shall be provided to indicate clearly the methods of earthing used on the equipment. A suitable form of indication shall be provided to show whether the equipment is prepared for "SERVICE", "BUSBAR EARTH" or "CIRCUIT EARTH" as the case may be. For bus section equipment it shall show whether "LEFT-HAND BUSBAR EARTH" or "RIGHT-HAND BUSBAR EARTH" is applied. All metal parts, including any relays, instruments, etc., mounted on the switchboard, shall be connected to a copper earth bar, which runs along the full length of the switchboard. The cross-section of the bar shall be sufficient to carry the rated short time withstand current of the switchgear for the rated short time withstand of the switchboard.
10.12 CABLE CONNECTION

Cable connections shall be performed exclusively under this Contract with fully insulated cable plugs according to the outside-cone or inside-cone system. All functional components of the primary part must be safe-to-touch and mounted in an arc-resistant panel enclosure. For turnkey projects, the terminations of all incoming cables to transformer panels shall be carried out by the Contractor. Cable testing must basically be possible from the front. Cables must be supported by cable brackets. The cable connection compartment must be totally enclosed and accessible through a removable cover.
10.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be suitably designed possibly as LV ring-core transformers. They must be fitted outside the high voltage part and outside the gas compartment. Feeder current transformers have to be placed above or below the circuit breaker,
according to the panel version. It must be possible to replace current transformers without gas work. Current transformers shall be supplied suitable for the duty specified in the Schedule of Requirements and comply with the requirements of EN 60044 - 1. All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken, by means of separate insulated leads, to a suitable, accessible terminal board. Current transformers, including primary winding conductors, shall have a short-time current rating and duration on all taps not less than that corresponding to the design short-circuit level of the associated switchgear. All current transformers must have a maximum continuous primary current rating not less than the primary equipment rating of the bay in which they are installed. Furthermore, current transformers shall have rated continuous thermal current of 120% of the rated primary current. The current error and phase displacement at rated primary current rating shall be retained up to the extended current rating. The secondary windings of each current transformer shall be earthed at one point only through links situated in an accessible position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The current transformers and CT secondary wiring of feeders controlling capacitor banks should be suitable to avoid secondary flashover due to transient inrush currents through the circuit breaker. Magnetization and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each type and rating of current transformer. The Contractor shall ensure that the capacity is adequate for the operating of the associated protective devices and instruments at the lead burdens involved. Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs, their suitability to withstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be ensured or saturable interposing current transformers fitted. Each current transformer shall be individually labelled and serial plates are to be provided for fitting to the outside of current transformer chambers, etc. Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the secondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connection required for each ratio. These connections shall be shown on the appropriate schematic and connection diagrams.
10.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

Voltage transformers shall be suitably insulated (preferably cast-resin) within a metal enclosure, safe-to-touch. They must be located outside gas compartments. For cable testing purposes they must be easy to detach or isolated using suitable disconnecting facilities. Cable testing should be made possible through a suitable adaptor. Voltage transformers shall be supplied as specified in the Schedule of Requirements. They shall comply with EN 60044 - 2. They shall be three-phase with a secondary phase-to-phase voltage as specified in the Schedule of Requirements. Voltage transformers for protection shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers and metering.
When a polarizing source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall be provided. The transformers shall have a rated voltage factor of 1,5 in accordance with EN 60044 and have a rated burden of 50/25VA with accuracy class 0,5 plus 3P to the specified standards. Where provided for directional overcurrent and directional earth fault protection, the residual voltage winding shall have a voltage factor of 1,9 and a rated residual burden of 25VA per phase with accuracy class 3P to the specified standards. Secondary winding shall be connected through suitable miniature circuit breakers, isolating terminals and links labelled to indicate their functions and phase colour to the appropriate circuits. MCBs shall comply with EN 60947. Secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall not be paralleled. Meters or other instruments with voltage input shall be connected directly to the VT of the respective circuit, if available. When meters or instruments are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connected directly to the same circuit as the current transformers then a voltage selection scheme shall be established and the voltage signals shall be wired through auxiliary contacts of the respective circuit breakers and also of the bus section circuit breakers to break the circuit automatically when the circuit-breaker is open. The voltage transformer connection shall be capable of carrying a current of 200A continuously so that primary injection testing may be carried out.
10.15 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEM

For the safe isolation from supply the switchgear shall be equipped with a capacitive voltage detection system with the following functions: 1. Voltage indication per phase 2. Relay outputs with potential-free contacts for signalling and interlocking 3. Test socket for phase comparison
10.16 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE

The arc-resistant switchgear enclosure shall consist of the following pressure-resistance units with appropriately located pressure relief duct : Panel front Rear wall with likely pressure relief duct Panel roof Lateral switchgear termination (end walls) Partitions between panels
The metal-enclosed switchgear must have an Internal Arc Classification (IAC) to EN 62271 200 for 1s. Corresponding test reports have to be enclosed.
Page 196 of 365
10.17 INTERLOCKS AND CONTROLS 10.17.1 Interlocks
The circuit breakers shall be provided with an interlocking system, which ensures safe operation of the equipment under all service conditions. Preventive interlocks or measures shall comply with EN 62271 - 200 and EN 62271 - 1. Interlock mechanisms shall be mechanical and, when manually operated, they shall be provided with labels, which are readily visible and contain clear, concise instructions for operation. Mechanical interlocking shall be effective at the point where hand power is applied so that stresses cannot be transferred to parts remote from that point.
10.17.2
Controls
Circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically controlled locally at the switchboard. In addition circuit breakers shall have facility for remote and/or supervisory control. Where separate control panels are specified, a multi-pole lockable changeover selector switch shall be provided at the circuit breaker and labelled "Local" and "Remote". Where only local and supervisory control is specified, circuit breakers shall be supplied with a multi-pole lockable changeover switch labelled "Local" and "Supervisory". Where remote or supervisory control facilities are required, electrical interlocking shall also be provided to prevent closure of the circuit, by interrupting the operating supply to the spring release coil of the spring closing mechanism.
10.18 LOCKING FACILITIES

In addition to the interlocking facilities specified above, locking facilities shall be provided to the access doors or gates to the circuit breaker compartment and circuit enclosures. Where a mechanism is to be locked in a specific position provision shall be made at that part of the mechanism where the operating power is applied, and not to remote or ancillary linkages. Each requirement shall be met by the fitting of a separate single padlock and shall not entail the fitting of any loose components prior to insertion of the padlock. It shall not be possible readily to gain access to the tripping-toggle or any part of the mechanism, which would permit defeat of the locking of the manual tripping.
10.19 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS

The circuit breakers shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches to relay circuit information for the purposes of control, remote and supervisory indication, circuit supervision, protection and metering as required by the specification. Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of the circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed. In addition, at least two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary switches of the same type and rating as those specified above shall be provided as spare items on each circuit breaker.
Page 197 of 365
The contacts of all auxiliary switches shall be strong and shall be positively driven in both directions with a wiping action, and where necessary discharge resistors shall be provided to prevent arcing when breaking inductive circuits. They shall be mounted so as to be readily accessible for maintenance and adjustment.
10.20 BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS

The busbars and connections shall comply with the requirements of BS 159 and shall be continuously rated for the site conditions and current specified. Only copper material is accepted for the construction of the busbars. The insulating material used shall be capable of withstanding the heating effects of the rated short time withstand current without permanent deformation or deterioration. The busbars shall be adequately supported against short-circuit forces and provision shall be made to allow for thermal expansion of the conductors due to normal load currents and short-circuit currents. The busbars shall be contained in a separate SF6 compartment within the general casing of the switchgear and shall be extensible at both ends. All bus sections shall be individually earthed through suitable three-position switches.
10.21 CIRCUIT LABELS

The switchgear shall be adequately labelled at the front and rear of the fixed portion of the equipment, and on moving portions in a clear and concise manner. Each switchboard shall be fitted with a main label sized 50 mm x 150 mm x 3 mm in a prominent position. Circuit labels shall not be fitted on detachable doors or covers. All circuit labels shall be engraved with black lettering on a white background. Labels shall be secured with brass or steel screws, which have received an approved rust preventative treatment.
Page 198 of 365
11. POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS 11.1 11.1.1

11.1.1.1
GENERAL Types of Transformers and Operating Conditions

General
All transformers shall be of the oil immersed type and suitable for outdoor installation and shall comply with EN 60076, Parts 1 to 5 inclusive. For indoor substations the transformers shall be installed within cells as shown in the relevant specification drawings. The transformer cells shall be forced ventilated as specified elsewhere in this Specification so that the maximum temperature that can develop within a transformer cell with the transformer operating at full load, under the highest ambient temperature, will not exceed 45oC at a height of 1,8 m from the transformer floor. For the purposes of this calculation the temperature of the incoming airflow should be taken as 40 0C. 11.1.1.2 Cooling
The types of cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule of Requirements and the letters relating to the method of oil circulation and cooling used hereafter in the Specification and Schedules shall be in accordance with EN 60076. Where a combination of two methods of cooling is applied to one transformer as for ONAN/ONAF Units, the transformer shall be capable of operating under the ONAN condition up to a certain load as stated in the Schedule of Requirements, after which the cooling equipment is to come into operation and the transformer will operate as an ONAF Unit. The forced cooled transformer shall be fitted with two coolers or two banks of radiators each capable of dissipating 50% of the losses at continuous maximum rating. It shall be capable of remaining in operation at full load for twenty minutes in the event of failure of blowers associated with both coolers without the calculated winding hot spot temperature exceeding 140oC. Failure of one fan in each group of blowers shall not reduce the continuous maximum rating of the transformer. In addition to forced cooling directly connected on the transformer radiators, extraction fans shall be incorporated, fitted on the side wall of the transformer cell. These extraction fans shall be at least equivalent in air flow capacity as with the air blowers on the transformer radiators and shall be controlled by suitable thermostats. 11.1.1.3 Parallel Operation
Transformers supplied of same rating and nominal voltages shall be suitable to operate satisfactorily in parallel with one another when operating on the same tap.
11.1.2
11.1.2.1
Continuous Maximum Rating

Basis of kVA Rating
Transformers shall have on both the High Voltage and the Low Voltage Windings the rating stated in the Schedule of Requirements and shall comply with the requirements as regards temperature rise and overloads on all tapings irrespective of the direction of power flow and
Page 199 of 365
with the voltage of the lower voltage winding at the normal voltage stated in the Schedule of Requirements. In the case of multi winding units the rating shall permit delivery of the specified loads at the terminals specified and they shall also comply with the requirements as regards temperature rise and overloads on all tapings with the voltage of the intermediate voltage winding at the normal voltage stated in the Schedule of Requirements. The transformers shall be capable of delivering at all tapings rated currents at an applied voltage equal to 110% of the tapping voltage as per clause 4.4 of EN 60076 -1. The overload capability shall be in accordance with IEC 60354. The service conditions will be those specified in the Schedule of Requirements. 11.1.2.2 Basis of Voltage Rating
The voltage rating shall be based on the turns ratio, i.e., no load values. The voltages between phases on the higher and lower voltage windings of each transformer measured at no load shall be those corresponding to the normal ratio of transformation stated in the Schedule of Requirements. Means shall be provided for varying the normal ratio of transformation in accordance with the Schedule of Requirements.
11.1.3
Electrical Connections
Transformer windings shall be connected in accordance with the EN 60076 group symbol specified in the Schedule of Requirements. All electrical connections within windings shall be brazed but, subject to approval, mechanically crimped joints may be used for round stranded conductors on tapping, bushing or earthing connections and on bundle conductors where design has been proved by type test and application is subject to rigorous quality control.
11.1.4
11.1.4.1
Ability to Withstand Short Circuit

General
All transformers shall be capable of withstanding, on any tapings and without damage the thermal and dynamic effects of external short circuits under the conditions stated in EN 60076, Part 5. For this purpose the design short circuit level for each system voltage is stated in Schedule of Requirements. 11.1.4.2 Calculations and Tests
Evidence shall be submitted with the Tender as to the extent to which the manufacturer has proved by test the ability of the specified transformer to withstand short circuit. The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Particulars a brief description of those transformers or parts thereof, which have been subjected to short circuit test. It is preferred that this information relates to designs comparable with the transformers Tendered but in the event this is not so the Engineer reserves the right to require calculations to prove that the design of transformers tendered will satisfactorily comply with this Clause.
Page 200 of 365
11.1.5
Stabilizing Windings
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Requirements, the product of the number of turns of the stabilizing windings and the cross-sectional area of one such turn must not be less than 33% of the corresponding product for the untapped main winding. When required in the Schedule of Requirements, the stabilizing winding shall be capable of carrying continuously the load specified therein.
11.1.6
Losses and Evaluation of Losses
The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Particulars guaranteed values for component losses (i.e. no-load loss, load loss at CMR and auxiliary loss) of the total loss which shall be as low as is consistent with transport restrictions, reliability and economic use of materials. Tenders will be assessed using the following: Total Cost = P + 10,27 (Fe + Cu + Aux) Where, P = Tender price of transformer in Euro Fe = Product of no-load loss in kW and 385 Cu = Product of full load copper loss in kW and 26 Aux = Product of the transformer auxiliaries full load in kW and 7 The acceptance of transformers yielding component losses higher than the guaranteed values shall be governed by either of the following: (a) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values but within the tolerance permitted under EN 60076, Part 1. Transformers shall be acceptable subject to full compliance with all other technical particulars including temperature rises at CMR and subject to the Tenderer accepting deduction from the Contract Price of charges for each KW or part thereof of component losses in excess of the guaranteed values, at the above evaluation rates. (b) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values and exceeding the tolerance permitted under EN 60076, Part 1. The acceptance of the transformers shall be entirely at the discretion of the Purchaser and subject to the Tenderer accepting deduction from the Contract Price of charges for each kW or part thereof of component losses in excess of the guaranteed values, at the above loss evaluation rates. In the event of transformers yielding component and total losses which are either equal to or below the guaranteed values, the Tenderer will not be entitled to any premium in respect of reduction in losses below the guaranteed values.
11.1.7
Variation in prices
The Contract price of each type of transformer of the tender is to be firm, except for copper, steel, oil and insulation material price variation. The variation in the Contract price is to be based on the variation of the cash price of these materials, as described below in the "Contract price adjustment formula".
After the price adjustment, the final price will constitute the firm Contract price for each type of transformer. 11.1.7.1 Contract price Adjustment Formula
If the cost to the Contractor of performing the obligations under the Contract shall be increased or reduced by reason of any rise or fall in the cost of the electrolytic copper, steel, oil or insulating material above or below such rates and costs ruling at the date of submission of the tender that shall affect the Contractor in the performance of his obligations under the Contract, the amount of such increase or reduction shall be added to or deducted from the Contract price as the case may be. The variations in the cost of Electrolytic Copper, Steel, Oil, or Insulation Material shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula: P = Po x (0,45 + 0,16 C/Co + 0,10 ST/STo + 0,18 SM/SMo + 0,05 Oil/Oilo+0,06Is/Iso) P: Po: C: Final calculated Contract price CFR Cyprus Port of each type of Transformer Tendered Contract price CFR Cyprus Port of each type of Transformer The official cash price in EURO of electrolytic copper grade A on the London Metal Exchange (LME) (http://www.lme.com/dataprices_daily_metal.asp) on the date of contract award or four (4) calendar months before delivery, which-ever is the nearer to the date of delivery. The official cash price in EURO of electrolytic copper grade A on the London Metal Exchange (LME) (http://www.lme.com/dataprices_daily_metal.asp) on the closing date of the tender Price of Steel in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Steel above 600mm (Kaltgewalztes Blech) Fachserie 17, Reihe 2 (Category 17, Row 2) No. 278 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month of contract award or four (4) calendar months before delivery, which-ever is the nearer to the date of delivery. Price of Steel in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Steel above 600mm (Kaltgewalztes Blech) Fachserie 17, Reihe 2 (Category 17, Row 2) No. 278 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month of the closing date of the tender. Price of Magnetic Steel in EURO as published by ZVEI (Zentralverband der deutschen Elektroindustrie) quarterly average index (http://www.zvei.de/index.php?id=376), on the month of contract award or four (4) calendar months before delivery, which-ever is the nearer to the date of delivery.
Co:
ST:
STo:
SM:
SMo: Price of Magnetic Steel in EURO as published by ZVEI (Zentralverband der deutschen Elektroindustrie) quarterly average index (http://www.zvei.de/index.php?id=376), on the month of the closing date of the tender. Oil: Price of Oil in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Mineral Oil Product (Minerallprodukte) Fachserie 17, Reihe 2 (Category 17, Row 2) No. 169
Page 202 of 365
(http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month of contract award or four (4) calendar months before delivery, which-ever is the nearer to the date of delivery. Oilo: Price of Oil in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Mineral Oil Product (Minerallprodukte) Fachserie 17, Reihe 2 (Category 17, Row 2) No. 169 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month of the closing date of the tender. Price of Insulating Material in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Paper and Board (Papier und Pappe) Fachserie 17, Reihe 2 (Category 17, Row 2) No. 127 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month of contract award or four (4) calendar months before delivery, whichever is the nearer to the date of delivery. Price of Insulating Material in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Paper and Board (Papier und Pappe) Fachserie 17, Reihe 2 (Category 17, Row 2) No. 127 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month of the closing date of the tender.
Is:
Iso:
In case a range of prices is given, the average price of this range shall be used. If there is no official cash price on the dates mentioned above, the official cash price of the first available morning market after the said dates shall be taken into account. Contract Price adjustment shall be calculated for each type of transformer of this tender, separately. The types of steel or oil referred to above, are to be used as the basis for the power transformer price calculation, and not to restrict the manufacturer to any specific quality of steel or oil in any way.
11.1.8
Impedance
The value of reactance measured on all tapings shall be as stated in Schedule of Requirements. The transformers are required to operate in parallel with up to two other similar units.
11.1.9
Sound Level
The transformer sound pressure level (Lp) shall be measured as a type test and in accordance with EN 60076-10. The acceptable sound pressure level of the transformers shall be as stated in the Schedule of Requirements. In addition, with the tender documents, calculations of the transformer sound pressure level shall be submitted that demonstrate that with the transformer energized at the maximum operating flux density, the sound pressure level of the transformer shall not exceed 80 dB(A) at the worst possible operating conditions. Where the bottom plate of the transformer tank will be in direct contact with the surface of the foundation, anti-vibration pads shall be provided under the contract for insertion between the transformer and its foundation.
Page 203 of 365
11.1.10
Harmonic Suppression
Transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic voltages, especially the third, fifth and seventh harmonics and minimize the detrimental effects resulting there from.
11.2 11.2.1
MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS Magnetic Circuit
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges, development of short circuit paths internally or to the earthed clamping structure, and the production of flux components normal to the plane of the laminations. Each lamination shall be insulated with a material stable under the action of pressure and hot oil. The winding structure and major insulation shall be designed to permit an unobstructed flow of cooling oil through core cooling ducts to ensure efficient core cooling. The magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts, and shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage to core bolts and to the frame of 2.000 V RMS for one minute.
11.2.2
Flux Density
Cores shall be constructed from cold rolled grain oriented steel sheets. Design shall be such that there will be no adverse effects due to core or stray flux heating with the quality of steel employed, and that when operating under the most onerous conditions envisaged in EN 60076 and IEC 60354, flux density in any part of the magnetic circuit does not exceed 19.000 lines per square centimetre (i.e. 1,9 Tesla). The maximum flux density of the transformers when operating with rated winding voltage at the principal tap shall not exceed 1,50 Tesla. The Contractor shall determine the operating conditions under which the maximum flux density will be attained within the following simultaneously applied limits: Frequency Voltage HV Load 48 Hz Up to but not exceeding the maximum system voltage specified in the Schedule of Requirements. The transformers may be subjected to intermittent overloading in accordance with IEC 60354 with: Load = 150% of Rated MVA & Power Factor = 0.85 Lagging.
11.2.3
Windings
The transformers shall be designed to withstand the impulse-voltage levels and power frequency voltage tests specified. The windings shall be located in a manner, which will ensure that they remain electrostatically balanced and that their magnetic centres remain coincident under all conditions of operation. The windings shall also be thoroughly seasoned during manufacture by the application of axial pressure at a high temperature for such length of time as will ensure that further shrinkage is unlikely to occur in service.
Page 204 of 365
The windings and leads of all transformers shall be braced to withstand the shocks which may occur through rough handling and vibration during transport, switching and other transient service conditions including external short circuit. If the winding is built up of sections or of disc coils separated by spacers, the clamping arrangements shall ensure that equal pressures are applied to all columns of spacers.
11.2.4
11.2.4.1
Internal Earthing
General
All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual core laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be maintained at some fixed potential. 11.2.4.2 Earthing of Core Clamping Structure
The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper strap. The bottom main core clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following methods: (a) By connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure. (b) By direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the core and windings. (c) By connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth connection to the tank. 11.2.4.3 Earthing of Magnetic Circuits
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only through a removable link placed in an accessible position just beneath an inspection opening in the tank cover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core and clamping plates, etc., to be tested at voltages up to 2,0 kV. The link shall have no detachable components and the connection to the link shall be on the same side of the core as the main earth connection. These requirements are compulsory. Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a separate link for each individual section and the arrangement of the connections shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where oil ducts or insulated barriers parallel to the plane of the laminations divide the magnetic circuit into two or more electrically separate parts, the ducts and insulating barriers which have a thickness greater than 2,5 mm are to be bridged with tinned copper strips so inserted as to maintain electrical continuity. 11.2.4.4 Earthing of Coil Clamping Rings
Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring shall be connected to the adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of the transformer as the main earth connection. 11.2.4.5 Earthing of stabilizing windings
Where a stabilizing winding is provided, one corner of the delta winding shall be earthed externally by a removable link to the main tank earthing terminal.
Page 205 of 365
11.2.4.6
Size of Earthing Connections
Main earthing connections shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 80 mm2 but connections inserted between laminations may have cross-sectional areas reduced to 20 mm2 when in close thermal contact with the core.
11.3 11.3.1
TANKS Transformer Tanks
Each transformer shall be enclosed in a suitably stiffened welded steel tank such that the transformer can be lifted and transported without permanent deformation or oil leakage. The construction shall employ weldable structural steel of an approved grade. Welding of structural steel shall be to an approved International Code of Standard. Lifting lugs shall be provided, suitable for the weight of the transformer, including core and windings, fittings, and with the tank filled with oil. Each tank shall be provided with at least four jacking pads not less than 350 mm to the transformer foundation, and where required, with lugs suitably positioned for transport on a beam transporter. The transformer tank and conservator vessel, when empty of oil, shall be designed to withstand full vacuum without deflection exceeding the value stated in the Schedule of Tests. Ancillary apparatus e.g. tap changers etc need not be so designed if provision can be made not to subject them to full vacuum during any site processing and their inability not to withstand full vacuum does not inhibit full vacuum being applied to the tank and conservator vessel. The transformer tank must be designed and secured to withstand the vibrations from earthquakes as set out in this Specification including a strengthened base and anchorage of the core and windings to this base. Where the design of the tank is such that the bottom plate will be in direct contact with the surface of the foundations, the plates shall have the following minimum thickness:
Length of Transformer Tank
Minimum Thickness Side Plates Bottom Plates 19mm 25mm 32mm
Less than 2500mm Greater than 2500mm Greater than 7500mm
6mm 9mm 9mm
Where skid type bases are provided, the plates shall have the following minimum thickness: Length of Transformer Tank Minimum Thickness Side Plates Less than 2500mm Greater than 2500mm 6mm 9mm Bottom Plates 9mm 12mm
Page 206 of 365
The base of each tank shall be so designed that it is possible to move in any direction the complete transformer unit, full with oil and fitted with all specified fittings, without injury when using rollers, plates, crane or rails without overstraining any joints and without causing any subsequent leakage of oil. A design which requires that slide rails be placed in a particular position is not to be used. Pulling eyes shall be provided at the base of the transformer for enabling skidding of the transformer to either centre line of the transformer. Unless elsewhere specified transformers may have either flat or skid bases, but unless specifically approved by the Engineer, detachable underpasses must not be used. All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded. The tank and cover shall be designed in such a manner as to leave no external pockets in which water can lodge, no internal pockets in which oil can remain when draining the tank or in which air can be trapped when filling the tank, and to provide easy access to all external surfaces for painting. Where built-on radiators are used, each radiator bank shall be connected to the main tank through flanged valves mounted on the tank at top and bottom and each bank shall be fitted with drain valve and air release plug. Where cooling tubes are used, each tube shall be of heavy gauge steel welded into the tank sides, top and bottom. Where separate coolers are used drilled flange facings shall be provided at both ends of the tank so that the cooler can be mounted at either end. Valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the cooler, and between the pump and bottom header of the cooler to facilitate the removal of the pump. Gasketted blanking plates shall be provided for the alternative oil connections to the tank. The alternative oil inlet to the tank shall be complete with shut-off valve and gasketted blanking plates to facilitate site handling. Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, must not distort when lifted and shall be provided with suitable flanges having sufficient and properly spaced bolts. Inspection openings shall be provided to give access to and removal of the internal connections of bushings, current transformers, winding connections and earthing links. Each opening shall be correctly located and must be of ample size for the purpose for which it is intended. Each inspection opening cover shall be provided with lifting handles and its weight shall not exceed 25kg. It must be possible to remove any bushing without removing the tank cover. Pockets shall be provided for a stem type thermometer and for the bulbs of temperature indicators where specified. These pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil temperature and it must be possible to remove any bulb without lowering the oil level in the tank. Captive screwed caps shall be provided to prevent the ingress of water to the thermometer pockets when they are not in use. Where called for in the Schedule of Requirements, accommodation shall be provided for outdoor weatherproof neutral current transformers.
11.3.2
Conservator Tanks, Breathers and Air Dryers
Each transformer shall be provided with an overhead conservator tank formed of substantial steel plates and arranged above the highest point of the oil circulating system. Connections into the main tank shall be at the highest point to prevent the trapping of air or gas under the main tank cover.
The location of the conservator tank shall be so arranged that it does not obstruct the passage of high voltage conductors above the transformer. The pipe work between the conservator and the transformer shall comply with the relevant requirements of the General Technical Requirements section and a valve shall be provided at the conservator to cut off the oil supply to the transformer. The capacity of each conservator tank shall be adequate for the expansion and contraction of oil in the whole system under the specified operating conditions. Conservator tanks shall also be provided with the following: (a) A removable end for cleaning purposes (b) A filling orifice with cap (c) A sump formed by projecting the feed pipe a minimum of 75mm above the bottom inside surface of the conservator (d) A drain valve with captive cap arranged to drain the conservator including the sump (e) An isolating valve arranged on the conservator side of the oil and gas actuated relay (f) An oil level indicator, magnetic type, with indicating levels corresponding to top oil temperature of 5oC, plus 30oC and plus 60oC and mounted so that it is readable by a person standing on the ground within 600mm of the end of the conservator. To be supplied with low oil level alarm contacts (g) Each conservator shall be fitted with a maintenance free silica gel breather. This shall be equipped with a sensor controlled heating system. The humidity of the air in the pipe line shall be continuously measured by the sensor and if a preset value is exceeded a selfregulating heating element inside the silica gel shall be activated. It shall be equipped with a self monitoring with remote output control system. Due to the climatic conditions at site, the breathers shall be larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate. All external parts shall be resistant against transformer oil, sea water and ultraviolet rays. All breathers shall be mounted at a height of approximately 1400 mm above ground level.
11.3.3
Valves and Location
Each transformer shall be fitted with the following valves as a minimum requirement. Main Tank (a) One horizontally mounted 50mm bore filter valve located near to the top of the tank. (b) One 50 mm bore filter valve located near to the bottom of the tank and diagonally opposite to the filter valve required against (a). Where design permits, this valve may be combined with item (c). (c) One 50mm drain valve with such arrangements as may be necessary inside the tank to ensure that the tank can be completely drained of oil as far as practicable. This valve shall also be provided with an approved oil sampling device 15mm diameter. (d) One 25mm bore valve at the bottom of the main tank and directly opposite to valve item (b) for connecting the pressure transducer of the oil filtration unit. Conservator
Page 208 of 365
(e) One valve between the conservator and gas actuated relay for the main tank and, where appropriate, for the tap change diverter switch tank. (f) One drain valve for oil conservator tank so arranged that the tank could be completely drained of all oil. (g) One horizontally mounted 50mm bore valve that has to be at the bottom of the conservator for the oil inlet of the oil filtration unit similar to valve item (b) Tap Changer Selector Switch (h) One 50mm filter and one 50mm drain valve where selector switches are contained in a separate tank. Diverter Switch (i) One 50mm drain valve to be fitted to each tank. An approved oil-sampling device shall also be provided. Blank flanges, plates or captive screw caps shall be fitted to all valves and pipe ends not normally connected in service. The omission of any, or the provision of alternative arrangements to the above requirements, will not be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.
11.3.4
Joints and Gaskets
All joint faces shall be arranged to prevent the ingress of water or leakage of oil with a minimum of gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air. Oil resisting synthetic rubber gaskets are not permissible except where the synthetic rubber is used as a bonding medium for cork or similar material or where metal inserts are provided to limit compression. Gaskets, having a minimum thickness of 5 mm, shall be as thin as is possible consistent with the provision of a good seal except that where jointing faces are precision machined thinner gaskets may be used and full details of all gasket sealing arrangements shall be shown on the Plant drawings submitted for approval. One set of gaskets should be supplied separately for each transformer so that new gaskets are available for use during the assembly of any part of the transformers, which are dispatched separately (e.g. radiators, conservators, valves etc.).
11.3.5
Pressure Relief Device
An approved pressure relief device of sufficient size for the rapid release of any pressure that may be generated in the tank and designed to operate at a static pressure lower than the hydraulic test pressure called for in the Schedule of Works Tests, shall be provided. An equalizer pipe connection shall be provided between the pressure relief device and the conservator. The relief device is to be mounted on the tank cover or sides and is to be provided with a skirt to project at least 25mm into the tank to prevent gas accumulation. In the event that the device is a spring operated valve type, it shall be provided with one set of normally open signalling contacts.
Page 209 of 365
11.3.6
Earthing Terminals
Four steel flag terminals having two 14mm diameter holes on 55 mm centres shall be located one on each side and near to the bottom of the transformer to facilitate connection to the local earthing system. Their location should be indicated on the drawings.
11.3.7
Rating, Diagram, and Valve Plates
The following plates, or an approved combined plate, shall be fixed to each transformer tank at an average height of 1500mm above the ground level: (a) A rating plate bearing the data specified in EN 60076, Part 1. This plate shall also include a space for the Purchaser's serial number and in addition include the short circuit current rating and time factor for each winding. (b) A diagram-plate showing in an approved manner, the internal connections and the voltage vector relationship of the several windings, in accordance with EN 60076, Part 1, with the transformer voltage ratio for each tap and, in addition, a plan view of the transformer giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals. (c) A plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs. This plate shall also if necessary warn operators to refer to the Maintenance Instructions before applying vacuum. The mass of oil shall be stated in litres and kg. Plates are to be of stainless steel or other approved material capable of withstanding the rigors of continuous outdoor service at site.
11.4 11.4.1
COOLING PLANT Cooling Plant General
Radiators and coolers, where required, shall be designed so that all painted surfaces can be thoroughly cleaned and easily painted on site with a brush or spray gun. The design shall also avoid pockets in which water can collect and shall be capable of withstanding the pressure tests specified in the Schedule of Works Tests for the transformer main tank. The clearance between any oil or other pipe work and live parts shall be not less than the minimum clearances stated in the Schedule of Requirements. The cooling of the transformers shall be such that failure of any one part of the cooling plant will not result in the loss of more than 50 per cent of the total forced cooling capacity.
11.4.2
Radiators Connected Directly to the Tank
Radiators connected directly to the tank shall be detachable and shall be provided with machined or ground flanged inlet and outlet branches. Plugs shall be fitted at the top of each radiator for air release and at the bottom for draining. A valve shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the tank.
11.4.3
Cooler banks
Each cooler bank shall be provided with: (a) A valve at each point of connection to the transformer tank. (b) A valve at each point of connection of radiators.
(c) Loose blanking plates to permit the blanking off of the main oil connections. (d) A 50mm filter valve at the top of each cooler bank. (e) A 50mm drain valve at the lowest point of each interconnecting oil pipe. (f) A thermometer pocket, fitted with captive screw cap, in the inlet and in the outlet oil pipes. (g) Air release and drain plugs on each radiator. The omission of any or the provision of alternative arrangements to the above requirements will not be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.
11.4.4
Forced Cooling
The type of forced cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees. Forced cooling equipment for transformers of similar rating and design shall be completely interchangeable with one another without modification on size.
11.4.5
Oil Pipes and Flanges
All oil piping necessary for the connecting of each transformer to the cooler banks shall be supplied under this Contract. The oil piping shall be of approved material with machined flanged joints. Copper pipe work is to comply with BS 61. Dimensions of steel pipes shall be in accordance with EN 10220 and the drilling of all pipe flanges shall comply with BS 4504. An approved expansion piece having anti-vibration characteristics shall be provided in each oil pipe connection between the transformer and each oil cooler bank. It shall be possible to drain any section of pipe work independently of the rest and drain valves or plugs shall be provided as necessary to meet this requirement.
11.4.6
Air Blowers
Air blowers for forced air-cooling shall be of approved make and design and be suitable for continuous operation outdoors and indoors. They shall also be capable of withstanding the stresses imposed when brought up to speed by the direct application of full line voltage to the motor. To reduce noise to the practical minimum, motors shall be mounted independently from the coolers or, alternatively, an approved form of anti-vibration mounting shall be provided. It shall be possible to remove the blower complete with motor without disturbing or dismantling the cooler structure framework. Blades shall be of galvanized steel unless otherwise approved. Blower casings shall be made of galvanized steel of thickness not less than 2,6mm (14 SWG) and shall be suitably stiffened by angles or tees. Galvanized wire with mesh not exceeding 12,5mm guards shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with the blades. Guards shall also be provided over all moving parts.
Page 211 of 365
Guards shall be designed such that blades and other moving parts can not be touched by test fingers.
11.4.7
Cooler Control
Where multiple fan cooling using small single-phase motors is employed, the motors in each cooling bank shall be grouped so as to form a balanced three-phased load. The supply to the cooling fans shall be controlled by means of a suitably rated isolating switch capable of being locked in the open position. A phase failure relay is to be provided in the main cooler supply circuit. Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a three pole electrically operated contactor and with control gear of approved design for starting and stopping manually. Auxiliary contacts on each contactor shall provide an alarm to the remote control panel when any of these contactors is open. Where forced cooling is used on transformers, provision shall be included under this Contract for automatic starting and stopping from the contacts on the winding temperature indicating device. The control equipment shall be provided with a short time delay device to allow the starting of only one group of fans at a time, in case of multiple fans cooling. Each motor shall be protected by a suitable circuit breaker with thermal and short circuit protection. Each motor circuit breaker shall have an auxiliary contact to provide an alarm to the remote control panel in the event of the circuit breaker being open. The control arrangements are to be designed to prevent the starting of motors totalling more than 15kW simultaneously either manually or automatically. All contacts and other parts, which may require periodic renewal, adjustment or inspection, shall be readily accessible. All wiring for the control gear accommodated in the marshalling kiosk together with all necessary cable boxes and terminations and all wiring between the marshalling kiosk and the motors shall be included in the Contract.
11.5 11.5.1
VOLTAGE CONTROL General
Where called for in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the tap changing type for varying the effective transformation ratio. Winding taps as called for in the Schedule of Requirements shall be provided on the high voltage winding. All terminals shall be clearly and permanently marked with numbers corresponding to the cables connected thereto. Tap positions shall be numbered consecutively ranging from one upwards. The lowest number shall represent the tapping position corresponding to the maximum number of high voltage winding turns.
Page 212 of 365
11.5.2
11.5.2.1
On-Load Tap Changers

General
On-load tap changers shall comply with EN 60214 and shall be suitable for power flow in both directions. Only designs that have been type tested in accordance with these standards will be accepted. Tap changers shall be based on vacuum switching technology and shall be manufactured by any one of the following approved manufacturers: (a) Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen Germany (b) ABB Components - Sweden Current making and breaking vacuum switches associated with the tap selectors or otherwise where combined with tap selectors shall be contained in a tank in which the head of oil is maintained by means, completely independent of that on the transformer itself. The head of oil in this tank shall be maintained either by a separate compartment of the main conservator or by a separately mounted tank. An oil surge detector relay, an oil level indicator and a dehydrating breather shall be provided. The tap changer shall have a 300.000 operations maintenance interval. Contacts used for making and breaking current shall be capable of performing at least 600.000 on-load tap change operations under maximum rated current conditions without replacement. Diverter switch life span shall be for at least 1 million operations. Transition resistors for on-load tap change equipment shall be mounted in the compartment containing contacts used for making and breaking current and their measured values shall be inscribed on the rating plate. Details of maintaining oil separation, oil levels, detection of oil surges and provision of alarm or trip contacts will be dependent on the design of tap-changer and be to the approval of the Engineer. 11.5.2.2 Mechanisms
The tap change equipment shall be suitable for operation from a single phase 230 V or three phase 400V, 50Hz supply. Means shall be provided adjacent to the tap-change motor for isolating the motor and the control gear from supply. The tap change mechanisms shall be designed such that when a tap change has been initiated, it will be completed independently of the operation of the control relays and switches. If a failure of the auxiliary supply during tap change or any other contingency would result in that movement not being completed an approved means shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary equipment. Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the tap changing mechanism. These shall be directly connected in the operating motor circuit. In addition, mechanical stops shall be fitted to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any conditions. For on-load tap change equipment these stops shall withstand the full torque of the driving mechanism without damage to the tap change equipment. Thermal devices or other approved means shall be provided to protect the motor and control circuit. A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be provided and fitted inside the tap change mechanism box.
Page 213 of 365
Switches, contacts and the driving mechanism shall be mounted in suitable compartments placed in accessible positions on the transformer. Any enclosed compartment not oil-filled shall be adequately ventilated and provided with low temperature heaters. All contactors, relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to condensation. 11.5.2.3 Local and Remote Control
Equipment for local manual and electrical operation shall be provided in an outdoor cubicle. Electrical remote control equipment shall be supplied if specified in the Schedule of Requirements. The mounting of driving mechanisms shall minimize projection from the transformer and shall be arranged such that the detachable manual operating handle in the driving mechanism is approximately 1,4m above ground level. Storage for the handle shall be provided within the casing of the tap changer driving mechanism. The following operating conditions are to apply to the on-load tap selector controls: (a) It must not be possible to operate the electrical drive when the manual operating gear is in use. (b) It must not be possible for two electric control points to be in operation at the same time. (c) Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only unless the control switch is returned to the off position between successive operations. (d) It must not be possible for any transformers operating in parallel with one or more transformers in a group to be more than one tap out of step with the other transformers in the group. (e) All electrical control switches and local manual operating gear shall be clearly labelled to indicate the direction of tap changing i.e. raise and lower tap number. 11.5.2.4 Indications
Apparatus of the latest technology and of an approved type shall be provided on each transformer: (a) To give indication mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote control point of the number of the tapping in use. This indication shall not be capable of being reset. (b) To give electrical indication, separate from that specified above, of tap position at the remote supervisory point. (c) To give indication at the remote control point that a tap change is in progress, this indication to continue until the tap change is completed. (d) To give indication at the remote control point and at the supervisory control point when the units of a group of transformers operating in parallel are operating at more than one tap apart. (e) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the number of operations completed by the equipment.
Page 214 of 365
(f) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the maximum and minimum position to which the mechanism has moved. These indications to be resettable.
11.5.3
Automatic Voltage Control
Automatic control, where specified, shall be suitable for the control of transformers in parallel, up to three transformers in the future. In addition to the methods of control covered in the Clause above, the following methods shall also be provided. (a) Automatic Independent: It shall be possible to select automatic independent control for each transformer irrespective of the method of control selected for any other of the associated transformers. (b) Automatic Parallel: It shall be possible using the minimum circulating current method or where specified the Master/Follower method.
11.6 11.6.1
TERMINAL BUSHINGS General
Unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers are to be provided with outdoor type bushing insulators for phase and neutral terminals. The conductor used must be to the requirements of EN 60137 using Copper based solid rod or stranded draw-lead fitted to a suitable outer terminal. All bushings shall be designed and tested in accordance with EN 60137 and the minimum creepage distance for outdoor bushings shall be as specified in the Schedules. Bushings for 66 kV and above shall be provided with adjustable arcing horns. Bushings shall be of sealed construction suitable for service under the very humid conditions at site and, in addition, to the very rapid cooling of equipment exposed to direct sunlight when this is followed by sudden heavy rainstorms. The insulation should be free at all times of partial discharge at all voltage levels within the working range and shall be tested for voids and partial discharges during manufacture. Typical sections of bushing insulators showing the internal construction, method of securing the top cap and methods of sealing shall be included in the Tender. On all condenser bushings a tapping shall be brought out to a separate terminal for testing purposes on site. Space on the bushing nameplates shall be provided for stamping values of initial field dissipation factor (tan ) tests.
11.6.2
Porcelain
Hollow porcelain shall meet the test requirements of BS 4963 (IEC 62155) and shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Designs based on jointed porcelains will not be acceptable. The glaze must not be depended upon for insulation. The glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall cover completely all exposed parts of the insulator. Outdoor insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working conditions.
The porcelain must not engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary, gaskets shall be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces in contact with gaskets shall be accurately ground and free from glaze. All fixing material used shall be of suitable quality and properly applied and must not enter into chemical action with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Cement thickness are to be as small and even as possible and proper care is to be taken to centre and locate the individual parts correctly during cementing. All porcelain insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning.
11.6.3
Marking
Each porcelain insulator shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or identification mark, year of manufacture serial number, electrical and mechanical characteristics in accordance with EN 60137. These marks shall be clearly legible and visible after assembly of fittings and not impressed but shall be imprinted before firing. When a batch of insulators bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further insulators bearing this mark shall be submitted and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected batch in such a way that there can be no possibility of the insulators being re-submitted for the test or supplied for the use of the Purchaser.
11.6.4
Mounting of Bushings
Bushing insulators shall be mounted on the tank in a manner such that the external connections can be taken away clear of all obstacles. Neutral bushings shall be mounted in a position from which a connection can be taken to a neutral current transformer mounted on a bracket secured to the transformer tank. The clearance from phase to earth must not be less than those stated in the Schedule of Requirements. The line current transformers, where required, will be provided under this Contract and the bushings are to be so arranged that these can be removed without disturbing the current transformers, secondary terminals and connections or pipe work. A flexible pull-through lead suitably sweated to the end of the winding copper shall be provided for the 66 kV and higher voltage bushings and is to be continuous to the connector which is housed in the helmet of the bushings. When bushings with an under-oil end of a re-entrant type are used the associated flexible pull-through lead is to be fitted with a suitably designed gas bubble deflector. The bushing flanges must not be of re-entrant shape, which may trap air. The quality of flange surfaces shall be N7. Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized and all bolt threads are to be greased before erection.
11.6.5
Identification and Arrangement of Terminals
The terminals of the transformer, 1U, 1V, 1W for the primary side and 2U, 2V, 2W for the secondary side, shall arranged from right to left as viewed from the low-voltage, with their inscriptions visible from the low-voltage side, Fig 11-1
Figure 11-1 Identification and arrangement of the terminals of a transformer
11.7 11.7.1
CABLES AND TERMINATIONS Cable Boxes and Sealing End Chambers
Where 132 kV, 66 kV, and 22 kV cables terminate on transformers, suitable cable boxes shall be provided. Means shall be provided for easy disconnection of the cables from the transformer bushings for testing purposes.
11.7.2
Testing
The cable box and disconnecting or sealing end chamber shall be capable of withstanding for fifteen minutes both at the time of the first test on the cables and at any subsequent time as may be required, between phases and phases to earth, a test voltage equal to: 2E kV DC or an AC test equal to 1,3E kV, where, E = RMS nominal system voltage in kV between phases. During these tests, the links in the disconnecting or sealing end chamber will be withdrawn and the transformer windings with connectors thereto will be earthed.
11.7.3
Supply of Cables
Auxiliary power and multicore control cables between the integral parts of the transformer, its marshalling kiosk or tank mounted cubicle and ancillary equipment shall be installed, glanded and have individual cores identified and terminated under this Contract. Similarly, cables from each transformer to its associated protective equipment, to auxiliary supply switchboards and interconnections with other transformers will be supplied, glanded and have individual cores identified under this Contract.
11.7.4
Cable Support Brackets
Where 132kV, 66kV, and 22kV cable boxes are fitted the transformers shall be supplied with suitable cable support brackets for supporting adequately the cables both under normal operating conditions and under abnormal conditions such as during short circuit.
11.8 11.8.1
TEMPERATURE AND ALARM DEVICES AND MARSHALLING CUBICLES Temperature Indicating Devices and Alarms
The transformers shall be provided with two approved devices for indicating the hottest spot HV and LV temperatures. The devices shall have a dial type indicator, and in addition, a
pointer to register the highest temperature reached. Each winding temperature device shall have three separate contacts fitted, one of which shall be used to control the cooling plant motors, one to give an alarm and one to trip the associated circuit-breakers. The dial of the temperature indicators shall have a scale ranging from 30oC to 150oC preferably uniformly divided. The temperature indicators shall be equipped with transmitter for remote indication. To simulate indication of the hottest spot temperature of the windings the device shall comprise a current transformer associated with one phase only and a heating device designed to operate continuously at 130 percent of transformer CMR current and for thirty minutes at 150% of CMR current, associated with a sensing bulb installed in an oil tight pocket in the transformer top oil. One CT shall be installed in the HV winding termination and the second in the LV winding termination. The winding temperature indicators shall be housed in the marshalling cubicle. The tripping contacts of the winding temperature indicators shall be adjustable to close between 80oC and 150oC and to re-open when the temperature has fallen by not more than 10oC. The alarm contacts and the contacts used to control the cooling plant motors and initiate automatic start-up of the reserve cooler on the above devices shall be adjustable to close between 50oC and 100oC and to re-open when the temperature has fallen by a desired amount between 15oC and 30oC. All contacts shall be adjustable to a scale and must be accessible on the removal of the cover. Alarm and trip circuit contacts shall be suitable for making or breaking 150VA between the limits of 30V and 250V AC or DC and of making 500VA between the limits of 110V and 250V DC. Cooler motor control contacts shall be suitable for operating the cooler contactors direct, or if necessary, through an interposing relay. The temperature indicators in the marshalling kiosk shall be so designed that it is possible to move the pointers by hand for the purpose of checking the operation of the contacts and associated equipment. The working parts of the instrument shall be made visible by the provision of cut-away dials and glass-fronted covers and all setting and error adjustment devices shall be easily accessible. Connections shall be brought from the device to terminal boards placed inside the marshalling cubicle. Isolating and test links and a 63 mm moving iron ammeter shall be provided in the marshalling kiosk for each winding temperature indicator for: (a) Checking the output of the current transformer. (b) Testing the current transformer and thermal image characteristics. (c) Disconnecting the bulb heaters from the current transformer secondary circuit to enable the instrument to be used as an oil temperature indicator. The calibration of the indicator shall be related to the winding having the maximum temperature rise. If the values on the winding temperature indicator vary by more than plus or minus 3oC from the values derived during the temperature rise tests specified in the Schedule of Particulars, adjustment shall be made to the equipment to achieve these limits.
Page 218 of 365
11.8.2
Gas and Oil Actuated Relays
Each transformer shall be fitted with gas and oil-actuated relay equipment having alarm contacts, which close on collection of gas or low oil level, and tripping contacts which close following oil surge conditions. Each gas and oil-actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible pipe connection for checking the operation of the relay. Each relay shall be fitted with a calibrated glass window for indication of gas volume. A machined surface shall be provided on the top of each relay to facilitate the settings of the relays and to check the mounting angle in the expansion pipe and the cross level of the relay. A straight run of pipe shall be provided for a length of five times the internal diameter of the pipe on the tank side of the gas and oil actuated relay and three times the internal diameter of the pipe on the conservator side of the gas and oil-actuated relay. To allow gas to be collected at ground level, a small bore pipe shall be connected to the gas release cock of the gas and oil-actuated relay and brought down to a point approximately 1.400mm above ground level, where it shall be terminated by a cock which shall have provision for locking to prevent unauthorized operation. The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the associated pipework and the cooling plant shall be such that maloperation of the relays will not take place under normal service conditions, including starting or stopping of oil circulating pumps, if available, whether by manual or automatic control under all operating temperatures. The pipework shall be so arranged that all gas arising from the transformer will pass into the gas and oil-actuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay must not form a delivery path in parallel with any circulating oil pipe, nor is it to be teed into or connected through the pressure relief vent. Sharp bends in the pipework shall be avoided. The transformer shall be provided with two gas and oil-actuated relays piped separately to the conservators for the transformer main tank and for the tap changer.
11.8.3
Marshalling Cubicles
The transformer ancillary apparatus shall be mounted in an approved heated and ventilated cubicle, attached to the transformer. The cubicle shall preferably be divided into four separate compartments for the accommodation of the following equipment. (a) Temperature indicators, cooler control "Auto-Hand" selector switch and test links and ammeter for the winding temperature indicator circuits. (b) Control and protection equipment for the tap change gear including an isolating switch in the incoming circuit capable of carrying and breaking the full load current of the motor and of being locked in the open position. (c) Control and protection equipment for the cooling plant including an isolating switch in the incoming circuit capable of carrying and breaking the full load current of all cooling plant motors and of being locked in the open position. The control facilities shall include a cooler selector switch, which can be padlocked in either position to select either cooler for remote control. Local control of the selected cooler shall be provided.
Page 219 of 365
(d) Terminal boards and gland plates including glands where specified for incoming and outgoing cables. Provision shall also be made for termination of secondary wiring of current transformers where specified. All doors shall be fastened by integral handles with provision for locking each door. The Temperature indicators shall be so mounted that the dials are not more than 1700mm from ground level and the door(s) of the compartment shall be provided with glazed windows of adequate size. Facilities shall be provided to permit the temperature indicators with capillary tubing and bulbs to be removed from the cubicle. Mechanical protection shall be provided and sharp bends avoided where the capillary tubes enter the cubicle. To prevent internal condensation an approved type of metal clad heater shall be provided controlled by a switch and a 5A fuse inside the cubicle to be supplied from a separate substation "heating" supply circuit. All internal wiring shall be so placed as not to obstruct access. Labels in addition to those specified elsewhere shall be provided on the outside of the kiosk to identify the compartments. All three-phase relays, contactors, isolating switches and thermal devices shall be marked with appropriate phase colour. Apparatus in which the phase elements are mounted horizontally shall be coloured brown, black, grey from left to right when viewed from the front of the panel, and when mounted vertically they shall be coloured brown, black, grey from top and bottom. The kiosk shall be fitted with the following interlocked switch sockets, mounted externally to provide auxiliary supply points: Weatherproof 15A 3-pin switched socket, Walsall type SP51/55 list No. 2193 for 240V AC complete with plug. The switched socket shall be connected to the cubicle heater supply circuit through a 15 A fuse or MCB in the live lead.
All supply circuits in the marshalling cubicles shall be monitored to alarm to the remote control panel in case the supply to the circuit is OFF or tripped.
11.9
DRYING OUT
All transformers shall be dried out by an approved method at the manufacturer's works and so arranged that they might be put into service without further drying out on site. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details of the method which they recommend should be adopted for drying out the transformers on site should it prove necessary to do so. Clear instructions shall be included in the Maintenance Instructions regarding any special precautionary measures (e.g., strutting of tap changer barriers or tank cover) which must be taken before the specified vacuum treatment can be carried out. Any special equipment necessary to enable the transformer to withstand the treatment shall be provided with each transformer. The maximum vacuum which the complete transformer, filled with oil, can safely withstand without any special precautionary measures being taken is also to be stated in the Maintenance Instructions.
Page 220 of 365
11.10 OIL
The Contractor shall supply the first filling with transformer oil. The required oil shall be produced from naphthenic base oil. It shall be inhibited mineral insulating oil with extremely good electrical and excellent ageing properties meeting the latest EN 60296 special applications and with the minimum properties shown in table below. The quantity of 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol antioxidant additive shall be stated in the quality certificate. The required Insulating Oil shall be completely free from Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) (EN 61619). A certificate stating the oil is free from PCBs must be submitted with the offer and shall accompany the shipping documents, in order to release delivery from customs. The required properties of the Insulating Oil shall be as in the table below: PROPERTY REQUIRED LIMITING VALUES Appearance Viscosity at 40oC (EN ISO 3104) at -30oC Pour point (EN ISO 3016) Water content (EN 60814) Breakdown voltage kV (EN 60156) Density at 20oC (EN ISO 3675 or EN ISO 12185) Dielectric dissipation factor, at 90oC Acidity (EN 62021) Corrosive Sulphur (ASMT 1275B, DIN 51353, and IEC 62535) Anti-oxidant additive Furfural content (EN 61198) Max 0,003 Max 0,01 mg. KOH/g Not corrosive 0,35 0,40% Max 0,1 mg/kg Max 0,895 g/ml Clear, free from sediment and suspended matter Max 12mm2/s Max 1800mm2/S Max -40oC Max 30 mg/kg for bulk supply / 40 mg/kg for delivery in drums Min 30 kV / 70kV after treatment
Page 221 of 365
Oxidation stability, (EN 61125 method C) Test Duration:500h Total acidity Sludge DDF at 90oC Flash Point PCB Content (IEC 61619) Max 0,1 mg KOH/g Max 0,03 Wt% Max 0,030 Min 135oC Non Detectable
Where the transport weight of transformers does not exceed 50.000 kg these can be shipped partly oil filled with sufficient oil to cover the windings and the insulation. The oil shall be under controlled nitrogen pressure of about 0,3 atmospheres. Alternatively the transformers can be shipped without oil with the tanks filled with nitrogen under pressure of about 30,4kPa. The Tenderers shall submit with their offer details on how they propose to ship the transformers for approval by the Engineer. The Tenderers must also supply full details on filling up the transformers with oil after delivery. Earthing transformers shall be delivered full with oil.
11.11 EARTHING AND AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS 11.11.1 General
The earthing transformers shall comply with EN 60289 and shall be of the oil immersed ONAN type suitable for outdoor installation and are to have a main interconnected star winding which will be directly connected to the lower voltage terminals of the associated system transformer. The neutral point of the interconnected star winding shall be brought out of the tank through a bushing insulator. This point may be isolated or connected to earth directly or through an impedance in order to provide an earthing point for the neutral of the system. The earthing transformers shall also be provided with a delta connected tertiary winding and also with a star connected auxiliary winding arranged to give a 400/230V, threephase, four-wire supply. The auxiliary winding shall have the continuous rating stated in the Schedule of Requirements and shall conform to EN 60076.
11.11.2
Electrical and Short Circuit Characteristics
The earthing transformers shall, when operating continuously at any load up to continuous maximum rating of the auxiliary winding be capable of withstanding for a period of three seconds the application of normal three-phase line voltage to the line terminals of the interconnected star winding with one line terminal and the neutral terminal connected solidly to earth. The zero phase sequence impedance and resistance of the interconnected star winding under these conditions shall be as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees. Additionally, the earthing and auxiliary transformers shall, when operating continuously at any load up to CMR, be capable of withstanding for three seconds the current obtained
Page 222 of 365
when a short circuit is applied between any or all of the lower voltage terminals with full line voltage maintained at the higher voltage terminals. The foregoing conditions shall assume an initial winding temperature which is the sum of the maximum ambient temperature stated in the relevant Schedule and the temperature rise obtained by continuous operation at CMR. The interconnected star winding of the earthing transformers when at its maximum temperature due to continuous full load on the auxiliary winding shall be designed to carry for thirty seconds without injuries heating an earth fault current not less than the full load lower voltage current of the main transformer to which it is connected or otherwise the current stated in Schedule of Requirements.
11.11.3
Tanks and Fittings
The earthing transformers shall be provided with the following fittings: (a) Conservator vessel with removable end cover and prismatic oil gauge (b) Buchholz relay (c) One thermometer pocket with captive screw cap (d) A maintenance free silica gel breather. This shall be equipped with a sensor controlled heating system. The humidity of the air in the pipe line shall be continuously measured by the sensor and if a preset value is exceeded a self-regulating heating element inside the silica gel shall be activated. It shall be equipped with a self monitoring with remote output control system. Due to the climatic conditions at site, this breather shall be larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate. It shall be mounted at a height of approximately 1400 mm above ground level. (e) Pressure relief device (f) Filter valve and combined filter and drain valves (g) Oil sampling device (h) Rating plate
11.11.4
Auxiliary Winding
The three-phase, four-wire auxiliary windings shall be terminated at a three-pole combined fuse switch unit to EN 60947-3 with bolted neutral link and gland entry for a 185mm2 3 1/2 - core CEANDER type XLPE cable or other equivalent. This shall be accommodated in a lockable, fully weatherproof compartment together with a neutral earthing link. The purpose of the neutral earthing link is to connect the 400V system neutral to earth. It shall be connected between the transformer winding end and a suitably located earthing terminal to which the system earth can be connected. Three spare fuses shall be supplied with each transformer.
11.11.5
Tappings
Tappings shall be provided on the low voltage winding to give the no-load voltage variation specification in Schedule of Requirements.
Page 223 of 365
11.11.6
Tap Changing
Tap changing shall be carried out with the transformer off-circuit by means of an externally operated self-positioning tapping switch. All phases of the tapping switch shall be operated by one handwheel, which shall be positively located and lockable at each tapping switch position. Indication plates shall be fitted to show clearly the tap position number at which the transformer is operating. Switch position number one shall correspond to the maximum plus tapping.
11.11.7
Oil
The specification of oil shall be as per paragraph 11.10 above.
Page 224 of 365
12. STATION DC EQUIPMENT 12.1 12.1.1 BATTERY CELLS General
The Battery shall be of long service life, high reliability and have an outstanding resistance to electrical abuse. The battery cells shall be of the high performance nickel/cadmium type (low internal resistance) and shall be designed for a life expectancy of at least 25 years under the conditions of service likely to be encountered by the equipment detailed in this Specification. The nickel/cadmium batteries shall comply generally with EN 60623, any variations being subject to the approval of the Engineer/client.
12.1.2
Battery Voltage Characteristic
The Charge/Discharge characteristic of the battery shall be submitted with the tender and an optimal float charge voltage per cell, which is just below the gassing level, shall be deducted such that the battery can recover to between 75% to 100% capacity within 24 hours from a fully discharged condition, with minimum electrolyte loss. The final volts/cell for boost charging shall be as high as possible to maintain amperehour efficiency.
12.1.3
Battery Construction
The cells of alkaline batteries shall be of long service life high reliability and shall be of robust construction and resistant to both mechanical and electrical abuse. The cells shall be designed for a life expectancy of 25 years under the conditions of service to be encountered by the specified plant. They shall be suitable for use in remote locations or where maintenance shall be minimal and shall be suitable for tropical climate. The electrolyte capacity and general design of the batteries shall be such that inspection and maintenance, including topping up of the electrolyte, shall be at intervals of not less than twelve months.
12.1.4
Cell Boxes
Cell boxes shall be designed to give ease of maintenance and provide mechanical strength and stability of the material used throughout the extended life. Cell boxes shall be manufactured from translucent or transparent high impact, durable plastic polymers, making the product well suited to the environment. The containers shall not deform or buckle under high room temperature, abnormal heat generated under heavy charging conditions and high gas pressure in case of blocked vent plugs.
12.1.5
Positive Pocket Plates
The positive pocket plates shall be designed for optimum performance and shall utilize high quality nickel-plated perforated steel, which shall form pockets containing the active material. The individual pockets shall form a homogenous plate enclosed in an outer frame for robustness. Latest means of providing an excellent electrical conductivity shall be adopted.
Page 225 of 365
Sufficient space shall be provided beneath the plates to accommodate any deposit, which may accumulate at the bottom of the cell without short-circuiting the plates. The life of the cell shall not be limited by the accumulation of deposit.
12.1.6
Negative Pocket Plates
The design of the negative pocket plates shall be similar to that of the positive pocket plates above with high perforation density and cadmium-plated.
12.1.7
Plate Inter-Connections
All the positive and negative plates shall be welded together in their respective groups and brought out to the terminal posts in such a way as to provide a low resistance path for optimum cell electrical performance.
12.1.8
Separators
Separators shall be provided between plates to prevent metallic conduction whilst permitting electrolyte conduction. Separators shall be suitable for continuous immersion in the electrolyte without distortion. The inter-plate separators shall ensure minimum electrical resistance and shall last at least as long as the life of the cell.
12.1.9
Terminals
The terminals shall be of a high conductivity and corrosion free materials and the terminal pillars shall match the size and discharge currents of the cell.
12.1.10
Inter-Cell Connectors
Inter-cell connectors shall be manufactured of high conductivity materials to keep the voltage drop between the cells to a minimum. The size and number of these connectors shall be capable of carrying the full discharge current. The connectors shall be of rigid construction and shall be interchangeable. "Bolted-on" type of connector is preferred.
12.1.11
Vent Plugs
The design of the vent plug shall be such that it can effectively prevent the electrolyte from spraying when the cells are under boost charge and at the same time providing sufficient ventilation for the gas to escape under the worst charging condition. The vent shall also be designed such that it can effectively act as a flame retardant. The size of the plug holes shall be large enough to permit convenient normal filling and topping of the electrolyte and extraction of the fluid using a syphon hydrometer for test purposes. The plugholes shall be so designed such as to minimize spraying of the electrolyte when the cells are accidentally rocked or moved from places with the plugs withdrawn. During transit blank plugs shall be fitted to prevent the formation of carbonate in the residual electrolyte that might be available and also to prevent the collection of dust and foreign particles.
Page 226 of 365
12.1.12
Polarity Identification
The positive (+) identification terminal shall be indicated on a red disk on the appropriate pillar and/or lid next to the pillar. Similarly for the negative (-) identification terminal which shall be marked on a blue disk.
12.1.13
Type Reference
The cell type reference shall be marked on both sides of the cell.
12.1.14
Electrolyte Level
The upper and lower electrolyte level markings shall form continuous lines on both sides of the containers. The levels shall be clearly drawn or formed as part of the container and they shall denote the upper and lower permissible levels of the electrolyte under normal operations and appropriately marked as "UPPER" and "LOWER" respectively.
12.1.15
Battery Crates
For convenience of handling, the plastic cells may be supplied in taped block form.
12.1.16
Battery Fuse Box
Each battery shall be provided with a suitable size set of fuses, mounted in a wall enclosure. The fuses shall be removable using suitable fuse handle.
12.2 12.2.1
BATTERY MOUNTING, CONNECTIONS, AND ACCESSORIES Battery Mounting
Batteries shall be mounted on anti-seismic single tier multistep racks of robust construction and shall be arranged in single parallel rows that shall not exceed a total height of one meter and a depth of 90 cm. Stands shall be treated with two coats of acid resisting enamel of approved colour and arranged such that each cell is readily accessible for inspection, test and maintenance including topping up of electrolyte. The stands shall be mounted on porcelain insulators and shall be so dimensioned such that the bottom of the lower step is not less than 30 mm above the floor. A separate stand shall be supplied for each battery bank. Each battery stand shall be installed on a stainless steel tray, type AISI- 316L of 2.0mm thickness that will collect the electrolyte in case of spillage.
12.2.2
Connectors and Termination Lugs
Apart from the requirements of inter-cell connectors previously described, connectors and termination lugs shall be supplied complete for tapping of the battery cells and termination of multicore cables to the battery chargers. All connectors and cable lugs shall be rated according to the current discharge rating of the batteries.
12.2.3
Accessories
Each battery installation shall be provided with a durable instruction card placed inside a strong wooden or suitably treated steel box with a full set of test accessories, installation tools, etc., which shall include the following minimum requirements: (a) 3-0-3 volts Voltmeter for cell testing,
(b) Small syphon hydrometer, (c) Large syphon hydrometer, (d) Cell bridging connector, (e) Level testing tube, (f) Topping up bottle/equipment as appropriate to the type of installation. Labels shall be provided to number each separate cell in numerical order. These shall be supplied loose and affixed at site once the cells are connected together.
12.2.4
Battery Spares
Spares shall be provided for the battery installation as follows: Electrolyte (concentrated): 10% Stand and cell insulators: 5% Battery cell: 4 Inter-cell connectors: 2% Mineral jelly: 1 standard tin
The mineral jelly shall be specially selected for greasing of terminals and connectors for all cells. The above spares are deemed to be consumable spares and as such are to be considered as part and parcel of the main battery equipment. Correspondingly, these are not shown separately on the Schedule of Spares.
12.2.5
Shipping and Site Assembly
The batteries shall be shipped dry to be assembled on site.
12.3 12.3.1
DC CONTROL & CHARGING EQUIPMENT General
The DC charging equipment shall be contained in a ventilated, floor standing, steel cubicle, having a hinged front door with locking facilities, complying with the general requirements of this Specification and giving full access to all components and cable connections. The Charger cubicle shall be mounted in a separate cubicle from the 110 V DC distribution panel and the 110/48 V DC converters that shall form a combined Distribution Board/DC to DC converter cubicle. As detailed in the drawing the battery chargers shall be physically situated in the substation battery room, the 110 V DC distribution board with the DC to DC converters and the 110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter shall be situated in the relay room and the 48 V DC distribution board shall be situated in the telecommunication room. Where ventilation openings are provided, these shall be fitted with drip-proof louvers and fine mesh wire or perforated screens to exclude small insects and vermin. Cubicle design shall be equal to IP31 or better.
Page 228 of 365
Status indication shall be provided locally by means of LEDs mounted on the front of the charger cubicle and in addition relays shall be provided, having a minimum of two normally open contacts, for the transmission of remote alarms. Chargers shall be designed to operate from a three-phase 400 V AC supply, except when the input rating is low enough for a single-phase 230 V AC supply to be used. Chargers shall be self-protecting in the event of continuous overload or short circuit and shall have current limiting facilities. They shall be suitable for re-adjustment to correct for the aging of rectifiers and other parts. The charger shall be of constant voltage, current limiting type that shall be suitable for unattended charging of station batteries. The design of the Charger components shall be of modular construction with chassis mounting such as to facilitate fault locating and testing of individual electronic control unit/card. Easy access from the front or top of the cubicle shall be allowed for dismantling each component/unit package. The block schematic of the whole DC system is shown in Figure 12-1. The DC system mainly incorporates two 400 V AC / 110 V DC Chargers, one 110 V DC Distribution Board, a battery set, two 110/48 V DC to DC converters, a 110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter and a 48 V DC Distribution Board.
12.3.2
Application
Generally the chargers shall be suitable for the following applications: (a) Unattended charging for Nickel/Cadmium Alkaline batteries as specified elsewhere in this specification to provide high security DC supply. (b) Simultaneous supply of load current and re-charge current. (c) Switch duties such as tripping and closing of circuit breakers for short durations with high peak current.
12.3.3
Operation
The automatic charger shall maintain the battery installation normally in the float/trickle charge mode, such that no discharge occurs with the normal standing loads and the battery remains fully charged. Battery Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically irrespective of the fluctuations in the voltage and frequency of the AC supply within the specified limits.
12.3.4
Regulation
Each charger shall be designed with a performance on float charge such that, with the output voltage set at approximately 1,45 volts per cell, the output voltage shall not vary by more than 1% with any combination of input supply voltage and frequency variations as stipulated under this Specification and output current variation from 0-100%.
Page 229 of 365
Figure 12-1 Typical Diagram of DC System in Transmission/Distribution Substations
Page 230 of 365
12.3.5
Output Voltage
The output voltage regulator shall be adjustable within reasonable limits and shall be so designed such that the setting cannot be inadvertently disturbed. Under all circumstances the following minimum range of charger output voltage adjustments shall be allowed: Float: 100% to 125% Boost: 110% to 145%
The float voltage level shall be set at or as near as possible to the upper limit to which the load can accept with the battery charged at just below gassing level. An approved overvoltage detection relay shall be provided on each charger to give local indication and remote alarm when the charger voltage rises by more than 5 volts above its normal automatic float voltage. This alarm shall be disconnected whenever boost charge is selected.
12.3.6
Charger Rating
The selected rating of the battery charger shall be such that the following duties can be met: (a) The charger shall be capable of bringing a completely discharged battery to a fully charged state in 10 hours with the normal load disconnected. (b) Following a 4-hour discharge into the normal load circuit, the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery to a fully charged condition in 8 hours with the load still connected. (c) Where dual batteries are specified, provision must be made to ensure that the above conditions (a) and (b) can be met for both batteries even if one charger should fail. The rating of the float charger shall be equal to the normal battery standing load plus the recommended finishing charger rate for the battery which shall not be less than numerically equal to 10% of the battery capacity at the 10 hour rate. The chargers shall be capable of delivering the following minimum continuous output currents: 300Ah system 90A 200Ah system 60A 100Ah system 30A
12.3.7
Power Rating
All charger components shall be rated at a minimum of 125% of the nominal full load for uous operation.
12.3.8
Boost Charging
A boost charger shall be provided to quickly recharge the battery after a heavy discharge. The voltage/current characteristics of the boost charger shall be such as to minimize gassing during the finishing period of a conditioning charge. The maximum voltage of the
Page 231 of 365
boost charger when delivering the recommended finishing charge shall be not more than 1,8 volts per cell for a nickel/cadmium battery. Regardless of how much charging capacity is available, a charging rate of the NominalAmpere-Hour/5 will not normally be exceeded. Boost charging must be afforded with the load disconnected or with a dropping diode assembly inserted in the load circuit, to prevent applying overvoltage to the load.
12.3.9
Fast Charge Facility
Beside the above 2-level float and boost charge modes which can be selected manually, the Charger design shall incorporate automatic fast/quick charge mode when on float. The fast charge mode shall be triggered through a voltage-sensing device after a mains failure over a preset period of between 0 to 10 hours. After the voltage level has recovered to a preset value and/or reached a preset time period of 0 to 24 hours, the charger will automatically return to the float/trickle charge mode. During this charging time the rectifier should change automatically from current limit to constant voltage mode in order to avoid exceeding 1,65V battery voltage. A third level charging mode for manual boost charging and for testing and commissioning purposes shall be provided for in the above situation.
12.3.10
Control Unit
Control circuit failures in S.C.R. type of battery charger is rather common and as such, a spare control card, together with one main circuit S.C.R. shall be permanently accommodated in each charger and labelled accordingly.
12.3.11
Transformers
Each charger shall be completed with a transformer of suitable rating and connection design for the specified auxiliary supply voltage. It shall be of indoor, natural air-cooled type, enclosed in a ventilated sheet-steel case.
12.3.12
Rectifiers
Unless otherwise approved all rectifiers and semi-conducting devices employed in the charger shall be of the silicon type. They shall be adequately rated with regard to the air temperature within the charger enclosure for the maximum ambient temperature. The output from the rectifier shall be controlled in response to originals from the control circuits and appropriately smoothed.
12.3.13
Battery Earthing and Earth Fault Indication
110 V (nominal) batteries shall operate unearthed. Means shall be provided to detect low insulation resistance of all the wiring connected to the battery by the following method and to give an earth fault alarm. The earth fault detection circuit shall consist in principle of a resistance connected across the battery output on the distribution side of the fuses with a relay connected between the centre point of this resistance and the earth terminal. Any unbalanced leakage current due to the low insulation resistance of the wiring connected to either pole of the battery shall cause a current to flow in the relay, which will operate at the predetermined value. The relay shall discriminate between positive and negative earth faults and test circuits shall be incorporated to simulate positive or negative earth faults by operation of push buttons.
12.3.14
Charge Fail Indication
An approved charge fail relay shall be provided for each charger to detect failure of the DC output of the low-rate charger and also fall of battery voltage below the low-rate value. This relay shall not operate on transient loss of charger input voltage due to faults on the power system or due to normal surges. The alarm shall not be initiated when any one charger is switched off.
12.3.15
Overload Protection
Independent current limiting circuits shall be provided on both float and boost operations for overload protection, which extends down to continuous short circuit, without damage to internal components or blowing of fuses. Automatic recovery to a constant voltage characteristic shall be allowed at the end of an overload.
12.3.16
Fault Protection
The following fault protections are normally employed and shall be incorporated: (a) Thermal input circuit breakers (b) High speed fuse in the transformer secondary and DC output for protection of thyristor stack and reverse battery connection (c) RC suppression network for protection of thyristor stack (d) Voltmeter fuse
12.3.17
Instruments, Indications, and Controls
Each charger shall be provided with the following instrumentation, indication and control facilities: 12.3.17.1 LED Mains ON (green) Charger fail (red) Charger on Float (white or red) Charger on Boost (orange or red) Battery earth fault Battery low-voltage Battery over-voltage
12.3.17.2 Voltmeter Charger output DC voltage Charger input AC voltage
12.3.17.3 Ammeter Charger output DC current

Page 233 of 365
12.3.17.4 Selector Switch Float/Boost selection
12.3.17.5 MCB Mains ON/OFF input
12.3.17.6 Push Button Lamp test
In addition, each charger shall be equipped with either an off-load isolator or disconnecting links for the DC output.
12.3.18
Alarm Facilities
The following alarms shall be provided for remote indication: Mains failure Charger fail Battery earth fault Battery under-voltage Battery over-voltage
In addition to the above, a common alarm to sum up all the alarms shall be provided for supervisory connection to the grid control centre. All alarm relays shall be supplied complete with the charger.
12.3.19
Other Facilities
Particulars shall be given on the method of adjustment included to compensate for aging of rectifier elements. Means shall be provided, to limit the voltage at the outgoing terminals of the distribution board to a value not greater than the lowest continuous maximum voltage rating of the relays, instruments etc., connected to it. The scheme, which may incorporate counter cells or back-off diodes, shall function particularly during boost charging. Means shall be provided for an automatic selection of silicon diodes positioned between the battery and the loads to drop the excess voltage. This requirement does not apply to duplicate battery and charger system. For the dual charger schemes, blocking diodes shall be connected in the output lead of the charger to allow independent sensing and ensure minimum battery drain by auxiliary circuits. Where necessary, a DC output suppressor shall be fitted to provide an alternative energy path for inductive DC current and thus preventing it from damaging the thyristor stack.
12.3.20
Wiring of Charger Unit
All wiring internal to the charger i.e. between the various relays, controller, etc., should be numbered (ferruled) so as to facilitate circuit tracing in the occurrence of a circuit failure. A schedule of the wiring so numbered shall be provided for each charger equipment.
12.3.21
Wiring Diagrams
Each charger unit shall be provided with a set of schematic drawings of the components installed in the unit. Block diagrams as well as complete internal circuit diagrams and connections shall be included together with a booklet with circuit description and operation alarms, relays etc., with fault diagnostic procedures. A durable instruction card complete with systems block diagram shall be placed in a slot on the inside of the Charger's cubicle door.
12.3.22
Wiring Termination
The wiring termination and terminal block requirements shall be in accordance with the specification.
12.3.23
Labels
Labels complying with the specification shall be supplied to denote and signify all instruments, controls and indications. Labels shall also be fixed on the charger's main components for identification of the functions/controls.
12.3.24
Spares
The following spares are considered part and parcel of the charger system: Neon bulbs and LEDs: 20%
12.4 12.4.1
DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS General
110 V DC distribution panels shall be mounted in a stand alone cubicle together with the two DC to DC converters and the 110V DC to 230V AC inverter as specified in detail in the Schedules and indicated in the drawing and shall generally comply with the requirements of cubicle type control panels of this specification. 48 V DC distribution panels shall be mounted in the telecommunications room.
12.4.2
Cubicle Construction
The DC Boards, either 110V DC or 48V DC, shall be enclosed in a suitable free-standing steel cubicle. The cubicle shall be constructed of sheet steel or cold rolled steel not less than 1,5mm thick and shall be preferably of folded construction. Doors should be 2mm thick or more.
12.4.3
Ratings
The 110 V DC Board shall have the following minimum incoming and outgoing circuits: 1 Incoming double pole MCB - At least 63A 5 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs 6A each 11 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs 16A each 2 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs 20A each 2 Outgoing double pole MCBs At least 32A
Page 235 of 365
Adequate space to accommodate at least 20 outgoing MCBs. The 48 V DC board shall have the following minimum incoming and outgoing circuits: 1 Incoming double pole MCB At least 32A 6 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs 6A each
Adequate space to accommodate at least five (5) 6A outgoing MCBs shall be provided.
12.4.4
Busbars
The busbars shall be rated not less than the load requirements of the outgoing circuits specified above. The busbars shall be connected directly to the 110V battery and charger system through double pole switches. Where duplicate battery and charger systems are specified they shall be paralleled to the busbars with the switches interlocked to the float/boost switch. Busbars shall have colour markings to indicate the positive and negative polarities similar to battery markings.
12.4.5
12.4.5.1
Converters
General
The 110V DC to 48V DC converters shall be mounted in the DC distribution cubicle. 12.4.5.2 Ratings
The output of the DC/DC converter shall be 48V5% with 20A continuous current rating. A minimum of 80% power efficiency conversion shall be considered. Each 48V DC converter output shall be isolated using a double pole switch.
12.4.6
Interlocks
As stated in the above paragraphs for duplicate battery and charger system, the charger incoming switches shall be interlocked to the charger float/boost selection switch such that, (a) A charger being connected to the busbar cannot be switched to boost charge. (b) A charger can only be connected to the busbar when selected on float charge. (Or alternatively, if the charger is connected to the load while on boost charge, then the charger will automatically return to float charge). (c) Both chargers can be operated in parallel on float charge.
12.4.7
Fuses, Links, and Switchgear
The switchgear shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of the Specification incorporating fuse-switch units of quick-break type, which shall be suitable for carrying continuously the rated current and of making or breaking this current. Where a linkswitch is specified in the Schedules an assembly similar to the fuse-switch shall be supplied, but the fuses shall be replaced by bolted copper links. The equipment shall be capable of carrying, making and breaking the maximum possible fault current and details of the make-up of this shall be provided. Curves of battery current plotted against time under short-circuit conditions shall be supplied.
Outgoing distribution cables shall be connected directly to the relevant fuse and/or link, or circuit-breaker. Ratings appropriate to the wiring cross-section shall be used such that only the lower rated fuse will blow in the event of two earth faults occurring on the same circuit. Double pole isolators shall be incorporated in the incoming DC supply from the charger and for the battery connections.
12.4.8
Earthing
The battery system specified here shall be of the floating type whereby the only earth connection is through the high-resistance battery earth fault relay. This has the advantage in that for an earth fault affecting one polarity only, all the battery circuits will still remain operative.
12.4.9
Cable Glands and Terminations
Outgoing wiring shall be done using multicore cables connected at the terminal blocks to the circuit switches. Cable gland plate for bottom entry shall be provided for in the cubicle layout.
12.4.10
Labels
Each circuit shall be suitably labelled at the front of the panel and at the cable termination where the terminals shall be additionally identified.
12.4.11
Spares
The spares listed below shall be considered as part and parcel of the contract for the DC Switchboard: Fuses for each rating: 20%
12.4.12
Drawings and Instruction Manuals
Drawings of all wiring, schematic and layout diagrams shall be submitted for approval within the time-period as stated in the specification. Instruction manuals for the Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of the batteries, chargers and distribution boards shall be in accordance with the general requirements of the instruction manuals in this specification.
Page 237 of 365
13. POWER AND MULTICORE/MULTIPAIR CABLES UP TO 132kV 13.1 13.1.1 GENERAL Scope
The Contract includes the supply and installation of all power and control cabling including terminations and other cabling materials such as racks, cleats, trays, supports, junction boxes etc. required for the satisfactory operation of the plant. The 300mm2 132kV and the 22kV power cables required for the completion of works at the substation will be provided by the purchaser. All accessories for terminating these power cables will be supplied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for laying, terminating, glanding, earthing, supporting, cleating, sealing, protecting, testing and commissioning of all cables under this contract. All ducts, cable racking and supports are to be supplied under the Contract and shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the competence of the electricians and jointers he proposes to use or to employ on the cable installation and jointing works.
13.1.2
Types of Cable
The required cables shall be of the following types as specified in detail in the following sub-sections, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Engineer. 132kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and copper conductors. 66kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and copper conductors. 22kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and 630mm2 copper conductor for connecting the power transformer to the 22 kV switchboard. 22kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and 300mm2 aluminium conductor for connecting the power transformer to the earthing transformer. Power and multicore cables (1000V grade) with stranded copper conductors and XLPE insulated, armoured, with PVC or PE oversheath Multipair telephone type cables for telemetry, control and measurement signals.
13.1.3
Determination of Conductor Size and Rating
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the design parameters on which to base his cable designs. All cable sizes quoted in this tender are indicative only and no claim will be considered in connection with these.
13.1.4
Drawings
The Contractor will be required to prepare schematic drawings as called for in this Specification, which are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Page 238 of 365
Drawings showing the general arrangement of the cable runs shall be provided by the Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for preparing detailed cable layout drawings and details of the supports before the commencement of the works. The cabling drawings shall also include all cables supplied by others as well as the requirements for equipping in future all substation circuits, which are indicated in the drawings. The Contractor shall also provide final record drawings of all cable works as laid to the approval of the Engineer.
13.1.5
Quantities and Schedules
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that quantities manufactured and shipped are adequate to complete the work. All multicore type control cables, auxiliary power cables and telephone type control cables shall be supplied by the Contractor who shall determine the cable types, quantities and installation materials he may require to complete the work. Schedules indicating the point of origin and termination of all cables shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval before erection work commences.
13.1.6
Reliability
All cables shall be designed for operation on systems where continuity of supply is the first consideration. They shall also be satisfactory in operation under the atmospheric and climatic conditions prevailing at the site and under such variations of current, voltage and frequency as may be met under fault and surge conditions on the system.
13.1.7
Type Approval
Cables and accessories for use at 22kV, 66kV and 132kV shall have satisfactorily passed type approval tests equal to those required by the International Electrotechnical Commission or equivalent British Standard and details for the cable designs offered shall be given in the appropriate place in the schedules hereto. The Contractor is to certify that the cables and/or accessories offered will be identical in all essential particulars in respect of design, materials and workmanship with the cables and/or accessories for which type approval certificates are offered in support of his tender. The Contractor shall also ensure that all materials used will be subjected to and shall have satisfactorily withstood such tests as are customary in the manufacture of the types of cable specified. Records of such tests shall be available for inspection, if required by the Engineer.
13.1.8
Quality of Materials
All materials shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified. They must be capable of withstanding the normal variations of temperature and service conditions without disturbances or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part and without impairing the strength and stability of the various parts for the work, which they have to perform. The repair of defective parts during manufacture will, normally, not be permitted but, in the exceptional circumstances where this rule is waived, the repair shall not be put in effect without the written permission of the Engineer.
Page 239 of 365
13.1.9
Design Particulars
Cables shall comply with the design details entered in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees hereto and, except where otherwise specified, their individual components shall meet the requirements of the current International Standards / Recommendations where these are applicable.
13.1.10
Cable Lengths
Where applicable, cables shall be supplied in maximum drum lengths bearing in mind the transport limitations in gaining access to the site. No drum shall contain more than one length.
13.1.11
Sealing and Drumming
Immediately after the Works Tests both ends of every length of metal-sheathed cable shall be sealed by means of a metal cap fitted over the end and plumbed to the sheath. Other cables shall be sealed by enclosing the ends in approved caps, which shall be tight fitting and adequately secured to prevent ingress of moisture. The ends of each drum length of multicore cables shall be marked red and green in accordance with BS 6346 or BS 5467. The cable end which is left projecting from the drum shall be adequately protected against damage. Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made of timber, pressure impregnated against fungal and insect attack or made of steel suitably protected against corrosion. They shall be arranged to take a round spindle and be lagged with strong closely-fitting battens in accordance with EN 1559. Each drum shall bear a distinguishing number, either printed or neatly chiselled on the outside of one flange. Particulars of the cable, i.e. voltage, length, conductor size, number of cores, finish, section and length number, gross and net weights, shall be clearly shown on one flange of the drum. The method of drum making shall be to the Engineer's approval. All cables and accessories shall be carefully packed for transport and storage on Site in such a manner that they are fully protected against all climatic conditions, particular attention being paid to the possibility of deterioration during transport to the Site by sea or overland and to the conditions prevailing on the Site. Wooden drums shall be suitably constructed to avoid problems due to shrinkage, rot and attack by insects. Drums, crates, cases, etc., for maintenance spares shall be non-returnable. Cable maintenance lengths and spare lengths shall be wound onto steel drums before they are handed over to the Purchaser's stores. Particulars of the cable (as stated above) shall be clearly marked.
13.1.12
Spare Cable
Spare cable and accessories as detailed in the schedules are required to be included in the Contract.
Page 240 of 365
13.1.13
Jointing Accessories
13.1.13.1 Cable Joints Joints shall be of the premoulding or prefabricating or cold shrink, or slip-on technology and shall be as compact as possible. Moulded components shall be tested during manufacture including, X-ray testing for voids, electrical testing at 1,5 times working stress and partial discharge measurement. Cable conductors shall be connected by well established and tested crimping means, designed, manufactured and site constructed to assure that retraction of the cable insulation is unable to occur or is not critical to the accessory design. The connecting ferrule shall be of the open barrel type. All jointing accessories are to have been specifically designed to work in the cable system in which they form apart. In particular, the Contractor's attention is drawn to the requirement that all jointing accessories shall be entirely suitable to operate the Cable sheath sections as a fully insulated sheath system with the provision for periodically testing the integrity of the sheath by the application of 10 kV D.C. across the cable sheath and the outer graphite or semiconductive surface of the sheath. Before manufacture commences the Contractor shall submit drawings showing the types of joint boxes proposed for the cable included in the Contract. The joint boxes shall be constructed of approved materials and shall be watertight, free from sharp points or ridges and thoroughly clean internally. Joint boxes shall be laid direct in the ground and they shall be protected by an outer box of approved design and filled with compound. Each joint and its outer box shall be permanently labelled in an approved manner and the marking shall include the serial number of the joint and the phase colour. 13.1.13.2 Glanding Mechanical glands for the termination of elastomeric or thermoplastic insulated cables into straight-through joints and termination accessories shall meet the requirements of EN 50262 and BS 6121 and shall be correctly designed for the termination of the armouring providing cable retention of class B. The gland shall not only adequately secure the armour to provide efficient electrical continuity and protective bonding to Earth of Category C but shall also provide a watertight seal between the oversheath and the inner extruded or taped bedding to prevent the ingress of moisture giving an ingress protection rating of IP 66. The glands shall preferably project 10 mm above the gland plate to avoid entry of moisture and be provided with watertight seals between the cable outer sheath and gland and between the inner sheath and threaded fixing component. All glands shall be fitted with a substantial earth bond terminal. The armour-clamping device shall be capable of clamping the cable armour so that the clamp withstands any short circuit current from the armour wires, through the gland body to the integral bonding connector. 13.1.13.3 Cable Sealing Ends and Terminal Boxes Terminations shall be constructed as outdoor, indoor SF6 or transformer sealing-end and shall be dry. Outdoor sealing ends shall be prefabricated and indoor SF6 and transformer sealing ends pluggable prefabricated.
Page 241 of 365
The terminations shall have built in stress cone designs and be designed to accommodate minor cable movement, radial and longitudinal, without significant change in the dielectric stresses. Moulded components shall be tested during manufacturing, including X-ray testing for voids, electrical testing at 1,5 working stress and partial discharge measurement. Detailed drawings showing the types of cable sealing ends, terminal boxes and glands proposed for the installation shall be submitted at the time of Tendering. All sealing ends and terminal boxes shall be fitted with insulated glands to facilitate outer sheath testing after installation. Disconnecting links shall be provided on all sealing ends terminations of metallic sheathed cables and combined armour and earthing clamps shall be fitted to all boxes terminating armoured cables where specified. The design of the sealing and terminations shall be suitable for use as single point bonding system, if required, in order to enable higher cable ratings. The necessary overvoltage suppression fittings shall be included in the supply. The external dimensions, fixing details and terminal arrangements for all sealing ends and terminal boxes shall be agreed with the Purchaser. Outdoor terminations shall have an adequate silicon rubber post insulator housing. The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and climatic conditions, ozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid temperature changes likely to arise when operating in the Site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning. When an insulator bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further insulators bearing this mark shall be submitted and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators which have been rejected in such a way that there shall be no possibility of such insulators being resubmitted subsequently for test or being supplied. Each insulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trademark and the year of manufacture. Marks shall be visible after assembly of fittings and shall be imprinted and not impressed. The marks shall be imprinted before firing and shall be clearly legible after firing and glazing. The Contractor shall state in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees the maximum working loads for each design of cable sealing end. Indoor SF6 terminations shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to EN 62271-209. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory evidence, or carry out a programme of Type Tests, to demonstrate that the complete sealing end assembly is gas and oil-tight under all conditions of maximum operating and transient pressures and pressures attained during testing of connected equipment. At SF6 switchgear terminations the cable supporting steel work may be required to be totally self-supportive and designed to avoid imposing excessive thrust forces under any service condition on the switchgear circuit.
Page 242 of 365
Cable supporting steelwork at SF6 switchgear may also be required to be clad in a lightweight metallic material suitably finished or painted to the Engineer's requirements. At Gas Insulated Switchgear, the sectionalising insulation shall be protected against voltage flashover during switching operations by short circuiting links or sheath voltage limiters spaced 180 degrees around the sealing end, each connection shall not exceed 500mm in length.
13.1.14
Jointing Instructions
As soon as possible after the commencement of the Contract and before materials are despatched, copies of the jointing instructions applicable to the joints, sealing ends and terminations to be supplied shall be submitted in English to the Engineer for approval, together with details of the physical and electrical characteristics of the filling medium proposed.
13.1.15
Insulated System
The 132 kV, 66kV and 22 kV cable installations shall be insulated sheath systems and the accessory designs shall include provision for periodic HV DC testing to check the integrity of the cable anti-corrosion sheath. All outdoor type cable sealing end bases shall be insulated from the surrounding structural steelwork by means of post insulators interposed between the bases and the supporting structure. Cable glands of oil-immersed air insulated and SF6 type sealing ends shall be insulated from the transformer/switchgear body by an insulated barrier. A disconnecting link device shall be provided at the base of each sealing end to enable the post insulators/insulated barrier to be open circuited when required for testing purposes.
13.2
132/66kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES
Some cable design details are given below:
13.2.1
13.2.1.1
Construction and Dimensions

Conductors
The conductors shall be manufactured from annealed copper, circular stranded (Class 2) complying with BS 6360 or EN60228 in the following sizes: 300mm2, 630mm2 and 800mm2
Copper shall have an International Standard Conductivity of 100%. Provision should be made to prevent the longitudinal penetration of water along the conductor. This is to be achieved by the application of a moisture barrier between the strands of the conductor. A radial water barrier alone over the conductor construction is not considered an acceptable solution. 13.2.1.2 13.2.1.2.1 Screens and insulation Application
Semi-conducting screens and insulation shall be applied simultaneously, as a continuous single pass extrusion free from factory repairs, by means of a triple extrusion method, using a triple extruder head.
Page 243 of 365
13.2.1.2.2
Conductor screen
A conductor screen consisting of an extruded layer of semi-conducting compound, which shall be cross-linked during manufacture of the cable, shall be applied over the conductor. The extruded layer shall be continuous and shall cover the surface of the conductor completely. 13.2.1.2.3 Insulation
The insulation shall be of extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) in accordance with clause 4 of IEC60502 and shall be applied using a dry cure, dry cooling process designed, as far as possible, to eliminate microvoids in the dielectric. The thickness of the insulation shall not fall below the nominal value by more than 10 per cent at any point. The materials used in the manufacture of compounds for XLPE insulation shall be of the highest purity, mixed together and processed under such conditions of cleanliness as to ensure a stable product with the required physical and electrical characteristics, suitable for prolonged use without deterioration in service under the environmental and operational conditions prevailing at the site. 13.2.1.2.4 Insulation screen
The insulation screen shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked semi-conducting compound. It shall be in accordance with clause 5.3 of IEC60502. The screen shall be bonded. It shall be continuous and cover the whole area of the insulation and shall have no tendency in service to separate from the insulation due to the effects of bending, load cycling and short circuit. 13.2.1.2.5 Moisture Barrier and Sealing Compounds
A layer of semiconducting swelling tape shall be applied under the metal sheath to avoid the propagation of moisture in case of damage to the outer sheath. Overlapping to be at least 50%. In the case of copper wire screen cables two layers of semi conducting swelling tape shall be applied, one under and one over the copper wire screen. All compounds used in protective bedding, servings and over metal sheaths shall be of such a nature that in the finished cable they do not crack or run at any temperature likely to be attained in transit to the Site or on the Site, before or after laying or when the cables are in operation. The compound shall adhere properly to the armour and sheath, so that after the coverings are removed it shall be evident that the metal surfaces were completely covered by closely adherent compound before the removal of the coverings. Care shall be taken to ensure that the amount of compound applied is retained evenly around the cable. The compounds used shall have no deleterious effect on the sheath, armour or protective coverings.
13.2.2
Metal Sheath (screen)
The Tenderer shall offer cables having lead alloy metal sheaths, or copper wire screen as indicated by the schedules of requirements. The cross-section of the metal sheath shall be adequate to carry the earth fault current specified. The minimum thickness of the metal sheath shall not fall below the declared nominal thickness by more than 0.1 mm + 5% of the specified nominal thickness for lead alloy. The sheath thickness shall be sufficient to ensure adequate mechanical strength.
Page 244 of 365
The screen area, the number and nominal diameter of the wires of the copper wire screen shall be based on providing the specified earth fault capability. The wires shall be spaced with an average gap not greater than 4mm and no gap shall exceed 8mm. The sheath thickness shall be sufficient to ensure adequate mechanical strength and also to meet the specified earth fault duty. Similarly the copper wire screen shall meet the specified earth fault duty. The Tenderer shall submit with his tender calculations to show that the design offered is entirely suitable to carry the specified fault current and shall state the referred Standard for the basis of his calculation. In the case of copper wire screened cable aluminium or copper foil of 0,2mm thickness shall be applied on top of the second layer of semi conductive swellable tape and bonded to the oversheath lower surface to prevent the radial ingress of moisture.
13.2.3
Anti-corrosion Outer Protective Covering
The outer covering (oversheath) shall have a minimum radial thickness of 4 mm and be of black extruded high density polyethylene type ST7 in accordance with clause 4.3 and 10.11 of IEC60840 (clause 8 of EN60811-1-3). The thickness of the outer covering shall not fall below the nominal thickness at any point by more than 0,1mm + 15% of the specified nominal thickness Lead sheaths shall be coated with a thin layer of bitumastic compound or any other suitable anti-corrosion layer or coating to prevent corrosion of the lead sheath. The outer covering shall be in intimate contact with and closely follow the contour of the lead sheath. The sealing compound shall be of a quality and type which will not crack or run in the finished cable at any temperature likely to be attained in transit to Site, during installation or when in operation at the maximum sustained load. The compound shall have no deleterious effect on the lead sheath or outer covering. If there is any damage to the outer covering which in the opinion of the Purchaser, appears to be repairable, the supplier may, after receiving agreement to attempt repair. This repair, however, shall not bind the Purchaser to accept the repaired cable length when it is re-offered for inspection and test. The outer covering shall have a coating to form an electrode for the HV DC sheath integrity tests to be applied at the factory and for periodic HV DC tests after installation. The coating shall withstand the rigours of installation and shall adhere to the surface of the sheath when the cable is operating at maximum conductor temperature. The coating shall be either a conductive layer extruded simultaneously with the under laying nonconductive layer or shall be in the form of graphite colloid applied on the under laying nonconductive layer in hot jets. Conductive layers obtained by mere superficial deposition of conductive powder (graphite) are not acceptable. The outer sheath of 132kV 300mm2 cable shall include an extruded PE sheath with a flame-retardant outer layer.
13.2.4
13.2.4.1
Cable markings
Marking of oversheath
ternal surface of all cables in this specification shall be legibly marked with the following elements of marking.
Page 245 of 365
Element 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Electric cable Voltage designation Specification number Manufacturers identification The number of cores, type and nominal area of conductor. EAC Contract No./year of manufacture
English EAC ELECTRIC CABLE 132000 V or 66000V 15-001
Greek 132000 V or 66000V 15-001
1x630 Cu (RL)* XXXX-YYYY
1x630 Cu (RL)* XXXX-YYYY
* 1x630 Cu (RL) indicates a single core cable with 630 mm2 Copper conductors with Radial and Longitudinal moisture barrier. The marking of elements (a) to (d) shall be by embossing or indenting on the oversheath in both Greek and English. The marking of element (e) and (f) may as an alternative to embossing or indenting be by printing on the oversheath. Elements (1), (2) and (3) shall appear, in any sequence that is deemed to neither confuse nor conflict, on two or more primary lines along the axis of the cable, approximately equally spaced around the surface of the cable. Elements (4), (5) and (6) shall appear on at least one line, which can be one of the primary lines, or a secondary line or lines. They can appear in any sequence that is deemed to neither confuse nor conflict, and need not all be on the same line. The letters and figures shall consist of upright block characters. The characters shall have a minimum height of 3 mm. The distance between the end of the one element of marking and the beginning of the next identical element of marking shall not be greater than 500 mm, for elements (1), (2) and (3), and not greater than 1000 mm for elements (4), (5) and (6). The marking shall be in an alternating order between Greek and English. Compliance shall be checked by visual examination and measurement. 13.2.4.2 Metre marking
Metre marking in any legible colour in steps of 1m length of cable (starting from free end at one metre intervals) shall be provided throughout the length of the cable. The start and end values shall be marked on the drum label.
13.2.5
Sealing and drumming
The manufacturer shall cap the ends of all cables for dispatch to form a seal to prevent the ingress of water during transportation and storage.
Page 246 of 365
Cable drums shall be lagged in order to protect the cable from damage, and the end of the cable projecting from the drum shall also be protected from damage. Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made either of steel or timber, pressure impregnated against fungal and insect attack or made of steel suitably protected against corrosion. Timbered drums shall be arranged to take a round steel spindle and the perimeters shall be reinforced by adequate flat steel section. Drums shall be lagged with strong closely-fitting battens around the perimeter. For long term storage, cable drums required for Purchasers stock shall be made of steel only. Drum dimensions and length of cable on each drum to be agreed after Contract award. In addition to any other information given in the form of stencil marks the following information should appear on a metal plate securely fixed on the side of the drums: Maker and Country of origin. EAC Contract No. Drum Number/Lot Number Year of manufacture. Voltage (132,000 V or 66,000V) Size of cable Length in metres Gross weight in kg. Net weight in kg. Weight of empty drum in kg (excluding battens) Each loaded drum shall bear an arrow indicating the correct direction of rotation of the drum for pulling out the cable. All drums are to bear the following shipping Mark: 132 kV UNDERGROUND XLPE CABLES ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS EAC CONTRACT NO. ./YEARXXXX LIMASSOL (OR LARNACA) CYPRUS Each item is to be packed properly or protected for shipment and transport from the point of manufacture to site. Each drum is to contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope. All items of material are to be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing list. Standardised delivery lengths are required and these shall be finalised at Contract award. For tender purposes and unless otherwise shown on the construction drawings, these can be taken as 500mm-700m approximately. Drum dimensions and construction details shall be submitted by the successful Tenderer, for approval by EAC, after Tender award.
13.3
22 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES
The 22 kV cables required to connect the power transformers with the earthing transformers and the 22 kV incoming circuit breakers are to be supplied by the Purchaser. Some basic design details are given below:
13.3.1
Cable Design
The project includes cross-linked polyethylene insulated single core and multicore power cables, which shall be generally manufactured to EN 60502 and BS 6622. Conductor stranding, triple extrusion of insulation and screens, and outer protective covering is to be in accordance with the paragraphs above.
13.3.2
Inner Covering
The inner covering shall be extruded.
13.3.3
Metallic Layer/Screen
A metallic layer of copper wires of 95 mm2 cross section shall be applied over an extruded bedding.
13.3.4
Voltage Identification
The outer covering shall be embossed with the name of the manufacturer followed by ELECTRIC CABLE 22.000 VOLTS. The size of cable, year of manufacture, and type of insulation shall also be included.
13.4 13.4.1
AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES UPTO 1.000 V General
The cables shall have stranded copper conductors and shall be XLPE insulated, armoured, with PVC or PE oversheath. The cables shall meet the requirements of the standards specified hereafter or of such other standard, which in the opinion of the Authority offers an equivalent or higher quality. When such other standard is offered a copy of the standard together with a copy of an approved English translation of the Standard should be submitted with the offer.
13.4.2
Voltage Designation
The designated rated voltages of the cables shall be 600/1.000V as defined in BS 5467 and IEC 60502.
13.4.3
Conductors
Conductors shall be of plain stranded copper wires and shall have a minimum crosssectional area of 1,5 mm2. Conductors less than 16 mm2 cross section shall be made of seven strands. Copper conductors shall meet the requirements of EN 60228 or BS 6360. Single strand conductor is not permitted.
13.4.4
Insulation
The insulation shall be cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) type GP8 according to BS 5467 and BS 7655: section 1.3. The insulation shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall form
Page 248 of 365
a compact and homogeneous body. The insulation shall meet the compatibility test requirements specified in the relevant standard.
13.4.5
Identification of Cores
The cores of the cables shall be identified in accordance with clause 3.29.1 and BS 5467. When numerals are used they shall be printed in black on white core insulation at intervals not greater than 70mm, throughout the length of the core. The print shall be permanent and not easily removed. Bedding
13.4.6
Bedding
The bedding of the cables shall be an extruded layer of synthetic material compatible with the operating temperature of the cable and generally shall be in accordance to BS5467. Suitable intermediate powder shall be included in-between the insulation and bedding for facilitating the removal and separation of the upper layer without causing any damage to the core insulation.
13.4.7
Armour
The cables shall have wire armour consisting of a single layer of galvanized steel wires complying with the requirements of BS 5467 of that size and number appropriate to the thickness of the insulation in order to provide screening factor corresponding to the level of the disturbing electromagnetic field intensity from the adjacent power circuits which shall be considered as 15 kV.
13.4.8
Oversheath
The oversheath of the cables shall be an extruded layer of black PVC compound to the recommendation of the BS5467 and effectively to the requirements for type 9 specified in BS 7655. The outer sheath shall contain 1,5% non toxic Termite Repellent or other method of protection against termites which must be stated in the relevant schedules. The external surface of the sheath shall be embossed with a legend specifying the cable type as described in the relevant standards BS5467.
13.4.9
Laying up
Cores shall be laid up in accordance with BS5467. Multicore control cables shall contain one of the following stranded numbers of cores: 4, 7, 12, 19, and 27. For control cables having more than seven cores, the direction of lay shall alternate for each successive layer.
13.4.10
Fillers
Where fillers are necessary to make a circular compact XLPE insulated cable, they shall be of PE. Textile and other hygroscopic materials are not permitted.
13.4.11
Voltage Identification
The PVC outer sheath of control cables shall be embossed with the legend "ELECTRIC CONTROL CABLE". The letters shall be raised and consist of upright block characters in accordance with the requirements of BS5467.
Page 249 of 365
13.4.12
Cable Lengths
Cables shall be supplied in maximum drum length. No drum shall contain more than one length of cable.
13.4.13
Jointing
Cables shall be terminated and jointed with accessories, which have successfully been type tested. Straight through jointing of cable lengths is not normally permitted but in exceptional circumstances may be allowed subject to the Engineer's approval. All cables entering or leaving terminal boxes shall be provided with separate terminations so that any cable out of a number of such cables can be removed or replaced without disturbing the remainder.
13.5
MULTIPAIR CABLES
Multipair cables are intended to be used for the transmission of analogue measured quantities such as current, power, and/or audio frequencies and also control and indication signals of rated voltage 110Vdc. The cables shall meet the requirements of BS 5308 Part 1. The conductors shall be tinned copper stranded and shall comply with BS 5308. The solderability of the tinned copper conductors shall be demonstrated in accordance with an approved specification (EN 60068). The size of the conductor shall be of 0,8 mm diameter (0,9 mm diameter would be accepted). The insulation of the cores shall be PE (Polyethylene- preferable) or XLPE of approved thickness and self-coloured for identification purpose - two different colours identifying a pair in accordance with a specified colour scheme. The insulated cores shall be twisted together to form pairs except in the case of the two pair cable, which shall be laid up in quad formation. Binding tapes constructed from suitable materials shall be applied with open spiral or overlap as required between layers and over the laid up structure to provide a compact uniform formation. A rip cord to facilitate removal of the inner sheath of the insulated cables shall be included during the application of the overall binding tape. Where required and specified the cables shall be collectively or individually foiled with drain wire and/or braid screened in order to ensure protection from interference. Where armoured cables are specified they shall be in accordance to BS 5308 and to the requirements of the relevant clause above (13.4). The oversheath of the cable shall be in accordance to BS 5308 and to the requirements of the relevant clause above (13.4).
Page 250 of 365
13.6 13.6.1
INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE SUBSTATION BUILDING General
All cables shall be installed either on trays or racking, in ducts, cleated to steelwork or laid in concrete trenches. The installation and handling of the cables shall be undertaken at all times by adequate staff suitably trained and supplied with all the necessary plant, equipment and tools. The arrangement of the cables and all methods of laying shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be planned to provide an orderly formation, free from unnecessary bends and crossing, which will permit the removal of any one cable without undue disturbance to adjacent cables. No joints shall be allowed in any cables unless approved by the Engineer.
13.6.2
Segregation
The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services. Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire risk areas, and to minimise the risk of damage from any source. Control cables shall be separated from power cables when installed in air. Any screening and cable segregation which the Contractor considers necessary to prevent spurious signals being induced into the cables from other adjacent cables shall be included and stated in the relevant cable schedules.
13.6.3
Racks, Cleats and Trays
All cables routed in concrete trenches shall be suitably supported by means of cleats or racks. No cable shall be laid on the trench floor. They shall be run in a neat and orderly manner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall be avoided as far as possible. Where cable runs unavoidably cross a suitable ramp shall be provided so that the runs do not touch. The manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radii shall be observed. The Contractor shall supply all necessary steelwork, cleats, racks, fixings, etc to support and secure the cables adequately, together with any special fittings required for bonding, earthing or protection against mechanical damage in vulnerable positions. Rawl bolts or equivalent shall be used for fixing of supports and associated steelwork to masonry. The method used for fixing such supports shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Supports, racks, etc shall be arranged, as far as possible, for the easy removal of any single cable in multi cable run without undue disturbance of adjacent cables. Where cables required for future extensions will be run in the same runs as cables being supplied under this Contract, provision shall be made in the design of the supports, etc for accommodating these future cables plus 20% spare space without undue overcrowding or congestion. Every cable shall be securely supported at a point not more than 1 m from its termination, and, where vertical runs pass through the floors, immediately above the floor. The type of installation used for the support system shall be to an approved method. "Racks" may be defined as steel members of various forms specially constructed for one or more of the following purposes: (a) Carrying cables, cable ladders, or trays, which are otherwise unsupported.
(b) Supporting cleats. Racks may be mounted: (a) Directly upon structural steelwork or masonry (NOTE: Drilling or welding of structural steelwork may only be carried out when approved by the Engineer). (b) On the floor in the form of single or double sided stands. Cable trays shall be manufactured from 18 SWG minimum perforated steel or ladder rack type subsequently galvanised in accordance with EN 729 and shall be supported on steelwork or directly on the masonry as required. The cable tray must be fully tested with a uniform distributed load safety factor of 2,5. The cable trays rack shall have cable retaining edges or pegs and be of a width suitable for the number of cables to be supported and shall be supplied with purpose made brackets suitable for mounting from the building structure. Where required extended brackets shall provide a rear space of 150mm between the ladder rack and building structure for on and off access of cable. Cable trays shall be of adequate width for deploying the cables in a single depth with a width allowance of 33% for future expansion. Cables up to 35mm2 shall be held with cable straps at intervals of 1m. Larger cables shall be held with suitable cable cleats. All cable trays shall be electrically continuous by means of 20mm x 3mm copper links across each joint and shall be bonded to the main earthing bar to a number of positions. Racks shall be constructed of mild steel, and may be either purpose made from standard sections or a preformed package system of metal frame construction. All sections shall have sufficient mechanical strength so that distortion is prevented. Rawl bolts or drilled-in inserts shall normally be used for the fixing of supports and associate steelwork to masonry. All ladders and trays shall be securely fastened to supporting steelwork, and shall be adequately supported to prevent sagging. The spacing of racks or ladders for cable runs shall suit the type of cables to be erected but the horizontal distance between centres of racks supporting wire armoured cables shall not exceed 500 mm and the horizontal distance between centres of racks supporting unarmoured cables shall not exceed 300mm. The distance between centres of ladders supporting any type of cable in a vertical run shall not exceed 750mm. Cable support and rack designs shall be submitted for approval before manufacture and erection commences. Cables shall be cleated on vertical runs. Cables on horizontal ladders or trays shall be laid in parallel runs and secured in position by means of plastic ties. The distance between supporting clamps for control cable in horizontal and vertical runs shall be to the manufacturer's recommendation but shall not exceed the following: 600mm for cables up to 40mm overall diameter 1000mm for cables between 40mm and 60mm overall diameter 2000mm for cables exceeding 60mm overall diameter on horizontal runs and 1200mm on vertical runs
Page 252 of 365
Cables run on trays shall be neatly dressed and where not provided with cleats shall be secured by heavy gauge, type approved metal reinforced, clips or saddles. Not more than six cables shall be embraced by one and not more than two layers of cables run on one tray. Care shall be exercised to ensure a "Reduced Fire Propagation" installation. Single core and multicore cables shall be clamped to the racks with smooth finish split packing pieces or cleats with bores or the correct size for the cable diameters. For single cables, claw type cleats shall be of silicon aluminium, glass filled nylon or other tough non-hygroscopic material. Single core cables erected in close trefoil 3 phase groups shall be held in position with non-magnetic clamps to the approval of the Engineer. Wooden cleats are prohibited. Cleats used to clamp single core power cables shall be of adequate strength to restrain the cables axially and laterally during heat cycling and under short circuit conditions.
13.6.4
Galvanising
All metal cable trays, cable ladders, racks and steelwork, etc., shall be galvanised or otherwise protected by a method approved by the Engineer. The protective finish shall be to an approved specification. No welding shall be carried out after the protective finish has been applied.
13.6.5
Identification
All cables shall be identified below the gland at each end and at approved positions by means of bands engraved or stamped with the cable number, feeder name, size of cable, number of cores, phase colour, etc., or such lettering as the Engineer may require. The bands shall be securely fastened in a permanent manner, and shall be made of material able to resist corrosion, damp and mechanical damage.
13.6.6
Earthing and Bonding
The Contractor shall connect, unless otherwise instructed, all cable screens and armour, supporting steelwork and the metal enclosure of sealing boxes, joints etc., to the main earth bar by suitable branch connections. The earth strip or insulated cable and connections thereto shall be laid in formed cable trenches or ducts, and/or fixed to walls, concrete or steelwork, by means of clamps or claw type cleats, as appropriate. The spacing of fixings shall not be greater than 1m. The Contractor shall be responsible for the efficient bonding and earthing to the main earth system of all cable screens and armour where provided. All completed records shall be the property of the Employer. They shall be completed within one month of the approval of the progress prints following upon the completion of each section of the Contract Works. Progress prints, in duplicate if required, shall be submitted to the Engineer at intervals not exceeding three months.
13.7 13.7.1
EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES AND ANCILLARY EARTHWORKS IN TRANSMISSION SUBSTATIONS General Requirements
Excavation/Reinstatement works shall be undertaken only by contractors/subcontractors registered with the Council of Registration of Civil Contractors of Building & Civil Works and holding a valid annual licence under the required classification (Civil Works).
Page 253 of 365
The Tenderer shall submit at tender stage a list of equipment and resources that will be assigned to the project. The Tenderer shall also submit a reference list outlining past experience of Civil Contractors/Subcontractors in similar contracts. Every effort shall be made to maintain traffic flow and access to persons and vehicles to property and places adjacent to the route.
13.7.2
Route
Generally the route of the trench is that shown on the attached construction drawings. The Contractor is obliged to mark this route on site and no excavation is permitted unless the Engineer inspects the marked route and approves it. The final route of the trench is that decided by the engineer.
13.7.3
Excavation of Trenches
At least seven days notice of intention to start excavation shall be given to the Engineer together with the agreed programme for excavation on the complete route. The depth of excavation is that shown on the construction drawings but this depth may be increased or decreased in selected parts of the route or locally to avoid other services or other reason as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer. This increase or decrease of excavation depth does not vary the contract value. The Contractor shall stick to the approved route and by no means is allowed to depart without the written consent of the Engineer. The exact location of each trench shall be approved by the Engineer on Site and no claims are allowed by the Contractor for any deviation from the route shown on the construction drawings. Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and each trench shall be excavated to approved formation and dimensions and shall have vertical sides which shall be timbered or otherwise secured where necessary so as to avoid subsidence and damage. The bottom of each trench shall be firm and of smooth contour. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent damage to the road or ground surface from a slip or breaking away of the sides of the trench. Where trenches pass from positions where a change of level is necessary, the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually. The rate of rise or fall, if not indicated on the construction drawings shall be approved by the Engineer. All trenches shall be excavated with vertical sides to the width, lines, grades and depths as shown on the drawings or as specified in writing by the Engineer. All excavations shall be adequately supported and kept free from water from any source at the Contractors expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable fill material and completed in accordance with the specification. Where directed by the Engineer such over excavations shall be backfilled with mass concrete at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall carry out at his own expense soil thermal resistivity tests for the sand intended to be used in the sand cement bound mixture and the mixture itself under dry and wet conditions, sufficiently in advance before commencement of the works, to verify the required thermal properties of the mixture.
Page 254 of 365
When excavations for trenches have been accurately executed, the contractor shall give notice to the Engineer. Laying of cables or ducts or building of structure shall not be started until the Contractor has obtained the Engineers sanction to proceed with the work. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of existing services and supplies from damage at no extra cost. The Contractor shall not work in any area where services are still covered. The Engineer shall have the right to stop the work or part of the Works where the Contractor fails to take the necessary measures to uncover these services and the Contractor shall not claim for additional compensation in time or additional money. The Contractor shall perform all hand excavation, protection and other work as specified herein or as required to locate existing services within the limits of this Contract, or at offsite locations as designated by the Engineer and in accordance with the requirements of all Contract Documents. The existing services referred to herein shall include, but not by way of limitation, all sewers, water mains and lines, gas mains, electric (both power and lighting), telephone and such others as may be encountered under this Contract. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionary and protective measure required to maintain existing services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation. In particular, the Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent undermining of any existing services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation In the cases where the excavation is to be made on asphalted or concreted roads and/or pavements, the asphalt or concrete surfacing shall be cut using suitable disk cutter at a depth of not less than 120mm. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to minimise damage of the asphalt beyond the width of the excavated trench. The Contractor will be charged with the extra costs where reinstatements in excess of the approved excavation width. This method of cutting of road surfacing is essential and shall be strictly adhered to. The use of air compressor and associated cutting tools will not be allowed. There shall not be any soil classification for excavating either in soft or in hard material. The contractor is responsible for obtaining information he considers necessary regarding the possibility of encountering soil with varying degree of hardness, and allow for it in his tender. All excavations shall be adequately supported and kept free from water from any source at the Contractors expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 13.7.3.1 Excavated Material
The materials excavated from each trench shall be placed so as to prevent nuisance or damage to adjacent ditches, drains, fences, gateways and other property or things. If, owing to traffic or for reasons of safety or other considerations, or deemed necessary by the Engineer, the excavated material cannot be stacked on site, it shall be removed from the site to an approved tip and returned for refilling the trench (if proved to be suitable according other clauses of this specification) on completion of laying at the cost of the contractor. The cost of any additional security measures needed to be taken by the Contractor in such cases is deemed to be included in the Contract price. Surplus material shall be disposed off by and at the cost of the Contractor.
Page 255 of 365
13.7.3.2
Horizontal drilling
Horizontal drilling shall be used instead of excavation where specified in the drawings or in any Contract document. 13.7.3.3 Traffic Safety Measures
The Contractor shall at all times during the construction of the Works maintain a right of way. This right of way shall be of adequate quality and durability for the free and safe passage of pedestrians and traffic, to the Engineers satisfaction. The Contractor shall also ensure that there are adequate footways for pedestrians when the Works disrupts the existing ones. The footways shall be adequately maintained with at least a suitable all weather surface. The Contractor shall also maintain pedestrian accessibility to substation buildings and switchyards. Measures shall be taken by the contractor to ensure at all times the safety of Employers personnel as well as for the Contractors employees working on site. To this effect it is of primary importance that the Contractor properly fences the excavated route and all barricades, excavations and constructions be illuminated by the Contractor at night. The Contractor shall construct and maintain detours for the diversion of traffic where this becomes necessary. Detours shall be of an approved standard with adequate signing to ensure traffic safety. Detours shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer needed, and the area shall be reinstated. The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, reposition, cover and uncover and finally remove, as applicable, traffic signs, cones and other street furniture as the progress of the Works require and take such other measures as may be necessitated by the Works in order to direct traffic and take all other necessary precautions for the protection of the Works and the safety of the employees and Employers personnel. All details or traffic safety and management measures necessitated by the Works shall be submitted to the Engineer for his consent 7 days before the Contractor intends to commence any work. The Contractor shall also furnish any further relevant details and information requested by the Engineer.
13.7.4
Methods of Laying
Cables laid direct in the ground in excavated trenches shall be protected with concrete covers. Cables may also be drawn into pipes or ducts or laid in formed trenches or troughs or on racks or supported in trays or cleats as required by the Engineer. Where cables are laid in formed trenches the installation shall include for the removal and replacement of the trench covers and for the provision of temporary protective covers on the trenches where they access ways. Where three single-core cables are laid direct in the ground or in formed trenches or supported in cleats or racks and form one three-phase circuit, they shall be laid in triangular formation touching unless otherwise agreed, the apex of the triangle being up most (trefoil arrangement). 13.7.4.1 Cables Laid Direct
Unless instructed to the contrary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall lay cables direct in the ground in the following manner: 100mm of soft Cement Bound Sand to EN 197-1 in the ratio of 14 parts to 1 part by volume shall be placed to form a bed for the cable.
Page 256 of 365
After the cables have been laid they shall be bound with suitable cables ties at intervals of 2m and then they shall be covered to a level of 400mm above the bottom of the lower most cable with cement-bound sand in the ratio 14:1 by volume. In all cases the mixture shall be prepared in a suitable mixer to give a homogeneous material. Water shall be added in the requisite amount (dependent upon the initial water content of the sand) so as to achieve a proper mixture that will enable adequate compaction to be achieved. (The water shall reach the bottom of the mixture). In each layer where protective covers are required they shall be carefully centred over the cables forming each circuit, each cover being closely interlocked with the adjacent covers throughout the length of the cable. The covers shall be in accordance with BS 2484 and EAC drawing 7180008. The sand shall be fine (particles greater than 5mm not allowed), homogeneous and pure without any chemical impurities that might cause harm to the cable. Sands thermal resistivity shall not exceed 1,2oCW/m. The Contractor shall submit laboratory tests proving its thermal resistivity, chemical properties and composition. Where more than one horizontal layer of cables is laid, the level of the upper layers of cable shall be gauged from the level of the finished bottom of the trench and marked on the side of the trench at frequent intervals before the installation of the lower layers, to ensure that the correct vertical spacing is maintained. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ascertaining to the satisfaction of the Engineer whether the soil is chemically active and for taking special precautions to protect the cables against chemical action. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid electrolytic and/or electro-chemical action occurring in situations where the cable and accessories are likely to be installed in close proximity to other dissimilar metals in the presence of moisture. Where power cables are to be installed in buried formed concrete or brick trenches fitted with covers, and in order to maintain thermal environment on buried cable routes, the cables shall be cleated in trefoil formation and the trench backfilled with imported back-fill material of thermal resistivity to secure the stated cable rating under all conditions. The back-fill material shall be carefully consolidated and the covers fitted. Power cables laid in unfilled formed concrete or brick trenches shall be securely cleated to the trench bottom in a manner to suit the cable system design. 13.7.4.2 Pipes and Ducts
Where cables are to be drawn in pipes the bottom of the trench shall be maintained as smooth as possible. Sharp changes in altitude or direction shall be avoided. The trench shall first be formed with 100mm cement-bound sand soft fill as specified in paragraph 6.1 and the pipes shall then be laid in trefoil formation. Spacers at intervals of 2m shall be installed to secure the pipes in position. Pipes shall then be covered with cement-bound sand mixture (prepared as per paragraph 6.1) up to a level of 100 mm above the uppermost pipe unless otherwise shown on drawings. All provisions described elsewhere in this specification regarding the mixture, concrete covers etc, shall be applied to backfill trenches with pipes. In certain cases and where in the construction drawings is stated so, pipes shall be covered by concrete grade 20 instead of cement bound sand mixture. The Engineer may
instruct the Contractor to use concrete instead of the mixture in other places as well, depending on the site conditions and provisional measures against future installations. Prior to handing over the project, pipes shall first be sized to remove any debri. After that a suitable mandrel (piston) of 10% smaller diameter than the diameter of the pipe shall be successfully drawn through the pipes to secure good practice of duct laying. Care shall be taken to make the bends of pipe or duct-lines as easy as practicable and in no case of a radius less than 3,2 metres. Prefabricated bends in accordance with shall be used in cases where the curvature is such that pipe cannot be bent. Pipes for fibre-optic cables shall be laid as shown on construction drawings. Spacers to at intervals of 2m, shall be installed to secure the pipes in position. Pipes shall be sized to remove any debri. After that a suitable mandrel of 10% smaller diameter than the bore diameter of the pipe shall be successfully drawn through the pipes to secure good practise of duct laying. Prefabricated bends shall be used in cases where the curvature is such that pipe cannot be bent. The radius of curvature in any case shall be greater than 300mm. In general and where applicable angles and bends shall be preferably effected by bending the pipes in as high as possible radius of curvature. Prefabricated bends shall be used only where the bending of pipe is impossible. In all installations of pipes embedded in concrete, expansion joints shall be provided every 18m. Duct seals to shall be fixed in all pipe ends whether empty or occupied by cable, or cables, to prevent ingress of water or vermin. Spacers to at intervals of 2m shall be installed in all pipe installations. Nylon pulling guide of 8mm diameter and strength of at least 1000kgf shall be laid in all pipes.
13.7.5
Warning tape/cable markers
Before the last layer of backfill material, PE warning tape shall be laid as shown on the construction drawings. The warning tape is to be provided by the Purchaser. In addition suitable concrete cable markers shall be placed right on the trench surface or nearby every 5m to indicate the position of the cable. The marker shall be approved by the Engineer.
13.7.6
Cable Covers
Cable covers shall be of un-reinforced concrete and shall comply with BS2484 and EAC drawing 7180008.
13.7.7
Pits for Fibre-Optic Cables
Pits for fibre-optic cables shall be constructed as shown on the relevant construction drawings to the specified dimensions. Pit covers shall be manufactured by heavy-duty ductile iron to EN 60124 grade D400 of high quality and standard. The frame shall be monoblock, provided and fixed with anchoring devices. The top shall be of the 3-point suspension system with two or more triangular covers. The top surface shall be anti-skid with the EAC logo as badging. The raised pattern shall be at least 5mm in depth. For fibre optic cable pits adjacent to concrete, expansion joints at pipe entries/exits shall be provided. The Contractor shall provide reasonable number of cover lifting keys or tools, which must be simple and operated by one person.
Page 258 of 365
13.7.8
132kV Joint-Bays
The Contractor must allow in his tender, where necessary, for the preparation of adequate joint-bays for jointing work. The size of the joint bays, if not indicated on the construction drawings, must be as compact as possible and in any case the width of the excavation must not exceed 3m. Joint-bay drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Joint bays shall have a concrete base and a double layer of slabs shall be suitably located above the joints to provide mechanical protection. Each joint shall bear an engraved label indicating the circuit joint number and phase mounted on the outer shell where the phase colour shall also be painted. Joint bays shall be excavated in not more than 2 days before the actual pulling work.
13.7.9
Filling In and Reinstatement
Filling in of trenches shall not be commenced until the Engineer has inspected, approved the cables and accessories or pipes and has authorised the operation to proceed. After cable slabs have been installed and approved by the Engineer backfilling operations shall commence immediately. Where the cable route passes along switchyards or areas other than reads or pavements then the excavated material can be used as backfill provided that is normal soil (nonrocky). If the excavated ground is rockly, then soil suitable for compaction shall be imported for backfill. The soil shall be compacted properly in layers not exceeding 300mm. Where the cable route passes along roads or pavements or areas designated for future road or pavement the backfilling and reinstatement shall comply with the following requirements. Generally all material and work shall comply with the latest edition of the "Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the Department of Public Works (PWD-Roads Division), Sections 400, 500, 600 and 700. All excavations made (whether for the purpose of cable laying or trial holes) shall be backfilled in 100-200mm layers depending on the compacting machine used, the earth in each layer being well rammed and consolidated and sufficient allowance made for settlement. Each layer shall be adequately sprayed with water in such a manner that, in conjunction with the means of compaction that are to be used, a density of at least 95% of the dry density at the optimum moisture content to be achieved, in accordance with the American Specification AASHTO-180-74 (Modified Proctor Test). The Contractor is responsible for the proper compaction of each layer, which shall be tested in accordance with the above-mentioned specification standard. The minimum number of tests is two for a length of excavation up to 50 meters. For greater lengths the number tests will be increasing accordingly but in any case the distance between successive test positions shall not be greater than 50 meters. The Contractor shall send copies of test results to the Engineer. The equipment to be used for the compaction of the backfill material shall include apart from vibrating rollers (self or hand driven) power rummers, vibrating plates, and others to be approved by the Authority and the Engineer, so that proper compaction is effected in corners and side edges.
Page 259 of 365
13.7.9.1
Fill material type 2
The backfill material of the section between the cable slabs and at depth as shown on the construction drawings from the road finished level, shall be of type 2 material as specified in the latest edition of the Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the PWD. 13.7.9.2 Fill material type 1
The section of the trench, from the top of backfill type 2 to the level where asphalted layers start, the trench shall be backfilled with material type 1 as specified in the Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the PWD. The excavated material may be used as backfill material type 1 or 2 provided that it complies with the corresponding specification. The Contractor must make the necessary contacts and obtain appropriate certificates on time: (i) from the Soil Mechanics Laboratories of the Public Works Department (PWD) regarding the suitability of excavated or imported materials to be used as backfill (ii) from relevant authorities on the T.R. values of the excavated or imported materials. For this reason the Contractor shall stock on site all the required fill material before the commencement of the works. The Contractor shall immediately after the stock piling arrange for the inspection and testing of the stocked material by the PWD. Work shall not be allowed to commence unless the imported material proves to be suitable by PWD. Copies of the certificates shall be sent for approval to the Authority and the Engineer prior to their use. 13.7.9.3 Asphalting
The trench shall be fully reinstated with asphalting layers. All associated work shall be constructed according to relevant drawing and PWD specification. The asphalt shall be of type 35-50 at a temperature of 25oC and shall comply with the quality of the asphalt produced by the Cyprus Petroleum Refinery at the time of purchase of the asphalt for the purpose of this project. Any amendments imposed by PWD on the quality control procedure after the Contract award shall be applied for the purpose of this Contract without affecting the contract price. The placing of asphalt layers, including the type 1 material, shall be effected with special finisher suitable for the trench width, so as to effect excellent quality smooth finish. The Contractor shall bear all costs and relevant charges for all the necessary field and laboratory tests required. The Authority reserves the right to perform field and/or laboratory tests at any time in order to check the compliance with the Specification. If the results of such tests are negative the Contractor shall be obliged to remove the unsuitable materials and replace them with suitable ones at his own expense or if possible and with the consent of the engineer take any suitable measures and actions to rectify the defective works. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in respect of such negative tests results.
Page 260 of 365
13.8
TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY CABLES AND IDENTIFICATION OF CORES
The ends of each cable shall be terminated in brass compression type cable glands in accordance to EN 50262. In cubicles all cores including the spare cores of multi-core cables shall be ferruled and terminated at the top of a terminal block. The ends of every type wire and every cable tail shall be fitted with numbered white ferrules with the numbers clearly engraved in black. Moisture and oil-resisting insulating material having a glossy finish shall be used. The ferrules shall be of the interlocking type and shall grip the insulation. Wiring looms shall be formed in a neat and secure fashion using approved cable strapping. The individual cores shall be taken out and connected to the terminals in such a manner that a sufficient length of core is available to permit cutting off and re-making of the conductor termination without disturbing the main group of wiring. All cores shall be left long enough to reach any terminal in the box. All cores shall be run to the far end of the terminal row away from the gland and then back to the appropriate terminal. All markers shall be fitted to cores in an approved manner such that the number reads from the terminal outwards. Control cable looms within cubicles shall have sufficient surplus length to permit a subsequent rearrangement to the remotest termination.
13.9
TERMINATION OF CONTROL CABLE SCREENS
Control cables which incorporate metallic screens shall have the screens earthed at one end only but the screens shall be connected to terminal boards at both ends. The position of the earthing connection shall be shown clearly on the relevant diagrams. Earth connections formed from wire braid screening shall be sleeved with green or green/yellow insulation. Cable type earth connections shall use green/yellow coloured insulated cable. Multicore cable, comprising twisted pairs with a screen round each pair, shall have the pair and the screen earth connection secured together intact up to the terminal board.
13.10 TERMINAL COLOURING AND LABELLING

Phase identification shall be marked in an approved manner on cable boxes, tail ends and single-core cables and at all connecting points. Cable boxes shall be marked with approved labels indicating the purpose of the supply where such supply is not obvious.
13.11 TERMINAL BOXES AND CABLE MARSHALLING KIOSKS 13.11.1 General
The outer case of terminal boxes shall be of steel construction and shall be so designed to form an extremely rigid structure and shall be fitted with one or more hinged covers provided with fasteners and padlocking facilities.
Each unit shall be provided with an earth stud. All main equipment shall be arranged so that it is accessible from the front of the box or kiosk. The outer cases shall be treated before painting to prevent corrosion and shall be finished in glossy enamel to an approved colour externally and white internally. Where terminal boxes are required for installation outdoors or in damp situations, they shall be of watertight construction and galvanised. Boxes located outside shall be weather and insect proof with drainage facilities to EN 60529, IP54 degree of protection. Those located indoors shall be to IP51 degree of protection. If the width of the box necessitates the provision of two hinged front covers they shall close on to a centre post, which shall be removable to facilitate cable termination. The depth of the outer case shall be not less than 200 mm.
13.11.2
Outdoor Boxes and Kiosks
Outdoor boxes and kiosks shall have domed or sloping roofs and shall be of weatherproof and vermin-proof construction, with adequate ventilation and draining facilities. Any divisions between compartments inside the boxes or kiosks shall be perforated to assist the natural air circulation. They shall be so designed that condensation does not affect the insulation of the apparatus, the terminal boards or the cables. Heaters shall be provided. Where these exceed 40 watts, they shall be controlled by means of a watertight switch mounted on the outside of the box or kiosk.
13.11.3
Access Facilities
Access shall be provided at both the front and back of kiosks and junction boxes, except for small terminal boxes of the type normally employed for wall mounting. Doors and access covers shall be easily opened and shall not be secured by nuts and bolts. Doors and covers under 14 kg weights may be of the slide-on pattern; above this weight they shall be hinged. Kiosk doors shall be fastened with integral handles. Nuts, bolts, or carriage keys shall not be used. Provision shall be made for padlocking each door. Hinged doors on outdoor boxes and kiosks shall be provided with stays to retain the doors in the open position.
13.11.4
Low Voltage Connections
If voltages in excess of 125 V are present in box or kiosk, they shall be adequately screened or insulated and an appropriate "DANGER" notice shall be fixed on the outside and inside of the box or kiosk.
13.11.5
Cable Termination
All cables shall enter boxes and kiosks at the base. Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level, but shall wherever practicable enter boxes or kiosks near the base. Removable gland plates shall be provided, at least 450mm above ground level. Sufficient free space shall be available for the addition of future cables. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate
draining into cable crutches or conduits. Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate. The back, sides and front of the box or kiosk shall project at least 50 mm below the gland plate to prevent moisture draining on to the plate and cable glands. Where armoured cables are employed the armouring shall, unless otherwise approved, be earthed inside the cable glands. For the reception of external cables in panels removable gland plates shall be provided. All cables shall enter vertically from below and at their point of entry to the equipment they shall be sealed by fitted boards. These shall be of an approved, non-flammable, insulating, and verminproof material. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate draining into cable crutches or conduits. Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate. Separate gland plates shall be provided for each circuit plate with glands designed as pre EN 50262 and suitable for the specified cables.
13.11.6
Labels
Labels shall be provided inside each junction box or kiosk to describe functions of the various items of equipment. Where the kiosk is divided into compartments each door shall have an external label to identify the compartment.
13.11.7
Terminal Boards
Terminal boards shall comprise banks of rail mounted, screw clamp, spring loaded insertion, solder lug or stud type terminals as required to suit the design and duty of the cables to be terminated, arranged in pairs horizontally and grouped in vertical formation to provide a rigid assembly. Each pair of terminals shall be connected together at the base with a fixed or plug type link. Insulating material of self extinguishing or resistant to flame propagation and substantially non-hydroscopic type shall be moulded around the base of the screws or studs, links connecting pairs of screws or studs or plug sockets to prevent exposure of live metal at the back of the terminal boards and to secure the terminals against rotation and displacement. Terminal boards shall have an approved means for securing the wires, and shall be complete with identification ferrules, insulating barriers between pairs of terminals and removable transparent non-flammable terminal covers fitted with marker strips for identifying the terminals. All nuts, washers, links and other components provided for securing the wires shall be electro-tinned. Springs shall be aged and shall withstand corrosion. The clearance between adjacent terminal boards and from the sides of the case shall not be less than 100 mm. The minimum clearance between terminal boards and the top and bottom of the case shall be 200mm. All terminal boxes and boards shall meet the associated cable site tests.
13.12 DRAWINGS
The following drawings and schedules are required: (a) Multicore and auxiliary power cable route plan
(b) Layout and dimensions of cable trays, racks and ladders (c) Arrangement for cable support, steelwork, clamping, cleating, cable markers, cable tress etc (d) Cable schedules (e) Core termination schedule Other drawings necessary to complete compilation and details of cable layout and arrangement shall be submitted as required by the Engineer.
Page 264 of 365
14. LV AC SWITCHBOARD 14.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
The panel is to comprise of a completely enclosed self supporting metal structure and shall be of the single busbar air insulated multi-cubicle, factory built assembly type, incorporating moulded case circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers, isolators, fuses, instruments and current transformers. All units when built up into a complete switchboard shall be such that the completed switchboard is of flush fronted design, having a neat and clean appearance and shall be readily extensible on both sides. All components shall be accessibly mounted in the switchboard and shall not impede access to wiring or terminals. All faults occurring within any individual unit shall be contained within that unit and except for busbar faults shall not cause shut down of any section of board other than the unit itself. All equipment shall be constructed of nonhygroscopic and non-flammable material. Insulating barriers and bus supports shall be of an approved material. The design shall cater for the interconnection of busbars, both primary and secondary, between adjacent units. The apertures for secondary bus wires between adjacent units and for secondary wiring in individual units shall be "bushed" to prevent damage to wires on sharp edges of metal. Primary busbars shall be contained in a separate compartment within the switchboard and access shall be possible only by means of bolted-on sheet steel covers, which shall clearly be marked "Busbars". Busbars and busbar connections shall not be exposed when covers and doors are opened for access to the remainder of the switchgear. The construction shall be robust and be designed to prevent the spreading of damage due to fire, short-circuits or other causes. All cable terminations shall be accessible from the bottom. The cable termination compartment shall be segregated from the rest of the switchboard. The switchboards shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
14.2 14.2.1
RATINGS 415V AC Switchboard
The Switchboard shall comprise the following: 14.2.1.1 Incoming Circuits
1 250A 4P Manual change-over switch 2 250A 4P moulded case circuit breakers for the three incoming supplies, fixed type, motorized, with mechanical and electrical interlocks as described later on.
All Incoming Circuit breakers must be equipped with under voltage relay. 14.2.1.2 Outgoing Circuits
1 200A 3P moulded case circuit breaker 1 125A 3P moulded case circuit breaker
Page 265 of 365
4 63A 3P MCBs type D 2 20A 3P MCBs type D 9 16A 3P MCBs type D 1 60A 1P MCB type D 2 25A 1P MCBs type D 2 - 20A 1P MCBs type D 4 16A 1P MCBs type D 6 10A 1P MCBs type D
20% space for additional MCBs All the above as per drawing No. 1S000E8NE1SB002 constituting part of the tender.
14.3
MAIN BUS-BARS
The panel shall include three phase busbars and one neutral busbar of high conductivity copper, adequately supported to withstand all normal and fault condition stresses. The clearances of the busbars to all earthed metal parts shall comply with the requirements to EN 60439 - 1. The Busbars shall be insulated by using appropriate plastic cover or other suitable insulating means. The phase and neutral busbars shall be not less than 264mm2 cross sectional area and the rated short time withstand current of the busbar shall be 50kA for 1 s.
14.4
TEMPERATURE RISE
The panels shall be capable of carrying continuously the specified currents without exceeding the maximum temperatures given in the appropriate International Standards.
14.5
CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURE
The panel shall comply with EN 60439 - 1 and the degree of protection shall be not less than IP31 to EN 60529. The panel shall be of robust construction and shall be made of electro-zinc coated sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2mm (14 SWG). The construction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other reinforcement where necessary. The stiffness shall be such as to prevent maloperation of relays or other apparatus by impact. The front of the panel shall have a smooth well-finished surface. All steel surfaces shall be protected against corrosion in accordance with EN ISO 12944. The exterior of the panels shall be given one coat or primer, one undercoat and at least one finishing coat of minimum thickness 80 microns of light grey colour. The interior of the panel shall be finished with a mat white surface. The panel shall provide for bottom entry of cables via detachable blank vermin proof plates.
Page 266 of 365
The enclosure shall be front accessed. The backside cover panels shall be detachable but not for maintenance or installation purposes. All maintenance and installation requirements must be satisfied by accessing the panels from the front. The depth and other dimensions of the panels shall be such as to satisfy the installation of the incoming and outgoing cables. The minimum estimated required area per incoming cable must not less than 300x300mm. The panel shall be well ventilated, top and bottom, through vermin proof louvers fitted with brass gauge screens. All control circuits shall be fused with suitable rated fuses at the points of supply. Indicating lamps shall be fitted with suitable dropping resistors. All devices shall be clearly labelled and the ON/OFF position of the switches shall be clearly indicated. Incoming and outgoing circuits shall be appropriately marked. Also interconnection wires shall be marked by inserting suitable plastic sleeves at both wire ends, bearing the same number.
14.6
LV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
All incoming and outgoing circuits on the panel shall be protected by means of 415V/240V miniature or moulded case circuit breakers, which shall comply in all respects with the requirements of EN 60898 and EN 60947-2. The breaking capacities of the incoming circuit breakers shall be not less than 20 kA and the breaking capacities of the outgoing circuit breakers shall be not less than 9 kA unless otherwise specified. The circuit breaker operating mechanisms, except for the incoming circuit breakers (see Paragraph below), shall be of the quick-make and quick break type with the speed of operation independent of the operator and shall be mechanically trip free from the operating handle. The operating mechanisms shall be constructed to operate all poles simultaneously during opening, closing, and tripped conditions. The circuit breakers operating handle or switch shall clearly indicate the three positions, ON, OFF, and TRIPPED. The circuit breakers shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal elements for inverse time delay operation and magnetic elements for short circuit protection. Current curves shall be provided showing overload and short circuit discrimination between outgoing breakers and the incoming breaker. The replacement of any circuit breaker shall be possible to be carried out without interference to the other circuit breakers on the panel. Outgoing circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be covered by a hinged door with a safety lock.
14.6.1
Incoming Circuit Breakers
The incoming circuit breaker operating mechanisms shall be motor wound spring operated. The circuit breaker shall be capable of closing fully and latching against its rated making current. Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional measures:
Page 267 of 365
(a) If the circuit breaker is open and the spring charged, the circuit breaker can be closed and then tripped. (b) If the circuit breaker is closed and the spring charged, the circuit breaker can be opened, closed and then tripped. (c) Mechanical indication and an auxiliary switch for remote electrical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. (d) Motor charged mechanisms should be provided with means for charging the spring by hand and also a shrouded push-button for releasing the spring. An electrical release coil shall also be provided. (e) Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence immediately and automatically upon the completion of each circuit-breaker closing operation. The time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 30 seconds. (f) It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker, fitted with a motor charged closing mechanism, whilst the spring is being charged. It shall be necessary for the spring to be fully charged and the associated charging mechanism fully prepared for closing before it can be released to close the circuit-breaker. All circuit-breaker operating mechanisms shall be fitted with an electrical 110Vdc shunt trip release coil for local remote tripping /opening and in addition a mechanical hand tripping device. The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for operation from a 110Vdc power supply and shall operate satisfactorily, over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals is at any value within the voltage range of 85% to 110% of nominal voltage, with the exception of the shunt trip release coil which shall operate between 70% to 110% of nominal voltage and in addition over the range of all operating conditions of the batteries and chargers of the substation. All operating coils for use on the DC supply shall be connected so that failure of insulation to earth does not cause the coil to become energized. Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse in each pole on each unit and shall be independent of each other and all other circuits. Approved, positively driven mechanically operated indicating devices shall be provided to indicate whether a circuit-breaker is in the open, closed, service, isolated or earthed position. Facilities shall be provided for manually charging the springs in case of closing supply failure. Manual operation of circuit breakers for maintenance purposes shall be provided. The locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the circuit breaker can be prevented from being closed when it is open and from being manually tripped when it is closed. These facilities shall not require the fitting of any loose components prior to the insertion of the single padlock required. It shall not be possible, without the aid of tools, to gain access to the tripping toggle or any part of the mechanism which would permit defeat of the locking of the manual trip. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism so as to render inoperative the electrical tripping.
Page 268 of 365
14.6.2
Manual Change-Over Switch
The manual change-over switch shall comply in all respects with the requirements of EN 60947-3. The rated operational currents as stated are based on the AC-23 utilization category. They shall be of the quick make and quick break operation and shall have independent opening and closing mechanism. The changeover switches shall be of compact moulded body with double break contacts and separate arcing contacts. Locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the changeover switch can be locked in either position. The technical characteristics of the switch must be such as to comply with the characteristics of the back up fuses of 400A rating, HRC type 2 and the LV circuit breaker of the MCCB type included in the proposed switchboard under this tender.
14.7 14.7.1
INSTRUMENTS Voltmeters
The phase-to-neutral voltage of each Incoming supply shall be measured by means of suitable separate voltmeters with phase selection switches.
14.7.2
Ammeters
The load of each phase of the incoming circuits shall be monitored by means of 0-300 A scale Ammeter. The Ammeter shall be controlled by means of a suitable selector switch with L1, L2, L3, and OFF positions.
14.7.3
Indicating Lamps
A red lamp shall be connected to each Incoming supply circuit to indicate whether the circuit in question is connected to the Distribution Switchboard busbars or not.
14.8
Each phase of the Incoming circuits shall be equipped with a Current Transformer for monitoring the phase currents. The current transformers shall comply with EN 60044 - 1 and have the following characteristics: Ratio: 300/1A Class: 1 Burden: 15 VA
For the Substation switchboards, each phase and the neutral of the Incoming circuits shall be equipped with a Current Transformer for Restricted Earth Fault protection. The current transformers shall comply with EN 60044 - 1 and have the following characteristics: Ratio: 300/1A Class: X Knee point voltage: 100V
Page 269 of 365
Internal Resistance at 75oC: 0,85
14.9
TERMINATION CABLES
The incoming supplies to the panels will be by means of 185mm2, 4-core, XLPE/PE insulated and armoured aluminium cables, which shall be terminated by means of suitable cable lugs and glands, which are to be provided with the panel. The terminations strips shall be at adequate height for avoiding core deformation and insulation deterioration. They must be accessible at all installation stages of cable Detail drawings of the termination compartment and terminals with any other associated equipment shall be provided at the stage of tender. It shall be ensured that the glanding and termination space is adequate for all incoming and outgoing circuits.
14.10 EARTHING
The panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 95 mm2 crosssection, which is to be connected to the substation earth.
14.11 INCOMING SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONTROL AND INTERLOCK SCHEME

The incoming supply circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked and shall be provided with selector switches and relays in order to be controlled for either automatic/manual changeover or manual parallel operation. In the manual position, it shall be possible to have the following combinations: (a) When change-over and non paralleling is selected: CB1 closes and CB2 cannot close. CB2 closes and CB1 cannot close.
(b) When manual parallel operation is selected: Both CB1 and CB2 close paralleling the two transformers.
In the automatic position, the following change over shall happen automatically ensuring that the transformers will never be paralleled: If CB1 is closed and CB1 fails or looses its source of supply, then CB2 shall close automatically. If under the same conditions CB2 fails then CB1 shall close automatically.
After any changeover the circuit breaker shall remain to that state, even when the cause is removed. Each incoming supply shall be monitored by means of an under voltage relay which is to operate when the voltage on any phase drops below 70% of the rated value. It shall be possible to adjust the operation of these relays with a time delay, adjustable between 0 and 2 seconds. The under-voltage relay shall pick up when the monitoring voltages reach a value of 90% of the rated value. Both pick-up and drop-off voltage settings, shall be adjustable between 20% and 100% of the nominal voltage.
Page 270 of 365
When a circuit breaker trips an alarm must be given on the panel and supervisory signalling to be provided by voltage free contact.
Page 271 of 365
15. SUBSTATION EARTHING 15.1 GENERAL
The Contract includes the connection of all items of Plant to the earthing system of the substation that shall include the supply and installation of all materials and equipment for the connection of the Plant.
15.2
BASIS OF DESIGN
The design of the earth mat is based on the maximum fault level of the system as specified in Section 3.1- Design Criteria. The earthing system design is generally in accordance with the guidelines for earthing in IEEE 80 "Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding". The earthing of all equipment and the provision of earthing systems, electrodes and connections is in accordance BS 7430.
15.3
EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT
All electrical apparatus shall be connected by individual branches from the earth grid. The points of connection in respect of principal items of plant are: (a) The HV switchgear, MV switchboard, capacitor banks, power transformers, earthing and auxiliary transformers, tanks, Relay/Control Panels, Telecom panels, LV AC and DC equipment and all other electrical apparatus shall each be connected to the main earth bar by means of separate subsidiary connection of at least 185 mm2. (b) All steel doors, rails, steel structures, cable trays, concrete reinforcement bars and all metal structures of the substation shall be connected to the earth grid by branch earth bars. (c) Connections to transformer neutrals shall be duplicate and made direct to the main earth bar at two different points. The transformer body shall be connected to the earth grid separately. (d) In general the connections between HV electrical equipment and the main earth bar and between LV electrical equipment comprising substantial multi-cubicle switchboards and the main earth bar shall be duplicated. (e) The main earth bar shall be distributed throughout the substation and shall provide access for connection of all equipment and panels and shall cater for future expansions.
15.4
JOINTS AND BRANCHES
Joints shall have a resistance not exceeding that of an equivalent length of conductor and joints and shall be tested to prove compliance with this requirement. No drilling of the earth conductor shall be allowed. Joints and connections to the earthing system shall be so effected as to avoid reduction of the current carrying capacity and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Page 272 of 365
All joints and connections underground shall be made by thermo welding. Exposed connections shall be made by thermo welding or where approved by the Engineer by compression or tinning and bolting, provided allowance for such connections was made in the design calculations. Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that the available contact area is fully utilized in all connections to plant and apparatus.
15.5
GUARDS
Where earthing conductors are exposed to mechanical damage steel guards shall be provided to protect them.
Page 273 of 365
16. FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS 16.1 GENERAL
Except as otherwise specified optical fibre media will be provided by others in accordance with this Specification. Each optical fibre link shall comprise a specified number of fibres between two substation buildings, as defined in the Schedules. The fibres shall be carried in underground optical fibre cable buried with the 132 kV power cables, terminating in demountable connectors, as specified in detail below. Optical fibres shall be of the single mode type and shall be designed for operation at nominal wavelengths of both 1.300nm and 1.550nm. However, the fibres shall be optimised for operation within the 1.300nm window, as specified in detail below. Any fibre optic cable connection, which may be required to be provided between the digital current differential protection relays and the multiplexer equipment, which shall be installed in the telecommunications room, shall be supplied under this Contract and its total cost for installation and connection at both ends shall be assumed to be included in the Contract price. The optical fibres shall be fitted with demountable connectors. The connection types shall be defined during the Contract design stage in co-ordination with the supplier of the optical terminal equipment. Unless otherwise stated the following scope of supply for the optical links is not included in this Contract: (a) Fibres within the underground optical fibre cable, which shall interconnect with the existing system. (b) Splice boxes, within each substation building, to accommodate fibre splices between the fibre cable and the flexible termination cable. (c) Flexible termination cables, which shall form the final connection between the splice box and termination equipment to be supplied under this contract.
16.2 16.2.1
OPTICAL FIBERS General
All fibres shall be of the single mode type and shall comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.652 (Red Book) and the requirements detailed below. The fibres shall be optimised for use with wavelengths of around 1.300 nm, but they shall also be suitable for operation with wavelengths around 1.550 nm. The fibres shall be entirely suitable for jointing by means of a normal fusion splicing technique.
16.2.2
Fibre Material
The fibre shall be manufactured from high grade silica and doped as necessary to provide the required transmission performance. The chemical composition of the fibres shall be specifically designed to minimize the effect of hydrogen on the transmission properties.
Page 274 of 365
16.2.3
Fibre Coating
The primary coating shall consist of an inert material which can be readily removed for jointing purposes without damage to the fibre and without necessitating the use of hazardous chemicals. A secondary coating may be applied directly over the primary coating or alternatively a loose jacket may be provided. Where a tight fitting secondary coating is provided it shall consist of an inert material. The secondary coating or loose tube shall be colour coded throughout the length of the cable. If not part of the material of the secondary coating the colour coding shall be fast and capable of withstanding normal handling during termination. The fibre coating shall be translucent such that fibre splicing techniques, using optical alignment of cores by means of injection and detection of light through the cladding, shall be supported. In addition, the fibre coating shall be optically matched to the cladding to promote cladding mode stripping. The composition of the cable shall be specifically designed to reduce the production of hydrogen gas and to prevent the migration of hydrogen into the fiber.
16.2.4
Fibre Geometry
The mode field diameter shall be 9,2m with a tolerance of 0,6m. The mode field non-circularity shall be less than 6%. The mode field concentricity error shall not be more than 1m. The fibre cladding diameter shall be 125m 2.4%. The cladding non-circularity shall be less than 2% when measured over the maximum and minimum diameters.
16.2.5
Fibre Attenuation
Those optical fibres forming part of entirely new links, to be provided within the scope of the Contract, shall have an average attenuation of coefficient (per optical path) not exceeding 0,4dB/km at 1.300nm and 0,25dB/km at 1.550nm.
16.2.6
Cut-off Wavelength
The cut-off wavelength of fibres shall lie in the range 1.100 to 1.280nm, as measured by the Reference Test Method detailed in ITU-T G650.
16.2.7
Dispersion Coefficient
The fibres should be optimised for operation at 1.300nm such that the total dispersion coefficient is nominally zero. The dispersion coefficient at 1.550nm shall not exceed 18ps/km.nm. The dispersion coefficients at wavelengths of both 1.300nm and 1.550nm will be advised later.
Page 275 of 365
16.3 16.3.1
FIBER JOINTS Fusion Splices
All fibre joints shall be of the fusion type, except where demountable connectors are specified. Fusion slicing shall be carried out by trained personnel using automatic fusion splicing equipment designed for the fibre type. Fibre ends shall be prepared for splicing using methods and tools recommended by the fibre and splicing equipment manufacturers. The cleanliness and accurate cleaving of fibre ends shall be ensured prior to splicing. The accurate alignment of fibre cores, prior to splicing, shall be verified using a technique that monitors the optical power transmitted across the splice interface. Fusion splicing shall be commenced only after manipulations of fibre alignment have maximized the transmitted power. Fusion splice optical losses shall average at no more than 0,07dB per splice. No single splice loss shall exceed 0,1dB. Splices shall be mechanically strengthened and protected from the environment by means of purpose designed splice sleeves or enclosures. The protection sleeves shall be heat shrinkable and shall incorporate a stainless steel rod. The minimum length of the sleeves shall be 45mm. The finished splice shall be supported within the splice (joint) box by means of suitable clips or restraints. It shall be possible to remove and replace the splice in the support device without risk of damage to the splice or fibre. Each fusion splice shall have a spare length of fibre of approximately 1 m associated with it. This excess fibre shall be coiled neatly and clipped (or otherwise retained) within the splice (joint) box.
16.3.2
Demountable Connectors
Demountable connectors shall be fitted to each fibre at the termination of each optical link. The connector types shall be defined during the contract design phase.
16.3.3
Splice Boxes
Splice boxes shall be wall mounted and located at the substation building, tolerance room, adjacent to the terminal equipment with which the optical link is associated; the precise location shall be agreed with the Engineer.
16.4
TERMINATION CABLES
A termination cable is defined as that cable installed between the splice box at the substation end of the approach cable and the optical termination equipment (supplied by others). The termination cable shall be of flexible and rugged construction, suitable for installation within floor voids at the substation buildings. The cable construction shall incorporate strength member(s), fibre buffering (bedding) and a tough jacket. The fibres shall be entirely compatible with those of the approach cable to ensure good optical and physical fusion splicing properties. Each termination cable shall be supplied in a preformed length, with factory fitted demountable connectors at the free end. The type of demountable connector shall comply
with the requirements previously described. A minimum allowance of 10m shall be made for the length of each termination cable.
16.5 16.5.1
TESTING Factory Testing
Factory testing shall be carried out in accordance with procedures defined in ITU-T G.650 or EN 793 - 1.
16.5.2
Site Testing
On hand over of the optical fibre optic link the contractor shall perform the following tests, to be carried out for each individual fibre link to confirm acceptability and compliance with this specification. (a) Link attenuation at 1.300nm and 1.550nm for each individual fibre of the link. (b) Fibre attenuation profile measurement using an optical time domain reflectometer. This test shall be carried out from each end of each fibre link. Test results shall be presented in graphical form with graduated axes. Precautions are to be taken to ensure that the fibres under test are outside the dead zones of the OTDR. For this reason an appropriate length of fibre pigtail shall be inserted between the launch end and the fibre to be tested.
16.5.3
Splicing & Testing Reports and Certificates
The following reports in duplicate shall be submitted to the Engineer for each new optical link to be established, for record purposes and shall be incorporated in the As Constructed Records. (a) Splicing reports detailing the date, weather conditions, jointers and supervising engineers names, details of the type of cable and the type of joint or termination, location, ambient temperature and any other information relative to the Splicing Optical process. (b) Test certificates shall be submitted detailing the test results of commissioning as specified in the relevant clause above. (c) Full written reports shall be required of any damage occurring to conductor or equipment together with remedial action proposed which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Page 277 of 365
17. INSPECTION AND TESTING 17.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the carrying out of material and plant inspection and testing. He shall be responsible for any inspection and testing normally carried out by the Manufacturer/Contractor/Sub-Contractor and for those carried out according to the manufacturing and fabrication standards of the material/plant and/or rule, regulations and practices of the manufacturing country. The whole of the Plant covered by this Contract will be subject to inspection and test by the Engineer during manufacture and on completion. The approval of the Engineer or the passing of any such inspection or test will not, however, prejudice the right of the Purchaser to reject the Plant if it does not comply with the Specification when erected to give complete satisfaction in service. The costs of all tests and inspection shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. The Purchaser and/or the Engineer and/or his representative shall be entitled at all reasonable times during the manufacture, to inspect, examine and witness tests on the Manufacturer's, Contractor's and Sub-Contract's premises the material and workmanship of all plant to be provided under the Contract. If part of the said plant is being manufactured in other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the Purchaser and/or the Engineer and/or his representatives, permission to inspect, examine and witness tests as if the said plant is being manufactured at the Contractor's premises. Such inspection, examination and/or testing shall not release the Contractor from any of his obligations under the Contract. Before any Plant is packed or dispatched from the Main or Sub-Contractor's works, all tests called for shall have been successfully carried out in the presence of the Engineer. Not less than thirty days notice shall be given when the Plant is ready for inspection or test and every facility shall be provided by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors to enable the Engineer to carry out the necessary inspection and tests.
17.2
SUB-CONTRACTORS
Within two months of acceptance of the Tender the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer a list of all sub-orders placed or intended. The Contractor shall submit un-priced copies of all orders and sub-orders as selected by the Engineer. One copy of all drawings referred to in the sub-orders is to be submitted, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. The drawings and sub-orders submitted to the Engineer shall cover all components, which are subject to electrical and mechanical pressure or stress when the Plant is in operation and also those items, which will be dispatched to Site direct from the Sub-Contractor's works. For the purpose of this Clause, inter-works shall be treated as sub-orders. Sub-orders shall include a statement advising the Sub-Contractor that the items being ordered will be subject to inspection and test by the Engineer. It is important that all copies of sub-orders are clearly marked with the name of the Contractor and the following reference:
Page 278 of 365
Purchaser's Name Contract Number
Sub-Contractors shall comply with all the applicable requirements of this Specification and, in particular, with this Section. Orders issued by the Sub-Contractor shall also include the Main Contractor's name and reference on their sub-order in addition to the above-mentioned heading.
17.3
MATERIAL TESTS
The Contractor shall provide test pieces as required by the Engineer to enable him to determine the quality of the material supplied under this Contract. Such test pieces shall be prepared and supplied free of charge and any cost of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. If any test piece fails to comply with the requirements of the appropriate specifications for the material in question, the Engineer may reject the whole of the material represented by that test piece; the Contractor's designers and metallurgists will be consulted before any material is so rejected. In the event of the Engineer being furnished with certified particulars of tests which have been carried out for the Contractor by the suppliers of materials, they may, at their own discretion, dispense with the previously mentioned test entirely.
17.4
WORKS TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
After the Contract has been awarded and the main features of the project design are known, then an Engineer's Inspection and Testing Program shall be established by the Contractor. The Engineer reserves the right to call for such additional tests as may be necessary to prove compliance with the Specification. Unless an alternative place of testing is agreed or specified the routine tests shall be carried out at the Manufacturer's Works. Type tests will not be required in those cases where the Contractor can produce certified evidence to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the required type tests have been performed successfully on identical equipment or equipment which is for practical test purposes similar and produced in the factory where the equipment offered is to be manufactured. Evidence to this effect shall be submitted at the time of tendering. Where a type-tested design is manufactured under license in a different location evidence of repeat type tests appropriate to the alternative manufacturing location will be required. Type tests shall be carried out by approved testing authorities. The Manufacturer's test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and where necessary shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by such other body as may be agreed. Not less than thirty days notice of all tests shall be given to the Engineer, in order that he may be present if he so desires. As many tests as possible shall be arranged together in accordance with a program to be agreed with the Engineer.
Page 279 of 365
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer applications for inspection which shall contain the following information. (a) Contract number (b) Manufacturer's name plus name of manufacturer's staff responsible for the testing and manufacturer's works order number (c) Location of tests (d) Date of test (e) Description in full of Plant offered for inspection (Contractor's order references alone are insufficient and unacceptable) (f) Schedule of tests to be performed and standard to be applied (g) List of the Engineer's approved drawing numbers appropriate to the Plant offered (h) Sub-order number The subject items should remain available for Engineer's inspection and test up to a minimum of 10 days beyond the agreed date of witnessing the test. Every facility with respect to access, drawings, instruments and manpower shall be provided by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractor to enable the Engineer or his designated representative to carry out the necessary inspection and testing of the Plant. Inspection and testing during manufacture shall be in accordance with the General Conditions of Purchase and this section of the Specification. Works tests shall include all routine electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests in accordance with the relevant Standards except where departures therefrom and modifications thereto are embodied in this Specification. For Plant not covered by International Standard or specifically mentioned in this Specification, such tests as are relevant shall be carried out in accordance with the maker's standard practice which must meet with the prior approval of the Engineer. Should the Plant or any portion thereof fail under test to give the required performance, further tests which are considered necessary by the Engineer shall be carried out by the Contractor and the whole costs of the repeated tests to which the Purchaser will be put (including travelling and other expenses of the Engineer) will be borne by the Contractor. After satisfactory completion of the witnessed tests at the Works, the Plant shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval during dismantling preparatory to shipping. No item of Plant is to be dispatched to Site until the Engineer has given his approval in writing.
17.5 17.5.1
SITE TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Procedure
Not less than 2 months before the commencement of site testing the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a test program for all sites to meet the erection and commissioning program agreed. Together with this program the Contractor shall provide in adequate time for approval by the engineer before site testing is due to commence a set of pro-forma test forms for each
item or type of equipment showing details of the proposed tests, checks and method of recording results. A list of all general checks shall also be included. The forms shall record type of equipment, serial numbers and any other identifying marks, substation name and circuit identification and shall include space for the test Engineer's and witnessing Engineer's signature. No testing shall commence until the format and test procedures are agreed and all results shall be submitted on the approved form. Where testing of common equipment such as bus zone protection and voltage selection schemes is involved as extensions to existing and operational sites the submission shall clearly state the outage requirements or 'risk of trip' conditions which would apply to operational plant and where wiring modifications are involved on existing plant marked diagrams shall be submitted showing any wiring additions and deletions if these have not been previously submitted, before any work commences and this submission shall form part of the "Permit to Work". Testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests which involve existing apparatus and outages may be carried out outside normal working hours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the necessary outage arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing program. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing at the time of commencement of site erection of the site supplies, which will be required for the operation of the test equipment. The Contractor shall provide the requisite experienced test personnel and all relevant test equipment, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer or stated in the Schedules. No tests as agreed under the program of tests shall be waived except upon the instruction of the Engineer in writing. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise agreed.
17.5.2
Standards and Methods
The method of testing, unless specified in the Schedules, shall be agreed with the Engineer. Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in the test sheets in cases where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bearing on the test results. The Contractors' test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and shall be appropriately calibrated by an approved authority or standard at the contractors expense. The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject to some variation upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessitated by changed conditions at site or by differing design, manufacture or constructional techniques.
17.6
TEST CERTIFICATES
Triplicate sets of all principal test records, test certificates and performance curves shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after the conclusion of each test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this Contract. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not they have been
witnessed by the Engineer. The information given in such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference and the Purchaser's name. The Engineer shall countersign the test certificates from all works and site tests if found to be satisfactory and retain two copies. The test certificates shall be grouped by substation sub-divided by plant type and further on a circuit-by-circuit basis and shall be compiled into volumes complete with index and included in the appropriate Operation and Maintenance manuals. So that the records may be used for maintenance tests the final records shall be provided as soon as possible after completion of testing.
17.7
REJECTION OF PLANT
If any item fails to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at Site, the Engineer may reject the item, or defective component thereof, whichever he considers necessary, and after adjustment or modification as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the item for further inspection and/or test. In the event of a defect on any item being of such a nature that the requirements of this Specification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modification, such item is to be replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.8
LIST OF TESTS
Following is the list of the tests at the manufacturer's works and at site.
17.8.1
Manufacturers Inspection and Testing Program
The Contractor shall carry out a comprehensive Inspection and Testing Programme during manufacture of plant. The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for the cost of carrying out the following stages of inspection and/or test. These are not intended to form a comprehensive programme, as it is the Contractor's responsibility to draw up and carry out and furnish evidence of "type tests" on certain items of equipment. 17.8.1.1 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
The requirements of this section are intended to cover complete switchgear assemblies. Component parts such as circuit breakers, isolators, current and voltage transformers, and instruments shall have already been submitted to separate tests as specified in this Specification. Additional pressure tests are specified however for the compartment chambers of gas-insulated switchgear. 17.8.1.1.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 62271 - 200 or 62271 - 203 as applicable. The interchangeability feature of identical units, together with the interlocking provided for preventing units of different ratings being inter-changed shall be demonstrated. Supply voltage variations for auxiliary devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. Fluid leakage tests and partial discharge tests shall be included for gas-filled switchgear.
Page 282 of 365
Each pressurised chamber of gas-insulated switchgear shall be subject to a hydraulic test after completion of all welding and machinery operations for a period of 15 minutes. There shall be no sign of leakage or undue strain during the test and no permanent distortion after pressure has been released. The test pressure shall be not less than 1.5 times the design pressure of the compartment or as may be varied to the requirement of regulations of the country of installation and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 17.8.1.2 Circuit Breakers
17.8.1.2.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 and EN 62271 - 1 together with any tests carried out as a normal routine procedure by the manufacturer. In addition, leakage tests shall be carried out on gas-filled circuit-breakers. The gas pressures, gas supply conditions, test connections and the measuring and recording of results are to be approved by the Engineer. Circuit-breakers shall be tested complete with any housing of which they form an integral part. 17.8.1.2.2 Type Tests In accordance with the Specification, the performance of the circuit-breaker offered shall be covered by existing type-test certificates to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 evidence of which shall be submitted with the tender. In the case of the 22kV circuit breaker for capacitor bank control, evidence must be provided that the circuit breaker offered has passed satisfactorily the type tests for capacitor bank switching according to the relevant Standard. 17.8.1.3 Disconnectors and Earth Switches
Routine and Type Tests - In accordance with EN 62271 - 102. 17.8.1.4 Post Insulators
17.8.1.4.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60168 and IEC 60273. The mechanical routine test shall consist of a tension test. The insulators shall withstand a load not less than 30% of the tension failing load, for 3 seconds, without failure or loosening of fittings. Where solid-core insulators are used an ultrasonic test shall be applied as a routine test on the insulating part of each insulator before assembly. The frequency of the ultrasonic wave shall be between 0.8 MHz and 50 MHz. The test shall be made along the axis of the insulator and radially. 17.8.1.4.2 Sample Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60168. The tests shall be carried out on a sample of 0.5% with a minimum of three insulators. All insulators shall be submitted to test (1) to (4) of clause 34. Porosity tests - test (5) - shall, be carried out on fragments of porcelain from insulators broken during other tests. Galvanising tests - test (6) may be carried out on new unmounted fittings, selected from the manufacturer's stocks of identical material.
Page 283 of 365
17.8.1.5
Oil-Filled Vessels other than Cable Boxes
17.8.1.5.1 Routine Tests All oil-filled vessels other than cable boxes shall be filled with insulating oil and subjected to service operating pressure, or, if vented to atmosphere, to a pressure of 1 bar. They shall be left standing for a period of 24 hours. During this period no leakage shall occur. 17.8.1.6 Insulated Pressure Containers
17.8.1.6.1 Routine Tests Containers made of insulating material which have in service to withstand gas pressures in excess of atmospheric pressure shall each be tested hydraulically after all necessary grinding or machining work on them has been completed. For containers having fittings permanently attached thereto, the tests shall be made after the fittings have been added. The tests shall be carried out at the pressure given below for a period of 15 minutes and components shall thereafter be marked in an agreed manner. (a) For containers subject to static gas pressure loads only, and not subject to material mechanical shock in service, the test shall be made twice maximum working pressure. (b) For containers subject to rapid changes of gas pressure, or to gas pressure plus mechanical shock, the test shall be made three times maximum working pressure. 17.8.1.7 Bushings
The requirements of this section are applicable to ceramic, treated paper, condenser and other bushings for use indoors or outdoors and may be with or without oil or other filling as appropriate. 17.8.1.7.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60137. 17.8.1.7.2 Sample Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60137. 17.8.1.7.3 Type Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60137. 17.8.1.8 Porcelain Hollow Insulators
The requirements of this section are applicable to porcelain insulators which are complete in themselves or form part of complete bushing assemblies. 17.8.1.8.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 62155. 17.8.1.8.2 Sample Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 62155.
Page 284 of 365
17.8.1.9
Current Transformers
17.8.1.9.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044. These shall also include a check of the magnetisation characteristic. 17.8.1.9.2 Type Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044. 17.8.1.10 Voltage Transformers 17.8.1.10.1 Routine Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044. 17.8.1.10.2 Type Tests In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044. Additionally, for magnetic voltage transformers, it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that capacitance discharge capability of the transformer is not less than the rating assigned or stated in the Schedules. Where deemed necessary by the Engineer discharge tests shall be made on representative units to confirm the mechanical and thermal stability of the windings. 17.8.1.11 Protective Equipment 17.8.1.11.1 Routine Tests All relays, instruments and other equipment shall be subjected to routine tests as specified in EN 60255, supplemented by additional tests as is considered necessary by the Engineer. Routine test reports shall be submitted for each relay and piece of equipment. The reports shall record all measurements taken during the tests. All apparatus directly connected to pilots which pass outside the switching station shall withstand a high voltage test of 4 kV to earth for one minute. During the test all other windings, connections or contacts shall be earthed. Composite relay systems, e.g. distance relays, auto reclose relays, shall be subject to such testing to International Standards by approved manufacturers' works inspection and testing procedure as shall satisfactorily prove the correctness of the assembly and its settings and ranges of operation. 17.8.1.12 Control and Indicating Panels, Marshalling Kiosks, Terminal Boxes, Meters, Instruments, and Secondary 17.8.1.12.1 Routine Tests All components shall have been tested in accordance with relevant International Standards/Recommendations prior to assembly in the complete equipment. Tests shall be carried out to prove the correct functioning and wiring of the complete equipment to the requirements of the Specification.
Page 285 of 365
All secondary wiring including panel wiring and control circuits and all apparatus connected directly thereto shall withstand a high voltage test of 2 kV to earth unless subject to other requirements such as detailed under Protective Equipment. 17.8.1.13 Motors 17.8.1.13.1 Type Tests - A.C. Motors One motor of each type shall be submitted to the following tests, which shall be carried out in accordance with EN 60034. (a) Inspection, at 50% assembly stage on h.v. motors 1.0 kV and above. (b) Loss tangent measurement on each phase of h.v. motors 5.0 kV and above. (c) Measurement of winding resistance, resistance measurement detectors and heaters where applicable. (d) Verification of direction of rotation relative to the phase sequence of the supply. (e) No load loss measurement at nominal voltage with check for balance with the machine unbolted from the bedplate. All h.v. motors shall be run for 15 minutes at 120% nominal voltage. (f) Temperature rise test. (g) Locked rotor test. (h) Verification of load characteristics and momentary excess torque capability. (i) Verification of capability to produce rated output at minimum transient voltage, with measurement of slip. (j) Measurement of breakaway, pull-up and pull-out torques. (k) Measurement of breakaway starting current. When this test is carried out at a reduced voltage due to limitation of test plant, allowance shall be made for the effects of saturation when deducing the value at nominal voltage. (l) Overspeed test at 120% nominal speed for 5 minutes on h.v. motors and prototype designs. (Visual examination on high speed or highly stressed rotors and welded rotor assemblies). (m) Dielectric tests including measurement of insulation resistance. (n) Noise measurement where applicable. (o) Vibration measurements when required. (p) High voltage test. 17.8.1.13.2 Routine Tests - A.C. Motors All other motors shall be submitted to test (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (i), (l), (o), and (p) of the above.
Page 286 of 365
17.8.1.13.3 Type Tests - D.C. Motors One motor or each type shall be submitted to the following tests which shall be carried out in accordance with EN 60034 where appropriate. (a) Insulation resistances. (b) Resistance measurements of windings and heaters where applicable. (c) Winding polarity checks. (d) Light run figures and balance. (e) Load characteristics. (f) Temperature rise tests. (g) Commutation tests. (h) Overspeed tests. (i) High voltage test. (j) Noise tests where applicable. (k) The above tests shall be conducted on the first motor of each basic design although test certification for tests (f) and (j) may be submitted for approval. (l) Where special series or ballast resistors are used, these shall be tested with the motor. 17.8.1.13.4 Routine tests - D.C. Motors Tests as (a), (b), (c), (d), (g), (h), (i) and (l) above. 17.8.1.14 Galvanising 17.8.1.14.1 Sample Tests Galvanising articles shall be tested in accordance with EN ISO 1460, EN ISO 1461 as appropriate, or such other standard as may be approved. If evidence of white rust is apparent upon receipt at site of bundled steel section, the Engineer shall order the Contractor to make such tests as he deems necessary to determine the extent of damage, if any, and the remedial measures necessary. 17.8.1.15 Insulating Oil and Gas 17.8.1.15.1 Sample Tests Samples of oil and gas from each consignment shall be tested before despatch and shall comply with the requirements of EN 60296 and IEC 60376, respectively. 17.8.1.16 Handling Devices and Lifting Tackle 17.8.1.16.1 Routine Tests All handling devices and lifting tackle supplied for maintenance purposes under the contract shall, unless they are built into and form part of the equipment, be tested, marked and certificates of test provided.
Page 287 of 365
Lifting tackle built into and forming part of the equipment shall be operated with the maximum working load to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 17.8.1.17 Batteries and Chargers 17.8.1.17.1 Routine Tests Battery charger routine tests according to EN 60146. The normal low-rate (float) charge voltage shall be set in the works at the specified voltage per cell when delivering 50% of rated load. At this setting it shall be demonstrated that the charger can maintain output voltage within the prescribed limits under the specified variations of input voltage and frequency and output load current. The operation of the boost charge facility shall also be demonstrated. The correct functioning of all control indication and alarm devices shall be verified. All secondary wiring shall be submitted to a high voltage test of 2 kV AC for 1 minute. Where load voltage limiting regulators/diodes are to be connected it shall be demonstrated and recorded that the load voltage is maintained within -10% to +10% of rated voltage for all stages of battery charging conditions. 17.8.1.18 Low Voltage Switchgear 17.8.1.18.1 Routine Tests Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate International Standards/Recommendations. Routine tests shall include general inspection and electrical operation tests. DC Switchboard routine tests in accordance with EN 60439. 17.8.1.19 Auxiliary Power and Control Cables 17.8.1.19.1 Routine Tests Routine tests in accordance with BS 6346. 17.8.1.19.1.1. PVC /XLPE PE Insulated Auxiliary Cables (a) Voltage test - Every drum of completed cable shall be tested without immersion in water for 5 minutes at 3 kV rms AC between conductors and between each conductor and the armour which shall be earthed. The voltage shall be increased gradually and maintained at the full value for 5 minutes. (b) Insulation resistance - After completion of the voltage test the insulation resistance between each conductor and the remaining conductors in the cable which shall be connected to the armour shall be measured and shall be not less than that stated in the relevant Schedule. (c) Conductor resistance - The DC resistance of each conductor shall be measured and shall be not greater than the figure stated in the relevant Schedule when corrected to 20C. (d) Armour resistance - The DC resistance of the armour shall be measured and shall be not greater than the figure stated in the relevant Schedule when corrected to 20C.
Page 288 of 365
(e) Insulation thickness - Measurements shall be made on representative samples or core taken not less than 0,30 m from the end of every factory length of cable, and the method of measurement shall be approved by the Engineer. (f) Extruded bedding and sheath thickness - Measurements shall be made on representative samples taken not less that 0,150 m from the end of every factory length of cable, and the method of measurements shall be approved by the Engineer. (g) Spark test on oversheath - The extruded oversheath shall be spark tested in approved manner. 17.8.1.19.1.2. Polyethylene (PE) Multipair Cables (a) Voltage test - Every drum of completed cable shall be tested between conductors and between all conductors and the armour which shall be earthed. No breakdown of the insulation shall occur. Between each conductor and remaining conductors connected to the armour which shall be earthed - 10 kV AC, for 1 minute. Between all conductors bunched and armour, which shall be earthed, - 15 kV AC for 1 minute. (b) Insulation resistance - The insulation resistance shall be measured between each conductor and the other conductors connected to the armour after completion of the voltage test. The measured value shall not be less than that indicated in the relevant Schedule. (c) Conductor resistance - The DC resistance of the conductors shall be measured and the results when corrected to 20OC shall not be greater than the figures stated in the relevant Schedule. (d) Mutual capacitance of telephone pairs - The mutual capacitance shall be measured between the two conductors of each telephone pair with other conductors of the cable and armour earthed. The mean value using alternating current and a suitable bridge shall be recorded. (e) Capacitance unbalance - Measurement of pair to pair capacitance unbalance shall be made at a suitable audio frequency with all other conductors and any screen connected to the armour and earthed. The measured value shall be divided by:
1 L L 2 + 500 500 1 2
where L is the length in meters. (f) Mutual inductance - Measurements shall be made at 5 kHz on carrier pairs. The measured value shall be divided by:
1 L L 2 + 00 500 1 2
where L is the length in meters. (g) Voltage test on outercoverings - The PVC oversheath of complete cable shall withstand a spark test for one minute between the armour and the external conducting surface of the
Page 289 of 365
PVC sheath. The voltage applied between electrode and armour shall be 6 kV AC per mm of thickness or 9 kV DC per mm of thickness. 17.8.1.19.2 Sample Tests (a) PVC Auxiliary Cables (b) Polyethylene Multipair Cables. Sample tests shall be carried out on the first length and on not less than 10 per cent of drum lengths of cable supplied to the contract. The method of testing insulation and sheath shall be in accordance with EN 60811. The physical examination of cable shall include measurement of insulation and sheath thickness, diameter and number of armouring wires, cable diameter and make up of cable to comply with the relevant Schedule particulars. 17.8.1.20 Optical Fibers Factory testing shall be carried out in accordance with procedures defined in ITU-T G.650 or EN 793 - 1. 17.8.1.21 132kV and 66kV XLPE Single Core Cables 17.8.1.21.1 Routine Tests Routine tests shall be carried out on completed cable lengths of XLPE insulated power cables in accordance with IEC 60840 and supplements and shall include the following: (a) High Voltage test (b) Partial discharge test (c) Electrical test on cables having graphite or semiconductive coated over-sheaths: The oversheath shall withstand a d.c. voltage test equal to 8 kV per mm of sheath thickness applied between the metallic layer beneath the oversheath and the outer conducting coating for one minute subject to a maximum of 25 kV. 17.8.1.21.2 Special Regular Tests The Contractor shall carry out the special tests detailed in IEC 60840 and supplements as appropriate to the type of cable under test, and shall include the following: (a) Conductor examination and dimensional check. (b) Measurement of electrical resistance of conductor. (c) Measurement of cable diameters and thickness of insulation, screens, metallic sheath and over-sheath on a sample from each drum of cable. (d) Check of dimensions and thickness of insulation, screens, metallic sheath and oversheath on a sample from each drum of cable. (e) Measurement of insulation purity. (f) Measurement of insulation concentricity.
Page 290 of 365
(g) Measurement of moisture content in extruded insulation and screen, using the Coulometric Kart Fisher Titration method or other equivalent method. (h) Measurement of screen protrusions. (i) Volume Resistivity of Semi-Conducting Screens. (j) Insulation shrinkage test. (k) Hot set test. (l) Measurement of capacitance (m) Water penetration test. 17.8.1.21.3 Type Tests The cable shall have satisfactorily passed type approval tests generally in accordance with the IEC 60840. The outercovering on cables must have been subjected to abrasion, penetration and saline bath tests in accordance IEC 60229 during the type approval programme of tests. Evidence of having satisfactorily passed the relevant type approval tests must be provided with the Tender. 17.8.1.22 Power Cable Accessories Accessories shall be subject to routine tests in line with the appropriate IEC Recommendation and in accordance with the relevant clauses of this Specification. Routine tests shall include material and dimensional checks on samples of accessories. Type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the IEC 60840. Evidence of having satisfactorily passed the relevant Type approval tests must be provided with the Tender. Indoor SF6 terminations shall be tested in accordance with EN 62271-209 17.8.1.22.1 Range of approval 17.8.1.22.1.1. General The sequential type tests, which are primarily electrical tests, are intended to assess the performance of the cable. Cables of similar construction are regarded as those having the same type and manufacturing process of insulation material, the same form of conductor (stranded or solid, circular or shaped), and the same forms of semi-conducting screens. Repetition of the sequential type tests is not necessary on account of differences in the protective layers applied over the screened cores, unless these would be likely to have a significant effect on the results of the tests, taking into account that the prime purpose is to test the electrical performance of the electrical system.
Page 291 of 365
17.8.1.22.1.2. Range If the sequential type tests have been carried out on one conductor size, in the range 300-1200 mm2, the results should be regarded as valid for cables of the same type having other conductor sizes in that range, whether copper or aluminium. The results of tests carried out successfully on cables with shaped conductors should be accepted as valid also for cables, otherwise of similar type but, having circular conductors, but not vice versa. The results of tests on cables with stranded aluminium conductors or stranded copper conductors should be accepted as valid for similar cables with stranded conductors of the other metal. 17.8.1.23 Power Transformer 17.8.1.23.1 Routine Tests All power transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests in accordance with EN 60076. (a) Correct functioning of the tap-changer and driving mechanism. (b) Measurement of winding resistance on all tap positions and phases. (c) Measurement of ratio, polarity and phase relationship. (d) Measurement of impedance voltage on all tap positions. (e) Measurement of Zero Sequence Impedance (f) Determination of capacitances windings-to-earth, and between windings. (g) Measurement of load loss. (h) Measurement of no load loss and no load current at Un and at +5% Un and at +10% Un. (i) Insulation resistance (j) Dielectric withstand tests. On uniformly insulated windings tests shall comprise: induced over voltage withstand short duration power frequency voltage withstand lighting impulse withstand for line terminals lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115% BIL kVp
On non-uniformly insulated windings tests shall comprise: short duration power frequency voltage withstand induced line to earth overvoltage withstand test lightning impulse withstand for line terminals lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115% BIL kVp
Page 292 of 365
induced power frequency overvoltage withstand test with partial discharge measurement. This shall be performed in symmetrical three-phase connection on completion of all the above tests.
The following are noted regarding the impulse voltage withstand tests: 1. 2. 3. The transformer shall have been subjected to the above routine tests prior to the impulse voltage withstand tests. Impulse test on regulating windings shall be carried out on the principal and on the extreme tap positions. The procedure shall be as required by EN 60076 Part 3, Clause 13, the impulse test voltages being applied successively to each line terminal. Negative polarity is to be used throughout the tests. The sequence of voltage applications shall be: i. One reduced impulse calibration test.
ii. One 100 per cent full wave voltage application. iii. One reduced chopped wave voltage application. iv. Two 115 per cent chopped wave voltage applications. v. Two 100 per cent full wave voltage applications. Oscillographic records of the applied voltage and neutral current and/or transferred voltage are to be taken and included in the records. Copies of the oscillographic records are to be made available to the Engineer at the time of the tests for examination. External flashover of the bushings during the chopped wave tests is not permitted. At the conclusion of the impulse voltage withstand tests, the transformers shall again be subjected to the routine tests (f) and (g). (k) Sweep Frequency Response Analysis 17.8.1.23.2 Type and Special Tests These tests shall be carried out on one transformer of each size and type. (a) Temperature Rise Test - The test shall be in accordance with EN 60076, Part 2. Temperature-rise tests shall be conducted on the tapping corresponding to the maximum losses. (b) Sound Level Test - A sound pressure level test in accordance to EN 60076, Part 10 shall be carried out. (c) Measurements of the harmonics at the no-load current
Page 293 of 365
17.8.1.23.3 Voltage Control Equipment 17.8.1.23.3.1. Routine Tests Each finished tap changer is to be subjected to the routine tests specified in EN 60214 but in addition the mechanical test shall be carried out at rated voltage and no load. 17.8.1.23.3.2. Type Tests Test Certificates shall be submitted confirming compliance with EN 60214 except that evidence of the service duty type test shall be in excess of 100,000 operations. 17.8.1.23.3.3. Sequence Tests Proving tests as necessary on control scheme to cover the principal modes of remote and supervisory control, alarm and identification. These tests shall be performed with the tap changer installed in the transformer and temporarily connected by cables to the remote control panel. 17.8.1.23.4 Magnetic Circuit 17.8.1.23.4.1. Routine Tests Each core completely assembled is to be tested for one minute at 2,000V AC between core bolts, side plates, structural steelwork and core at the core and coil stage. After the transformer is tanked and completely assembled, a further test is to be applied between the core and the earthed structural steelwork to prove that the core is earthed through the removable link, at one point only. Magnetisation curves shall be supplied by the manufacturer with the test reports based on the test values for voltages up to 110% of nominal and on calculated values for nominal voltages above 110% up to 140%. 17.8.1.23.5 Cable Boxes 17.8.1.23.5.1. Routine Tests To meet the requirements as specified in EN 50299 17.8.1.23.6 Tanks 17.8.1.23.6.1. Routine Tests Oil Leakage - All tanks, conservators and oil filled compartments which are subjected in service or during maintenance to oil pressure are to withstand without leakage, a hydraulic pressure test equal to 69kN/m2 or the normal pressure plus 34kN/m2 whichever is the greater, for 24 hours during which time no leakage or oil ingress into normally oil free spaces shall occur. 17.8.1.23.6.2. Type Tests Unless Type Test Certificates can be produced for tests carried out on similar equipment, the following tests are to be included for tanks and conservators. (a) Vacuum Test - The equipment is to withstand a full vacuum of 760mm of mercury when empty of oil. The permanent deflection of plates or stiffeners on removal of vacuum is not to exceed the following values:
Page 294 of 365
Length of Plate Less than 1300mm 1300 to 2500mm Greater than 2500mm
Permanent Deflection 3.17mm 6.5mm 12.7mm
(b) Pressure Test - The equipment is to withstand a pressure corresponding to 69kN/m2 or the normal pressure plus 34kN/m2 whichever is the greatest. The permanent deflection of plates or stiffeners on removal of pressure is not to exceed the value stated in respect of the vacuum test in the preceding paragraph. 17.8.1.23.7 Gas and Oil Actuated Relays 17.8.1.23.7.1. Routine Tests (a) Oil Leakage - When subject to an internal oil pressure of 207kN/m2 for fifteen minutes (b) Gas collection (c) Oil Surge (d) Performance test under service conditions (e) Voltage - 2kV for one minute between electrical circuits and casing 17.8.1.23.8 Galvanizing 17.8.1.23.8.1. Routine Tests To the requirements of EN 10244 or EN 729 whichever is applicable. 17.8.1.23.9 Current Transformers All current transformers shall be subjected to the routine tests specified in EN 60044 - 1. Triplicate Copies of all test records should be submitted to the Engineer. Also one copy of each test record should be included in the relative Operating, Maintenance and Installation Manuals. 17.8.1.24 Earthing and Auxiliary Transformer 17.8.1.24.1 Routine Tests All transformers shall be subjected to the following tests in accordance with EN 60076. (a) Measurement of Winding Resistance (b) Ratio, polarity and phase relationships (c) Measurement of impedance voltage (d) Measurement of zero sequence impedance (e) Measurement of load loss (f) Measurement of no load loss (g) Short duration power frequency withstand test (h) Induced overvoltage withstand test
(i) Insulation resistance of each winding 17.8.1.24.2 Type and Special Tests (a) Temperature rise test - A temperature rise test shall be carried out on one transformer and the costs shall be included in the Contract price. This test shall take into account temperature rise due to both the specified earth fault current and continuous operation at CMR of the auxiliary winding. (b) Impulse voltage withstand (full wave) to be carried out on each transformer.
17.8.2
Tests at Site
Tests on completion of erection shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the relevant Clauses of the General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment to carry out the site tests and certificates of calibration (if applicable) by an approved authority shall be submitted for the approval of the Site Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a written programme of tests and checks according to this Clause for the approval of the Engineer. Test sheets and testing procedures (if required) shall be forwarded to the site engineer not less than one month in advance of the planned test. The Contractor shall provide experienced test personnel subject to the approval by the Engineer (CV's shall be submitted) and conditions imposed by any authorised local Body and the local laws ruling at that time on such practice. The testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests which involve existing apparatus and outages may be carried out outside normal working hours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the necessary outage arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing programme. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing at the time of commencement of site erection of the site supplies which will be required for the operation of the test equipment, to enable the Engineer to arrange accordingly or to agree with alternative arrangements should this be necessary. The Contractor shall record the results of the tests clearly, on an approved form and with clear reference to the equipment and items to which they refer, so that the record can be used as the basis for maintenance tests by the Purchaser during the working life of the equipment. Triplicate copies of all Site test records, test certificates and performance curves shall be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer as soon as possible after completion of any group of tests. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Engineer. The information given in such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference. The Engineer shall countersign the test sheets if found to be satisfactory and return one copy to the Contractor. The Contractor shall subsequently provide to the Engineer six bound copies of all site test sheets as final records. The test sheets shall be grouped by substation sub-divided by plant type and further on a circuit-by-circuit basis. So that the records may be used for maintenance tests the final records shall be provided as soon as possible after completion of testing.
Page 296 of 365
Initial energising and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by the Engineer and carried out jointly by the Purchaser, Contractor and Engineer. They will be subject to the Purchaser's standard safety procedures and all operational switching will be carried out by the Purchase according to a detailed programme, which the Purchaser will prepare and which will be agreed in advance between all three parties. During these 'live' tests the Contractor shall remain responsible for the performance of his Plant. No tests as agreed under the programme of tests shall be waived except upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer in writing. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a list of recommended settings for all protection and other types of automatic equipment, not less than three (3) months before such equipment is required in commercial service. Where the settings involve discrimination with settings of an existing network or plant supplied under another contract, the relevant information will be supplied to the Contractor. Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in the test sheets in cases where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bearing on the test results. The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject to some variation upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessitated by changed conditions at Site or by differing design, manufacture, or construction techniques or by latest revisions, if any, of the Purchaser's testing procedures. The Tenderer is required to submit proposals for dielectric tests to be carried out at site and to include in his price the costs of such tests and of such equipment as deemed necessary. 17.8.2.1 Main Switchgear and Ancillary Equipment
17.8.2.1.1 General Checks A general check of all the main switchgear and ancillary equipment shall be made and shall include a check of the completeness, correctness and condition of earth connections, labelling, arcing ring and horn gaps, clearances, painted surfaces, cables, wiring, pipework, valves, blanking plates and all other auxiliary and ancillary items. Checks shall be made for oil and gas leaks and that insulators are clean and free from external damage. A check shall be made that loose items which are to be taken over by the Purchaser, e.g. blanking plates, tools, spares, are in order and are correctly stored for taking over. 17.8.2.1.2 Metal Enclosed Switchgear Tests Following completion of erection of GIS metal enclosed switchgear all high voltage circuits shall be subjected to a high voltage AC withstand test. The Contractor shall submit with his tender his proposals for carrying out this test including the proposed test voltage. Provided that the switchgear is fully assembled at the manufacturers works and submitted to a full AC voltage test and provided that site installation is carried out under controlled clean conditions an alternative site test comprising an impulse test followed by a partial discharge test may be acceptable. The Contractor shall submit details of any alternative site test ures at the time of tendering. Dielectric tests shall be carried out on all auxiliary and Control Circuits. The resistance of the main busbars and connections shall be measured and recorded. Contact resistance tests shall be carried out with not less than 15 amperes passing through the contacts.
All electrical and mechanical interlocks shall be proved. Checks shall be made on local and remote indications and operation of auxiliary contacts. Operational tests will include local and remote trip/close. Circuit-breaker timing tests shall be carried out on all circuit- breakers. Testing of the gas system shall be carried out to prove the gas quantity, its dryness and its dielectric strength. The gas leakage shall also be measured. All test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor who shall also provide current calibration test certificate for all test equipment. 17.8.2.1.3 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches Manually operated equipment shall be subject to operational tests to confirm contact pressures, contact resistance, synchronism of operation of all phases and the ease of operation. Checks shall be made on interlocks, local, remote and supervisory indications and operation of auxiliary contacts. Motorised equipment shall be tested to prove the motor operation, including local and remote operation. Timing tests shall also be carried out. Motors shall be subjected to overload and single-phasing tests. Earth switches and maintenance earthing devices shall be tested to confirm the opening and closing sequences and checks shall be made on interlocks, indications and manual locking devices. 17.8.2.1.4 Current Transformers The magnetisation characteristic of all current transformers shall be checked at a sufficient number of points to identify the current transformers with reference to the manufacturer's estimated design curve and to determine the suitability of the current transformer for its intended duty. It may be noted that it is not normally necessary to check the characteristic up to the knee-point for this purpose. Special measures may have to be taken to ensure that the core is fully demagnetised before commencing the test. Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor. The primary injection methods employed for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engineer. Local primary injection tests are to be carried out to establish the ratio and polarity or current transformers as a group, care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio. 17.8.2.1.5 Voltage Transformers All voltage transformers shall be checked for polarity, ratio, phasing and for secondary output (for CVT it shall be energised from the primary voltage side). The following tests shall be carried out on electromagnetic type voltage transformers: (a) Insulation tests at 500V to earth and between windings. All voltage transformers shall be checked for polarity phasing and for secondary output. (b) In the case of capacitor voltage transformers used as carrier coupling units tests will be required on the coupling equipment and on the high frequency earth rods and their connections where these are included under the Contract.
17.8.2.1.6 Interlocking All interlocking arrangements both electrical and mechanical shall be fully checked and tested. The interlocking for on load transfer shall be fully proven on each circuit. 17.8.2.1.7 Batteries and Battery Charging Equipment The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation shall be tested. Battery discharge tests shall be carried out to confirm the battery rating and that the conditioning charge has been successfully carried out. Tests shall be carried out on the batteries and chargers to confirm the charger ratings and adjustment and on the battery and charger alarm systems and to confirm battery capacity. The specific gravity and cell voltages of the batteries when fully charged shall be recorded. 17.8.2.1.8 Instruments and Meters Instruments and instrument transformer circuits shall be checked for polarity or direction and for calibration including any interposing transformers or transducers. These checks shall be made on all current transformer ratios. Meters shall be checked for correct operation and rotation. The meters will subsequently be taken to the employer's test laboratory and if they are found to be inaccurate and out of limits will be dealt with as a defect during the guarantee period rather than a commissioning defect. 17.8.2.1.9 Low Voltage Switchboards General testing and inspection shall be carried out as referred to above so far as is applicable. It shall include checks on interlocking, changeover arrangements and interchangeability of components. Insulation tests shall be carried out with a 1kV test set. Attention is drawn to the requirement for functional testing and timing testing on circuitbreakers and AC and DC circuits associated with standby auxiliary supplies and standby generating sets, particularly where automatic operation is specified. Insulation tests shall be carried out with a 500V insulation test set. Check earthing connections. Shutters, interlocking, earthing procedures and the interchangeability of components shall be checked. 17.8.2.1.10 DC Supply Equipment Tests shall be carried out on the batteries and chargers to confirm the charger ratings and adjustment, the battery and charger alarm systems and battery capacity. The open-circuit cell voltages of the batteries when fully charged shall be recorded (for each cell). The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation shall be tested. 17.8.2.2 Power Cables
The Contractor is responsible to carry out all necessary after installation tests according to IEC 60840. In addition the testing program shall include impedance measurements. The Contractor shall submit at least one month before the commencement of tests detailed testing program for Engineers approval. A full commissioning report in triplicate shall be
Page 299 of 365
submitted before handing over the project. All costs of these tests shall be borne by the Contractor. 17.8.2.3 Auxiliary Cables
(a) Voltage Test - Each 600/1000V cable shall after installation and glanding but before connecting tails to equipment terminals be tested at 3,5kV DC During the test the voltage shall be increased gradually to the full value and maintained continuously for 1 minute between conductors and between each conductor and armour without breakdown. (b) Insulation resistance - The insulation resistance of each completed cable circuit shall be measured and recorded. 17.8.2.4 Optical Fibers
On hand over of the optical fibre optic link the contractor shall perform the following tests, to be carried out for each individual fibre link to confirm acceptability and compliance with this specification. (c) Link attenuation at 1.300nm and 1.550nm for each individual fibre of the link. (d) Fibre attenuation profile measurement using an optical time domain reflectometer. This test shall be carried out from each end of each fibre link. Test results shall be presented in graphical form with graduated axes. Precautions are to be taken to ensure that the fibres under test are outside the dead zones of the OTDR. For this reason an appropriate length of fibre pigtail shall be inserted between the launch end and the fibre to be tested. 17.8.2.5 Transformers
The following tests shall be performed: (a) Insulation resistance tests between core and tank, between primary and secondary windings and to earth. (b) Voltage withstand tests on insulating oil to EN 60296. (c) Voltage ratio. (d) Phase relationship. (e) Magnetisation characteristics of current transformers of winding temperature devices. (f) Calibration of winding temperature devices. (g) Tap Changer: Insulation resistance of control and motor circuits. Raise-lower switch in local and remote position over complete range. Operation of limit switches and motor protection cut-outs.
(h) Prove control circuits and remote indication and alarms. (i) Calibration of automatic voltage control equipment. (j) Cooling Equipment:
Page 300 of 365
Megger insulation resistance in control circuits, motors, pumps and fans as appropriate. Check operation of fan and pump motors from local and remote positions. Check the automatic starting and stopping of power cooling devices and the associated indication.
(k) Check the Buchholz protection relays for alarm and trip operation using compressed air. (l) Calibrate the oil temperature indicators including the winding temperature measurement. Prove that the cooling-on, alarm and trip functions operate. (m) Sweep Frequency Response Analysis This should be carried out before energisation and it should be the last test on the transformer. Before carrying out any tests the transformer should be dried by means of approved methods, if necessary. The above tests should be carried out on the earthing transformers as far as practicable. 17.8.2.6 Protection, Control, Alarms, Measurement, and Indication Equipment
17.8.2.6.1 General Sufficient tests shall be performed on the relays and protection schemes to: (a) Establish that the equipment has not suffered damage during transit. (b) Establish that the correct equipment has been supplied and installed. (c) Confirm that the various items of equipment have been correctly interconnected. (d) Confirm performance of schemes designed on the basis of calculation, e.g. differential protection. (e) Provide a set of figures for comparison with future maintenance values allowing the condition of the equipment to be determined. 17.8.2.6.2 Wiring Insulation Resistance Test at not less than 1000V AC for one minute or 500V DC are to be carried out on all AC and DC protection, control, alarm and indication circuits to ensure that wiring is in a satisfactory condition. The insulation of all circuits shall be checked before proceeding with other tests and it is also essential that all AC wiring is proved, relay contacts, auxiliary contacts, etc., being operated to verify this. Visual inspection and wiring checks for completeness shall be made before testing commences on cable glands, cable jointing, fuse or circuit-breaker ratings and small panel items such as indicating lamps. Static equipment which may be damaged by the application of test voltage shall have the appropriate terminals short-circuited. Inter-relay, inter-unit and cubicle wiring carried out at site is to be checked to the appropriate circuit wiring diagram. This may be done by using bells or buzzers or DC voltage supplied from the station battery. Where it is found necessary during pre-commissioning work to effect site modifications to the secondary wiring, site copies of the appropriate schematic and wiring diagrams shall be suitably marked as agreed with the Engineer before the circuit is commissioned.
Page 301 of 365
Loop resistance measurements are to be made on all current transformer circuits. Separate values are required for current transformer and lead resistance and all measurements are to be recorded on lead resistance diagrams. 17.8.2.6.3 Mechanical Inspection All panel equipment is to be examined to ensure that they are in proper working condition and correctly adjusted, correctly labelled and that the relay case, cover, glass and gaskets are in good order and properly fitting. 17.8.2.6.4 Secondary Injection Secondary injection shall be carried out on all AC relays, using voltage and current of sinusoidal waveform and rated power frequency to confirm satisfactory operation and range adjustment. When testing distance relays a switched voltage and current input should be used to simulate fault conditions. The polar characteristics of all distance protection shall be recorded at 30 degree intervals. For circulation current protection employing voltage operated relays, the points of injection for relay voltage setting tests shall be across the relay and stabilizing resistance. The fault setting for this type of protection is to be established by secondary injection, where it is impracticable to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is to be made across the appropriate relay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors and CTs connected. 17.8.2.6.5 Primary Injection Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor. The primary injection methods employed for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engineer. Tests are to be carried out as follows: (a) Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of current transformers as a group, care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio. (b) Overall primary injection to prove correct inter-connections between current transformer groups and associated relays. (c) Fault setting tests to establish the value of current necessary to produce operation of the relays. 17.8.2.6.6 Instruments and Meters All instruments, meters and transducers shall be tested and calibrated to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. 17.8.2.6.7 DC Operations Tests are to be carried out to prove the correctness of all DC polarities, the operating levels of DC relays and the correct functioning of DC relay schemes, selection and control switching, indicating and alarms. 17.8.2.7 On Load Tests
In view of the hazards inherent in these tests, they shall be carried out under the direct supervision of the Engineer and/or the Employer.
Page 302 of 365
An operation and stability test shall be carried out for on load commissioning of unit type protection. Test for restraint shall be carried out to prove the characteristics of protective systems with directional characteristics. On load checks shall be made after the protection gear has been placed in service to ensure that all connections and test links have been replaced and test leads removed as well as to confirm the integrity of the current transformer circuits. Where necessary voltage readings shall be taken at the terminals on each relay to ensure that loop connections between the relays are complete. Special attention shall be paid to broken delta voltages and residual current circuits where zero voltage or current respectively may not be proof of the completeness of the circuit. 17.8.2.8 Tests on Completion
Tests on completion shall be subject to discussion and agreement but shall in general include the following after all erection and site tests have been satisfactorily completed. (a) Energization of all equipment under no load condition, normal system voltage, for 48 hours. (b) Verification of correct indication of all instruments and meters under varying loads and voltage (Local Displays, HMI and SCADA). (c) End to end tests of differential protection, intertripping and communications circuits under live line conditions. (d) Operational tests on synchronising equipment. (e) Directional tests on distance, and directional overcurrent and earth fault protection where appropriate. (f) On-load stability tests of unit protection systems. (g) Phasing checks on LV AC systems, VT supplies and main systems. (h) Measurement of noise level with the transformer fans in operation under the minimum ambient noise conditions. The exact nature of the tests and presentation of the results shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
17.9
INSPECTION PLAN AND PROCEDURES
An Inspection Schedule shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Engineer. The Schedule shall include: (a) International Standards. For each of the following stages of the work, the acceptance criteria shall be stated. (b) Stages of inspection shall cover the following: Tests to review or approve certification of material. Review and approval of manufacturing procedures.
Page 303 of 365
Witnessing test or review and approval of certification of operator's qualification to carry out the work required. Visual and dimensional examination of components. Pressure tests on casings and vessels. Non-destructive examination of materials in progress. Functional tests on sub-assemblies, type tests on complete units, system performance tests and soak test. Examination of painting, packing proposals and documentation for shipment.
The Engineer will indicate the inspection requirements on the agreed inspection program in accordance with the following paragraphs: (a) Hold point which requires a mandatory inspection by the Engineer. This inspection or test shall be witnessed by the Engineer and further progress in manufacturing shall not be made until the plant is approved by the Engineer. (b) Inspection or test of material may be carried out by the Engineer at his discretion. (c) Certification of material and functional test shall be approved by the Engineer before dispatch from the works. The approval by the Engineer of any such inspection and tests shall not prejudice the right of the Employer to reject the plant if it fails to comply with the Specification when erected or to give complete satisfaction in service.
Page 304 of 365
18. ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT

The Items of Equipment are listed in the following paragraphs. The descriptions given in the items of this Section cover the main items of equipment and, furthermore, are not exhaustive in their description of the full requirements of the Specifications. It is, therefore, the Tenderer's responsibility to include in his supply and in the prices to be quoted in Schedule of Prices all items, which are necessary to meet the full requirements of the Specification and the General Conditions of Contract. The main equipment contained in this section is the following: 132kV and 66kV Outdoor Switchgear GIS Switchgear 22kV Indoor Metalclad Switchgear Transformers Microprocessor based Substation and Energy Automation System Protection and Bay Control Cubicles and Panels Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Signalling (SCADA) Main and Auxiliary Power and Multicore Cables up to 132kV LV AC Distribution Board DC Battery Systems Fire Extinguishers Ambient Temperature Sensors
18.1
132 and 66kV OUTDOOR TYPE SWITCHGEAR
To complete each item of equipment detailed in this section there shall be provided the necessary terminal boards, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates and all necessary sundries whether specified in detail or not. The Items of Equipment comprise: 132kV Triple Pole Circuit Breakers 132kV Isolators and Earthing Switches 132kV Current Transformers 132kV & 22-11kV Neutral Current Transformers 132kV Voltage Transformers 132kV Surge Arresters 132kV Connections 132kV Structures
Page 305 of 365
66kV Voltage Transformers 66kV Surge Arresters
18.1.1
132kV Triple Pole Circuit Breaker
(a) 132 kV triple-pole, circuit breaker, of the SF6 type, having a continuous rating of 800A, a symmetrical breaking capacity as specified in the drawings and Section 3.1 Design criteria of the specifications. It shall be suitable for the application of three-phase auto-reclosure when required. The circuit breaker, shall be complete with a 110V dc motor wound, spring charged operating mechanism. In a weatherproof control local kiosk shall be housed the electrical controls and mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, auxiliary switches, local control switch, local/remote control selection changeover switch, internal heaters, externally mounted single phase AC plug and socket outlet. Circuit breaker operating mechanisms of hydraulic type shall be considered provided that the Tenderer submits with his Tender complete technical details and tests carried out on identical equipment to that offered, particularly in relation to oil pressure loss. Manual facilities must be provided for recharging the system. (b) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 1600A rating. (c) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 2000A rating. (d) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 2500A rating (e) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 3150A rating
18.1.2
18.1.2.1
Isolators and Earthing Switches

132kV Isolator
(a) 132 kV isolator, triple-pole, open type, suitable for outdoor installation, 800A continuous rating, complete with manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, auxiliary switches, mechanism box heater and all necessary multicore cable gland plates. (b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1(a) but with site rating of 1600A (c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 2000A (d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 2500A (e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 3150A 18.1.2.2 132kV Isolator (power driven)
(a) 132 kV isolator as item 18.1.2.1(a) but power driven for local, remote and supervisory control, fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. (b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2(a) but with site rating of 1600A (c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2000A (d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2500A (e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 3150A
18.1.2.3
132kV Isolator (power driven) with Earth Switch
(a) 132 kV isolator as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but complete with triple-pole, earth switch, with the isolator power driven for local, remote and supervisory control, fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. (b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3(a) but with site rating of 1600A (c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 2000A (d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 2500A (e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 3150A
18.1.3
132kV Surge Arresters
Set of three Metal Oxide surge arresters for outdoor use housed in polymeric housing, rated voltage 120kV complete with insulating base for structure mounting
18.1.4
66kV Surge Arresters
Surge arresters as Item 18.1.3 but with rated voltage 60kV
18.1.5
Surge Arrester Monitoring Unit
Set of three surge arrester monitoring units able to record:

Number of discharges Amplitude of surges together with date and time Leakage current Resistive current through the arrester
For each substation a handheld cordless transceiver should be supplied, able to collect the monitoring unit measurements and transfer them to a computer for statistical analysis. Relevant software should be included with the package.
18.1.6
18.1.6.1
Busbars and Connections

132kV Double Busbar Substations
18.1.6.1.1 132kV Double Busbar (a) One 3 phase set of 132kV 3150 A continuously rated tubular connections, clamps etc. to establish the wrap-around double busbar system of the substation as shown in the relevant drawings including busbars and connections to the Bus Section Isolators, in busbars 'A' and 'B'. Sufficient provision shall be made at the end of the busbars for clamps associated with future extension. (b) As for item 18.1.6.1.1(a) above but having 2000A rating 18.1.6.1.2 132kV Bus Coupler Bay Connections (a) One 3 phase set of 132kV 3150A continuously rated tubular and conductor type connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connections and all necessary sundries to complete one bus coupler bay as shown in the drawings
Page 307 of 365
(b) As for item 18.1.6.1.2(a) above but having 2000A rating 18.1.6.1.3 132kV 2500A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections One 3 phase set of 132kV 2500A continuously rated tubular and conductor type connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connections and all necessary sundries to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings. 18.1.6.1.4 132kV 2000A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.6.1.3 above but rated at 2000 A, to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings 18.1.6.1.5 132kV 800A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.6.1.3 above but rated at 800 A, to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings 18.1.6.1.6 132kV 800A Double Busbar Transformer Connections One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.6.1.3 above but rated at 800 A, to complete one transformer bay, with conductor type connections to the transformer, up to and including the clamp on the transformer 132kV terminal bushing, as shown in the drawings 18.1.6.1.7 132kV Bus Section Bay Connections (c) One 3 phase set of 132 kV 3150 A continuously rated tubular and conductor type connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connectors and all necessary sundries to complete one bus section bay in substation, as shown in the drawings. (d) As for item 18.1.6.1.7(a) above but having 2000A rating 18.1.6.1.8 132kV Post Insulators Type 1 One 132kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts and steel structure suitable for upright mounting on the provided steel structure. 18.1.6.1.9 132kV Post Insulators Type 2 One 132 kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts suitable for underhang mounting on steel gantry. 18.1.6.2 132/66kV Single Busbar Substations
18.1.6.2.1 132kV 1600A Single Busbar One 3 phase set of 132 kV 1600 A continuously rated busbar connections complete with strain sets, clamps and all necessary fittings to complete the single busbar system, as shown in the drawings. 18.1.6.2.2 132kV 1600A Bus Section Bay Connections One 3 phase set of 132 kV 1600 Amp continuously rated conductor type connections, clamps, bimetal connectors to complete one bus section bay in substation with conductor type busbars, as shown in the drawings.
Page 308 of 365
18.1.6.2.3 132kV 800A Single Busbar Line/Cable Connections One 3 phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.6.2.2 to complete one Line/Cable bay up to and including the clamp on the overhead line conductor or alternatively up to and including the stem of the respective cable sealing end, as shown in the drawings. 18.1.6.2.4 132kV 800A Single Busbar Transformer Connections One 3 phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.6.2.2 to complete one transformer bay up to and including the clamp on the transformer terminal bushing or cable sealing end, as shown in the drawings. 18.1.6.2.5 132kV Post Insulators One 132 kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts and steel structure suitable for upright mounting on the provided steel structure. 18.1.6.2.6 66kV Post Insulators As item 18.1.6.2.5 above but 66kV. 18.1.6.3 STRUCTURES
18.1.6.3.1 High Level Steel Structure Type 1 Substation high level steel structure to support both the incoming overhead line feeder connections and substation strained conductors, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc to enable attachment of line-strain sets. Additional take off points to be provided on the beam to achieve specified down lead clearances in accordance with the attached detailed drawings. 18.1.6.3.2 High Level Steel Structure Type 2 Substation high level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, including busbars, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc and suitable for mounting underhang insulators where necessary for clearance purposes in accordance with the attached detailed drawings. 18.1.6.3.3 High Level Steel Structure Type 3 A high level steel structure to support the substation shield wire system in accordance with the attached detailed drawings. The structure shall be equipped with a Tension Head Plate with 8 holes which are necessary for the attachment of earth wire coming from any direction. 18.1.6.3.4 High Level Steel Structure Type 4 Substation high level steel structure suitable for supporting two adjacent incoming overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc to enable attachment of line strain sets, and capable of being extended in future at both ends. Additional take off points to be provided on the beam to achieve specified down lead clearances. The structures should be suitable for extension on both ends for supporting in future new line feeders connected to the substation.
Page 309 of 365
18.1.6.3.5 High Level Steel Structure Type 5 Substation high level steel structure as item 18.1.6.3.4 above but suitable for connecting three adjacent overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors. 18.1.6.3.6 High Level Steel Structure Type 6 Substation high level steel structure as item 18.1.6.3.4 above but suitable for connecting four adjacent overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors. 18.1.6.3.7 High Level Steel Structure Type 7 Substation high level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, including busbars, of two adjacent feeders, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc. and suitable for mounting underhang insulators, where necessary for clearance purposes. The structures should be suitable for extension on both ends for extending the substation in future with new bays. 18.1.6.3.8 High Level Steel Structure Type 8 Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as item 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for three adjacent feeders. 18.1.6.3.9 High Level Steel Structure Type 9 Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as item 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for four adjacent feeders. 18.1.6.3.10 High Level Steel Structure Type 10 Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as item 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for five adjacent feeders. 18.1.6.3.11 High Level Steel Structure Type 11 Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as item 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for six adjacent feeders. 18.1.6.3.12 Steel Supporting Structures for Other Equipment Substation steel supporting structures for all other equipment including: Circuit-breaker. Isolator and earth switch. Post type current transformer. Capacitor voltage transformer. Post insulator, etc.
18.2
METAL ENCLOSED GIS SWITCHGEAR
To complete each item of equipment detailed in this schedule, there shall be provided the necessary terminal boards, panel wiring, fuses, cubicles, lighting, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates including cable glands, SF6 gas or other insulating medium,
Page 310 of 365
connections to all related equipment provided under this Contract and all necessary sundries whether specified in detail or not. In all cases the current ratings referred to are site ratings based on the specified outdoor shade design ambient temperature. The items of equipment comprise: Circuit Breakers Isolators and Earth Switches Voltage Transformers Current Transformers Busbars and Connections Gas Handling Equipment Metal Enclosed Surge Arresters
18.2.1
132 kV Circuit Breakers
(a) SF6 single pressure type circuit-breaker, triple pole, continuous minimum site rating 800 amperes, 132 kV with rated short circuit rating as specified in Clause 3.1.2 of this specification at 145 kV symmetrical breaking capacity complete with insulators and operating mechanism. Control cabinet complete with circuit breaker and switch control monitoring facilities, mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, bay controller with mimic diagram, alarm leds with accept and cancellation facilities, all necessary auxiliary switches, local control capabilities, local/remote selection and internal heaters. It shall include all pipe work on, in and between the circuit-breaker poles and the control cabinet or kiosk. The local control panels shall be equipped with all necessary facilities appropriate to the GIS design offered. (b) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 1600 amp rating (c) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 2000 amp rating. (d) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 2500 amp rating (e) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 3150 amp rating
18.2.2
132 kV Isolators and Earthing Switches
(a) Busbar/line isolating switch, triple-pole, continuous site rating 800 amperes, complete with electrical and manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box heater. (b) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 1600 amperes (c) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2000 amperes (d) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2500 amperes
(e) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 3150 amperes (f) Maintenance earth switch, triple-pole with electrical and manual operating mechanism, mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box heater. (g) High speed busbar or line fault making earth switch, triple pole with electrical and manual operating mechanism, mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box heater. (h) Maintenance earth switch, triple-pole with electrical and manual operating mechanism, mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches, mechanism box heater and fitted with additional primary injection testing facilities.
18.2.3
Busbars and Connections
(a) Set of 132 kV, 2000 A rated busbar chamber with busbars clamps, support insulators and all necessary sundries to equip a single busbar unit with a 3 phase set of busbars. Suitable for extension at both ends. (b) As item 18.2.3 (a) above but double busbar. (c) As item 18.2.3 (a) above but rated 3150A. (d) As item 18.2.3 (b) above but rated 3150A. (e) As item 18.2.3 (a) above but rated 1600A (f) Set of 132 kV 2000 A rated busbar chamber with busbars, clamps, support insulators and all necessary sundries to equip a single busbar bus coupler unit with a 3 phase set of busbars. (g) As item 18.2.3 (f) above but double busbar. (h) As item 18.2.3 (f) above but rated 3150A. (i) As item 18.2.3 (g) above but rated 3150A. (j) As item 18.2.3 (f) above but rated 1600A. (k) Set of 132 kV 800 A rated connection chambers with connectors, clamps, support insulators, current transformer accommodation, voltage transformer accommodation for a single busbar feeder unit. (l) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but double busbar. (m) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but rated 1600A. (n) As item 18.2.3 (l) above but rated 1600A. (o) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but rated 2000A. (p) As item 18.2.3 (l) above but rated 2000A. (q) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but rated 2500A. (r) As item 18.2.3 (l) above but rated 2500A.
Page 312 of 365
(s) Cable sealing end termination chamber complete with connections, clamps and all sundry items to accept three 132 kV single core cable sealing ends. (t) Set of SF6 Air bushing 800 A rated termination, suitable for the connection to overhead lines, transformers or sealing ends. The insulators shall be of composite material construction. (u) As item 18.2.3 (t) above but rated 1600A. (v) As item 18.2.3 (t) above but rated 2000A. (w) As item 18.2.3 (t) above but rated 2500A. (x) Set of 132 kV 800 A rated connection chambers with connectors, clamps, support, insulators, current transformer accommodation for a single busbar transformer feeder unit. (y) As item 18.2.3 (x) above but double busbar. (z) Set of 132 kV 800 A connection chamber with 3 phase connections through to transformer 132 kV gas insulated terminal bushings complete with support insulators, clamps and all sundry items and supports. The system shall incorporate any necessary expansion joints and absorb any vibration generated by the transformer. (aa) As item 18.2.3 (z) above but through to SF6 connection chamber complete with chamber / chamber adaptors, support insulators, clamps and all sundry items and supports. The system shall incorporate any necessary expansion joints and absorb any possible vibration generated by the connected equipment. (bb) Set of 132 kV 800 A connection trunking as detailed under item (z) but with facilities to accommodate 132 kV gas insulated metal oxide surge arresters should it be established that these are required as a result of insulation co-ordination studies. (cc) (dd) (ee) As item 18.2.3 (bb) above but rated 1600A. As item 18.2.3 (bb) above but rated 2000A As item 18.2.3 (bb) above but rated 2500A.
18.2.4
Gas Handling Equipment
A portable gas handling trolley shall be provided for the complete sampling, testing, filtering, drying, extraction, evacuation and refilling of SF6 gas. The unit shall be selfcontained and house all necessary compressors, high precision pressure gauges, piping, moisture meter, leak detection equipment and controls together with a storage tank capable of containing sufficient gas to fill all chambers of one circuit bay including associated busbar chambers. Two portable gas alarm units shall also be supplied for detecting possible overpressure in a compartment during maintenance by means of clear audible alarm.
Page 313 of 365
18.2.5
Metal Enclosed Surge Arresters
Set of 3-phase metal enclosed, metal oxide, surge arresters, for accommodation in GIS Switchgear complete with discharge counter, and leakage indicator. The units shall have electrical characteristics to suit the insulation co-ordination requirements of the substation.
18.3 18.3.1
Current and Voltage Transformers 132kV 1600A Bus Coupler /Section Circuit Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 2000A, each separately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secondary windings: (a) First winding with a ratio, rated burden, class, and accuracy limit factor for busbar circulating current protection and breaker fail protection. (b) Second winding ratio 1600/1A, rated burden, class, and accuracy limit factor for overcurrent protection and instruments and of at least class 5P20.
18.3.2
132kV 2000A Bus Coupler /Section Circuit Type 2
As item 18.3.1 but with CT ratio 2000/1
18.3.3
132kV 3150A Bus Coupler /Section Circuit Type 3
18.3.4
132kV 800A Line/Cable Circuit Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800A, each separately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secondary windings: (a) First winding ratio 800/1A, with characteristics as class PX, with knee point voltage more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8 for 1st main protection. (b) Second winding ratio 800/1A with characteristics as (a) above for 2nd main protection. (c) Third winding ratio 800/1A, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for overcurrent, earthfault and instruments and of at least class 5P20. (d) Fourth winding with a ratio, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for busbar and breaker failure protection.
18.3.5
18.3.6

Page 314 of 365
18.3.7
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800A, each separately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secondary windings: (a) First winding ratio 800/1A, with characteristics as class PX, with knee point voltage more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8 for 1st main protection. (b) Second winding ratio 800/1A with characteristics as (a) above for 2nd main protection. (c) Third winding ratio 800/1A, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for overcurrent, earthfault, instruments and at least class 5P20. (d) Fourth winding with a ratio, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for busbar and breaker failure protection (e) Fifth winding ratio 800/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA Class 0,2S (f) Sixth winding ratio 800/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA Class 0,2S
18.3.8
18.3.9
18.3.10
132/23-11,5kV Transformer Circuit Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800A, each separately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secondary windings: (a) First winding ratio 200/1A, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for overall transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection. (b) Second winding ratio 200/1A, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for overcurrent, earth fault protection, and instruments of at least class 5P20. (c) Third winding with a ratio, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for busbar and breaker failure protection
18.3.11
As item 18.3.10 but with CT ratio 200-100/1.
18.3.12
(a) First winding ratio 200/1A, rated burden, class, and accuracy limit factor for overall transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.
Page 315 of 365
(b) Second winding ratio 200/1A rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for overcurrent, earth fault protection and instruments of at least class 5P20. (c) Third winding with a ratio, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for busbar and breaker failure protection (d) Fifth winding ratio 200/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA Class 0,2S (e) Sixth winding ratio 200/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA Class 0,2S
18.3.13
As item 18.3.12 but with CT ratio 200-100/1
18.3.14
132 kV Neutral Current Transformer
Outdoor post type, neutral Current Transformer to be mounted on the transformer tank or alternatively ring type internal to the transformer tank round the respective bushing, comprising one core as follows for differential/restricted earthfault protection: (a) Turns ratio: 200/1A (b) Class: PX (c) Knee point emf: 400V (min) (d) Secondary winding resistance: 8 (max)
18.3.15
132 kV Neutral Current Transformer
As item 18.3.14 but with CT ratio 200-100/1 ratio.
18.3.16
22-11 kV Neutral Current Transformer
Outdoor post type 22-11kV side neutral current transformer to be mounted on the earthing transformer tank or alternatively ring type internal to the transformer tank round the respective bushing, comprising two cores as follows: (a) Core 1: 22-11kV Restricted Earth Fault protection Turns ratio: 2000-1000-500/1A Class: PX Knee point emf: 400V (min) Secondary winding resistance: 8 (max)
(b) Core 2: Standby Earth Fault Protection Turns ratio: 2000-1000-500/1A Class & Accuracy limit Factor: 5P20 Rated Burden: 20VA
18.3.17
132 kV Outdoor Voltage Transformer
Set of three 132 kV voltage transformers, single phase, separately mounted capacitor type suitable for outdoor installation, ratio
132,000 110 110 110 / V 3 3 3 3

with a minimum accuracy, class and output to EN 60044 5 as follows: (a) First winding with an rated output of 25VA, accuracy class 0,2 with voltage ratio error of 0,2% and phase displacement of 10min for main statistical metering (b) Second winding with an rated output of 25VA, accuracy class 0,2 with voltage ratio error of 0,2% and phase displacement of 10min for main statistical metering and measurements (c) Third winding ratio with an rated output of 50VA, accuracy class 3P with voltage ratio error of 3% for protection, synchronizing and instrumentation purposes and each complete with a weatherproof cubicle containing secondary miniature circuit breakers, complete with appropriate number of auxiliary contacts, isolating terminals, and earthing links. The voltage transformers shall also have facilities for the connection of power line carrier coupling equipment, including provision of a drain coil, and for the mounting of line traps on top
18.3.18
66kV Outdoor Voltage Transformer.
As item 18.3.17 but with
66,000 110 110 110 / V ratio. 3 3 3 3
18.3.19
132 kV GIS Voltage Transformer
As item 18.3.17 but in an SF6 environment triple wound single-phase to EN 60044 2 complete with a cubicle containing secondary miniature circuit breakers and appropriate number of auxiliary contacts, isolating terminals, and earthing links.
18.4 18.4.1
POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS Power Transformer Requirements

40 MVA DESCRIPTION UNIT MVA kV 132/23-11,5 kV 40 22,8-11,4 0,9 % +/- 10 3 2 kV/kV kV/kV 132/23-11,5 145/24-12 16 MVA 132/23-11,5 kV 16 22,8-11,4 0,9 +/- 10 3 2 132/23-11,5 145/24-12 16 MVA 66/23-11,5 kV 16 22,8-11,4 0,9 +/- 10 3 2 66/23-11,5 72.5/24-12
1.
To deliver a continuous maximum power for entire range of regulation with the following conditions: (a) Normal LV voltage (b) Load Power factor (lag) (c) Range of HV System Voltage
2. 3. 4. 5.
No. of phases No. of windings Normal ratio of transformation Corresponding highest system voltage
Page 317 of 365
40 MVA DESCRIPTION 6. Minimum withstand voltages: (a) Full wave impulse (b) Induced overvoltage power frequency (c) Power frequency withstand of neutral 7. 8. 9. 10. Type of cooling Minimum continuous ONAN rating of transformers External cooling medium Service conditions: (a) Altitude not exceeding (b) Air temperature not exceeding (c) Air temperature in any one year not exceeding: 11. 12. 13. 14. For design purposes Average in any one day Average in one year
o o o o o
16 MVA 132/23-11,5 kV
16 MVA 66/23-11,5 kV
UNIT
132/23-11,5 kV
kVrms kVrms kVrms
550/125-95 230/50-28 38/ONAN/ONAF
550/125-95 230/50-28 38/ONAN/ONAF 10 Air
325/125-95 140/50-28 38/ONAN/ONAF 10 Air
MVA
31.5 Air
m
o
1000 50
1000 50
1000 50
C C C C C C
45 30 20 60 55 140
45 30 20 60 55 140
45 30 20 60 55 140
Winding temperature rise limit Top oil temperature rise limit Winding hot spot temperature on emergency overload not exceeding Maximum hot spot temperature rise when loaded in accordance with IEC 60354 Phase connections: (a) 132 kV winding (b) 66 kV winding (c) 22-11 kV winding or tertiary (d) Vector group - 132 or 66 or 22-11 kV
73
73
73
15.
Star
Star Delta
Delta YNd11
Delta YNd11
Star Dyn11
16.
Short circuit withstand: Fault Level at terminals of: (a) 132 kV Busbars (1 sec) (b) 66 kV Busbars (1 sec) kA kA Refer to Clause 3.1.2
Page 318 of 365
40 MVA DESCRIPTION (c) 22 kV Busbars (3 sec) 17. Impedance voltage at 75oC and at principal tapping C.M.R. between windings. (% on HV base) Sound pressure level in accordance with EN 60076-10 Indoor installations Refer to Specification Drawings 19. Sound pressure level in accordance with EN 60076-10 Outdoor installations Refer to Specification Drawings 20. Sound pressure level at worst possible operating conditions Voltage Control 21. Total range of variation of nominal tapped ratio as item 4 above (a) - plus % (b) - minus % (c) Number and Size of steps 22. Type of control % % #/% 12,5 18,75 25/1,25 On load local, remote and, supervisory YES / 110Vac, 50Hz m Vdc 100 110 YES YES 3 Vac Vdc 230 110 dB (A) 80 UNIT kA % 21 132/23-11,5 kV
16 MVA 132/23-11,5 kV
16 MVA 66/23-11,5 kV
15
15
18.
dB (A)
50
50
50
dB (A)
60
60
60
80
80
12,5 12,5 20/1,25 On load local, remote and, supervisory YES / 110Vac, 50Hz 100 110 YES YES 3 230 110
10 14,3 17/1,43 On load local, remote and, supervisory YES / 110Vac, 50Hz 100 110 YES YES 3 230 110
23. 24.
Automatic control required and reference voltage Estimated distance between remote control point and transformer Nominal DC supply Provision for supervisory indication required Marshalling kiosk required Number of transformers for which automatic control is to be required Supply voltage for parallel control and panel indications Supply voltage for supervisory control, alarms and trips
25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.
Page 319 of 365
40 MVA DESCRIPTION 31. Pollution category of open air bushings Insulators Minimum (mm/kV nominal voltage) 32. 33. 34. Number of cooler banks required per transformer Rating of each cooler bank as percentage of total loss at C.M.R. Type of oil preservation system % UNIT 132/23-11,5 kV
16 MVA 132/23-11,5 kV
16 MVA 66/23-11,5 kV
Heavy Composite 35 2 50 Maintenance Free Silica Gel Breather Flat base YES
Heavy Composite 35 2 50 Maintenance Free Silica Gel Breather Skid or Flat base NO
Heavy Composite 35 2 50 Maintenance Free Silica Gel Breather Skid or Flat base NO
35. 36. 37.
Whether wheels, skid or flat bottom base required Whether anti-vibration pads required High voltage cable is 132 kV XLPE single core, 300 mm2 Cu Conductor cable with 90 mm2 Cu Wire Screen 22kV Cables: 630 mm2 Cu Conductor XLPE single core cables with 95 mm2 Cu wire screen 22kV Cable to connect the earthing transformer: 300 mm2 Al conductor XLPE single core cable with 95 mm2 Cu wire screen
One per phase
One per phase
One per phase
38.
Three per phase
One per phase
One per phase
39.
One per phase
One per phase
18.4.2
Earthing Transformer Requirements

150 kVA DESCRIPTION UNIT % #/% A/Phase 23-11,5/0,415 kV 5 5/2,5% 557 Zyn1/d
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
No-Load voltage ratio variation Number of taps and approx. step Rating of interconnected star winding on 30 seconds basis Vector group HV/LV Bushing insulators or cable box: (a) HV Line (b) HV Neutral
Cable box Bushing
Page 320 of 365
150 kVA DESCRIPTION (c) LV Line (d) Neutral (e) HV Cable disconnecting chamber required 6. 7. External secondary load Zero sequence impedance with LV windings open circuited Maximum Flux Density at Rated Voltage Impedance Voltage at C.M.R. of S.W., 75oC and Normal Ratio Nominal mean sound level in accordance with EN 60551 Type of transformer base required Accommodation required on tank for outdoor weatherproof post type current transformer Supplied under this Contract 13. Low Voltage Cable to the LV Switchboard: kVA UNIT 23-11,5/0,415 kV Cable box Bushing No 150 4 for 11 kV nominal /Phase T % dB (A) 16 for 22 kV nominal 1,7 4 60 Skid or flat
8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
YES YES 3x185 mm2 Al cable with 70 mm2 concentric Cu wire neutral (CEANDER type)
18.5
22 kV SWITCHGEAR
To complete each item of equipment detailed in this schedule there shall be provided the necessary terminal boards, current transformer and voltage transformer test terminal block, auxiliary relays, panel wiring fuses, MCB's, cubicle lighting, anti-condensation heaters, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates and all necessary sundries whether specified in detail or not. The Items of Equipment comprise: (a) Transformer Incoming circuit breakers. (b) Bus Section circuit breakers (c) Feeder circuit breakers (Underground) (d) Feeder circuit breakers for capacitor bank
Page 321 of 365
18.5.1
Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers Type 1
Transformer Incoming Circuit breaker panel comprising the following: (a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating plug and socket. (b) Fixed 2000A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered. (c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110V DC. (d) Three current transformers each housing the following cores: One Class PX, with knee point voltage more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8 Ohms, of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for biased differential protection. One Class 5P20 of 2000-1000/1 ratio for O/C and E/F protection. One Class 1 of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for capacitor bank Control on ONLY the black (L2) phase current transformer. One Class 0,2 of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for metering, instruments and tap changer control.
(e) One three-phase disconnectable, circuit connected voltage transformer ratio 2200011000/110V, 50/25VA per phase of accuracy class 0,5+3P, for protection, metering, tap change control, supervisory indication and instruments. (f) One voltage regulating relay of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers using the minimum circulating current principle, manual step up and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control etc. (g) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these: Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms 1A overcurrent and earth fault IDMT protection 1A two stage inverse time LV standby earth fault Adequate programmable binary inputs Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset) Adequate programmable LEDs
Page 322 of 365
Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power Factor Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch Trip/Close Control Switch Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults LED reset and test push button Trip Circuit Supervision 110Vdc Power Supply
(h) Current and Voltage Transformer Test terminal blocks. (i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification. (j) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for the cables specified in the relevant drawing. (k) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected. (l) Space to be made available for one three-phase electronic meter to be mounted locally by the Purchaser on the cubicle. Dimensions of openings will be given by the Purchaser after Contract award. All necessary wiring up to the meters shall be supplied with the panels.
18.5.2
As paragraph 18.5.1 but with CT ratios 2000-1000-500/1
18.5.3
As paragraph 18.5.1 but without voltage regulating relay
18.5.4
As paragraph 18.5.2 but without voltage regulating relay
18.5.5
Bus Section Circuit Breakers Type 1
Bus Section circuit breaker panel comprising the following: (a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating set of isolating plug and socket. (b) Fixed 2000A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered. (c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110Vdc. (d) One set of three current transformers housing the following:
CT Class 5P20 ratio 2000-1000/1 for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these: Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDMT protection Adequate programmable binary inputs Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset) Adequate programmable LEDs Measuring Functions for Current. Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch Trip/Close Control Switch Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults LED reset and test push button Trip Circuit Supervision 110Vdc Power Supply
(f) Cubicle heaters ON / OFF switch (only on Bus Section one) (g) Voltage Selection Relay and bus-wiring to all feeders (h) Current Transformer Test terminal block. (i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification. (j) Lockable Busbar Earth Switch for each separate Bus-Section (on this panel or otherwise as appropriate).
18.5.6
Bus Section Circuit Breakers Type 2
As paragraph 18.5.5 but with CT ratios 2000-1000-500/1
18.5.7
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Underground) Type 1
Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling an underground cable feeder comprising the following:
Page 324 of 365
(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating plug and socket. (b) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered. (c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 Vdc. (d) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings: One Class 5P20 of 500/1A ratio, for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these: Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earth-fault IDMT protection Adequate programmable binary inputs Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset) Adequate programmable LEDs Under / Over-voltage Under / Over-frequency Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power Factor Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch Trip/Close Control Switch Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults LED reset and test push button Trip Circuit Supervision 110Vdc Power Supply
(f) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks. (g) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
Page 325 of 365
(h) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for the cables specified in the relevant drawing. (i) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.5.8
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Underground) Type 2
As paragraph 18.5.7 but with additional Class 0,2 CT of 500/1 ratio for metering.
18.5.9
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Overhead) Type 1
Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling overhead line feeder comprising the following: (j) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating set of isolating plug and socket. (k) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered. (l) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 V DC. (m) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings: One Class 5P20 of 500/1A ratio, for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(n) One core balance neutral current transformer Class 5P20 of 60/1A ratio, for sensitive earth-fault protection. (o) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these: Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earth-fault IDMT protection Auto-reclosing Sensitive earth fault Adequate programmable binary inputs Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset) Adequate programmable LEDs Under / Overvoltage Under / Over-frequency Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power Factor
Page 326 of 365
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch Trip/Close Control Switch Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults LED reset and test push button Trip Circuit Supervision 110Vdc Power Supply
(p) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks. (q) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification. (r) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for the cables specified in the relevant drawing. (s) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.5.10
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Overhead) Type 2
As paragraph 18.5.9 but with additional Class 0,2 CT of 500/1 ratio for metering.
18.5.11
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Capacitor Bank)
Outgoing feeder circuit breaker panel suitable for switching up to a 10MVAr capacitor bank, comprising the following: (a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating plug and socket. (b) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230Vac motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered. (c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 Vdc. (d) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings: One Class 5P20 of 500-300-150/1A ratio for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One three-phase disconnectable, circuit connected voltage transformer ratio 2200011000/110V, 50 / 25VA per phase of accuracy class 0,5, for metering, capacitor Bank control, supervisory indication and instruments (f) One interposing current transformer, Class 1,0 of ratio 1+1+1/1A, 30VA for the capacitor bank control, which is supplied by others (g) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these:
Page 327 of 365
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms and capacitor bank circuit breakers 1A phase segregated 3-phase and earth-fault IDMT protection Under / Over-voltage Adequate programmable binary inputs Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset) Adequate programmable LEDs Measuring Functions for MVars Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch Trip/Close Control Switch Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults LED reset and test push button Trip Circuit Supervision 110Vdc Power Supply
(h) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks. (i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification. (j) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for the cables specified in the relevant drawing. (k) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.5.12
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Local Transformer)
Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling underground cable feeder comprising the following: (a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating plug and socket. (b) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230Vac motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
Page 328 of 365
(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110Vdc. (d) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings: One Class 5P20 of 500-100/1, for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these: Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earth-fault IDMT protection Adequate programmable binary inputs Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset) Adequate programmable LEDs Under / Overvoltage Measuring Functions for Current, Real and Reactive Power and Power Factor Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch Trip/Close Control Switch Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults LED reset and test push button Trip Circuit Supervision 110Vdc Power Supply
(f) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks. (g) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification. (h) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for the cables specified in the relevant drawing. (i) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
Page 329 of 365
18.6
PROTECTION AND CONTROL CUBICLES
Each cubicle shall be of sheet steel suitable for floor mounting with cable access at the bottom. The cubicles shall accommodate all the items specified together with all relevant ancillary components. Note: Bay Controllers can be situated on the Protection Cubicle or the Local Control Cubicle depending on the type of installation. Important Note: In certain cases relays should be compatible with relays at the opposite line end. These cases are indicated in the relevant protection drawings included to this specification. It is expected that the Tenderers should offer the specified relays.
18.6.1
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF) Including:
(a) One first main feeder protection is a distance type full scheme offering a range of inbuilt schemes to be used with protection signalling equipment over multiplexed fibre optic cables to provide initially a permissive overreach scheme. It shall also incorporate "weak infeed" feature to allow tripping when there is either no infeed or insufficient infeed to operate the relay measuring elements. The relay shall also incorporate Auto-reclosing and Synchronizing features. (b) One second main feeder protection relay for current differential feeder protection, complete with current check feature, to be used with signalling equipment (not included in this Contract) over direct or multiplexed fibre optic channels. (c) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault (d) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability. (e) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit (f) One protection IN/OUT switch first main protection (g) One protection IN/OUT switch, second main protection The following functions should be incorporated into the main relays: (h) Under / Over-voltage (i) Under / Over-frequency (j) First main protection high speed tripping, electrical reset (k) Second main protection high speed tripping, electrical reset (l) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset (m) Busbar protection high speed tripping, hand reset (n) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset (o) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit
Page 330 of 365
(p) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit (q) Main protection out of service indication (r) Main protection operated indication (s) One LED reset and test push button Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays. Current and voltage transformer test terminal blocks for each circuit, auxiliary relays, interposing current transformers and material to complete the relay cubicle.
18.6.2
As 18.6.1 but without busbar protection relays
18.6.3
As 18.6.1 but without bay controller and busbar protection relays
18.6.4
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF/DIFF) Including:
As 18.6.1 above but with both protection relays based on current differential principle. The relays should be from different manufacturers or alternatively its main algorithm must be based on a different basic logic.
18.6.5
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF/DIFF) Including:
18.6.6
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST) Including:
As 18.6.1 but without line differential relay.
18.6.7
As 18.6.1 but without line differential relay and busbar protection relays.
18.6.8
As 18.6.1 but without bay controller, line differential and busbar protection relays
18.6.9
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF) Including:
As 18.6.4 but with only one line differential relay.
18.6.10
As 18.6.4 but with only one line differential relay and without busbar protection relays.
18.6.11
As 18.6.4 but with only one line differential relay and without bay controller and busbar protection relays`
Page 331 of 365
18.6.12
132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle Including:
(a) One 3-element high speed biased numerical differential relay complete for 3 phase overall transformer protection incorporating instantaneous high set differential current element (b) One instantaneous 132kV winding restricted earth fault relay (c) One instantaneous 22-11kV winding restricted earth fault relay (d) One instantaneous 415V winding restricted earth fault relay (e) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault (f) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability. (g) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit The following functions should be incorporated into the main relays: (a) Main protection high speed tripping, hand reset (b) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset (c) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset (d) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit (e) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit (f) Main protection operated indication (g) One LED reset and test push button Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays. (h) One Controller with adequate programmable binary inputs, LEDs and tripping relays that will receive information from the transformer and will initiate alarms and trips for the following: Main transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip On-load tap changer Buchholz oil surge protection trip Main transformer low oil level alarm Tap changer low oil level alarm Oil temperature alarm and trip Winding temperature alarm and trip Main transformer pressure relief operated trip Earthing transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip
Page 332 of 365
Earthing transformer pressure relief operated trip Earthing transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection operated Earthing transformer low oil level alarm Silica Gel Breather Alarm
(i) LED reset and test push button Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays and material to complete the relay cubicle.
18.6.13
18.6.14
18.6.15
132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Including:
(a) One 3-element high speed biased numerical differential relay complete for 3 phase overall transformer protection incorporating instantaneous high set differential current element (b) One instantaneous restricted earth fault relay (c) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault (d) Bay Controller, mounted on the protection and control panel, to collect and preprocess status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability. (e) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit The following functions should be incorporated into the main relays: (j) Main protection high speed tripping, hand reset (k) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset (l) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset (m) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit (n) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit (o) Main protection operated indication (p) One LED reset and test push button Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays. (q) One voltage regulating relay of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers, manual step up
and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control etc. (r) One Controller with adequate programmable binary inputs, LEDs and tripping relays that will receive necessary signals from the transformer that will initiate alarms and trips for the following: Main transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip On-load tap changer Buchholz oil surge protection trip Main transformer low oil level alarm Tap changer low oil level alarm Oil temperature alarm and trip Winding temperature alarm and trip Main transformer pressure relief operated trip
Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays and material to complete the relay cubicle.
18.6.16
As 18.6.15 but without voltage regulating relays
18.6.17
18.6.18
18.6.19
132 kV Bus Coupler Relay Cubicle Including:
(a) One numerical low impedance busbar and breaker failure central unit carrying out the following features in conjunction with the protection bay units: Zone 1, Zone 2 and additional Check Zone measurement Phase segregated measurement Self monitoring, including CT circuits and isolator positions Integrated 2-stage circuit breaker failure protection Set of LEDs to indicate protection operated, zones out of service LED reset and test push button
(b) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault (c) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station
Page 334 of 365
control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability. (d) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit (e) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit (f) One LED reset and test push button Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays. (g) One voltage selection scheme (selection of busbar voltage) and Synchronizing facilities to be used for Auto-reclosing, Local Closing and SCADA Closing (h) One current transformer test terminal block Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays and material to complete the relay cubicle.
18.7 18.7.1
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM General
A microprocessor based Substation Control System to monitor and control the entire substation that shall handle the following tasks: Telecommunication Monitoring Remote control/control with switchgear interlock Serial connection of protection devices Automation Pre-processing and visualizing process-related information in the station Archiving and reporting
18.7.2
Configuration
The typical configuration shall consist of: (a) Substation Controller shall be of an open-type, modular construction telecontrol and substation controller. (b) Serial interfaces for connection to higher-level system control centres (SCADA) using the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, test and diagnosis PC for commissioning and trouble shooting, time synchronization. (c) Connection to bay level. (d) Bay control units, protective IEDs or combined control and protection bay units. (e) Engineering PC (latest available specification) with Windows operating system that shall configure and parameterise the substation having the following features:
Page 335 of 365
Software for setting, commissioning, controlling and testing IEDs, for visualizing and evaluating fault records, etc. 21 TFT Monitor Colour Laser Printer
(f) Operation and monitoring PC (latest available specification) with Windows XP Professional operating system having the following features: Human Machine Interface offering standard function modules for graphical display, for messaging, archiving and reporting. It shall consist of symbol library, message management expansion, wizards, processing functions and Measured/Metered Value processing unit 21 TFT Monitor Dot-Matrix Printer Furniture to include:

(g)
One computer table for the Engineering PC screen and printer, and one for the HMI and printer One rack for the PCs Four office arm chairs
18.8 18.8.1
REMOTE CONTROL CUBICLES AND PANELS General
Each cubicle and panel shall be of sheet steel, suitable for floor mounting, accommodating all items to complete the control functions. Alarm fascias shall include all the necessary repeat facilities to retransmit alarms over SCADA.
18.8.2
18.8.2.1
Remote control cubicles and panels for double busbar substations

Line/Cable Bay
132 kV double busbar feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following: Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch Line isolator semaphore indicator and combined control switch Line earth switch semaphore indicator only Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: Circuit Breaker Lockout
Page 336 of 365
No. 1 2 1 1 1 1
Function Circuit Breaker Tripped SF6 Pressure Low CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout Main 1 Protection Operated Main 2 Protection Operated Busbar Protection Operated Backup Protection Operated Breaker Fail Protection Operated Intertrip Received Communication Circuits Faulty Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty Auto-Recloser Off Auto-Recloser Operated Auto-Recloser Lockout VT Fail Main 1 Protection inoperative/out Main 2 Protection inoperative/out Isolator in intermediate position
No.
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled Ammeter phase selector switch Voltmeter circular platform scale suitably scaled Voltmeter phase selector switch Wattmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled Varmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled Pushbutton for resettable protection related trip relay reset LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton Synchronising check relay Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset SCADA transducer for MW SCADA transducer for MVAr 18.8.2.2 Transformer Bay
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
132 kV double busbar transformer circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Page 337 of 365
Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: Circuit Breaker Lockout Circuit Breaker Tripped SF6 Pressure Low CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout Main Protection Operated Busbar Protection Operated Back-up Protection Operated Breaker Fail Protection Operated Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty Oil Temperature Main Transformer Buchholtz Alarm Main Transformer Winding Temperature Main Transformer Oil Level Main Transformer Pressure Relief Main Transformer Oil Temperature Earthing Transformer Buchholtz Alarm Earthing Transformer Pressure Relief Earthing Transformer TRFMR LVAC Supply Faulty Main protection inoperative/out Isolator in intermediate position
No. 1 2 1 1
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled Ammeter phase selector switch LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset 18.8.2.3 Bus Coupler Bay
1 1 1 1
132 kV bus coupler feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following: Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch No. 1 2 1
Page 338 of 365
Function 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: Circuit Breaker Lockout Circuit Breaker Tripped SF6 Pressure Low CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout Busbar Protection Operated Backup Protection Operated Breaker Fail Protection Operated Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty Isolator in intermediate position Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton Synchronising check relay Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset SCADA transducer for Amps SCADA transducer for Volts 18.8.2.4 Bus Section Bay
No. 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
132 kV bus section feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following: Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch Busbar earth switch semaphore indicator only 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: LVAC Supply Faulty Busbar Protection inoperative/out Battery Charger 1 or 2 fail Battery Volts low Battery earth 1 or 2 fail Isolator in intermediate position 1
Page 339 of 365
No. 1 4 4 1
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton

Function Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset Substation Attended / Unattended switch Centrally mounted double swing recess-able synchronising frame including: Synchroscope 200mm dial and on/off switch 2 voltmeters 100mm dial for "running" and "incoming" volts Phase angle meter 100mm dial, double scaled complete with selector switch 2 frequency indicators 100mm dial
No. 1 1 1
18.8.3
18.8.3.1
Remote control cubicles and panels for single busbar substations

Line/Cable Bay
132kV single busbar feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following: Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators only Line isolator semaphore indicator and combined control switch Line earth switch semaphore indicator only Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: Circuit Breaker Lockout Circuit Breaker Tripped SF6 Pressure Low CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout Main 1 Protection Operated Main 2 Protection Operated Busbar Protection Operated Backup Protection Operated Breaker Fail Protection Operated Intertrip Received Communication Circuits Faulty Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty Auto-Recloser Off Auto-Recloser Operated Auto-Recloser Lockout
Page 340 of 365
No. 1 1 1 1 1 1
Function VT Fail Main 1 Protection inoperative/out Main 2 Protection inoperative/out Isolator in intermediate position
No.
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled Ammeter phase selector switch Voltmeter circular platform scale suitably scaled Voltmeter phase selector switch Wattmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled Varmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled Pushbutton for resettable protection related trip relay reset LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton Synchronising check relay Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset SCADA transducer for MW SCADA transducer for MVAr 18.8.3.2 Transformer Bay
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
132kV single busbar transformer circuit, control panel equipped with the following: Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators only Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: Circuit Breaker Lockout Circuit Breaker Tripped SF6 Pressure Low CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout Main Protection Operated Busbar Protection Operated Back-up Protection Operated No. 1 1 1 1
Page 341 of 365
Function Breaker Fail Protection Operated Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty Oil Temperature Main Transformer Buchholtz Alarm Main Transformer Winding Temperature Main Transformer Pressure Relief Main Transformer Oil Temperature Earthing Transformer Buchholtz Alarm Earthing Transformer Oil Level Main Transformer Pressure Relief Earthing Transformer TRFMR LVAC Supply Faulty Main protection inoperative/out Isolator in intermediate position
No.
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled Ammeter phase selector switch LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset 18.8.3.3 Bus Section Bay
1 1 1 1
132 kV bus section feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following. If CB is not specified disregard its functions: Function Section of Mimic diagram Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch 28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms: Circuit Breaker Lockout Circuit Breaker Tripped SF6 Pressure Low CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout Busbar Protection Operated Backup Protection Operated Breaker Fail Protection Operated Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty LVAC Supply Faulty Busbar Protection inoperative/out Battery Charger 1 or 2 fail Battery Volts low
Page 342 of 365
No. 1 2 1 1
Function Battery earth 1 or 2 fail Isolator in intermediate position
No.
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton Synchronising check relay Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset SCADA transducer for Amps SCADA transducer for Volts Substation Attended / Unattended switch Centrally mounted double swing recess-able synchronising frame including: Synchroscope 200 mm dial and on/off switch 2 voltmeters 100 mm dial for "running" and "incoming" volts Phase angle meter 100 mm dial, double scaled complete with selector switch 2 frequency indicators 100 mm dial Remote Tap Changer Panels Type 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
18.8.3.4
Automatic control shall be suitable for the control of transformers in parallel, up to three transformers using the Master/Follower/Independents principle. Remote Tap Changer Panel shall be equipped with the following: 1. Automatic Voltage Regulating Relay equipped with following: 2. Voltage Indication (Phase to phase voltage of the low voltage terminals of the transformer). Tap position indicator Automatic/Manual - voltage control selector switch spring return Remote/Supervisory tap change control selector switch Raise/Lower pushbuttons Start/Stop controls for forced cooling equipment Independent/Master/Follower selector switch AVR voltage reference adjuster
Alarm Relay: A multi-element alarm flag relay is to be provided to indicate the following: Buchholz Gas
Page 343 of 365
3.
Winding Temperature - stage 1 Low oil level Pressure Relief operated (if provided) Marshalling Kiosk AC Fail.
Trip Relay: A multi-element trip flag relay is to be provided for the following: Buchholz Oil surge OLTC oil surge Winding temperature - stage 2
4.
Indications and Alarms Tap change in progress - white lamp Tap change out of step - amber lamp Auto/Manual indication - white lamps Air forced cooling equipment running - white Air forced cooling failure - amber VT Fail alarm - amber Supply voltage failure on OLTC - amber lamp
The alarm and trip relays are required to be latched flag relays with four hand-reset change over contacts per element. The contacts shall be voltage free for operating the transformer main trip relay. Depending on the scheme the available on the automatic regulating relay controls and alarms shall be utilised and only the remaining as specified above, shall be provided by other means. Remote control schemes shall be entirely suitable for operation with the distance between the transformer and remote control panel as shown on the drawings. 18.8.3.5 Remote Tap Changer Panels Type 2
Remote Tap Changer panel as paragraph 18.8.3.4 but using the minimum circulating current principle 18.8.3.6 Remote Tap Changer Panels Type 3
Remote Tap Changer panel with up to three voltage regulating relays, applicable scheme to match substation requirements, of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers, manual step up and step down operation of tap changer, input output modules for indications, alarms and measurements, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control complete with all accessories.
Page 344 of 365
18.9 18.9.1
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SIGNALS Alarms to SCADA
Alarms to SCADA shall be grouped in the following manner subjected to the particular requirements of the project and the final recommendation and approval of the enginner: 18.9.1.1 Protection Fault
Summary of all conditions that degrade or prevent the operation of protection relays, for example, (a) Relay dc supply failure (b) Protection relay fault (c) Pilot wire fault (d) Communication circuit fault (e) VT failure/MCB tripped 18.9.1.2 Trip Circuit Fault
Summary of all conditions that prevents CB opening, for example, (a) Fault detected by trip circuit supervision relay and trip supply faulty (b) SF6 pressure low stage 2 (c) Oil pressure low stage 2 18.9.1.3 Circuit Breaker Fault
Summary of all conditions that prevents CB operation (closure), for example, (a) Aux DC & Drive supply faulty (b) SF6 pressure low stage 1 (c) Oil pressure low stage 1 (d) Spring not charged (delayed contact)
Page 345 of 365
18.9.2
18.9.2.1
Circuit Data
132 kV Switchgear INFO. NAME S*Z010 S*F040 S*Z052 S*Z054 S*F056 S*Z180 S*Z200 S*Z220 S*Z230 S*F250 S*Z240 S*Z242
S0C1240 S0C1242 S0C2240 IEC 618705 101 info No 1 8 2 3 5 12 16 17 18 20 21 23 21 22 23 IEC 61870-5 101
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
Line Bay
Transformer bay
13NN 23NN 33NN 123NN 163NN 173NN 183NN 213NN 233NN -
BS/BC
COMMON
Address
13NN 83NN 23NN 33NN 53NN 123NN 163NN 173NN 183NN 203NN 213NN 233NN 213NN 223NN 233NN 13NN 83NN 23NN 33NN 53NN 123NN 163NN 173NN 183NN 203NN 213NN 233NN 13NN 23NN 33NN 123NN 163NN 173NN 183NN 213NN 233NN 21300 22300 23300
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Circuit Breaker (QA1) Open/Close-command Auto Recloser IN/OUT -command BusBar Isolator A (QB1) Open/Close-command BusBar Isolator B (QB2) Open/Close-command Line Isolator (QB8) Open/Close-command Trip Relay Reset-command Circuit Breaker (QA1) Open/Closed BusBar Isolator (QB1) Open/Closed Bus Section Isolator QB2 Open/Closed Line Isolator (QB8) Open/Closed BusBar WA11 Maintenance Earth Switch QC1 Closed BusBar WA21 Maintenance Earth Switch QC2 Closed BusBar WA11 Earth Switch QC115 Closed BusBar WA12 Earth Switch QC125 Closed BusBar WA21 Earth Switch QC215 Closed
DO DO DO DO DO DO DI DI DI DI SI SI SI SI SI
Page 346 of 365
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
INFO. NAME
S0C2242 S0C3240 S0C3242
IEC 618705 101 info No 24 25 26 22 27 40 41 41 42 46 49 50 51 52 70 71 71 72
IEC 61870-5 101
Line Bay
Transformer bay
403NN 413NN 423NN 493NN 503NN 703NN 713NN 723NN
BS/BC
COMMON
Address
243NN 253NN 263NN 223NN 273NN 403NN 413NN 413NN 423NN 463NN 493NN 503NN 513NN 523NN 703NN 713NN 713NN 723NN 223NN 273NN 403NN 413NN 423NN 463NN 493NN 503NN 703NN 713NN 723NN 403NN 423NN 493NN 503NN 703NN 723NN 24300 25300 26300 49300 5030051300 52300 -
16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.
BusBar WA22 Earth Switch QC225 Closed BusBar WA13 Earth Switch QC135 Closed BusBar WA23 Earth Switch QC235 Closed Line Isolator Maintenance Earth Switch QC8 Closed Line Earth Switch (CCT) QC9 Closed First Main Protection Operated Second Main Protection Operated Transformer (tank) Protection Operated Backup Protection Operated Intertrip ((Remote End) Operated Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Operated BusBar Protection Operated Busbar Zone A Protection Operated Busbar Zone B Protection Operated First Main Protection Fault Second Main Protection Fault Transformer Protection Fault Backup Protection Fault
SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI
S*F262 S*F260 S*Z270 S*F280 S*T280 S*Z290 S*F300 S*Z490 S*Z500 S0C510 S0C540 S*Z310 S*F320 S*T320 S*Z312
Page 347 of 365
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
INFO. NAME S*Z319 S*Z329 S*F314 S*F324 S*Z330 S*Z332 S*Z334 S*Z340 S*Z342 S*F346 S*Z341 S*Z349 S*Z350 S*F360 S*Z359 S*Z360 S*T360 S*F370
IEC 618705 101 info No 74 75 73 76 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 60 61 63 64 61 65
IEC 61870-5 101
Line Bay
Transformer bay
743NN 753NN
BS/BC
COMMON
Address
743NN 753NN 733NN 763NN 303NN 313NN 323NN 333NN 343NN 353NN 363NN 373NN 603NN 613NN 633NN 643NN 613NN 653NN 743NN 753NN 733NN 763NN 303NN 313NN 323NN 333NN 343NN 353NN 363NN 373NN 603NN 613NN 633NN 643NN 653NN 303NN 313NN 323NN 333NN 343NN 363NN 373NN 603NN 633NN 643NN 613NN 303NN 313NN 323NN 333NN 343NN 363NN 373NN 603NN 633NN 643NN 743NN 753NN -
34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51.
BusBar / Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Fault Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Fault First Main Prt. Communication Fault Second Main Prt. Communication Fault Trip Circuit Fault Bay SF6 Lock Out SF6 Sensor Defect Circuit Breaker QA1 fault BusBar Isolator QB1-2 fault Line Isolator QB8 fault Bay /GIS Loss of SF6 Alarm Bay Control fault First Main Protection Set Out of Service Second Main Protection Set Out of Service BusBar Protection Set Out of Service CB Failure Protection Set Out of Service Transformer Protection Set Out of Service Auto Recloser Set Out of Service
SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI
Page 348 of 365
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
INFO. NAME S*F372 S*Z380 S*F550 S*F560 S*F562 S*F564 S*F482 S*Z590 S0C599 S*F690 S*F692
S*F480
IEC 618705 101 info No 77 58 78 79 80 81 69 83 84 84 85 68 85300 86 87 92 93 94
IEC 61870-5 101
Line Bay
Transformer bay
583NN -
BS/BC
COMMON
Address
773NN 583NN 783NN 793NN 803NN 813NN 693NN 833NN 843NN 843NN 853NN 683NN 85300 863NN 873NN 923NN 933NN 943NN 843NN 853NN 683NN 863NN 873NN 863NN 873NN 863NN 873NN 923NN 773NN 583NN 783NN 793NN 803NN 813NN 693NN 833NN 833NN 833NN 83300 84300 6830085300 86300 87300 93300 94300 583NN 58300 -
52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69.
Auto Recloser Fault Supervisory Control Selected (NCC Authority) Auto Recloser Initiated Auto Recloser Lockout Auto Recloser Blocked Reclosure by Remote End Measuring Instrument Circuits Faulty Annunciator Fault Substation controller General Alarm Under Ground cable High Temperature Alarm Under Ground cable Low Pressure Alarm Supervisory Check Synchronizing Circuit Faulty Switchgear maintenance Alarm Protection Panel DC Supply Fault Control Panel DC Supply Fault Bus Coupler/ Section Current Busbar WA11 Voltage Busbar WA12 Voltage
SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI AM AM AM
S0C660
S*Z606 S*Z608
S*C700 S0C710 S0C720
Page 349 of 365
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
INFO. NAME S0C730 S0C740 S*F800 S*F810 S0C960
IEC 618705 101 info No 95 96 90 91 99
IEC 61870-5 101
Line Bay
Transformer bay
-
BS/BC
COMMON
Address
953NN 963NN 903NN 913NN 993NN 903NN 913NN 95300 96300 99300
70. 71. 72. 73. 74.
Busbar WA21 Voltage Busbar WA22 Voltage MW Measurement MVAr Measurement GIS Room Temperature Measurement
AM AM AM AM AM
NN is replaced by the bay number as designated in the relevant approved Single Line Diagram such as 05. 3 (predecessor of NN) corresponds to the operating Voltage of the Switchgear that is 132kV. For 66kV 4 replaces number 3 Configuration method for creating the IEC 61870-5-101 Information Address is given in paragraph 18.9.2.6 below
Page 350 of 365
18.9.2.2
Transformer & Tap Changer Control
Transformers and transformer tap changer control should provide the following signals: INFO. NAME S*T080 S*T100 S*T400 S*T410 S*T414 S*T420 S*T430 S*T440 S*T450 S*T470 S*T790
IEC 61870-5 101 info No 14 13 84 85 86 77 78 65 653NN 79 88 89 793NN 883NN 893NN IEC 61870-5 101
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
Address
143NN 133NN 843NN 853NN 863NN 773NN 783NN
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Tap Changer Raise/ Lower-command Tap Changer Auto/Manual-command Transformer Temperature Alarm Transformer Buchholtz Gas Alarm Transformer Oil Level Alarm Tap Changer Fault Tap Changer Incomplete Tap Changer Supervisory Control Selection (NCC Authority) Tap Changer in Auto Transformer Cooling Fault Tap changer Tap position Indication
DO DO SI SI SI SI SI SI DI/SI SI SI
Page 351 of 365
18.9.2.3
Medium Voltage Switchboard

INFO. NAME IEC 61870-5 101 info No 1 8 9 12 16 17 17 18 21 22 25 IEC 61870-5 101 Address 1*NN 8*NN 9*NN 12*NN 16*NN 17*NN 17*NN 18*NN 21*NN 22*NN 22*NN
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
Incomer
BS
UG
OH
Capac
Common
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Circuit Breaker (QA1) Open/Close-command Auto Recloser IN/OUT command Sensitive Earth Fault In/Out-command Lockout Relay Resetcommand Circuit Breaker QA1 Open/Closed BusBar QB1 isolator Closed BusSec QB11 isolator Closed BusSec QB12 isolator Closed BB WA11 E/S QC115 closed/open BB WA12 E/S QC125 closed/open BB WA13 E/S QC135 closed/open
DC DC DC SC/DC DP SP SP SP SP SP SP
S*D050 S*D040 S*D044 S*D180 S*D200 S*D220 S*D122 0 S*D122 2 S*D124 0 S*D124 2 S*D124 4
1*NN 16*NN 17*NN -
1*NN 16*NN 17*NN 18*NN 21*NN 22*NN 22*NN
1*NN 16*NN 17*NN -
1*NN 8*NN 9*NN 12*NN 16*NN 17*NN -
1*NN 16*NN 17*NN -
21*00 22*00 25*00
Page 352 of 365
EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010 ITEM DESCRIPTION TYPE INFO. NAME S*D260 S*D380 S*D310 S*D370 S*D372 S*D800 S*D810 S*D780 S*D700 S0D710 S0D720 S0D730 S0D330 S0D340 S0D270 IEC 61870-5 101 info No 27 58 70 65 66 90 91 97 92 93 94 95 30 33 40 IEC 61870-5 101 Address 27*NN 58*NN 70*NN 65*NN 66*NN 90*NN 91*NN 97*NN 92*NN 93*NN 94*NN 95*NN 30*NN 33*NN 40*NN Incomer BS UG OH Capac Common
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
Feeder E/S (QC1) closed Supervisory Control Selected (NCC Authority) Protection Fault (Circuit /IED) Auto Recloser Service Set Out Sensitive Earth Service Set Out MW Measurement MVAr Measurement Power Factor Measurement Bus Section Current BusBar WA11 Voltage BusBar WA12 Voltage BusBar WA13 Voltage Circuit Breaker Trip Circuit Fault Circuit Breaker Fault Over Current Protection Operated
SP SP SP SP SP AM AM AM AM AM AM AM SP SP SP
27*NN 58*NN 70*NN 90*NN 91*NN 30*NN 40*NN
58*NN 70*NN 90*NN 92*NN 30*NN 40*NN
27*NN 58*NN 70*NN 90*NN 91*NN 30*NN 40*NN
27*NN 58*NN 70*NN 65*NN 66*NN 90*NN 91*NN 30*NN 40*NN
27*NN 58*NN 70*NN 91*NN 30*NN 40*NN
58*00 93*00 94*00 95*00 30*00 33*00 40*00
Page 353 of 365
EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010 ITEM DESCRIPTION TYPE INFO. NAME IEC 61870-5 101 info No 41 42 55 43 49 78 79 70 86 99 IEC 61870-5 101 Address 41*NN 42*NN 55*NN 43*NN 49*NN 78*NN 79*NN 70*NN 86*NN 99*NN Incomer BS UG OH Capac Common
27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.
High Set Definite Time Protection Operated Earth Fault Protection Operated Under Frequency Protection Operated Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Operated Circuit Breaker Fail Protection Operated Auto Recloser Initiated Auto Recloser Lockout Protection Fault (IED LifeCont) DC Supply Fault MV Room Temperature Measurement
SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
S0D280 S0D272 S0D570 S0D290 S0D490 S0D550 S0D560 S*D310 S0D606 S0D960
42*NN 70*NN -
42*NN 70*NN -
42*NN 70*NN -
41*NN 42*NN 43*NN 70*NN -
42*NN 70*NN -
41*00 42*00 55*00 43*00 49*00 78*00 79*00 70*00 86*00 99*00
NN is replaced by the bay number as designated in the relevant approved Single Line Diagram such as 03. * is replaced by the number corresponding to the operating Voltage of the Switchboard that is 6 for 22kV and 7 for 11kV.
Page 354 of 365
18.9.2.4
Capacitor Bank INFO. NAME

S1V050 S1V051 S1V052 S1V100 S1V200 S1V201 S1V202 S0V270 S0V380 S0V390 S0V960 IEC 61870-5 101 info No 1 2 3 13 16 17 18 40 58 77 99 IEC 61870-5 101 Address 1795 2795 3795 13795 16795 17795 18795 40795 58795 77795 99795
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Capacitor Bank 1 Circuit Breaker Open/CloseCommand Capacitor Bank 2 Circuit Breaker Open/CloseCommand Capacitor Bank 3 Circuit Breaker Open/CloseCommand Capacitor Bank Supervisory Control Select (NCC Authority) Capacitor Bank 1 Circuit Breaker Open/Closed Capacitor Bank 2 Circuit Breaker Open/Closed Capacitor Bank 3 Circuit Breaker Open/Closed Capacitor Bank Stage Faulty CB Trip Capacitor Bank Supervisory Control Selected (NCC Authority) Capacitor Bank Alarm Capacitor Room Temperature Measurement
DC DC DC DC DP DP DP SI SI SI AM
Page 355 of 365
18.9.2.5
Substation Common Alarms INFO. NAME

S0S414 S0S640 S0S650 S0S620 S0S600 S0S610 IEC 61870-5 101 info IEC 61870-5 101
ITEM DESCRIPTION
TYPE
No 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Water Level Alarm Communication Equipment Fault Fire Alarm Operated Low Voltage AC Supply Failure 110V Battery Charger Fault 48V DC Supply Equipment Fault
Address
77000 78000 79000 82000 87000 88000
SI SI SI SI SI SI
77 78 79 82 87 88
Page 356 of 365
18.9.2.6
IEC 61870-5-101 -OBJECT INFORMATION ADDRESS structure Maximum Number Address Structure Three byte (UNSTRUCTURED)=
IEC 61870-5 101 Info. No
16777215
& VOLTAGE DesgNo & CCT or PANEL or BAY No

VOLTAGE LEVEL designation No
Rated Operating Voltage

VARIABLE VOLTAGE LEVEL OR COMMON TO THE S/S >220kv 220kv 132kv 66kv 24-52kv 22kv 11kv 1,2-10kv <1kV
Function plant / equipment
DESIGNATION No 0
Common Signals 000 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
feeders/bays feeders/bays feeders/bays feeders/bays feeders/bays feeders/Panels feeders/Panels feeders/Panels Boards/Cubicles /Panels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Dedicated Addressing
Special units Special units Special units (Ripple)(132kV) (Ripple)(66kV) (Capacitor Banks 11kV)
390 490 795
Page 357 of 365
18.10 MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES 18.10.1 132/66kV Cables, Joints and Terminations
18.10.1.1 Cables 1. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 800mm2 Copper wire stranded conductor, 13kA for 1sec lead sheath, HDPE oversheath. 2. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 800 mm2 Copper wire stranded conductor, 13kA for 1sec copper wire screen, HDPE oversheath. 3. Same as item 2, but with 630 mm2 copper wire stranded conductor 4. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 300mm2 copper conductor, 13KA for 1 sec. copper wire screen and aluminium foil, HDPE oversheath. 5. 66kV, single core XLPE cable with 630mm2 copper wire stranded conductor, 13kA for 1 sec lead sheath, HDPE oversheath. 6. 66kV single core XLPE cable as item 4 but with 300mm2 copper conductor. 18.10.1.2 Terminations 1. 132kV outdoor sealing-end termination for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with bushing and all necessary accessories and fittings. 2. 132kV outdoor sealing-end as item 1 but for 630mm2 copper conductor cable 3. 132kV outdoor sealing-end as item 1 but for 300mm2 copper conductor cable 4. 132kV SF6 sealing-end termination for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable complete with internal and external fittings, and earth bond terminals. 5. 132kV SF6 sealing end as item 4 but for 630mm2 cable. 6. 132kV SF6 sealing end as item 4 but for 300mm2 cable. 7. 132kV transformer sealing end for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable complete with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings and earth bond terminals 8. 132kV transformer sealing end as item 7 but for 630mm2 copper XLPE cable 9. 132kV transformer sealing end as item 7 but for 300mm2 copper conductor XLPE 10. 66kV outdoor sealing-end termination for 630mm2 copper conductor, XLPE cable, complete with bushings and all necessary accessories and fittings. 11. 66kV outdoor sealing end as item 10 but for 300mm2 copper conductor cable. 12. 66kV transformer sealing-end for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings and earth bond terminals 13. 66kV transformer sealing end as type 12 but for 300sqmm copper conductor cable.
Page 358 of 365
14. 22kV indoor sealing-end for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings. 15. 22kV indoor sealing-end for 300mm2 aluminium conductor XLPE cable, complete with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings 18.10.1.3 Joints 1. 132kV joint for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with all necessary jointing accessories, internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc. 2. 132kV joint as item 1 above but for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE Cable. 3. 66kV joint for 300mm2 copper conductor, XLPE cable, complete with all necessary jointing accessories, internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc 4. Joint as item 3 above but for 630sqmm copper conductor cable. 5. 132kV Transition joint to connect a 630mm2 aluminium conductor, oil filled cable to a 630mm2 Copper Conductor XLPE Cable, both cables with lead sheath, with all necessary jointing accessories internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc 6. As item 5 above but to connect the 630mm2 aluminium conductor, oil filled 132kV cable to an 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable.
18.10.2
132/66kV GIS Transformer Cable Connections
(a) All 132 kV cables within the substation area to suit the relevant substation design are to be supplied by the Purchaser and design details are to be given to the successful Tenderer at Tender award. (b) All cables supplied are to be laid and fitted to position by the Tenderer with suitable terminations of proven technology.
(c) The Contract includes the supply and installation of all cable support
(d) The cables shall be single point bonded with earthing at the switchgear. At the unearthed terminals, varistors of adequate size shall be installed, in order to limit overvoltages.
18.10.3
22kV Cables
(e) All 22 kV cables within the substation area to suit the relevant substation design are to be supplied by the Purchaser and design details are to be given to the successful Tenderer at Tender award. (f) All cables supplied are to be laid and fitted to position by the Tenderer with suitable terminations of proven technology.
(g) The Contract includes the supply and installation of all cable support and traywork (including
for all cables of outgoing feeders), cable ties etc. If necessary, in case of spare cable connections on the MV switchboard, these should be fitted with plugs or plastic covers
18.10.4
Transformer 22 kV Switchgear Cable Connections
Three phase 22kV XLPE cable circuits adequately rated to suit the rating of the transformers with 20% overload. Minimum cable size shall be single core copper stranded conductor of 630 mm2 cross sectional area.
Page 359 of 365
18.10.5
Transformer - 22 kV Earthing Transformer Cable Connections
Three phase 22kV XLPE cable circuit of same size as the transformer 22kV switchgear connection or a smaller size provided detailed calculations warrant it.
18.10.6
Communication Cables and Accessories
Provide and install all necessary fibre optic cables, copper connection cables, plugs, connector modules/adapters, star couplers, converters and modems.
18.10.7
Auxiliary Power and Multicore Cables
Provide and install, gland, test through and terminate multicore and auxiliary power cables including glands to interconnect all items of plant supplied and installed under the contract. Also gland off and terminate at the contractors plant all cables supplied and installed under separate contracts interconnecting plant not supplied under this contract with all plant supplied under this contract The minimum size of cable for the connection between the earthing transformer low voltage side or the local supply transformer and the LV AC switchgear shall be 3x185 mm2 Al cable with 70 mm2 concentric Cu wire neutral (CEANDER type). The Contractor will be responsible for the provision of all cable supports and traywork, cable ties and cleating.
18.11 LV AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

One 400 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 kA for 1 second LV AC switchboard comprising an air insulated metal enclosed multitier design incorporating moulded case circuit breaker units and fixed type moulded case circuit breakers, forming a flush fronted switchboard which shall be complete with all wiring, earthbar, secondary fuses and material to complete.
18.12 SUBSTATION DC EQUIPMENT

The tender includes all items referred to in chapter 12 of this specification document that include among other equipment the following: One or Two 110Vdc batteries (depending on the requirements) Two 110Vdc battery chargers One 110Vdc distribution board Two DC to DC converters (110V to 48V) One 48Vdc distribution board One 110Vdc to 230 Vac inverter
All battery charger systems shall be sized adequate to cater for the indicated full substation development.
Page 360 of 365
18.12.1
110V DC Battery System
18.12.1.1 300Ah Battery 110V batteries of the same capacity individually, of the nickel cadmium high performance type with stands and accessories having a capacity of 300Ah The battery will operate unearthed with high impedance earth fault detection. The battery system should include: (a) One set of battery fuses in a wall mounted box with suitable bushed entry for battery connections and cable gland plate for charger cable. (b) One Set of battery connections, connectors and fixings. 18.12.1.2 200Ah Battery As item 18.12.1.1 above but having a capacity of 200Ah 18.12.1.3 100Ah Battery As item 18.12.1.1 above but having a capacity of 100Ah
18.12.2
110V DC Battery Charger
18.12.2.1 Double Charger 110 volt battery charger unit consisting of floor mounted sheet steel cubicles, access doors and containing all necessary ancillary equipment, busbars etc, and including: Two chargers each with rated output to supply 100% of the standing load and the full float and boost charge requirements of the battery specified. The chargers shall normally work in parallel, but shall be suitable for isolation for fault location or maintenance purposes. Each charger shall be complete with the following: (a) Boost charge switch with automatic timer. (b) Input AC supply switch and fuse. (c) Output DC double-pole switch and fuses. (d) Output DC ammeter, flush type, 100mm dial. (e) Output DC Voltmeter, flush Type, 100mm dial. (f) Charge failure relay to give remote alarm and local indication. (g) Battery overvoltage relay to give remote alarm and local indication. (h) Cable gland plates. (i) One set of manual changeover equipment to provide the following facilities in the case of a dual battery system: Either one of the battery banks on float and the other on boost charge. Both batteries on float. Mimic diagram to show clearly the switch position of the changeover scheme
Page 361 of 365
18.12.2.2 Single Charger As item 18.12.2.1 above but one charger
18.12.3
110V DC Distribution Board
110 Vdc distribution board consisting of floor mounted sheet steel cubicle with access doors and containing all necessary ancillary equipment, busbars, complete with connections to chargers and batteries, and including: (a) Battery input/output DC ammeters, flush type, 100 mm dial with high/low sensitivity switch. (b) Load output DC ammeters, flush type, 100 mm dial. (c) Battery earth fault high impedance type detector relay with facilities to identify positive and negative earth faults and complete with test facilities, alarm indications and remote alarm facilities. (d) Battery fail relay to give remote alarm local indication. (e) Double-pole circuit fuse-switches for a minimum of thirty distribution outlets, actual number to the approval of the Engineer. There should also be capacity for extending the number of outlets to 60. (f) The board shall be fitted with voltage regulating equipment (limiting diodes) to maintain load volts within -15% and +10% of nominal under all charge conditions. (g) Two DC/DC converters 110/48 Vdc (h) 110 Vdc / 230 Vac inverter
18.13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Suitable portable type extinguishers shall be supplied as necessary complete with wall mounting brackets and shall be erected by the Contractor. The extinguishers shall be of the dry powder type (10kg charged weight) or CO2 type (6kg charged weight) depending on the equipment that is erected in the room that they are to be situated. A scheme of fire extinguishers shall be provided and each extinguisher shall be numbered in accordance with the schedule. The schedule shall contain all relevant design and maintenance information. The whole of the fire extinguisher arrangements, quantities, locations and types shall be to the approval of the Fire Officer in Cyprus and the Engineer. Mobile extinguishers shall be provided as follows: ROOM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 132 kV Switchgear (Indoor Installations) Relay and Control SCADA and Telecom 22 /11kV Switchgear Battery Capacitors (where applicable) Basement (where applicable) NO. OF UNITS 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
Page 362 of 365
ROOM 8. Main Entrance (where applicable)
NO. OF UNITS 1
18.14 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Where applicable temperature sensors shall be installed in the switchgear rooms (GIS, 22kV and Capacitors) for the measurement and monitoring of ambient temperature from the Energy Centre. The sensors shall have a temperature range of 5oC to +70oC and shall be wall mountable with stainless steed sheath so as to provide mechanical protection to the sensor.
Page 363 of 365
19. SPECIFICATION DRAWING LIST

The following drawings accompany and form part of this Specification: DRAWING DESCRIPTION International Airport- 132kV Substation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Control Building Phase A & B Control Building Phase C 132kV Single Line Diagram Substation Interconnection Switchgear Equipment Layout Phase A Switchgear Equipment Layout Phase B Switchgear Equipment Layout Phase C 132kV Protection Scheme (2 sheets) 132/22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design Pyla- 132kV Substation 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Control Building Plan Control Building Plan Phase A Control Building Plan Phase B Switchgear Equipment Layout Switchgear Equipment Layout - Phase A Switchgear Equipment Layout - Phase B 132kV Single Line Diagram (3 sheets) 132kV Protection Scheme (3 sheets) 132/22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design Protaras- 132kV Substation 19. 20. 21. 22-11kV Single Line Diagram (2 sheets) 22-11kV Protection Scheme (4 sheets) 22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design Limassol Marina- Primary Substation 22. 23. 22-11kV Single Line Diagram (2 sheets) 22-11kV Protection Scheme (4 sheets) TIM/LIM90 TIM/LIM95 TK42/301 TK42/303 TK42/304 TK53/2-1 TK53/2-2 TK53/2-3 TK53/18-1 TK53/18-2 TK53/18-3 TK53/61 TK53/62 TK53/63 TK60/9-1 TK60/9-2 TK60/42 TK60/43 TK60/45-1 TK60/45-2 TK60/45-3 TK60/46 TK60/47 DRAWING NO.
Page 364 of 365
DRAWING DESCRIPTION 24. 25. 22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design Metering AC Supplies Larnaca Commercial Centre- 132kV Substation 26. 132kV U/G Cable Bay - Protection Scheme Dhekelia- 132kV Substation 27. 132kV U/G Cable Bay - Protection Scheme Free Industrial Zone- 132kV Substation 28. 132kV U/G Cable Bay - Protection Scheme Common Drawings 29. 30. Protection & Control Symbol Notation 132 kV & 22-11kV Interlocking Conditions (10 sheets)
DRAWING NO. TIM/LIM96 TM/LIM97
TK67/120
TK1/1004
TK47/249
TK/C/24 TK/C/27
Page 365 of 365

132kV GIS Substations Contract

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

132kV GIS Substations Contract

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS

132 kV Outdoor Gas Insulated Substations & Ancillary Equipment

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

300Ahr DC Battery System.

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

Dhekelia GIS Substation

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS

The following shall be the Contract Terminal Points:

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

132 kV and 22 kV Power Cables

International Airport Substation

Larnaka Commercial Substation

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

Dhekelia GIS Substation

Free Industrial Zone Substation

PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

TOOLS AND APPLIANCES

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc

ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment

EAC SPECIFICATION 14-019

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

REFERENCES NORMATIVE REFERENCES

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

EN 10137 EN 10143 EN 10147 EN 10155 EN 10210 EN 10220 EN 10244 EN 12540

EN 50064 EN 50068 EN 50069

EN 50081 EN 50089 EN 50178 EN 50262 EN 50265

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

EN 60439 EN 60529 EN 60599 EN 60617 EN 60618 EN 60623

EN 60672 EN 60688 EN 60793 EN 60811 EN 60898 EN 60947 EN 61000-4-3

EN 61082 EN 61131 EN 62155

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

BS 7430 BS 7655 BS 7668 BS 7884